Epson Aculaser c4200 Service Manual

SERVICE MANUAL
A4 Full Color Laser Printer
EPSON AcuLaser C4200
SEPG05001
Notice:
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION. The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice. All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly appreciate being informed of them. The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof. EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
General Notice:
Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright 2005 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION. I&I CS/Quality Management & PL Department
PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1)Personal injury and 2) damage to equipment.
DANGER WARNING
Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in performing procedures preceded by DANGER Headings. Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.
The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.
DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR PROCEDURES. 2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK. 3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN. 2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT TO THE POWER SOURCE. 3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS. 4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS. 5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF SECONDSOURCE ICs OR OTHER NON-APPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON WARRANTY.
About This Manual

This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of the printer. The instructions and procedures included herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the preceding page.
Manual Configuration
This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix. CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS Provides a general overview and specifications of the product. CHAPTER 2.OPERATING PRINCIPLES Describes the theory of electrical and mechanical operations of the product. CHAPTER 3.TROUBLESHOOTING Describes the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting. CHAPTER 4.DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and assembling the product. CHAPTER 5.ADJUSTMENT Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment. CHAPTER 6.MAINTENANCE Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of Epsonapproved lubricants and adhesives required for servicing the product. APPENDIX Provides the following additional information for reference: Connector pin assignments Electric circuit boards components layout Electrical circuit boards schematics Exploded diagram & Parts List
Symbols Used in this Manual

Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a procedure or an action. Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to keep the products quality.
C A U T IO N
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of, equipment.
C H E C K P O IN T
May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also provide additional information that is related to a specific subject, or comment on the results achieved through a previous action. Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss of life.
W A R N IN G
Abbreviations
A lot of abbreviations are used throughout this manual. Some of them are common ones and the others are original ones. The list below includes the most of the major abbreviations and may include those which are not used in this manual as this is intended to be used in every quarter.
[A] ADC........................................ Auto Density Control ALM ................................................................Alarm Assy ........................................................... Assembly Aux. ............................................................Auxiliary [B] B/W................................................. Black and White BCR ............................................... Bias Charge Roll Bk .....................................................................Black BCR ............................................... Bias Charge Roll BRKT ............................................................Bracket BTR ............................................. Bias Transfer Roll BUR ..................................................... Back Up Roll [C] C ........................................................................Cyan CCW ........................................... Counter Clockwise Cl. ................................................................... Clutch Clk ................................................................... Clock CHK.................................................................Check CK....................................................................Check Conpane...............................................Control Panel Cont ...........................................................Controller CR...........................................................Charge Roll CRU...............................Customer Replaceable Unit CRUM ................................................ CRU Memory CST...............................................................Cassette CVR ................................................................. Cover CW............................................................ Clockwise
[D] DB ...................................................Developing Bias Deve ..........................................................Developer Diag .......................................................... Diagnostic dpi..........................................................dots per inch DTS ........................................................ Detack Saw Dup.................................................................Duplex [E] Elec................................................................Electric EP ............................................. Electro Photography ESS............................................Electric Sub System [F] F ........................................................................Front FDR ................................................................ Feeder FG....................................................... Frame Ground FIP .....................................Fault Isolation Procedure FRU ...................................... Field Replaceable Unit FX............................................................. Fuji Xerox [G] GG ........................................................ Guide Gauge GND .............................................................. Ground [H] H........................................................................ High H/R .............................................................Heat Roll HCF ........................................ High Capacity Feeder HCS ....................................... High Capacity Stacker Hex ....................................................... Hexadecimal HVPS ........................... High Voltage Power Supply
[I] I/F.................................................................Interface I/L ............................................................... Interlock ID ....................................................... Image Density [J] Jxx..................................................................Jack xx [K] [L] L.......................................................................... Left L......................................................................... Low L/H............................................................ Left Hand L/P ........................................................... Low Paper LD .......................................................... Laser Diode LEF ................................................. Long Edge Feed LVPS ............................ Low Voltage Power Supply [M] M..................................................................Magenta M/N.................................................... Multi National Mag .............................................................Magnetic MCU ...................................... Machine Control Unit Mech ....................................................... Mechanical MOT ................................................................Motor MSI ............................................Multi Sheet Inserter [N] N/F ...................................................... Normal Force N/P ..............................................................No Paper NPS ................................................. No Paper Sensor NV ........................................................ Non Volatile NVM ...................................... Non Volatile Memory (to continue to next page)
[O] OHP ............................................Overhead Projector OPC ..................................Organic Photo Conductor OPT.................................................................Option [P] Pyy .................................................................Plug yy P/J ........................................................Plug and Jack P/H .................................................... Paper Handling P/R ........................................................Pressure Roll PL ...................................................................... Plate PLT .................................................................... Plate PPM ................................................ Print Per Minute PV ........................................................ Print Volume PWB ....................................... Printed Wiring Board PWBA.............................................. PWB Assembly [Q] [R] R ....................................................................... Right R ........................................................................ Rear R/H ......................................................... Right Hand RDY.................................................................Ready Regi........................................................ Registration ROS .......................................Raster Output Scanner RRP................Removal and Replacement Procedure RTN ................................................................ Return [S] SEF ................................................. Short Edge Feed SG .......................................................Signal Ground SNR ................................................................ Sensor SNS................................................................. Sensor Sol................................................................Solenoid SOS...................................................... Start Of Scan SPI .......................................................Scan Per Inch STD..............................................................Standard STK................................................................ Stacker STND...........................................................Standard SW ..................................................................Switch Sync ...................................................... Synchronous
[T] T ..........................................Tooth (number of Gear) Temp ..................................................... Temperature TR.................................................................Transfer TTL ............................... Transistor-Transistor Logic [U] [V] [W] [X] Xero....................................................... Xerographic [Y] Y.....................................................................Yellow YMCBk ...................... Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black YMCK........................ Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black [Z]
Safety Information
To prevent possible accidents during maintenance work, strictly observe the WARNINGs and CAUTIONs described in this manual. Never attempt to perform dangerous operations or any other operations which depart from the descriptions and procedures in this manual. Other than the cautions and warnings stated below, there are many other situations and circumstances that could result in serious bodily injury. Always pay enough attention to secure safety when working with the printer.
Power Supply
Before starting any service procedure, turn the printer power off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.When the power supply cable must be connected, be aware of the potential for electrical shock and do all tasks by following the procedures in this manual.
W A R N IN G
Mechanical Components
When servicing any driving assembly (e.g., gears), first turn the power off and unplug the power cord, and then manually rotate the assembly.
Do not touch any live parts other than the required parts while the printer is on. As the LVPS ASSY (power supply section) is live even when the power is off, never touch the live parts. Do not touch any live parts unless instructed to do so.
W A R N IN G
Do not touch the driving part (e.g., gears) while the assembly (printer) is operating.
High Temperature Assembly

When working with hot parts (FUSER etc.) make sure to turn the power off, unplug the power cable, and leave the printer until it cools down sufficiently to work with to prevent burn injury.
W A R N IN G
As the inside of the printer is high-temperature state immediately after the operation, leave it more than 40 minutes before working.
Ida_00_002A
Laser Beam
W A R N IN G
Letting a laser beam get directly into your eyes could result in loss of vision. Never open the Cover where the Warning Label about Laser Beam is affixed. Before disassembling or assembling, be sure to turn the power off. If you need to work on the printer with power applied, strictly follow the instructions in this manual. Understand hazardous nature of the laser beam, use extreme caution to avoid injury of yourself and anyone around you. Since the laser beam has a narrower frequency band and more coherent phases than any other light (sunlight, electric light), the beam has excellent monochromaticity and convergence, thus it reaches long distances. Because of these characteristics, the laser beam converges into one point, causing high density and high temperature, which is harmful to the human body. Reference: The laser beam in this printer is invisible.
ROS ASSY
C H E C K P O IN T
Ida_00_003A
Warning/Caution Labels
Warning labels and caution labels are attached on the corresponding locations on or in the printer.
C H E C K P O IN T
Caution Label for Toner Cartridges
In maintenance work, check that the labels are free from peeling and soiling.
Caution Label for High-temperature Surface
Ida_Sec00_010GA
Ida_00_004A
Caution Label about PHD ASSY and BTR ASSY
Caution Label about MSI and Paper Tray
Ida_Sec00_005FA
Ida_00_006A
Ida_00_009A
Caution Label about FRAME ASSY DEVE
Caution Label about ROS ASSY
Ida_Sec00_007GA
Ida_Sec00_008GA
Cautions relating to Toner cleaning

To prevent ignition, explosion, burn, injury, etc., do not use a general vacuum cleaner for cleaning dropped toner. (To do so may cause the toner to catch fire by sparks in the vacuum cleaner.)
W A R N IN G
Storage of Paper
Damp papers could cause printing quality troubles. To keep papers in their best condition, store them wrapping tightly with packing material or putting them into a plastic bag.
Do not pick up dropped toner with a general vacuum cleaner. To do so may cause ignition.
Leg_Sec001_014EA
Revision Status
Revision Date of Issue JUN 24, 2005 Description
First release
Revision A
Contents
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 7 1.1.1 Engine Features ............................................................................................ 7 1.1.2 Controller Features ....................................................................................... 7 1.1.3 Software Features ......................................................................................... 8 1.2 Basic Specifications.............................................................................................. 9 1.2.1 Process Specifications & System.................................................................. 9 1.2.2 Printer Basic Specifications.......................................................................... 9 1.3 Paper Specifications ............................................................................................ 19 1.3.1 Paper Type .................................................................................................. 19 1.3.2 Paper that may cause printing defects, paper jams or printer malfunction. 19 1.3.3 Available Paper by Feeder.......................................................................... 20 1.3.4 Printing Area............................................................................................... 20 1.4 Reliability and Serviceability .............................................................................. 21 1.4.1 Reliability ................................................................................................... 21 1.4.2 Durability.................................................................................................... 22 1.4.3 Serviceability .............................................................................................. 22 1.5 Service Conditions............................................................................................... 23 1.6 Conditions for Storage and Transport ................................................................. 24 1.7 Electrical Characteristics ..................................................................................... 25 1.8 Compatible Specification .................................................................................... 26 1.9 Consumables/Periodic Replacement Unit ........................................................... 27 1.9.1 Specifications.............................................................................................. 27 1.9.2 Conditions for Storage and Transport......................................................... 28 1.10 External Appearance and Unit Names .............................................................. 29 1.10.1 Unit Names ............................................................................................... 29 1.11 Engine Restrictions............................................................................................ 31 1.11.1 Controls that Restrict Print Speed............................................................. 31 1.11.2 Controls that Restrict Print Start............................................................... 31 1.11.3 Toner Duty Limiting Value ...................................................................... 31 1.12 Notes When Replacing Consumables and Installing Optional Products........... 32 1.12.1 Consumables............................................................................................. 32 1.12.2 Optional Products ..................................................................................... 1.13 Life Details ........................................................................................................ 1.14 Engine Control (Appendix) ............................................................................... 1.15 Controller Specifications................................................................................... 1.15.1 Controller Basic Specifications ................................................................ 1.15.2 Controller Configuration .......................................................................... 1.15.3 External Interface Specifications.............................................................. 1.16 Control Panel..................................................................................................... 1.16.1 External Appearance and Names.............................................................. 1.16.2 Panel Settings List .................................................................................... 1.16.3 Explanation of Menu and Settings............................................................ 1.16.4 Special Operations.................................................................................... 1.17 Printer Status ..................................................................................................... 1.17.1 List of Printer Messages ........................................................................... 1.17.2 Status Messages and Troubleshooting...................................................... 1.17.3 Warning Messages and Troubleshooting ................................................. 1.17.4 Error Messages and Troubleshooting ...................................................... 1.17.5 Service Call Error Messages..................................................................... 1.18 Expanding the RAM.......................................................................................... 1.19 Handling Precautions ........................................................................................ 1.20 Status Sheet ....................................................................................................... 1.21 Engine Status Sheet/Print Log Report............................................................... 1.22 Color Registration Sheet ................................................................................... 1.23 Form Overlay List ............................................................................................. 1.24 Paper Handling Algorithm ................................................................................ 32 33 34 36 36 37 37 40 40 42 53 59 60 60 62 63 65 68 70 71 72 76 77 78 79
Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES

2.1 Print Process ........................................................................................................ 2.1.1 Print Process Overview .............................................................................. 2.1.2 Print Process Diagram ................................................................................ 2.1.3 Technical Explanation of Print Process...................................................... 82 82 83 84

2.2 Flow of Print Data ............................................................................................... 92 2.2.1 Data Flow.................................................................................................... 92 2.3 Drive Transmission Path ..................................................................................... 93 2.3.1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN ................................................................................. 93 2.3.2 DRIVE ASSY DEVE ................................................................................. 94 2.3.3 DISPENSER ASSY (Y, M, C, K) .............................................................. 96 2.3.4 DRIVE ASSY FUSER ............................................................................... 97 2.3.5 MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM....................................................................... 98 2.3.6 DRIVE ASSY (550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit) ......................................... 99 2.3.7 DRIVE ASSY 2ND (1,100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit) ........................... 100 2.4 Feeding Paper .................................................................................................... 101 2.4.1 Paper Feed Path (When options are not installed).................................... 101 2.4.2 Paper Feed Path (When the 550-sheet Paper Cassette is installed) .......... 102 2.4.3 Paper Feed Path (When the 1100-sheet Paper Cassette is installed) ........ 103 2.5 Main Structure and Function ............................................................................. 104 2.5.1 Paper Cassette........................................................................................... 104 2.5.2 Paper Feeder ............................................................................................. 105 2.5.3 Optional Feeder (550-sheet Paper Cassette)............................................. 106 2.5.4 Optional Feeder (1100-sheet Paper Cassette)........................................... 108 2.5.5 Retard & Regi Assy .................................................................................. 110 2.5.6 Front Assy In ............................................................................................ 111 2.5.7 Chute Assy Out......................................................................................... 112 2.5.8 BTR Assy & Fuser Assy........................................................................... 114 2.5.9 Xerographics............................................................................................. 116 2.5.10 Toner Cartridge....................................................................................... 117 2.5.11 Frame & Drive........................................................................................ 119 2.5.12 Electrical ................................................................................................. 120 2.6 Switch and Sensor ............................................................................................. 122 2.7 Mode.................................................................................................................. 123 2.7.1 Printing Mode ........................................................................................... 123 2.7.2 Operating Modes ...................................................................................... 123 2.8 Control ............................................................................................................... 124 2.8.1 Paper Size Control .................................................................................... 124 2.8.2 Paper Feeder Selection Control ................................................................ 124 2.8.3 ROS Light Intensity Control..................................................................... 124 2.8.4 Process Control......................................................................................... 125 2.8.5 Color Registration Control ....................................................................... 128 2.8.6 BTR ASSY Control .................................................................................. 129 2.8.7 Toner Control............................................................................................ 130
Revision A
2.8.8 Fuser Control ............................................................................................ 2.9 Detection Mechanisms ...................................................................................... 2.10 Features of the Controller................................................................................ 2.10.1 Power Supply.......................................................................................... 131 132 134 136
Chapter 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 Procedure for Troubleshooting.......................................................................... 3.1.1 Procedure for Troubleshooting................................................................. 3.1.2 Preliminary Check .................................................................................... 3.1.3 Precautions in Performing Troubleshooting Work................................... 3.1.4 Notes on Using FIP................................................................................... 3.2 Paper Jam .......................................................................................................... 3.2.1 Paper Transferring Path and The Main Components ............................... 3.2.2 Paper Jam Handling (FIP) ........................................................................ 3.2.3 Check Points for Frequent Paper Jam....................................................... 3.3 Level 1 FIP ........................................................................................................ 3.3.1 Level 1 FIP ............................................................................................... 3.3.2 The flow of Level 1 FIP ........................................................................... 3.4 Level 2 FIP ........................................................................................................ 3.4.1 List of Warnings and Errors ..................................................................... 3.4.2 List of Service Request............................................................................. 3.4.3 Engine-related Trouble FIP ...................................................................... 3.4.4 Controller-related Trouble FIP ................................................................. 3.4.5 Print Quality Trouble FIP ......................................................................... 3.4.6 Other FIP .................................................................................................. 3.5 Abnormal Noise-related Trouble....................................................................... 3.5.1 Abnormal Noise-related Troubleshooting Entry Chart ............................ 3.5.2 Abnormal Noise-related FIP..................................................................... 3.6 Test Print ........................................................................................................... 138 138 138 139 140 141 142 144 151 152 152 152 153 153 158 163 209 211 225 228 228 229 233
Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 4.1.1 Precautions................................................................................................ 4.1.2 Before starting work ................................................................................. 4.1.3 Screws....................................................................................................... 4.1.4 Tools ......................................................................................................... 4.1.5 Conventions used in descriptions of procedures ...................................... 236 236 238 239 240 241

4.2 COVERS ........................................................................................................... 4.2.1 COVER TOP MAIN................................................................................. 4.2.2 CONSOLE PANEL .................................................................................. 4.2.3 COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD ............................................................... 4.2.4 COVER ASSY TOP PHD ........................................................................ 4.2.5 COVER REAR ASSY.............................................................................. 4.2.6 FAN REAR............................................................................................... 4.2.7 COVER SIDE R ASSY ............................................................................ 4.2.8 COVER FRONT R ................................................................................... 4.2.9 TRAY ASSY MSI BASE......................................................................... 4.2.10 COVER ASSY MSI ............................................................................... 4.2.11 COVER FRONT L ASSY ...................................................................... 4.2.12 COVER SIDE L ASSY .......................................................................... 4.2.13 COVER ASSY TOP, COVER TOP STOPPER..................................... 4.3 PAPER CASSETTE .......................................................................................... 4.3.1 ROLL ASSY RETARD............................................................................ 4.3.2 HOLDER ASSY RETARD...................................................................... 4.3.3 KIT GUIDE SIDE L, KIT GUIDE SIDE R ............................................. 4.3.4 KIT GUIDE END ..................................................................................... 4.4 PAPER FEEDER............................................................................................... 4.4.1 CHUTE ASSY FEEDER.......................................................................... 4.4.2 COVER CST ............................................................................................ 4.4.3 FEEDER ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY) ................................................. 4.4.4 SWITCH ASSY SIZE .............................................................................. 4.4.5 SWITCH ................................................................................................... 4.4.6 HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG ..................................................................... 4.4.7 PICK UP ASSY........................................................................................ 4.4.8 ROLL ASSY TURN, BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC ........................... 4.4.9 SENSOR NO PAPER............................................................................... 4.4.10 SENSOR LOW PAPER ......................................................................... 4.4.11 SOLENOID FEED ................................................................................. 4.4.12 ACTUATOR LOW PAPER ................................................................... 4.4.13 CHUTE UPPER (REFERENCE ONLY) ............................................... 4.4.14 ROLL ASSY FEED................................................................................ 4.4.15 ACTUATOR NO PAPER ...................................................................... 4.5 RETARD & REGI ASSY ................................................................................. 4.5.1 ACTUATOR REGI .................................................................................. 4.5.2 SENSOR REGI......................................................................................... 4.5.3 CHUTE ASSY REGI IN .......................................................................... 4.5.4 SENSOR OHP .......................................................................................... 242 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 255 256 257 259 261 261 262 263 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 278 279 280 281
Revision A
4.5.5 ROLL ASSY RETARD............................................................................ 4.5.6 CHUTE ASSY REGI ............................................................................... 4.5.7 ROLL REGI METAL............................................................................... 4.5.8 ROLL REGI RUBBER ............................................................................ 4.5.9 CLUTCH REGI........................................................................................ 4.5.10 CLUTCH TURN .................................................................................... 4.5.11 ROLL TURN MSI.................................................................................. 4.6 CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT ................................................................................ 4.6.1 FUSER ASSY........................................................................................... 4.6.2 BTR ASSY ............................................................................................... 4.6.3 HOLDER ASSY CTD.............................................................................. 4.6.4 SENSOR TNR FULL............................................................................... 4.6.5 DRIVE ASSY FUSER ............................................................................. 4.6.6 SOLENOID FEED MSI ........................................................................... 4.6.7 SENSOR NO PAPER............................................................................... 4.6.8 ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI ................................................................ 4.6.9 ROLL ASSY FEED.................................................................................. 4.6.10 SENSOR FULL STACK........................................................................ 4.6.11 SENSOR DUP JAM............................................................................... 4.6.12 ACTUATOR FULL STACK ................................................................. 4.6.13 MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM................................................................... 4.6.14 ACTUATOR DUP ................................................................................. 4.6.15 ROLL DUP............................................................................................. 4.6.16 ROLL EXIT............................................................................................ 4.6.17 CHUTE ASSY DUP IN ......................................................................... 4.6.18 CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT ..................................................................... 4.6.19 FAN FRONT .......................................................................................... 4.7 XEROGRAPHICS ............................................................................................ 4.7.1 ROS ASSY ............................................................................................... 4.7.2 HSG ASSY BIAS..................................................................................... 4.8 DEVELOPMENT ............................................................................................. 4.8.1 FRAME ASSY DEVE.............................................................................. 4.8.2 CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC..................................................................... 4.8.3 DEVE ASSY (Y), (M), (C), (K)............................................................... 4.8.4 DISPENSER ASSY-4 (REFERENCE ONLY)........................................ 4.8.5 DISPENSER ASSY (Y) ........................................................................... 4.8.6 DISPENSER ASSY (M) .......................................................................... 4.8.7 DISPENSER ASSY (C) ........................................................................... 4.8.8 DISPENSER ASSY (K) ........................................................................... 4.8.9 SENSOR NO TNR (Y), (M), (C) ............................................................. 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 289 290 291 292 294 296 299 300 302 304 305 307 308 309 310 311 312 315 319 320 320 321 322 322 324 325 326 329 331 333 335 337

4.8.10 SENSOR NO TNR (K)........................................................................... 4.8.11 ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 ....................................................................... 4.8.12 BOX ASSY CRUM READER ............................................................... 4.9 DRIVE ............................................................................................................... 4.9.1 DRIVE ASSY DEVE ............................................................................... 4.9.2 DRIVE ASSY MAIN ............................................................................... 4.10 ELECTRICAL................................................................................................. 4.10.1 LVPS ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY)..................................................... 4.10.2 LVPS....................................................................................................... 4.10.3 HARNESS ASSY AC INLET................................................................ 4.10.4 HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK ........................................................... 4.10.5 PWBA EEPROM.................................................................................... 4.10.6 PWBA MCU IDTN ................................................................................ 4.10.7 SENSOR HUM....................................................................................... 4.10.8 HVPS ...................................................................................................... 4.10.9 ESS BOX (REFERENCE ONLY) ......................................................... 4.10.10 PWBA ESS MAIN ............................................................................... 4.10.11 PWBA ESS ROM................................................................................. 4.10.12 PWBA NIC C533 ................................................................................. 4.11 ONE TRAY OPTION FEEDER ..................................................................... 4.11.1 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY ....................................................... 4.11.2 HARNESS ASSY OPFREC................................................................... 4.11.3 PWBA OPTFDR 1T ............................................................................... 4.11.4 COVER RIGHT...................................................................................... 4.11.5 HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2 ................................................................. 4.11.6 CHUTE ASSY FEEDER........................................................................ 4.11.7 COVER LEFT ........................................................................................ 4.11.8 SWITCH ASSY SIZE ............................................................................ 4.11.9 PICK UP ASSY ...................................................................................... 4.11.10 ROLL ASSY TURN............................................................................. 4.11.11 CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC ..................................................... 4.11.12 SENSOR NO PAPER........................................................................... 4.11.13 SENSOR LOW PAPER ....................................................................... 4.11.14 SOLENOID FEED ............................................................................... 4.11.15 DRIVE ASSY....................................................................................... 4.11.16 ACTUATOR LOW PAPER ................................................................. 4.11.17 CHUTE UPPER (REFERENCE ONLY) ............................................. 4.11.18 ROLL ASSY FEED.............................................................................. 4.11.19 ACTUATOR NO PAPER .................................................................... 4.11.20 ROLL ASSY RETARD........................................................................ 338 339 340 342 342 344 345 345 347 348 349 350 351 355 356 356 358 360 361 362 362 363 365 366 367 369 370 371 373 376 377 378 379 381 382 383 384 385 386 387
Revision A
4.11.21 HOLDER ASSY RETARD.................................................................. 4.11.22 KIT GUIDE SIDE L, KIT GUIDE SIDE R ......................................... 4.11.23 KIT GUIDE END ................................................................................. 4.12 TWO TRAY OPTION FEEDER .................................................................... 4.12.1 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY ....................................................... 4.12.2 COVER ASSY LEFT............................................................................. 4.12.3 COVER ASSY RIGHT .......................................................................... 4.12.4 COVER ASSY FRONT ......................................................................... 4.12.5 COVER CST .......................................................................................... 4.12.6 FEEDER ASSY LEFT ........................................................................... 4.12.7 FEEDER ASSY RIGHT......................................................................... 4.12.8 SWITCH ASSY SIZE ............................................................................ 4.12.9 CHUTE ASSY FEEDER........................................................................ 4.12.10 HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2............................................................... 4.12.11 PWBA OPTFDR 2T............................................................................. 4.12.12 DRIVE ASSY 2ND .............................................................................. 4.12.13 PICK UP ASSY 3RD ........................................................................... 4.12.14 ROLL ASSY TURN............................................................................. 4.12.15 CLUTCH ASSY ................................................................................... 4.12.16 SENSOR NO PAPER........................................................................... 4.12.17 SENSOR LOW PAPER ....................................................................... 4.12.18 SOLENOID FEED ............................................................................... 4.12.19 ACTUATOR LOW PAPER ................................................................. 4.12.20 CHUTE UPPER (REFERENCE ONLY)............................................. 4.12.21 ROLL ASSY FEED.............................................................................. 4.12.22 ACTUATOR NO PAPER .................................................................... 4.12.23 PICK UP ASSY 4TH ........................................................................... 4.12.24 ROLL ASSY TURN............................................................................. 4.12.25 CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC ..................................................... 4.12.26 SENSOR NO PAPER........................................................................... 4.12.27 SENSOR LOW PAPER ....................................................................... 4.12.28 SOLENOID FEED ............................................................................... 4.12.29 ACTUATOR LOW PAPER ................................................................. 4.12.30 CHUTE UPPER (REFERENCE ONLY)............................................. 4.12.31 ROLL ASSY FEED.............................................................................. 4.12.32 ACTUATOR NO PAPER .................................................................... 4.12.33 ROLL ASSY RETARD........................................................................ 4.12.34 HOLDER ASSY RETARD.................................................................. 4.12.35 KIT GUIDE SIDE L, KIT GUIDE SIDE R ......................................... 4.12.36 KIT GUIDE END ................................................................................. 388 389 391 393 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 418 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 431 432 433 435

4.12.37 FOOT ASSY A, FOOT ASSY B ......................................................... 437
Revision A
7.7 Circuit Diagram ................................................................................................. 551
Chapter 5 ADJUSTMENT
5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 5.1.1 Precautions................................................................................................ 5.1.2 Adjustment Execution Timing.................................................................. 5.2 Adjustment/Action ............................................................................................ 5.2.1 Adjusting Color Registration Alignment.................................................. 5.2.2 Writing USB ID........................................................................................ 5.2.3 Firmware Update ...................................................................................... 439 439 440 441 441 442 444
Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE
6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 6.2 Cleaning............................................................................................................. 6.3 Maintenance Menu ............................................................................................ 6.3.1 Entry into Maintenance Mode .................................................................. 6.3.2 Maintenance Menu Items ......................................................................... 6.4 Sheet for Servicing ............................................................................................ 6.4.1 Engine Status Sheet .................................................................................. 6.4.2 Print Log Report ....................................................................................... 6.5 Consumables and Components That Need Periodic Replacement.................... 6.5.1 Consumables............................................................................................. 6.5.2 Regular Replacement Parts....................................................................... 452 454 458 458 459 460 460 464 466 466 468
Chapter 7 APPENDIX
7.1 Connectors......................................................................................................... 7.1.1 The List of Plugs and Jacks ...................................................................... 7.1.2 P/J Layout Diagram .................................................................................. 7.2 Wire Net ............................................................................................................ 7.3 Wiring Connection Diagrams............................................................................ 7.3.1 Marks used in the Diagram....................................................................... 7.4 Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts ...................................................... 7.4.1 Configurations .......................................................................................... 7.4.2 Marks used in the Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts................ 7.5 Service Parts List ............................................................................................... 7.6 Exploded diagram.............................................................................................. 471 471 474 479 482 482 485 485 488 516 520
CHAPTER
1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Revision A
1.1 Overview
This printer is a non-impact color page printer that takes advantage of a laser and electrophotographic technologies. It provides 1200/600 dpi of resolution, and the printing speed is 25 pages per minute (ppm) for color single-side printing, or 35 ppm for monochrome single-side printing.
1.1.2 Controller Features

High-speed controller for latest tandem 64-bit RISC CPU: Power PC 750FX 600 MHz
64-bit high-speed memory:DDR333 200 pin SO DIMM (compatible with the RAM for AcuLaser C9100) Standard RAM: 128MB By installing additional RAM, the memory can be expanded up to 640MB (128MB + 512MB). (The extended RAM must be installed to slot-1. Changing the initial state of slot-0 is prohibited.)
1.1.1 Engine Features

High-speed A4 tandem engine
Color Simplex printing Duplex printing 25.0 ppm 14.8 ppm Monochrome 35.0 ppm 20.4 ppm
Enhanced ASIC (FMV-FAIO) The color management technologies are incorporated into the hardware to achieve high-speed processing. Three Built-in interfaces Parallel interface (IEEE 1284 compliant, Supports ECP) USB interface (Rev. 2.0 HS) Ethernet interface (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T) Functions described below can be enhanced and increased in speed by expanding memory with RAM DIMMs CPGI drawing area Image creating speed Resolution Receive buffer Print buffer for collate printing
Note : When printing on A4-sized paper
Duplex print unit equipped as standard (Duplex printing is not available on extra thick paper, OHP sheet (transparency), labels, and envelopes.) Compatible with high quality plain paper that enables higher quality printing Printable on thick paper and transparency for laser printer This product is designed so that users can replace all the consumables. Toner cartridges (C, M, Y and K) Photoconductor Unit Transfer Unit Fuser Unit
High-capacity paper supply

Paper Feeder Standard Option MP tray Lower cassette 550-sheet paper cassette unit 1,100-sheet paper cassette unit Maximum Capacity up to 150 sheets up to 550 sheets up to 550 sheets up to 1100 sheets 2,350 sheets with 5 bins
Updating firmware is available (RCC compatible) when a Flash ROM DIMM is installed Large capacity HDD such as 40GB can be installed
Paper eject capacity is 250 sheets, face-down only
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Overview
Revision A
1.1.3 Software Features

Color technologies Smooth expanding of color images by ESC/Page-Color Color/Monochrome auto-detect function Supports 1200 dpi Monitors printer status and printer environment by bi-directional EJL and MIB Adobe PostScript3 is equipped as standard Supports PCL5c with optional DIMM (1200 dpi not supported) Engine controller ROM (only for Flash) can be upgraded Panel display Supports the new wide panel Displays remaining amount of C, M, Y, and K toner on the panel Displays toner cartridge presence, paper size, and remaining amount of papers Help function Supports 14 languages: English, French, Italian, German, Spanish, Portuguese, Dutch, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Norse, Chinese Simplified, Chinese Traditional, and Korean Supports EPSON Status Monitor 3 Employs new user interface suitable for business use
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Overview
Revision A
1.2 Basic Specifications

1.2.1 Process Specifications & System
Printing method: Light source: Photoconductor: Charging: Development: Toner: Primary transfer: Fixing: Semiconductor laser beam scan and electro photography with dry double component non-electromagnetic toner Semiconductor laser Negative organic photoconductor Roller charger Exposed area development
PRINTING SPEED MODE Table 1-1. Printing Speed Mode

Printing Speed Mode Standard 1 Low speed 1 Monochrome Low speed 1 mode (B/W) Low speed 2 The resolution is set to 600 dpi. Suitable for plain paper. The resolution is set to 600 dpi. Suitable for plain paper, thick paper, and envelopes. The resolution is set to 1200 dpi. Suitable for plain paper, thick paper, and envelopes. The resolution is set to 600 dpi. Suitable for plain paper, thick paper, extra thick paper*, and labels. The resolution is set to 600 dpi. Suitable for plain paper (high gross), and transparency. The resolution is set to 600 dpi. Suitable for plain paper The resolution is set to 600 dpi. Suitable for plain paper, thick paper, and envelopes. The resolution is set to 1200 dpi. Suitable for plain paper, thick paper, and envelopes. The resolution is set to 600 dpi. Suitable for plain paper, extra thick paper*, and labels. The resolution is set to 600 dpi. Suitable for plain paper (high gross), and transparency.
Chemical toner Roller transfer method Heated roller method and flexible belt nip method
Standard 2 Low speed 3
1.2.2 Printer Basic Specifications

Low speed 1
RESOLUTION 600 dpi, 1200 dpi WARMING UP TIME 35 seconds or less: 25 seconds or less: From turning the power on to ready-to-print status. (at: 22C, 55% RH, rated voltage, memory standard) From standby mode to ready-to-print status. (at 22C, 55% RH, rated voltage, memory standard)
Color mode Low speed 1 (F/C) Low speed 2 Low speed 3 Note *: 164-216 g/m2
PRINT MODE Color mode: Use four toners (CMYK) to print in full color.
Monochrome mode: Use only black toner (K) and the highest print speed is available.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic Specifications
Revision A
PRINTING MODE BY PAPER TYPE Table 1-2. Printing Mode by Paper Type
Gross*1 Basic Paper Weight Printing Speed Mode 600 dpi B/W FC 1200 dpi Low speed 1 Low speed 1 X X X Low speed 1 X X X X X
FIRST PRINT TIME The time from receiving the Start command to when trailing edge of the paper leaves the paper eject roller. Note that the time given in the tables below does not apply when the printer is in the conditions described in 1.11 Engine Restrictions (p31). Table 1-3. First Print Time (Unit: seconds or less)
Paper Source Speed Mode Standard 1 Standard 2 Low speed 1 Low speed 2/ Low speed 3 Note : Paper size: A4 MP Tray (STD) 10.2 12.0 14.3 18.4 LC1 (STD) 10.5 12.5 15.0 19.5 LC2 (OPT) 11.1 13.3 16.2 21.3 LC3 (OPT) 11.7 14.1 17.3 23.0 LC4 (OPT) 11.9 14.4 17.7 23.6
Paper Type
<Video I/F Name>
(1) Normal (2) (3) Normal-HQ (4) (5) Thick Extra Thick Extra Thick Back
<Plain paper-L> <Plain paper-H> <Plain paper-L> <Plain paper-L> <Plain (PPMDown)>
N N H SH SH H SH SH SH H SH
60 to Standard 1 Standard 2 105g/m2 60 to Standard 1 Standard 2 105g/m2 60 to 105g/m2 60 to 105g/m2 60 to 105g/m2 106 to 163g/m2 164 to 216g/m2 164 to 216g/m2 Low speed 1 Low speed 2 Low speed 3 Low speed 1 Low speed 2 Low speed 2 Low speed 3 Low speed 1 Low speed 2 Low speed 1 Low speed 2 Low speed 3 Low speed 1 Low speed 2 Low speed 2 Low speed 3 Low speed 1 Low speed 2
<Heavier paper-L> <Heavier paper-H> <Heavier paper-H> Back Face <Transparency (PPM-Down)> <Envelope> <Label-H>
Transparency Envelope Label
Note *1: Gross N: Normal Gross H: High Gross SH:Super High Gross
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
10

Duplex printing
Revision A
CONTINUOUS PRINTING SPEED Note that the time given in the tables below does not apply when the printer is in the conditions described in 1.11 Engine Restrictions (p31). Monochrome mode*1 Simplex printing Table 1-4. List of Continuous Printing Speed (Unit: ppm)
Printing Speed Mode Paper Size LT/Executive JIS-B5/ A5/HL LT/Executive JIS-B5/ A5 A4 Legal13 (GLG) Legal14 (LGL) F4 Envelop/DL/ISO-B5/ GLT LT and under LT ~ A4 A4 ~ Legal14 (LGL) Standard 1 MP tray LC1/2/3/4 MP tray LC1/2/3/4 MP tray LC1/2/3/4 MP tray LC1/2/3/4 MP tray MP tray MP tray 35.2 36.6 35.0*3 33.7 35.0 29.4 30.4 Low Speed 1 18.3 18.3 17.5 17.5 15.2 15.2 17.6 Low Speed Low Speed 2 3*3 12.2 12.2 11.7 11.7 10.1 10.1 8.2 8.2 8.0 8.0 7.2 7.2 A4
Table 1-5. List of Continuous Printing speed (Unit: ppm)

Paper Size LT/Executive JIS-B5/ MP tray A5 LC1/2/3/4 MP tray LC1/2/3/4 MP tray LC1/2/3/4 Printing Speed Mode Standard 1 Low speed 1 Low speed 2 Low Speed 21.0 21.0 20.4 20.4 18.7 18.7 11.5 11.5 11.2 11.2 10.2 10.2 7.8 7.8 7.6 7.6 6.9 6.9 3.4 3.4 3.3 3.3 3.1 3.1
Legal13 (GLG) Legal14 (LGL) Note *1: *2: *3:
See Supported paper size, type and orientation (p14) for details of paper orientation. Feed each of the papers at some intervals. The speed is 35.0ppm only when feeding from LC4.

35.2 33.7 29.4

11.7 11.2 9.8

8.2 8.0 7.2
17.6 16.8 14.7
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
11

Color mode*1 Simplex printing Table 1-6. List of Continuous Printing Speed (Unit: ppm)
Printing Speed Mode Paper Size LT/Executive JIS-B5/ A5/HL Standard 1 MP tray 25.1 26.2 24.1 25.0 21.0 21.7 Low Speed 1 18.3 18.3 17.5 17.5 15.2 15.2 18.3 Low Speed 2 12.2 12.2 11.7 11.7 10.1 10.1 Low Speed 3*2 8.2 Paper Size LT/Executive JIS-B5/ A5 LC1/2/3/4 A4 Legal13 (GLG) Legal14 (LGL) MP tray LC1/2/3/4 MP tray LC1/2/3/4 MP tray 15.2 15.2 14.8 14.8 13.6 13.6
Revision A
Duplex printing Table 1-7. List of Continuous Printing Speed (Unit: ppm)
Printing Speed Mode Standard 1 Low Speed 1 Low Speed 2 Low Speed 3 11.5 11.5 11.2 11.2 10.2 10.2 7.8 7.8 7.6 7.6 6.9 6.9 3.4 3.4 3.3 3.3 3.1 3.1
LT/Executive JIS-B5/ LC1/2/3/4 A5 A4 Legal13 (GLG) Legal14 (LGL) F4 DL/GLT/ISO-B5 LT and under LT ~ A4 A4 ~ Legal14 (LGL) MP tray
8.2 8.0 8.0 7.2 7.2

8.2 8.0 7.2
LC1/2/3/4
MP tray
Note *1: See Supported paper size, type and orientation (p14) for details of paper orientation. *2: Feed each of the papers at some intervals.
LC1/2/3/4
MP tray

35.2 33.7 29.4

11.7 11.2 9.8
LC1/2/3/4
MP tray MP tray MP tray
17.6 16.8 14.7
PAPER FEED REFERENCE Reference position to feed paper (in any size) is always center of the feeders.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
12
Revision A
PAPER FEED
COMBINATION WITH OPTIONAL CASSETTE By attaching two types of optional paper feed cassette, the paper supply capacity can be increased as follows.
Available Paper Basis Weight*2
82 g/m2 80 g/m2 75 g/m2 60 to 105 g/m2
Table 1-8. Paper Feed

Feeder Sheet Capacity/ Height Capacity
150 sheets 150 sheets
Paper Type*1/Paper Size

Standard paper: EPSON High Quality Plain Paper Standard paper: RX-80 4024 Paper (20lb) Plain paper/recycled paper: A4, A5, B5, Letter, GLT, HLT, Executive, F4, LGL13, LGL14 Transparencies: A4, LT Labels: A4, LT
Table 1-9. Combination with Optional Cassette

Combination MP tray Standard 550-sheet paper cassette (LC1) 550-sheet paper cassette (LC2) 1100-sheet paper cassette (LC3/4) Total Capacity 150 sheets 550 sheets (1) (2) (3) (4)
15 mm
550 sheets
MP tray Standard
15 mm 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm
Option
106 to 163 g/m2 Thick Paper/Extra Thick Paper: A4, A5, B5, LT, GLT, HLT, Executive 164 to 216 g/m2 envelopes, DL, ISO-B5 User defined size Width 88.90mm to 220.00mm Length 139.70mm to 355.60mm A4, A5, LT, B5, Executive, LGL13 (GLG), LGL14 A4, A5, LT, B5, Executive, LGL13 (GLG), LGL14 A4, A5, LT, B5, Executive, LGL13 (GLG), LGL14 75 to 105 g/m2 60 to 216 g/m2
1100 sheets
700 sheets
1250 sheets 1800 sheets 2350 sheets
Note : These values are valid with RX-80 paper (80 g/m2) and EPSON high quality plain paper (82 g/m2).
550-sheet 550-sheet cassette (LC1) 61mm Duplex unit (built-in) 550-sheet paper cassette (LC2, 3, 4) Option
60 to 105 g/m2 64 to 163 g/m2
550-sheet 61mm
60 to 105 g/m2
Note *1: Refer to 1.3 Paper Specifications (p19). *2: Environmental condition for the capacity: 22 C/55% RH.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
13
Revision A
SUPPORTED PAPER SIZE, TYPE AND ORIENTATION Table 1-10. List of Supported Paper Size, Type and Orientation
Paper size Dimensions in mm (inches) Paper A4 A5 LT HLT Standard GLT EXECUTIVE LGL13 (GLG) LGL14 F4 User defined paper size Transparency Special paper Labels envelopes*2 DL ISO-B5 Vertical (length) 297.00 148.00 279.40 (11.00") 215.90 (8.50") 266.70 (10.50") 266.70 (10.50") 330.20 (13.00") 355.60 (14.00") 330.00 A4: 297.00 LT: 279.40 A4: 297.00 LT: 279.40 110.00 250.00 Horizontal (width) 210.00 210.00 215.90 (8.50") 139.70 (5.50") 203.20 (8.00") 184.15 (7.25") 215.90 (8.50") 215.90 (8.50") 210.00 A4: 210.00 LT: 215.90 A4: 210.00 LT: 215.90 220.00 176.00 *3 *3 MP Tray 550-sheet Paper Cassette (STD/OPT) Paper Orientation SEF SEF SEF SEF SEF SEF SEF SEF SEF Discretionary SEF SEF SEF SEF LEF SEF Duplex Printing
139.70 to 355.60 (5.5" to 14") 88.90 to 220.00 (3.5" to 8.5")
Note *1: *2: *3:
: Feeding is possible and paper size is automatically detected. : Feeding is possible by specifying the size code with the controller. : Duplex printing is available.
*4: : Not available *5: SEF (Short Edge Feed): Set paper to be loaded from its short side. *6: LEF (Long Edge Feed): Set paper to be loaded from its long side. *7: See Envelope orientation (p.15) for details of details of envelop orientation.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
14

Envelope orientation
Revision A
PAPER EJECT CAPACITY Number of sheets: 250 sheets, face down only (A4/LT, Standard paper) 36 mm (Paper ejection automatically stops when the sensor detected that the ejected papers has built up to a thickness of 36 mm)
Paper feed direction
Thickness:
Envelope type Note *1: *2: *3:
DL
ISO-B5
Set envelopes with its print surface facing down. Image quality and feed is not guaranteed when printing on the back side (flap side) of envelopes. Envelopes with adhesive or tape are not available.
Note : Environmental conditions for the capacity: 22 C/55 % RH, standard paper (simplex/ duplex printing).
Printing surface set direction Table 1-11. Printing Surface Set Direction
MP tray Set direction (Printing surface) Face down Paper feed direction Top edge first Optional paper cassette Face up Bottom edge first
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
15

Dimensions and weight with options installed
Revision A
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT Dimensions and weight of each unit Table 1-12. Dimensions and Weight
Width (mm) Main unit 550-sheet paper cassette 1100-sheet paper cassette 437 429 584 Depth (mm) 588 509 695 Height (mm) 457 154 364 Weight (kg) 31.5 7 21
Table 1-13. Dimensions and Weights with Options Installed

Width (mm) Main unit + 550-sheet paper cassette Main unit + 1100-sheet paper cassette Main unit + 550-sheet paper cassette + 1100-sheet paper casette 437 Depth (mm) 588 Height (mm) 584 Weight (k) 39
584
695
796
53
Note 1: Manufacturing tolerance is 5 mm in dimensions and 0.5 kg in weight. 2: Consumables (Toner cartridges and Photoconductor unit) are not included in the main unit weight (controller is included).
584
695
923
60
437mm
588mm
Note 1: Manufacturing tolerance is 5 mm in dimensions and 0.5 kg in weight. 2: Consumables (Toner cartridges and Photoconductor unit) are not included in the main unit weight (controller is included).
457mm
Figure 1-1. Dimensions (Main Unit)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
16
Revision A
CONSUMABLES AND PERIODIC REPLACEMENT UNIT Table 1-14. List of Consumables and Periodic Replacement Unit
Classification Replacement Unit Toner cartridge (Black, Cyan, Yellow, Magenta) Consumables Photoconductor unit Transfer unit Fuser unit Retard Roll Developer Unit Assy. Periodic replacement units Feed Roll Assy. MP Retard Roll Assy. MP Regi Roll Assy. Feed Roll Assy. CST Note : For detailed specifications, refer to 1.9 Consumables/Periodic Replacement Unit (p27).
POWER CONSUMPTION The maximum rated current and power consumption are measured with all engine options and controller options installed. Table 1-15. List of Power Consumption
110 V Maximum rated current Power consumption Maximum Continuous printing average Color Monochrome 10 A 900 W 357 W 437 W 70 W 21 W 0W 240 V 5A 960 W 354 W 426 W 71 W 25 W 0W
Average during standby with the heater on Average in low power mode with the heater off Power supply off
Note : International Energy Star Standards: Color printer with 20 ppm print speed or higher: 45W or less
CONSUMPTION CURRENT 550-sheet paper cassette (option) POWER SUPPLY Power supply operating voltage/frequency AC 120 V 10 % Power supply for the controller DC 5.0 V 5%, 1 A or less DC 3.3 V 5%, 3 A or less 50 Hz /60 Hz 3 Hz AC 220 V/240 V 10 % 50 Hz /60 Hz 3 Hz 5 V/ 0.1 A or less 24 V/ 0.5 A or less 1100-sheet paper casette (option) 5 V/ 0.1 A or less 24 V/ 0.3 A or less
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
17
Revision A
NOISE Main unit

Item Sound pressure Sound power Printing Mode 55 dB 6.65 B Standby Mode 35 dB 5.0 B Sleep Mode Background noise Background noise
Note 1: The method of measuring and calculation conforms to ISO-7779 and ISO-9296. 2: Values mentioned above are actual measurement value.
EXHAUST GAS Ozone density: 0.02 mg/m3 or less (the measuring method conforms to BAM)
Styrene density: TBD mg/m3 or less Dust density: TVOC: 0.075 mg/m3 or less (the measuring method conforms to BAM) TBD mg/m3 or less
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
18
Revision A
1.3 Paper Specifications

1.3.1 Paper Type
Standard paper Monochrome: Color: Plain paper 64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 (Commonly used copy paper, recycled paper, high quality plain paper) Recommended recycled paper: Steinbeis Recycling Copy classic Special Media EPSON transparency sheets (A4) Labels Thick paper (106 g/m2 to 216 g/m2) Envelope
C H E C K P O IN T
1.3.2 Paper that may cause printing defects, paper jams or printer malfunction
Transfer paper (carbon paper, non-carbon paper), thermal paper, impact paper, acid paper
RX-80 paper, 4024 paper (20 lb) EPSON Color Laser Paper
Paper that is too thin or too thick Paper that is wet or damp Paper with special coatings or color printer paper with processed surfaces Glossy (too slick) paper, or paper with too rough surface Paper that the roughness is significantly different by side Paper with punch holes or perforations Creased, curled or torn paper Irregularly shaped paper or paper with non-perpendicular corners Labels that peel off easily Paper with glue, staples or paper clips attached to it Special paper for ink jet applications (super-fine, glossy, glossy film, etc.) Paper previously used in a thermal or ink jet printer
lb:
Ream weight = Total weight of 500 sheets of 17" x 22" sized paper 2: 1g/m2 = 0.2659763 lb g/m Before purchasing a large amount of paper, test the paper if it can be printed normally.
Transparencies for other color laser printers or color photocopiers Paper that has been already printed by other color/monochrome laser printers or photocopiers Sheets of paper stuck together Postcards for ink jet printers, unofficial postcards, and adhesive postcards Iron print coated paper (for both ink jet and laser printers) Paper that is deteriorated or discolored, due to temperatures lower than 190 C. When postcards with illustrations are used, the paper feed roller may be soiled with paper dust, and these postcards may not be fed properly. In this case, cleaning is required in accordance with MAINTENANCE (p451)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Paper Specifications
19
Revision A
1.3.3 Available Paper by Feeder

Table 1-16. Types of Paper Feed
Special Paper Paper Feed Standard Paper Plain Paper Transparency Labels Thick Paper Extra Thick Paper Envelopes
1.3.4 Printing Area

MAXIMUM PRINTABLE AREA Paper with 355.60 mm length or less Width: 210.90 mm x Length: 351.60 mm
Note : Printing prohibited areas for any type of paper are as follows; Right and left margins: 2.5 mm Top and bottom margins: 2.0 mm
MP tray Duplex unit (built-in) 550-sheet paper cassette (LC1/2/3/4) Note 1: 2: X X X X
GUARANTEED PRINTING AREA

X X X X
: Paper feeding and image quality is guaranteed. : Paper feeding and printing is possible. However, this is limited to types of paper for general applications. Image quality is not guaranteed. 3: X: Feeding is not possible.
The guaranteed printing area is shown below. The minimum left, right, top and bottom margins are 4 mm for any type of paper.
4mm
4mm
4mm
Guaranteed printing area
Figure 1-2. Guaranteed Printing Area
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Paper Specifications
4mm
20
Revision A
PRINTING START POSITION ACCURACY Table 1-20. Printing Start Position Accuracy
Simplex Printing Main scanning direction Reference point (c) Lifetime 600,000 pages or 5 years, whichever comes first. 600,000 pages or 5 years, whichever comes first. Sub-scanning direction Reference point (a) Duplex Printing
1.4 Reliability and Serviceability

1.4.1 Reliability
MECHANICAL LIFETIME Table 1-17. Mechanical Lifetime
Unit Main unit 550-sheet paper cassette (option)
2.5 mm 2.0 mm
2.5 mm 2.0 mm
1100-sheet paper cassette (option) 600,000 pages or 5 years, whichever comes first.
MPBF Table 1-18. MPBF

Unit Main unit Optional Feeder 100,000 pages 100,000 pages Lifetime
Feed direction
Printable area
PAPER FEED RELIABILITY Table 1-19. Paper Feed Reliability

Standard Paper Reliability Issue MP Tray Simplex Duplex 1/3,000 1/1,800 1/1,500 Plain Paper Special Paper
Figure 1-3. Printing Start Position Accuracy
550-sheet 550-sheet 550-sheet Paper MP Tray Paper MP Tray Paper Cassette Cassette Cassette 1/5,000 1/3,000 1/2,500 1/2,000 1/1,200 1/1,000 1/3,000 1/1,800 1/1,500 1/100 1/50
Jam rate
Multiple-sheet feed rate Note 1: 2: 3: 4:
Environmental conditions: Normal operating environment Paper size: Regular size Humidity: Newly unpacked paper Paper type: The 550-sheet paper cassette does not use special paper (Refer to Supported paper size, type and orientation (p.14)) 5: Multiple-sheet feed rate: Conditions when adding new paper onto remaining paper in the tray or cassette are not considered.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Reliability and Serviceability
21
Revision A
SKEW Table 1-21. Skew

A4 Main scanning direction (| a-b |) Sub-scanning direction (| c-d |) Simplex Printing 1.2 mm 0.8 mm Duplex Printing 1.2 mm 0.8 mm
1.4.2 Durability
PRINT VOLUME (PAGES/MONTH) Average : 3, 000 pages/month
Maximum : 90, 000 pages/month (monochrome:color = 1:1)
Table 1-22. Length Standard of Measurement

A4 Simplex printing Duplex printing Main scanning direction (e) Sub-scanning direction (f) 19 0mm 114.5 mm
1.4.3 Serviceability
MEAN TIME TO REPAIR MTTR : Average 30 minutes or less (Time required for service personnel to determine and correct the cause of the malfunction)
HEIGHT OF CURL OF OUTPUT PAPER Table 1-23. Height of Curl of Output Paper
Paper Type Standard paper, Plain paper Other special papers Curl Height 30 mm or less No regulation
Note 1: The same for simplex and duplex printing 2: Measurement conditions: 22 C/55% at low speed 2
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Reliability and Serviceability
22
Revision A
1.5 Service Conditions

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY Table 1-24. Ambient Temperature and Humidity
Temperature (C) Operating Non-operating 5 to 32 -20 to 40 Humidity (%RH) 15 to 85 5 to 85 Other No condensation
SPACE REQUIREMENTS In order to ensure that the printer operates properly, provide at least as much space as shown in the diagram below.
350mm
100mm
AIR PRESSURE (ALTITUDE) 65 to 101 kPa (0 to 3,100 m or less)

100mm
LEVELNESS Difference between front and back: Difference between left and right: 10 mm or less (at 445 mm) 10 mm or less (at 445 mm)
150mm 100mm
ILLUMINATION 3,000 lx or less (do not expose to direct sunlight)
Figure 1-4. Space Requirements
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Service Conditions
23
Revision A
1.6 Conditions for Storage and Transport

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY Main unit Table 1-25. Ambient Temperature and Humidity (Main unit)
Condition Normal conditions Harsh conditions High Low Temperature (C) 0 to 35 35 to 40 -20 to 0 High Low Humidity*1 (%RH) 15 to 85 80 to 95 5 to 15 Guaranteed Period 12 months after manufacture Max. 48 hours
DROPPING There should be no damage on 1 corner, 3 edges, and 6 sides of the packages under the conditions below. Table 1-27. Dropping
Drop Standard Option Main unit 550-sheet paper cassette 1100-sheet paper cassette 640 mm 910 mm 760 mm
Note *1: Non-condensing
VIBRATION There should be no damage under the following conditions Frequency: Acceleration: 5 to 55 Hz 1.5 G However, between 5 to 10 Hz, constant 7.5 mm double amplitude is assumed. Logarithmic sweep 10 minutes for one-way
Optional products Table 1-26. Ambient Temperature and Humidity (Optional products)
Condition Normal conditions Harsh conditions High Temperature (C) -20 to 50 50 to 60 High Humidity*1 (%RH) 5 to 85 85 to 95 Guarantee period 12 months after manufacture Max. 48 hours
Frequency sweep:
Note *1: Non-condensing
Direction of application: X, Y, Z directions Number of cycles: 3 cycles for each of XYZ directions (each 1 hour)
STORAGE ALTITUDE 0 to 3,100m or less For air transport, 0 to 15,000m. However, this assumes that the cargo compartment is maintained at 70.9275 kPa or higher.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Conditions for Storage and Transport
24
Revision A
1.7 Electrical Characteristics

NOTE: The following sections do not include any optional units. ELECTRICAL FAST TRANSIENT/BURSTS (AC LINE NOISE) Ensure the following conditions using evaluation methods compliant with IEC61000-4-4. 1 kV: 2 kV: No errors excluding insignificant dot errors No damage to parts
INSULATION RESISTANCE 10 M or more
WITHSTAND VOLTAGE There should be no break down during application of the voltages shown below. Leak current should be 20mA or less when applying the voltage for one minute. Table 1-28. Withstand Voltage
Between Inlet and Non-charged Between Primary and Secondary Metal Parts Power Transformers
INSTANTANEOUS OUTAGES No effect on printing quality. DIP: 0.5 cycle 95 %
120 V 200 V series
AC 2000 V AC 3000 V
AC 3000 V AC 3000 V
LEAK CURRENT 120 V: RESISTANCE TO STATIC ELECTRICITY Ensure the following conditions using evaluation methods compliant with IEC61000-4-2 CISPR 24. Contact electric discharge 5 kV: No error on any device after applying Aerial electric discharge 10 kV: No error on any device after applying INRUSH CURRENT 1/2 cycle 100 A or less (0-peak): Including heater inrush (with cold start or hot start/rated voltage: 10 %) 3.5 mA or less
220-240 V: 3.5 mA or less
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Electrical Characteristics
25
Revision A
1.8 Compatible Specification

SAFETY STANDARD Table 1-29. Safety Standards
Model Type 120 V 200 V series Applicable Standards UL60950 3rd Edition CSA C22.2 No.60950-00 IEC60950 3rd Edition EN60950 3rd Edition
POWER SUPPLY HARMONICS Not applicable
POWER CONSUMPTION Conforms to International Energy Star Program standards
MISCELLANEOUS Toner: SAFETY STANDARD (LASER TRANSMISSION) Table 1-30. Safety Standards (Laser Transmission)
Model Type 120 V 200 V series Applicable Standards FDA21CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J, Section 1010, 1040 IEC60825 Class 1 Laser Product CE Directive Nordic Agency Approvals
Have no affect on human body (conforms to OSHA, TSCA, EINECS) Have no affect on human body (conforms to OSHA) Conforms to UL478 5th edition Does not contain any materials prohibited in each country, nor harmful substances above the permitted values
OPC: Ozone generation: Materials:
<Reference> Laser specifications:

Wavelength (shortest to longest): 775 to 799 nm Maximum average radiant power: 10 mW
EMI STANDARDS Table 1-31. EMI Standards

Model Type 120 V 230 V Applicable Standards FCC Part 15 Subpart B, Class B (ANSI C63.4) EN55022 (CIRSPR Publication22), Class B EN61000-3-2 (Harmonics) Class A EN61000-3-3 (Flicker)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Compatible Specification
26
Revision A
Note *1: Approximate number of printed pages using A4 continuous printing at 5% image occupation rate. The cartridge lifetime varies according to the paper size and type of printing (toner save mode etc.) Note :Refer to 1.13 Life Details (p33) for details.
1.9 Consumables/Periodic Replacement Unit

C A U T IO N
The print page-based service life values of the Consumables and Periodical Replacement Parts are guidelines. The number of printable pages changes depending on how they are printed. The number of printable pages decreases depending on the intermittent printing (where a few pages, one to several pages, are printed each time), paper size, paper orientation, thick paper printing, printed document, frequent power-on/off, etc. Hence, the number of printable pages of the consumables and periodical replacement parts may become less than a half depending on the operating conditions and environment of the user.
Periodic replacement parts specifications Table 1-33. Periodic Replacement Parts Specifications
Name ROLL ASSY RETARD DEVE ASSY ROLL ASSY FEED (MP) Life Time 100,000 page 300,000 page 45,000 page (300,000 page*) 45,000 page (300,000 page*) 300,000 page 300,000 page
1.9.1 Specifications
Consumables Table 1-32. Consumables
Name Configuration Life Time External Dimensions (mm) 355 (W) 51 (D) 55 (H) 355 (W) 51 (D) 53 (H) 355 (W) 51 (D) 53 (H) 328 (W) 113 (D) 244 (H) 290 (W) 97 (D) 49 (H) TBD Weight (g) HOLDER ASSY RETARD CHUTE ASSY REGI ROLL ASSY FEED (CST)
Note *: Cassette: When the usage rate of MP tray is 85:15
Toner Cartridge (K)
Toner hopper
9,000 pages*1 (TBD) 8,000 pages*1 (TBD)
380
Toner cartridge (Y)
Toner hopper
350
Toner cartridge (C, M)
Toner hopper Photoreceptor Developer Intermediate roll Transfer BTR Waste Toner Box Heat roll Quarts lamp (For 120V/ 230V)
8,000 pages*2
360
Photoconductor unit
35,000 pages (TBD)
3200
Transfer unit
35,000 pages (TBD) 100,000 pages (TBD)
520
Fuser unit
TBD
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Consumables/Periodic Replacement Unit
27
Revision A
1.9.2 Conditions for Storage and Transport

Temperature and humidity conditions
Condition Normal conditions Harsh conditions High Low Temperature (C) 0 to 35 35 to 40 -20 to 0 High Low Humidity*1 (%RH) 15 to 80 80 to 95 5 to 15 Guarantee Period 24 months (unopened) Max. of 1 month
Note *1: Non-condensing Note : Storage time after opening is 12 months in the normal operating environment.
Storage altitude 65 to 101 kPa (0 to 3,100m) For air transport, 0 to 15,000m. However, this assumes that the cargo compartment is maintained at 70.9275 kPa or higher. Package dropping There should be no damage on 1 corner, 3 edges, and 6 sides of the packages under the conditions below. Table 1-34. Package Dropping
Package name Toner cartridge (Y, M, C, K) Photoconductor unit Transfer unit Fuser unit Drop 910 cm 910 cm 910 cm 910 cm
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Consumables/Periodic Replacement Unit
28
Revision A
1.10 External Appearance and Unit Names

1.10.1 Unit Names
Table 1-35. List of Unit Names
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Control panel Cover B Top cover Output tray Latch on cover B Cover A Name No. 7 8 9 10 11 12 Power switch Latch on cover A Standard lower paper cassette Expansion tray MP tray (Multi-purpose tray) Stopper Name No. 13 14 15 16 17 18 AC inlet USB interface connector Parallel interface connector Type B interface card slot cover Transfer unit Name Ethernet interface connector No. 19 20 21 22 Fuser unit Photoconductor unit Toner cartridge Cover D Name
Figure 1-5. Unit Name_1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
External Appearance and Unit Names
29
Revision A
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
External Appearance and Unit Names
30
Revision A
Table 1-37. Color Mode
Total pages printed with PHD 25601 - 30720 Number of pages between each cleaning Standard 26 26 Low Speed 1 18 18 Low Speed 2/3 13 13
1.11 Engine Restrictions

1.11.1 Controls that Restrict Print Speed
CLEANING CYCLE On a temporary basis, printing is interrupted to perform cleaning in the conditions mentioned below. Necessary time for the cleaning is approximately 25 seconds (including other controls). Cleaning may be carried out more frequently depending on the environment. Table 1-36. Monochrome Mode
Total pages printed with PHD 0 - 1024 1025 - 5120 5121 - 10240 10241 - 15360 15361 - 20480 20481 - 25600 25601 - 30720 30720 Number of pages between each cleaning Standard 108 108 72 72 72 54 54 54 Low Speed 1 54 54 36 36 36 27 27 27 Low Speed 2/3 39 39 26 26 26 20 20 20
30720 -
COOL DOWN Printing is temporarily interrupted to cool down the fuser unit in the conditions mentioned below. Necessary time for the cool down depends on the temperature of the fuser unit. 1. 2. 3. 4. Temperature of the fuser unit edge exceeded the specified value. Difference in temperature between the edge and the central portion of the fuser unit exceeded the specified level. Temperature exceeded the higher limit that is set to each type of papers. During continuous printing on small-sized papers, and when starting printing on largesized papers right after printing on small-sized papers.
1.11.2 Controls that Restrict Print Start

Necessary time to start printing may become longer immediately after shifting the print modes mentioned below. 1. Resolution Monochrome/Color Print speed Paper type Size
Table 1-37. Color Mode

Total pages printed with PHD 0 - 1024 1025 - 5120 5121 - 10240 10241 - 15360 15361 - 20480 20481 - 25600 Number of pages between each cleaning Standard 52 52 35 35 35 26 Low Speed 1 36 36 24 24 24 18 Low Speed 2/3 26 26 17 17 17 13
2. 3. 4. 5.
1.11.3 Toner Duty Limiting Value

240 % (to prevent fuser unit from twisting paper jam)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Engine Restrictions
31
Revision A
1.12 Notes When Replacing Consumables and Installing Optional Products

1.12.1 Consumables
Toner Cartridge Toner cartridge can be replaced regardless of whether or not the main unit is turned on. Photoconductor Unit This unit can be replaced regardless of whether or not the main unit is turned on. BTR This unit can be replaced regardless of whether or not the main unit is turned on. Fuser Unit Turn the printer off. Leave the printer stand for at least 30 minutes after turning off the power as the Fuser is extremely hot after use. Release the fixing levers on both right and left sides.
1.12.2 Optional Products

550-sheet Paper Cassette Turn off the main unit before installing. If the main unit is on when the cassette is installed, it is not detected. Secure to the main unit with the attaching parts located on the top surface. 1100-sheet Paper Cassette Turn off the main unit before installing. If the main unit is on when the unit is installed, it is not detected. Secure to the main unit or 550-sheet paper cassette with the attaching parts located on the top surface. Adding Controller Option Parts Turn off the main unit before installing. The part will be damaged if the power is on. Remove the cover that is located beneath the controller. Remove the three screws to pull out the cassette.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Notes When Replacing Consumables and Installing Optional Products
32
Revision A
Color mode Table 1-39. Color mode
1.13 Life Details

Monochrome mode Table 1-38. Monochrome mode
Unit
Toner cartridge (K)
Unit
Toner cartridge (K) Toner cartridge (C/ M/Y)
LIFE (unit: pages) Catalog Area specification Coverage Continuous 4 P/J 1 P/J value printing 9,000 5% 5% 10 % 20 % 50 % 5% 10 % 20 % 50 % 9,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 --------100,000 300,000 9,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 (46,000) (45,000) (42,000) (37,000) 100,000 300,000 9,000 26,800 26,800 26,800 25,600 (37,000) (36,000) (34,000) (30,000) 100,000 or less 170,000
LIFE (unit: pages) Catalog Area specification Coverage Continuous 4 P/J 1 P/J value printing 9,000 8,000 5% 5% 5% 9,000 8,000 35,000 35,000 29,000 12,000 --------100,000 300,000 9,000 8,000 35,000 35,000 29,000 12,000 35,000 (39,000) (32,000) (22,000) 100,000 300,000 9,000 8,000 26,800 25,600 24,100 12,000 (34,000) (31,000) (26,000) (18,000) 100,000 or less 170,000
Phoroconductor unit
35,000
Phoroconductor unit
35,000
10 % 20 % 50 % 5% 10 % 20 % 50 %
Transfer unit
35,000
Transfer unit
35,000
Fuser unit DEVE ASSY
100,000 300,000
-----
Fuser unit DEVE ASSY
100,000 300,000
-----
Note : Values in parentheses are theoretical values and may differ from the actual measurement values.
Note : Values in parentheses are theoretical values and may differ from the actual measurement values.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Life Details
33
Revision A
1.14 Engine Control (Appendix)

Table 1-40. Engine Control
Timing Cleaning Item Action Prerequisite Operating Time 42 sec. 1. At power-on Retrieves toner accumulated in the cleaner with 2. When opening/closing the covers the BTR. once the number of printed pages exceeded 200 pages. When using new printer for the first time. After replacing the developer assy with a new one.
At power-on
Toner transfer Transfers toner into the pipe. (Filling toner into the pipe) Idling the developer assy (Cleaning) Adjusting the CTD sensor light intensity Fuser unit warm-up Fuser unit sensor warm-up Warms the NC sensor Repeats idling and cleaning to charge toner.
57 sec. 110 sec. (including cleaning operation)
Each time the printer is used. When the sensor detected the temperature of -5 C or less.
25 sec. 90 sec. (at -10 C)
Process control (SAD)
Reads the density and gives feedback.
1. The number of accumulated printed pages exceeded 25 pages. 2. Carrying out printing immediately after the power-on. 3. When shifting the print speed in accordance with the change 4 ~ 10 sec. of paper type. 4. When shifting the resolution. 5. When shifting monochrome/color mode. 1. More than 80 pages are printed within 15 minutes. 2. Temperature has changed more than 6 C since the last regi control. 3. After replacing the PHD with a new one. 4. Temperature difference between environment temperature and the fuser unit at power-on is more than 10 C. 5. Printing is not carried out for more than 80 minutes. 6. Instruction from the controller.
Pre-printing operation Regi control Process-directional color registration control
19 sec.
1. Temperature of the fuser unit edge exceeded the specified value. Released when the temperature falls below the 2. Difference in temperature between the edge and the central Cool-down of the fuser unit Max. 90 sec. specified level. portion of the fuser unit exceeded the specified level. 3. Temperature exceeded the higher limit that is set to each type of papers.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Engine Control (Appendix)
34

Table 1-40. Engine Control
Timing HAC mode Item Action Applies/Agitates toner. Prerequisite Images with 50 % print rate are continuously printed.
Revision A
Operating Time 3 ~ 15 sec. 15 sec.
Adjusts the temperature to the one that is set to Adjusting the temperature each type of papers. (Starts printing when the When the paper type is changed. of the fuser unit (stand-by) temperature is settled to the specified value.) Cleaning The number of continuous print pages exceeded the specified value. 1. Temperature of the fuser unit edge exceeded the specified value. 2. Difference in temperature between the edge and the central portion of the fuser unit exceeded the specified level. 3. When printing on large-sized papers right after printing on small-sized papers. 4. When continuously printing on small-sized papers. Width = 150 mm or less:20 pages Width = 186 mm or less:30 pages Print jobs are temporarily stopped when shifting the following print modes. 1. Resolution 2. Monochrome/Color 3. Print speed 4. Paper type (When the current temperature is higher than the predetermined level) 5. Paper size When the temperature of the fuser unit continues to fall during printing.
Cool-down of the fuser unit During printing (Print jobs are temporarily stopped or delayed in order to perform the items right.)
Shifting the print mode
Reduction in temperature of Waits for the fuser unit to rise in temperature. the fuser unit Process control (TC) After printing operation Toner refill Cleaning Lateral regi control Others Fuser unit warm-up Executes during stand-by. Raises in temperature until it reaches the temperature for stand-by. Draws the TC patch, reads the density, and gives feedback. Including agitation/refill of toner and the cleaning
The number of accumulated print pages is more than 25 pages. 9 sec. Density of the TC patch is thinner than the specified level. Each time the printing is finished. Instruction from the controller. Instruction from the controller. 65 sec. 13 sec 47 sec. 25 sec.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Engine Control (Appendix)
35
Revision A
Printer Settings: Panel settings, EJL, PJL, HTTP, SNMP, and ENPC Stores in 256K bytes serial type of EEPROM
1.15 Controller Specifications

1.15.1 Controller Basic Specifications
CPU: Enhanced technology: RAM DIMM specification: DDR333 200 pin SO DIMM, CL=2.5 Number of slot: Standard: Max.: Expansion: ROM: Program ROM: Font: Expansion ROM: Two slots (the standard RAM must be installed to slot-1) 128 MB 640 MB 12 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB (SO DIMM) 32-bit width (3.3V) 16 MB (DIMM) In Program 1 slot (ROM DIMM slot, 3.3V) PowerPC750FX (600MHz) CPGI, CRIT, RIT (FMV)
NOTE: Expansion ROM can be installed and removed only when turning off the printer. Slot A: Control Panel: Interface Standard Parallel:
USB: Network: Type-B:
P5C ROM module LCD 22 digits, 5 lines, 3 LEDs, 6 buttons
1 ch (IEEE1284 compliant bi-directional B-type connector, Compatibility, Nibble, ECP) 1 ch (Rev.2.0 HS), (D4 supported) 1 ch (10Base-T/100Base-TX) 1 slot (Level 3 compatible) 1 slot (Level 3 compatible) 1 (Optional) (supports 40GB high-capacity type)
Option: HDD:
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Controller Specifications
36

Printer mode Standard: Option: Other: ESC/ Page-Color, FX (B/W), ESCP2 (B/W), I239X (B/W), ESC/Page (B/W), Adobe PostScript3 PCL5c EJL, PJL, and RCC mode (firmware up grades) DIAG mode (Engine adjustment), EpsonNetConfig (Web) Status sheet, Reserve Job List, Form Overlay List, Network Status Sheet, USB Ext I/F statusSht (only when connecting with EPSON D4 compliant device), AUX Status Sheet (only when Type-B level 3 is installed), PS3 Status Sheet, Font Sample (for each mode), Hex Dump, Support Mode, Printer Adjust Menu, Maintenance Mode (engine status sheet), Update function for engine firmware. Slide lip method: installed from the backside of the main unit
Revision A
1.15.3 External Interface Specifications

The printer provides the following host interfaces. Parallel (IEEE1284 compliant) interface: Ethernet (100BaseTX/10BaseT): USB (Rev.2.0 HS) interface: Optional Interface (Type-B) 1 slot: Standard Standard Standard Optional
Auxiliary software:
The locations of the respective interfaces are shown below;
Optional I/F
Installation method:
1.15.2 Controller Configuration

The factory default of this printer controller configuration is as follows. Paper size: A4
USB I/F Parallel I/F
Ethernet I/F <Orange LED> - ON: 100BaseTX - OFF: 10BaseT <Orange LED> - ON: 100BaseTX - OFF: 10BaseT
Figure 1-8. Location of External Interfaces
PARALLEL INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS

CMD: EJL, ESCPAGE-04, ESCPAGECOLOR-01, POSTSCRIPT, PJL, PCL*1;
Note *1:
Only when P5C ROM module is installed
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
37
Revision A
ETHERNET INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS Printing protocols TCP/IP: LPR, FTP, IPP, PORT2501, PORT9100 Microsoft Network: Net BIOS over TCP/IP, Net BIOS over NetBEUI NetWare: Operating mode Standby (factory default), NDS Print Server, Bindery Print Server, Remote Printer AppleTalk Management protocols TCP/IP: SNMP, HTTP, TELNET, DHCP, BOOTP, APIPA, PING, DDNS, mDNS*1, SNTP, SSDP, ENPC*2 Microsoft Network: Auto-IP, SSDP MS Network(NetBEUI): SNMP, ENPC*2 NetWare: SNMP, ENPC*2 AppleTalk: SNMP, ENPC*2
Note *1: *2: mDNS is for Rendezvous use. These information should not be disclosed to users.
USB INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS This printer supports USB2.0HS, and carries 18 digits serial ID number for the USB. The ID number is printed on the bottom of the Status Sheet. (See Status Sheet (p.75).) Each digit describes as follows; 1, 2: 3: 4 to 13: 14: 15, 16: 17, 18: Specific number for the printer model (36) Page Printer (P) Serial number of the unit The year of an assembly day (lowest digit) The month of an assembly day The day of an assembly day
When the printer is connected to the computer by the USB port, the interface does not support D4. However, D4 support is available if the EPSON external LAN option is connected. The CMD of Device ID differs from the parallel interface with D4L3 being added.
CMD: EJL, ESCPAGE-04, ESCPAGECOLOR-01, POSTSCRIPT, PJL, PCL*1, D4L3*2;
Note *1: *2:
Only when P5C ROM module is installed Available only for USB port
Entity type: See the following table Table 1-41. Entity Type
Emulation PS ESC/Page Color ESC/Page I239X FX ESCP2 PCL5C*1 Note : Only when P5C ROM module is installed EPSONPRPXL24 EPSONFX EPSONLQ2 EPSONPCL5C Entity Type LaserWriter EPSONPAGECOLOR1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
38
Revision A
OPTIONAL INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS Main System Type: MTP1200dpi, PW10200dt1200dpi, PRG (*****) rev, AP800ma, SPD0fast, D4
Note : The asterisks ***** indicate the ROM version
Printer Name: Product Name: Emulation Type: Entity Type:
Same as the Product Name of the factory default Short Product Name (AL-C4200) See the following table See the following table Table 1-42. Emulation Type and Entity Type
Emulation PS ESC/Page Color ESC/Page I239X FX ESCP2 PCL5C*1 Note *1:
Emulation Type POSTSCRIPT-00 ESCPAGECOLOR-01 ESCPAGE-04 PRPXL24-01 ESCP9 ESCPL2 PCL5C-00
Entity Type LaserWriter EPSONPAGECOLOR1 EPSONPRPXL24 EPSONFX EPSONLQ2 EPSONPCL5C
Only when P5C ROM module is installed
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
39
Revision A
1.16 Control Panel

1.16.1 External Appearance and Names
Table 1-43. Indicators
Indicators
LCD On: Ready LED Off: Data LED On: Off: Flashing: Printer is ready to print. Printer is not ready to print. Printer contains data that has not been processed yet. Printer has finished processing all print data. Printer is currently processing data. Data LED (Yellow)
LCD
(2) button
Error LED (Red) Ready LED (Green)
Function
5 line x 22 characters (132 x 65 dot matrix)
Cancel Job button
(1) button
(4) button
(3) button Start/Stop button
Error LED
Flashing 1: An error has occurred which permits continuing to print by pressing the Start/ Stop button. On: An error has occurred which requires the user to remove the cause of the error. Flashing 2: An error has occurred which requires the user to clear the error and press the Start/Stop button.
Figure 1-9. External View of Control Panel
Table 1-44. Summary of Button Functions

Button Name
Start /Stop
When Ready to Print

Into pause (not ready to print) status 1. Pressing normally: Deletes printing data 2. Pressing for 2 seconds or longer: Deletes all printing data
When Not Ready to Print
Error Has Occurred
In Panel Setting Mode

Returns to normal mode (the same state as before entering panel setting mode)
1. Pressing normally: 1. Recoverable error: Into On Line (ready to print) status Clears error 2. Pressing for 2 seconds or longer: 2. Non-recoverable error: Ejects paper forcibly Displays Unable Clear Error 1. Pressing normally: Deletes printing data 2. Pressing for 2 seconds or longer: Deletes all printing data 1. Pressing normally: Deletes printing data 2. Pressing for 2 seconds or longer: Deletes all printing data
Cancel Job
Invalid
(3)
Enters the printer information menu Enters the printer information menu in the panel setting mode in the panel setting mode Enters the printer information menu Enters the printer information menu in the panel setting mode in the panel setting mode Enters the printer information menu Enters the printer information menu in the panel setting mode in the panel setting mode
Invalid
1. When panel setting mode menu is displayed: Displays setting item 2. When setting item for non-execution is displayed: Displays setting value 3. When setting item for execution is displayed: Executes printing or processing 4. When setting value is displayed: Registers the setting value 1. When panel setting mode menu is displayed: Returns to normal mode 2. When setting item or setting value is displayed: Displays the previous higher rank in hierarchy 1. When panel setting mode menu is displayed: Displays the previous panel setting mode menu 2. When setting item is displayed: Displays previous setting item 3. When setting value is displayed: Displays previous setting value
(1)
Invalid
(2)
Invalid
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
40

Table 1-44. Summary of Button Functions
Button Name
(4)
Revision A
When Ready to Print
When Not Ready to Print
Error Has Occurred
In Panel Setting Mode

1. When panel setting mode menu is displayed: Displays the next panel setting mode menu 2. When setting item is displayed: Displays next setting item 3. When setting value is displayed: Displays next setting value
Enters the printer information menu Enters the printer information menu in the panel setting mode in the panel setting mode
Invalid
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
41
Revision A
1.16.2 Panel Settings List

The printer settings are listed below. NOTE: Underlined value in the Setting value column are factory default settings. Information Menu
Setting Status Sheet Reserve Job ListM*1 Setting Values Sample*6 E******F to E E******F to E E******F to E E******F to E E******F to E E******F to E E******F to E 0 to 99999999 F F F F F F F *6: *7: *8: Color B/W
Setting Pages*7 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999
Setting Values
Pages*7
Note *1: *2: *3: *4: *5:
Only displayed when print jobs are registered in the Quick Print Job. Only displayed and executable when there is any Form Overlay exists. Only displayed and executable when the "Network I/F=On". Only displayed when a level3-supported Type-B host interface is connected and turning the power on with "AUX I/F=On". Only displayed when a D4-compliant USB is connected and turning on the power with "USB I/F=On". Not displayed on the panel, only executable in EJL. Should not be exposed to users. This item is for display only and cannot be modified. Only displayed when the P5C module is installed.
Form Overlay List*2 NetworkStatus Sheet*3
Color Resist Sheet AUX Status Sheet*4 USB Ext I/FStatusSht*5
PS3 Status Sheet PS3 Font List ESC/Page Font
Tray Menu
Setting MP Tray Size LC1 Size*2 LC2 LC3 LC4 Size*1,*2 Size*1,*2 Size*1,*2 Setting Values A4*1, A5, B5, LT, HLT, LGL,GLT, GLG, EXE, F4, MON, C10, DL, C5, IB5 A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, GLG, EXE A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, GLG, EXE A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, GLG, EXE A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, GLG, EXE Plain, Letterhead, Recycled, Color, Transparency, Labels Plain, SemiThk, Letterhead, Recycled, Color Plain, SemiThk, Letterhead, Recycled, Color Plain, SemiThk, Letterhead, Recycled, Color Plain, SemiThk, Letterhead, Recycled, Color Displayed according to the installation status of the optional lower cassette. 550-sheet paper cassette is installed: displays up to LC2 1100-sheet paper cassette is installed: displays up to LC3
P5C Font Sample*8 ESCP2 Font Sample FX Font Sample 1239X Font Sample C M Y K Toner*7 Toner*7 Toner*7 Toner*7
MP Type LC1 Type LC2 Type LC3 Type LC4 Type Note *1:
Photocon*7 Transfer*7 Fuser*7 Total Pages*7
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
42

550-sheet paper cassette and 1100-sheet paper cassette are installed: displays up to LC4 (For details, refer to Controller Configuration (p.37).) *2: This item is for display only and cannot be modified. *2: *3: Not valid for P5C.
Revision A
Eco is not displayed on the panel, only settable in EJL. Should not be exposed to users.
Emulation Menu
Setting Parallel USB Network AUX*2 Note *1: *2: Setting Values Auto, ESCP2, FX, I239X, PS3, P5C*1 Auto, ESCP2, FX, I239X, PS3, P5C*1 Auto, ESCP2, FX, I239X, PS3, P5C*1 Auto, ESCP2, FX, I239X, PS3, P5C*1 Only displayed and executable when the P5C ROM module is installed Only displayed and executable when the Type-B interface is installed
Printing Menu
Setting Page Size Wide A4 Orientation Resolution RITech Toner Save Image Optimum*2 Top Offset Left Offset T Offset B L Offset B Note *1: Setting Values A4, A5, B5, LT, HLT, LGL, GLT, GLG, EXE, F4, MON, C10, DL, C5, C6, IB5, CTM*1 Off, On Port, Land 300, 600, 1200*2 On, Off Off, On, Eco*3 Auto, Off, On -99.0 to 0.0 to 99.0mm step 0.5mm -99.0 to 0.0 to 99.0mm step 0.5mm -99.0 to 0.0 to 99.0mm step 0.5mm -99.0 to 0.0 to 99.0mm step 0.5mm Paper size (width x length) for CTM (custom) are min. 88.9 x 139.7mm and max. 220 x 900mm. Max. 220 x 355.6 is displayed on the printer driver. Except service warranty for the paper width is up to 207.9mm.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
43
Revision A
Setup Menu
Page Setting Lang Langue Sprache Lingua IDIOMA SPRK Sprog Taal Kieli Lng. SPRK Englishv Franais Deutsch Italiano ESPAOL SVENSKA Dansk Neder lands SUOMI Portugus Norsk Setting Values
Setting Protect*6 Auto, On 0 to 8 to 15 Off, On
Setting Values
LCD Contrast Panel Lock*5
Note *1:
Displayed according to the installation status of the optional lower cassette. 550-sheet paper cassette is installed: displays up to LC2 1100-sheet paper cassette is installed: displays up to LC3 550-sheet paper cassette and 1100-sheet paper cassette are installed: displays up to LC4 Not displayed on the panel, only executable in EJL and PJL. Not saved in the EEPROM. Duplex printing is only available for A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, EXE, and GLG sized papers. Simplex printing is available for other sizes of papers. Valid for ESC/Page, ESC/P2, FX, 1239X. Not displayed on the panel or printed on the status sheet. Settable in EJL and EpsonNet WebAssist, etc. Not valid for P5C. Supports the STANDBYTIME command (nonpublic) of EJL. The default setting is 60 minutes.
*2: *3: *4: *5: *6:
Time To
Sleep*7
5, 15, 30, 60 , 120, 180, 240 Min 0, 5 to 60 to 300 step 1 Auto, MP, LC1, LC2*1, LC3*1, LC4*1 Normal, Last Off, 1st Page, EachPage 1 to 999 1 to 999 Off, On Long Edge, Short Edge Front, Back Normal, SemiThk, Thick, ExtraThk, Transparency Front, Back
*7:
Time Out Paper Source MP mode Manual Feed Copies Quantity*2 Duplex*3 Binding Start Page Paper Type Page Side Skip Blank Page*4,*6
Color Regist Menu

Setting Cyan Regist*1 Magenta Regist*1 Yellow Regist*1 Note *1: -36 to 0 to 36 step 1 -36 to 0 to 36 step 1 -36 to 0 to 36 step 1 Setting Values
Setting values are saved on the engine controller at the next printing, and the panel display returns to "0".
Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On
Auto Eject Page Size Ignore Auto Cont
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
44
Revision A
Reset Menu
Setting Clear Warning Clear All Warnings Reset Reset All SelecType Init Setting Values
Confidential Job Menu*1

Setting User Enter Job*3 Copies*4 Delete*4, *5 Note *1: *2: Not displayed when Confidential Job is not registered. To display this item, select Value (User name) and press Enter. Use 1 (Back), 2 (Up), 3 (Enter), and 4 (Down) buttons to enter the password. Enter the password while Enter Password is displayed. If there is a print job that matches the password, this item will be displayed. To display, select, and execute this item, select Value (Job name) and press Enter while the job is displayed. After the execution, the printer will cancel the SelecType mode. Returns to Job display after executing Delete and returns to User display if all the jobs are completed. The printer will cancel the SelecType mode if there is no user. Password*2 xxxxxxxxxxxxxx XXXX xxxxxxxxxxxxxx 1 to 999 Setting Values
Quick Print Job
Menu*1
*3: Setting Values xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 1 to 999 *5:
Setting User Job*2 Copies*3 Delete*3, *4 Note *1: *2: *3:
*4:
Not displayed when none of the Verify job, Re-print job, or Stored job are registered. To display this item, select Value (User name) and press Enter while the user is displayed. To display, select, and execute this item, select Value (Job name) and press Enter while the job is displayed. After the execution, the printer will cancel the SelecType mode. Returns to Job display after executing Delete and returns to User display if all the jobs are completed. The printer will cancel the SelecType mode if there is no user.
Parallel Menu*1
Setting Parallel I/F Speed Bi-D Buffer Size Note *1: On, Off Fast, Normal Nibble, ECP, Off Normal, Maximum, Minimum Setting Values
*4:
After this item is changed, the setting value takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned on again. While it is reflected immediately in the Status Sheet and EJL read-back, the actual change takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned on again.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
45
Revision A
USB Menu
Setting USB USB I/F*1 Speed*1 On, Off HS, FS No, Yes Panel, Auto, PING 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 On, Off On, Off On, Off On, Off Setting Values
Network Menu*1
Setting Network I/F*1 On, Off No, Yes Panel, Auto, PING 0.0.0.0 to 192.168.192.168 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.0 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 to 255.255.255.255 On, Off On, Off On, Off On, Off Auto, 100 Full, 100 Half, 10 Full, 10 Half Normal, Maximum, Minimum Network Config*2 Get IPAddress*2 IP*2*3 SM*2 GW*2 NetWare*2 AppleTalk*2 MS Network*2 Rendezvous*2 Link Speed*2 Buffer Size Normal, Maximum, Minimum Note *1: Setting Values
USB ExtI/FConfg*2 Get IPAddress*3 IP*3, *4, *5 SM*3 GW*3 NetWare*3 AppleTalk*3 MS Network*3 Rendezvous*3 USB Ext I/F Init*3 Buffer Size*1 Note *1:
After this item is changed, the setting value takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned on again. While it is reflected immediately in the Status Sheet and EJL read-back, the actual change takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned on again. Displayed only when the D4 support USB external device is connected. Changed to USB Config=No automatically when the panel setting mode is finished. Displayed only when the D4 support USB external device is connected, and USB external device=Yes. Content of the setting depends on the USB external device settings. The actual valid value is displayed (but cannot be changed) when Get IPAddress = Auto. When Panel or PING is changed to Auto in the IP address setting, the printer stores the previous setting value, which had been set in the Panel or PING. The stored value will be displayed when returning to Panel or PING. The printer displays 192.168.192.168 if the settings are not made from the panel.
*2: *3:
*2: *3:
After this item is changed, the setting value takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned on again. While it is reflected immediately in the Status Sheet and EJL read-back, the actual change takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned on again. Displayed only when Network Config=Yes. (Except these information can be printed on the status sheet regardless of the settings of I/F or Config.) The actual valid value is displayed (but cannot be changed) when Get IPAddress = Auto. When Panel or PING is changed to Auto in the IP address setting, the printer stores the previous setting value, which had been set in the Panel or PING. The stored value will be displayed when returning to Panel or PING.
*4: *5:
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
46

AUX menu*1, *2
Setting AUX I/F AUX Config*3 Get IPAddress*3,*4 IP*3, *4, *5 SM*3, *4 GW*3,*4 NetWare*3,*4 AppleTalk*3,*4 MS Network*3,*4 Rendezvous*3, *4,*6 AUX Init*3,*4 Buffer Size Note *1: Normal, Maximum, Minimum On, Off No, Yes Panel, Auto, PING 0.0.0.0 to 192.168.192.168 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 to 192.168.192.168 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 to 192.168.192.168 to 255.255.255.255 On, Off On, Off On, Off On, Off Setting Values Auto CR Auto FF CR Function LF Function FF Function Error Code Avoid Error PGI TriColorSpace CM Media Type Process Mode Note *1:
Revision A
ESC/Page menu*1
Setting On, Off On, Off CR, CR+LF CR+LF, LF CR+FF, FF Ignore, Space Off, On On, Off Normal, sRGB Off, Opt1, Opt2 1, 2 Setting Values
Not displayed on the panel or the status sheet, only executable in EJL
After this item is changed, the setting value takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned on again. While it is reflected immediately in the Status Sheet and EJL read-back, the actual change takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned on again. Displayed only when the Type-B host interface is installed. Only displayed, selectable, and executable when the Type-B host interface is installed. The mode automatically returns to "AUX Config = No" when the printer status is switched to Online. Only displayed, selectable, and executable when "AUX Config = Yes". The setting value switches to the Online status and becomes valid when the network card restarts. Therefore, when changing the setting value, if the "AUX status sheet" of the test print menu is executed before recovering from the panel setting mode, the previous setting value before the change will be printed. The actual valid value is displayed (but cannot be changed) when "Get IP Address = Auto". When "Panel" or "PING" is changed to "Auto" in the IP address setting, the printer stores the previous setting value, which had been set in the "Panel" or "PING". The stored value will be displayed when returning to "Panel" or "PING". Can be displayed and settable when Rendezvous support Type-B is installed.
*2: *3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
47

*4: *5:
Revision A
If the A4/LT configuration is set to LT, the default should be 60. If the configuration is set to A4, the default should be 64. Only displayed when the P5C ROM module is installed.
P5C menu*5
Setting FontSource Font Number Pitch*3 Height*3 Setting Values Resident, Download*1, ROM A*2 0 to available (Max 65535) 0.44 to 10.00 to 99.99 cpi step 0.01cpi 4.00 to 12.00 to 999.75 pt step 0.25 pt IBM-US, ECM94-1, 8859-10ISO, IBM-DN, PcTk437, WiAnsi, WiBALT, VeInternati, Math-8, PiFont, ANSI ASCII, Spanish, French2, Hebrew7, Arabic8, Pc866Cyr, ISOCyr, WinGrk, Pc862Heb, Roman-8, 8859-2 ISO, 8859-15ISO, PcMultiling, PcEur858, WiE.Europe, DeskTop, VeUS, PsMath, Legal, Swedis2, German, Windows, 8859-8 ISO, OCR A, Pc866Ukr, Pc8Grk, ISOGrk, Pc864Ara, Roman-9, 8859-9 ISO, PcBlt775, PcE.Europe, Pc1004, WiTurkish, PsText, MsPublishin, VeMath, UK, Italian, Norweg1, McText, Hebrew8, OCR B, WinCyr, Pc851Grk, Greek8, HPWARA
PS3 menu
Setting Error Sheet Coloration Image Protect Binary Off, On Color, Mono Off, On Off, On Setting Values
SymSet
Form CR Function LF Function Tray Assign Note *1: *2: *3:
5 to 60*4 to 64*4 to 128 Lines CR, CR+LF LF, CR+LF 4, 4K, 5S
Only displayed when there is download fonts exist. Only displayed when an optional font is inserted to the ROM socket. Either of them is displayed depending on the selected font type. "Pitch" is displayed if a fixed pitch font is selected and if a proportional font is selected, "Height" is displayed. Neither of them is displayed if a bitmap font is selected. There may be rare occasions that both "Pitch" and "Height" appears at a time. (Changing the Font Source or the Font Number when PCL5 is not running internally will lead to such occasion.)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
48
Revision A
ESCP2 menu
Setting Font Pitch Condensed T.Margin Text Setting Values Courier, Prestige, Roman, Sans serif, Roman T, Orator S, Sans H, Script, OCR A, OCR B 10cpi, 12cpi, 15cpi, Prop. Off, On 0.40 to 0.50 to 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch 1 to 66 to available (Max: 132) Lines PcUSA, PcCanFrenc, PcE.Europe, PcEur858, PcTurkish1, PcGk437, PcCy855, Bulgarian, PcAr864, PcAr864Ara, ISO Latin2, Italic, PcNordic, BpBRASCII, ISO Latin1, 8859-9 ISO, PcGk851, PcCy866, Hebrew7, PcAr720, PcLat866 PcMultilin, PcTurkish2, BpAbicomp, 8859-15ISO, Mazowia, PcGk869, PcUkr866, Hebrew8, PcLit774, PcPortugue, PcIcelandic, Roman-8, PcSl437, CodeMJK, 8859-7 ISO, PcLit771, PcHe862, Estonia,
FX menu
Setting Font Pitch Condensed T.Margin Text Setting Values Courier, Prestige, Roman, Sans serif, Script, Orator S, OCR A, OCR B 10cpi, 12cpi, 15cpi, Prop. Off, On 0.40 to 0.50 to 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch 1 to 66 to available (Max: 132) Lines PcUSA, PcPortugue, PcTurkish2, BpBRASCII, PcEur858, Italic, PcCanFrenc, PcIcelandic, BpAbicomp, ISO Latin1, PcMultilin, PcNordic, PcE.Europe, Roman-8, 8859-15ISO
CGTable
CGTable
Country Auto CR Auto LF Bit Image Zero Char
USA, France, Germany, UK, Denmark, Sweden, Italy, Spain1, Japan, Norway, Denmark2, Spain2, LatinAmeric On, Off Off, On Dark, Light, Bar Code 0,
Country Auto CR Auto LF Bit Image Zero Char
USA, France, Germany, UK, Denmark, Sweden, Italy, Spain1, Japan, Norway, Denmark2, Spain2, LatinAmeric, Korea, Legal On, Off Off, On Dark, Light, Bar Code 0,
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
49
Revision A
1239X menu
Setting Font Pitch Code Page T.Margin Text Auto CR Auto LF Alt. Graphics Bit Image ZeroChar CharacterSet Setting Values Courier, Prestige, Gothic, Orator, Script, Presentor, Sans serif 10cpi, 12cpi, 15cpi, 17cpi, 20cpi, 24cpi, Prop. 437, 850, 858, 860, 863, 865 0.30 to 0.40 to 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch 1 to 67 to available (Max: 132) Lines Off, On Off, On Off, On Dark, Light 0, 1, 2
Printer Adjust Menu*1 This menu should not be disclosed to users.
Support Menu*1 This menu should not be disclosed to users.

Setting HDD Format*2 Auto, On, Off PS3 HDD Init*2 LCD Backlight*3 Note *1: *2: *3: Only displayed when the Support Mode has been selected by a special operation at power-on. Can be displayed and executable when the HDD is installed. The capacity of the area that can be used for PS3 is 2GB. Cannot be set in EJL or MIB. Setting Values
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
50
Revision A
Setting Dev Cleaning*2 *3 Normal SemiThk BTR Normal*2 BTR Label*2 BTR Thick*2 BTR ExtraThk*2 BTR Transparency*2 BTR Envelope*2 BTR SemiThk*2 BTR Coated*2 Temp Normal*2 Temp Label*2 Temp Temp Temp Temp Thick*2 ExtraThk*2 Envelope*2 Coated*2 Mask*2 Cycle*2 0 to 1 step 1 0 to 2 step 1 -20 to 0 to 30 Step 1 -20 to 0 to 30 Step 1 -20 to 0 to 30 Step 1 -20 to 0 to 30 Step 1 -20 to 0 to 30 Step 1 -20 to 0 to 30 Step 1 -20 to 0 to 30 Step 1 -20 to 0 to 30 Step 1 -6 to 0 to 6 Step 1 -6 to 0 to 6 Step 1 -6 to 0 to 6 Step 1 -6 to 0 to 6 Step 1 -6 to 0 to 6 Step 1 -6 to 0 to 6 Step 1 -6 to 0 to 6 Step 1 -6 to 0 to 6 Step 1 0 to 1 step 1 0, 5, 10, 15 sec Step 5 -5 to 0 to 5 Step 1 -3.5 to 0.0 to 3.5 mm -3.5 to 0.0 to 3.5 mm -3.5 to 0.0 to 3.5 mm -3.5 to 0.0 to 3.5 mm
Setting Values
Maintenance Menu*1
Setting Engine Status Print Log Sheet*2 Setting Values
Report*2 Counter*2 Counter*2 Counter*2 Counter*2
Reset C Dev Reset M Dev Reset Y Dev Reset K Dev Reset
TransferCounter*2 Log*2
Clear Error Note *1:
Displayed only when the Maintenance Mode has been selected by a special operation at power-on. Always displayed in English regardless of the Lang setting of the Setup menu Exits the panel setting after the execution.
*2:
Temp Transparency*2 Temp SemiThk*2 Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Wait*2 Feed Offset Scan Offset Feed Offset2 Scan Offset2 Note *1:
Displayed only when the Support Mode has been selected by a special operation at power-on. Items within this menu are not localized. While activating this menu, do not open/close the covers as that leads to an error. Also, print data should not be sent. Setup and execution in error status is invalid. Exits the panel setting after the execution.
*2: *3:
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
51
Revision A
USER SETTING ITEMS OTHER THAN IN THE SETTING MENU The following is a list of user settings not included in the Setup menu. Initialization by the Initialization menu of the Panel does not clear these items.
Item Printer Name MFG in the Device ID MDL in the Device ID DES in the Device ID CID in the Device ID Setting Value 32-byte character string 32-byte character string 32-byte character string 32-byte character string 32-byte character string Default Short Product Name (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) Setting Method EJL, PrinterName command EJL EJL EJL EJL
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
52
Revision A
Photocon/Transfer/Fuser Life cycle of Photoconductor unit (Transfer unit/Fuser unit) is displayed in 7 increments. (Display only, especially for read-only.)
E * * * * * * F E * * * * * F E * * * * E * * * E * * E * E F F F F F : : : : : : : 100 % life of photoconductor unit 83% 83 % life of photoconductor unit 66% 66 % life of photoconductor unit 50% 50 % life of photoconductor unit 33% 33 % life of photoconductor unit 16% 16 % life of photoconductor unit 0% life of photoconductor unit = 0%
1.16.3 Explanation of Menu and Settings

The following are items specific to this printer. Information Menu Color Regist Sheet This executes Color Regist Sheet (press the Enter button) and prints the sheet for adjusting registration of each color (C, M, Y, K). Set the value of this result where each color is the darkest or, where black and each color are in a line to Yellow Regist, Magenta Regist, and Cyan Regist. Setting value of each Yellow Regist, Magenta Regist, Cyan Regist returns to 0 at the next printout after it is restored on controller. (Refer to Ch5 Color registration alignment for details.) C, M, Y, K Toner Indicates remaining amount of C (cyan), M (magenta), Y (yellow), K (black) in 7 increments. (Display only, especially for read-only.)
E * * * * * * F E * * * * * E * * * * E * * * E * * E * E F F F F F F : : : : : : : 100 % Remaining Toner 83% 83 % Remaining Toner 66% 66 % Remaining Toner 50% 50 % Remaining Toner 33% 33 % Remaining Toner 16% 16 % Remaining Toner Remaining Toner = 0% 0%
Total Pages Displays the number of sheets printed up to now (display only). Color Pages Displays the number of sheets printed in color up to now (display only). B/W Pages Displays the number of sheets printed in monochrome up to now (display only).
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
53
Revision A
Tray Menu MP Type, LC1 Type, LC2 Type, LC3 Type, LC4 Type This menu specifies the type of paper loaded in the MP Tray, LC1, 2, 3, 4 cassettes.
Paper Type Setting Value Plain SemiThk Letterhead Recycled Color Contents of Setting Engine Control Applicable Tray MP, LC1, LC2, LC3, LC4 MP, LC1, LC2, LC3, LC4 MP, LC1, LC2, LC3, LC4 MP, LC1, LC2, LC3, LC4 MP, LC1, LC2, LC3, LC4 MP MP
Table 1-45. Paper Type Display and Command Specification of Driver

Command PaperType PapaerTray EJL EJL display of driver PAPERTHICKNE PAPERFACE SS Unspecified Plain Letterhead Recycled Color Transparency Labels Semi-Thick Thick Extra Thick Extra Thick (Back) Auto only Auto only Auto only Auto only MP only MP only MP only MP only NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL THICK HIGHQUALITY THICK EXTRATHICK EXTRATHICK COATED FRONT BACK <GS>n1ptE N1: 0 Unspecified N1: 1 Plain N1: 3 Letterhead N1: 6 Recycled N1: 7 Color N1: 8 OHP N1: 9 Labels N1: 10 HighQuality N1: 0 Unspecified N1: 0 Unspecified N1: 0 Unspecified N1: 0 Unspecified
Plain Paper (copy paper etc.) Plain paper EPSON Color Laser Paper Letter form Recycled paper Color paper Plain paper Plain paper Plain paper Plain paper OHP (half-speed) Label paper (half-speed)
TRANSPARENCY
Transparency OHP transparency Labels Label paper
Paper Size Envelopes HLT, GLT, F4, CTM ---
Paper Type MP tray
Paper Source
Engine Control For Envelopes Follows MP type setting Follows paper type setting
Coated
Normal MP tray Other than Normal Auto; selects the paper source that matches the specified paper size from the paper sources where the paper type specified by the mode matches the setting value for each tray as shown in the above table. MP, LC1, LC2, LC3, LC4; selects the specified paper source ExtraThk, Transparency MP tray
A4, LC1, LC2, LC3, LC4
Normal
Follows paper type setting
Follows paper type setting Follows paper type setting
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
54
Revision A
Setup Menu Paper Source Selects the paper source when Paper Type = Normal. Auto: Feeds paper from the paper source that loads paper of the specified paper type and paper size. MP: Feeds paper from the MP Tray. LC1: Feeds paper from the LC1. LC2: Feeds paper from the LC2. LC3: Feeds paper from the LC3. LC4: Feeds paper from LC4. When Page Size is set to envelopes (IB5, DL), HTL, GLT and F4, Paper Source always selects the MP Tray. When Paper Type = Thick, ExtraThk, Transparency, Paper Source is always set to the MP Tray. Paper Type This sets the printing speed and color matching (CM). Refer to 1.24 Paper Handling Algorithm (p79). Page Side Front: Back: For printing on the front side of ExtraThk paper. For printing on the back side of ExtraThk paper.
Reset Menu SelecType Init This function returns the panel setting values to the factory default. However, the following panel setting values are not initialized. Setting values of Yellow Regist, Magenta Regist, and Cyan Regist
PS3 Menu Binary Specifies the data format. Applies to received data from internal, AUX, and USB interface. On: Binary data Off: ASCII data
Note : The settings should be as follows to use Binary data. : Error Sheet = Off : Job Management = Off : Not add Ctrl-D (04h) at the end of a job
Color Regist Menu Cyan/Magenta/Yellow Regist This menu is provided to manually adjust the laser scanning position of each color in relation to the position of Black in 1/4-dot unit of 600 dpi. The adjustment is made when primarily locating the main unit and when moving it. Additionally the adjustment is performed if required. The value can be set from -36 to 36 in 1/unit. The setting becomes valid after pressing the [ ] button.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
55

BTR Transparency
Revision A
Printer Adjust Menu This setting menu is displayed and selectable only in the Support mode which is activated by a special operation at power-on. After the powers is turned off and then back on again, the Printer Adjust menu is removed from the menu. This setting is valid after power-on or a warm boot. If the setting is changed from its default value, the color is no longer guaranteed, but this is used during printing of special paper. Always use the normal mode (not Support mode), and make sure there is no enginerelated service call error. Then, enter the Support mode and perform the task. Dev Cleaning When each toner; C/ M/ Y are mixed, removes the debased toner to transfer unit from developer and supply fresh toner in developer. The cleaning cycle is performed in the order of C, M, and Y, and it takes about 135 seconds. Normal Set the paper type to inform for engine when printing with PaperType=Normal. 0: Type thin paper for domestic 1: Type thick paper for overseas Label Set the paper type to inform for engine when printing with PaperType=Label. 0: Type thin paper for domestic 1: Type thick paper for overseas BTR Normal Sets Transfer Current when printing with PaperType=Normal. This setting applies to both sides of paper that are selectable at Printer Adjust Menu- Normal. Can be set in -20 to 30 by 1Step. The electricity value changes 5% by a Step. The lightest printing result is -20, and darkest printing result is 30. BTR Label Sets Transfer Current to be used when printing with PaperType=Label. Same as normal BTR Thick Sets Transfer Current to be used when printing with PaperType=Thick. Same as normal BTR ExtraThk Sets Transfer Current to be used when printing with PaperType=ExtraThk. Same as normal
Sets Transfer Current to be used when printing with PaperType=Transparency. Same as normal BTR Envelope Sets Transfer Current to be used when printing with envelop size paper. Same as normal BTR SemiThk Sets Transfer Current to be used when printing with PaperType=SemiThk. This setting applies to both sides of paper that are selectable at Printer Adjust Menu- SemiThk. Same as normal BTR Coated Sets Transfer Current to be used when printing with PaperType=Coated. Same as normal Temp Normal Sets Fuser Temperature to be used when printing with PaperType=Nomal. Setting value applies for all Normal-L front/back and Normal-H front/back. Can be set in -6 to 6 by 1 Step. The electricity value changes 1C by a Step Lowest fixation is -6 Highest fixation is 6 Paper curls when the fixation is too high Temp Label Sets Fuser Temperature to be used when printing with PaperType=Label. Same as normal Temp Thick Sets Fuser Temperature to be used when printing with PaperType=Thick. Same as normal Temp ExtraThk Sets Fuser Temperature to be used when printing with PaperType=ExtraThk. Same as normal Temp Transparency Sets Fuser Temperature to be used when printing with PaperType=Transparency. Same as normal
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
56

Temp Envelope Sets Fuser Temperature to be used when printing with envelop size paper. Same as normal Temp SemiThk Sets Fuser Temperature to be used when printing with PaperType=SemiThk. This setting applies to both sides of paper that are selectable at Printer Adjust Menu- SemiThk. Same as normal Temp Coated Sets Fuser Temperature to be used when printing with PaperType=Coated. Same as normal Transfer Mask Masks the Transfer Current applied for the leading edge of paper to prevent the paper from wrapping around the Photoconductor. 0: Do not mask 1: Mask Cleaning Wait Sets a time interval in seconds to run a cleaning cycle between pages when performing a continuous printing. The printer waits for the next page data for the set time period with its motors ON. If the next page data is not ready for printing within the time period, the printer runs a cleaning cycle. During wait time, it consumes life of consumables. Normally, default (10 seconds) is enough. Changing the time may be required, with slow host environment and heavy job in usual. Saving life of consumables is possible by selecting an appropriate wait time to reduce total operating time. Cleaning Cycle Sets the variable which determines the time interval of the cleaning cycles. (5: +50%, ..., 0: 0%, ..., -5=-50%) Cleaning Cycle = specified value x (10+) /10 Specified value of cleaning cycle mutates by total print pages of the photoconductor unit as well as temperature and humidity. Ex.) When the total printed pages of the photoconductor unit is below 5120 sheets, at normal temperature and humidity.
Revision A
Setting Value 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5
Cleaning Cycle 48-sheets 43-sheets 38-sheets 33-sheets 28-sheets 24-sheets
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
57
Revision A
Maintenance Menu This setting menu is displayed and can be selected only when the Maintenance Mode has been activated by special operation when the power is turned on. To return the printer to normal mode, turn the printer off and back on in a normal manner. Basically, this menu is intended to be used by service personnel. If cover A or B remains open when the Maintenance Mode is entered, engine-related errors (including Calibrating Printer) do not occur. Engine Status Sheet Pressing the [ ] button starts printing the Engine Status Sheet. (See 9.2 Engine Status Sheet for details). If data remains in the mode, paper is output. Be sure to switch to the Maintenance Mode after confirming that there are no engine related service call in the normal mode (a mode that is not the Maintenance Mode), then execute. The sheet is printed with the current setting values of RITech, Toner Save and Resolution applied, while the factory default settings are used to the other settings. Even after printing, the User Default environment (setting) does not change. The LCD display blinks during printing. The Engine Status Sheet is always printed as Lang = English regardless of the Lang setting of the Setup Menu. Print Log Report Starts printing the print log sheet when the [ are the same as the Engine Status Sheet. Reset C/M/Y/K Dev Counter Resets the life counter of the developer unit of each color, and adds one to the number of the replacement. This operation should be performed by service personnel when the developer unit of each color is replaced. Reset TransferCounter Resets the life counter of the transfer unit, and adds one to the number of the replacement. This operation is not required when replacing the transfer unit after Worn Transfer Unit (warning) or Replace Transfer Unit (error) occurred. Perform this operation when replacing the transfer unit under the conditions not mentioned above. (The condition where neither warning nor error is occurred.) Clear Error Log Clears the Error Log List that is stored to be printed on the Engine Status Sheet. ] button is pressed. Other items
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
58
Revision A
1.16.4 Special Operations

LIST OF OPERATING FUNCTIONS The following is a list of the special operating functions supported by this printer. Do not make these functions (except Hex dump and support mode value initialization) available to users. Table 1-46. List of Operating Functions
Function Hex Dump Support Mode Initialization of EEPROM Panel Setting Value Initialization Forced Clear of the Flash ROM A Module Program ROM Update ROM Module Copy Maintenance Mode Engine Program Update RAM Check (all area) CPU reset in a Service Call occurrence Operating procedure Turn the power on pressing the [Start/Stop] button Turn the power on pressing the [ Turn the power on pressing the [ Stop] buttons ] button ], [Cancel Job], and [Start/
Turn the power on pressing the [Cancel Job] button Turn the power on pressing the [ [Cancel Job] buttons Turn the power on pressing the [ Stop] buttons ], [ ], [ ], and
], [Cancel Job], and [Start/
Turn the power on pressing the [Start/Stop], [Cancel Job], and ] buttons [ Turn the power on pressing the [ [ ] buttons ], [ ], [ ], and
Turn the power on pressing the [Start/Stop], [Cancel Job], [ ], and [ ] buttons Turn the power on pressing the [Start/Stop], [ ] buttons [ ], [ ], and
Press the [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [Cancel Job] buttons when a Service Call error occurs ], and [Cancel Job] buttons when a ], [ ], and [Cancel
Detailed Information Display Press the [ ], [ in a Service Call occurrence Service Call occurs Ignore EpsonNet ASP in HDD Printing of the Error Sheet
Turn the power on pressing the [ Job] buttons
Press the [ ] button after resetting the CPU when a Service Call error occurs
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel
59
Revision A
Table 1-47. List of Printer Messages
Display Sort Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error
*4 *4
1.17 Printer Status

1.17.1 List of Printer Messages
The following is a list of messages displayed by the printer. Each message is the one when Lang = English is set. Table 1-47. List of Printer Messages
Display (Display at power-on) Service Req Cffff Service Req Exxx Formatting HDD Optional RAM Error ROM CHECK RAM CHECK HDD CHECK Unable Clear Error Self Test Reset All Reset Cancel All Print Job Cancel Print Job Reset to Save LC3 Error 001 Check Transparency Paper Jam x x x x Face-down Full Wrong Toner uuuu NonGenuineToner uuuu TonerCart Error uuuu Sort Status Service call error Service call error*1 Error Status Status Status Status Status Status Status Status Status Status Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error LED status On (All LEDs simultaneously) On (All LEDs simultaneously) On On All flashing On On On Flashing 2 On Flashing 2 On 1004 1004 1003 1003 40001 4021 4234 4090 4237 4241 to 4255 4238 Status Code 6000 6001~6999 Help Install uuuu TnrCart Install Photoconductor Install Fuser Install Transfer Unit Clean Sensor Wrong Photoconductor Replace Toner uuuu
Error LED status On On On On On On On On On On On On On Flashing 2 Flashing 1 On Flashing 1 Flashing 1 Flashing 1 Flashing 1 Flashing 1 On On On On On On On
Status Code 4235 4235 4235 4235 4228 4237 4236 4236 4236 4239 4007 4007 4007 1013 3005 4010 3003 3000 3001 3004 3007 4202 4240 4201 4256 4014 4003 4006 4006
Help
Replace Photoconductor Replace Transfer Unit Printer Open Install LC1 Install LC2 Install LC3 Manual Feed sss *3 Can't Print Duplex Paper Out ttt Paper Set ttt Print Overrun Mem Overflow Duplex Mem Overflow Invalid Data Invalid HDD Invalid N/W Module Invalid PS3 Invalid P5C Invalid AUX I/F Card Invalid ROM A Write Error ROM A Write Error ROM P
*2 *2
sss sss
Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Printer Status
60

Display Writing ROM A nnn/mmm *6 Writing ROM P nnn/mmm *6 Menus Locked (Panel setting display) Reserve JobCanceled Hard Disk full Form Data Canceled PS3 Hard Disk full Can't Print Collate Disabled Check Paper Size Image Optimum Check Paper Type Need Memory Format Error ROM A Form Feed (When status sheet is being printed) Warming Up Calibrating Printer Offline Cancel Print Job (by host) uuuu Toner Low Worn Photoconductor Worn Fuser Worn Transfer Unit Worn uuuu Dev Unit Sleep NonGenuine Toner Ready Status Status Status Status Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Status Warning Status Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Status 2565 2569 2570 2561 2072 2013 2004 2002 2008 2003 2000 1008 1010 1006 1014 1001 1003 2571 2571 2571 2571 2571 1007 2571 1000 *6: *5: Sort Status Status Warning Error LED status Status Code 1005 1005 Help (Printing) Display
Revision A
Sort Status Error LED status Status Code 1009 1012 1002 Help
(Communication with inactive I/F) Status (Job being executed (printing OK)) Status
The above list are described in the order of descending priorities (the top item is the highest on the list of priorities).
Note *1: *2: *3: *4: See 1.17.3 Warning Messages and Troubleshooting (p63) for details. Displays relevant values of the paper source in the panel settings except Auto. Displays relevant values of the paper size in the panel settings. Displays relevant values of each paper feed size of the Tray menu in the panel settings. Bit allocations for warning status of consumables are as follows: bit 0 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 application Worn Photoconductor Worn Fuser Worn Transfer Unit K Toner Low C Toner Low M Toner Low Y Toner Low Worn K Dev Unit Worn C Dev Unit Worn M Dev Unit Worn Y Dev Unit NonGenuine Toner
nnn = the number of written blocks, mmm = total number of blocks
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Printer Status
61
Revision A
1.17.2 Status Messages and Troubleshooting

The following is the item specific to this printer. Calibrating Printer Explanation This message is one of the Ready messages and indicates that the engine adjustment is in progress. At power-on When adjusting Print Quality Remedy Wait for approximately ten seconds to three minutes until the printer recovers automatically. Do not open/close the cover or turn the power off during this time.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Printer Status
62
Revision A
1.17.3 Warning Messages and Troubleshooting

The following are items specific to this printer. uuuu Toner Low Explanation The remaining amount of each toner (C, M, Y, or K) is low. The remaining amount is calculated based on the remaining toner sensor of the engine, and displays the message when the amount is 20 % or less. The uuuu display, which corresponds to the C, M, Y, and K toner cartridges, indicates the cartridge with low toner. Remedy This warning message is canceled by performing any of the followings: Execute Clear All Warning in the Reset menu. Execute Reset in the Reset menu.
C A U T IO N
Worn Fuser Explanation The fuser unit comes to the end of life. The print quality is not guaranteed from this time. Remedy This warning message is canceled by performing any of the followings: Execute Clear All Warning in the Reset menu. Execute Reset in the Reset menu. Replace the Fuser with a new one.
C A U T IO N
Replace the fuser unit immediately.
Never replace the toner cartridge until uuuu Toner Out occurs, otherwise the remaining toner may spill out.
Worn Photoconductor Explanation The photoconductor unit comes to the end of life. The print quality is not guaranteed from this time. Remedy Printing can be continued until the Replace Photoconductor error appears, however, the print quality is not guaranteed from this time. This warning message is canceled by performing any of the followings: Execute Clear All Warning in the Reset menu. Execute Reset in the Reset menu. Replace the Photoconductor unit with a new one.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Printer Status
63
Revision A
Worn Transfer Unit Explanation The transfer unit comes to the end of life. The print quality is not guaranteed from this time.
C A U T IO N
NonGenuine Toner Explanation A non-genuine toner cartridge is installed. Printing can be continued. Remedy This warning message is canceled by performing any of the followings: Install genuine toner cartridge. Execute Clear All Warning in the Reset menu. Execute Reset in the Reset menu.
Note : If the cartridge is not replaced with genuine toner cartridge, same warning appears on the panel when the printer is restarted.
Be aware that performing borderless printing (printing of image data that exceeds the specified paper size) shortens the life of the transfer unit. Reason: The amount of waste toner increases.
Remedy This warning message is canceled by performing any of the followings: Execute Clear All Warning in the Reset menu. Execute Reset in the Reset menu. Replace the transfer unit with a new one.
Worn uuuu Dev Unit Explanation The developer unit (DEVE ASSY) comes to the end of life. The print quality is not guaranteed from this time. Remedy This warning message is canceled by performing any of the followings: Execute Clear All Warning in the Reset menu. Execute Reset in the Reset menu. Replace the developer unit with a new one and execute Reset Dev Counter in the Maintenance menu.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Printer Status
64
Revision A
Remedy
Paper Jam xxxx Paper Jam A B Remedy Open both cover A and B to remove the jammed paper (Fuser Jam). Open cover A to remove the jammed paper (Reg Jam). As necessary, open cover D and remove the Photoconductor unit to remove the jammed paper. Open both cassette C and cover A to remove the jammed paper (Feed jam). Open cover B to remove the jammed paper (Duplex jam). Open both cassette C and cover A to remove the jammed paper (Feed jam). Perform remedy for Fuser jam and Duplex jam if those paper jams are occurred at the same time.
1.17.4 Error Messages and Troubleshooting

The following are items specific to this printer. Check Transparency Explanation A paper jam has occurred in registration because media other than transparency was fed when transparency is specified, or transparency was fed when other than that is specified. Remedy Remove both the media already loaded in the MP tray and the media that is jammed inside the printer from the MP tray side. Open and close cover A. Load the correct media to start printing again from where the jam occurred.
Paper Jam A
Paper Jam C A Paper Jam B Paper Jam C A B
Install uuuu TnrCart Paper Jam xxxx Explanation A paper jam has occurred.
Engine Status Fuser Jam X (A B) X (A B) Note Reg Jam X (A) X (A) Feed Jam X (A C) X (A C) X (A C) Duplex Jam X (B) X (B) X (B) Paper Jam xxxx AB A CA B AB CAB CAB 4234 Status bit 1, 2 1 1, 3 2 1, 2 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3
Explanation One or more toner cartridges are not installed. The uuuu display, which corresponds to the C, M, Y, and K toner cartridges, indicates the cartridge that is not installed. This error also occurs when the new toner cartridge(s) is installed with the tape attached to it. Remedy Open the top cover to install the specified toner cartridge. Remove the toner cartridge if the tape is attached to it, reinstall the cartridge, and remove the tape.
Face-down Full Explanation When the face-down tray is detected as full, the printer stops printing. The paper that was being output when the error occurred is ejected to the tray. Remedy Remove papers on the face-down tray and press the [Start/Stop] button to resume printing.
X: Paper jam has occurred. : Paper jam not occurred. Paper jam can occur at two places at a time as described above. Preferential order of the display CAB Status code A: bit1, B: bit2, C: bti3
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Printer Status
65
Revision A
Install Photoconductor Explanation The photoconductor unit is not installed or not set correctly. Remedy Open cover A and then cover D to install the photoconductor unit. Closing those covers will automatically releases the error.
Clean Sensor Explanation The sensor window for calibrating the engine is contaminated. Remedy Open cover A, remove the transfer unit, and clean off the white plastic window attached to the backside. Closing cover A after reinstalling the transfer unit will automatically release the error. Refer to Chapter 6 Maintenance-Cleaning for details.
Install Fuser Explanation The fuser unit is not installed, not set correctly, or broken down. If Install Fuser and Service Req E101 occur at a time, only the Install Fuser error is displayed on the panel. Remedy Turn the power off and let stand at least 30 minutes. Open cover B, install the fuser unit correctly, and close cover B. The error should be cleared after power has been restored to the printer. If the error remains displayed on the panel, replace the fuser unit as it is malfunctioning or the unit may be the one for another models. Wrong Photoconductor Explanation Improper photoconductor unit is installed. Remedy Open both cover A and cover D to install the appropriate photoconductor unit. Closing cover A and cover D will automatically release the error.
Replace Toner uuuu Install Transfer Unit Explanation The Transfer unit is not installed. Remedy Open cover A and install the transfer unit. Closing cover A will automatically release the error. Explanation Printing is stopped as the remaining amount of toner is detected as low based on the toner-end sensor of each color of the engine and the dispense time of the toner. As printing in the Toner End status does not provide proper color reproductivity, this error is not released by pressing the Start/Stop button. The uuuu display, which corresponds to the C, M, Y, and K toner cartridges, indicates the cartridge with low toner. Remedy Replace the toner cartridge(s).
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Printer Status
66
Revision A
Replace Photoconductor Explanation The photoconductor unit has reached its end of life. Printing must be stopped in order not to damage the engine. Remedy Open cover A and then cover D to install new photoconductor unit. Closing those covers will automatically releases the error.
Wrong Toner uuuu (uuuu = C, M, Y, or K) Explanation The destination for one of the toner cartridges is set incorrectly. Remedy Reinstall the appropriate toner cartridges.
NonGenuine Toner uuuu (uuuu = C, M, Y, or K) Replace Transfer Unit Explanation The transfer unit comes to the end of life. Remedy Open cover A and replace the transfer unit with a new one. Closing cover A will automatically releases the error. Remedy Reinstalling the genuine toner cartridge or pressing Start/Stop button will release the error. If the error is released by the latter operation, the warning "Non Genuine Toner" will remain displayed. Explanation A non-genuine toner cartridge is installed.
TonerCart Error uuuu (uuuu = C, M, Y, or K) Printer Open Explanation Either cover A or cover B is open. Remedy Closing those covers will automatically releases the error. Explanation One or more of the toner cartridges (C, M, Y, or K) is malfunctioning. Remedy Reinstall the toner cartridge or replace the toner cartridge with a new one to release the error. Turn off the printer and then back on again if the error is not cleared.
INSTALL LC1, INSTALL LC2, INSTALL LC3 Explanation Printing from LC2, LC3, or LC4 cannot be performed because LC1, LC2, or LC3 is not installed correctly. Remedy Installing the cassette firmly will release the error.
LC3 Error 001 Explanation Several numbers of the optional 550-Sheet Paper Cassette Unit is detected. Remedy Turn the printer power off, and remove the second optional 550-Sheet Paper Cassette Unit.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Printer Status
67
Revision A
Table 1-48. List of Service Call Errors
Error Category Error Code C0017 C0081 C0082 C0083 C0084 C0085 C0086 C0087 C0088 C0089 C0090 C0091 C0092 C0093 C0094 Controllerrelated C0095 C0096 C0097 C0098 C0128 to C0254 C0255 C0256 C0257 C0258 C0800 C0998 C0999 C1002 C1010 C1020 C1021 Explanation CPU error (undefined interruption) CPU error (TLB modification exception) CPU error (TLB miss exception [Load/Fetch]) CPU error (TLB miss exception [Store]) CPU error (address error exception [Load/Fetch]) CPU error (address error exception [Store]) CPU error (bus error exception [Fetch]) CPU error (bus error exception [Load/Store]) CPU error (SYSCALL exception) CPU error (Break exception) CPU error (reserving command exception) CPU error (unused coprocessor exception) CPU error (FPU exception) CPU error (TLB exception) CPU error (XTLB exception) CPU error (cache exception) CPU error (Trap exception) CPU error (FPU exception) CPU error (watch exception) CPU error (undefined trap) CPU error (NMI exception) CPU error (divide by 0) CPU error (arithmetic overflow) CPU error (break occurrence) IPL error (controller defect) Engine communication error (only at power-on) Engine flash ROM has no program data Standard RAM error (standard size is undefined, etc.) Verification error RAM error (slot 0) RAM error (slot 1)
1.17.5 Service Call Error Messages

This section shows the service call error message of this printer. (For details, refer to Chapter3 TROUBLESHOOTING.) SERVICE CALL ERRORS Table 1-48. List of Service Call Errors
Error Category Error Code E100 E101 E102 E103 E104 E105 E106 E107 E201 E202 E203 Engine-related E204 E205 E206 E207 E208 E209 E210 E211 E212 E213 E214 E215 E998 ROS Failure Fuser Error NV-RAM Error CTD Sensor Error Fan Motor Error Motor Failure Firmware Error Environment sensor Error ___Y Development Unit Life Over 2 __M_ Development Unit Life Over 2 __MY Development Unit Life Over 2 _C__ Development Unit Life Over 2 _C_Y Development Unit Life Over 2 _CM_ Development Unit Life Over 2 _CMY Development Unit Life Over 2 K___ Development Unit Life Over 2 K__Y Development Unit Life Over 2 K_M_ Development Unit Life Over 2 K_MY Development Unit Life Over 2 KC__ Development Unit Life Over 2 KC_Y Development Unit Life Over 2 KCM_ Development Unit Life Over 2 KCMY Development Unit Life Over 2 Engine communication error Explanation
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Printer Status
68

Table 1-48. List of Service Call Errors
Error Category Error Code C1120 C1121 C1122 C1123 C1200 C1210 C1400 Controllerrelated C1500 C1550 C1600 C1610 C1700 C1702 C1800 C1999 C2000 Explanation ROM checksum error (bit 0 to 7) (program) ROM checksum error (bit 8 to 15) (program) ROM checksum error (bit 16 to 23) (program) ROM checksum error (bit 24 to 31) (program) EEPROM writing error EEPROM writing times limit Engine initialization error CCNV hardware error Initialization hardware error for SRAM for compression Video series hardware error (including PWM IC calibration error) Video series hardware error (VCNV error) Loopback test failure of the Network Board Network Board is not installed Illegal SPD Other hardware errors Software error
Revision A
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Printer Status
69
Revision A
1.18 Expanding the RAM

When the memory is insufficient, the printer displays the following error messages. Mem Overflow Image Optimum Need Memory Duplex Mem Overflow The following methods can be used to clear the errors. Set the resolution to 300 dpi. Reduce receive buffer size. Set unused interfaces to Not Use.
C H E C K P O IN T
To ensure a stable operation, add more memory.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Expanding the RAM
70
Revision A
1.19 Handling Precautions

Precautions When Turning Off the Power This printer includes internal, nonvolatile memory (EEPROM), which stores setting values important to operate the printer normally. If the power is cut off during writing to the nonvolatile memory, the panel settings return to its default, or a Service Call error may occur when turning the power back on. In addition, HDD can be connected to this printer. If the power is cut off during writing to the HDD, HDD error may occur as the values written to the HDD is not guaranteed. The printer is executing the writing when it is in the following conditions, so never turn the power off at those timings. From the time the power is turned on until the Ready LED lights up steadily When the Ready LED is flashing When the printer is printing (while the paper feed motor is operating) To stop printing, perform either Offline or Cancel job. When the Data LED is on or flashing Precautions for High Temperature Parts Since the fuser unit inside the printer becomes very hot, be sure not to touch it when opening the cover to remove jammed paper or for any other purposes.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Handling Precautions
71
Revision A
1.20 Status Sheet

An example of the printout of the Status Sheet is shown in the Figure 1-10 (p.75). The printout example is in the case where English is selected.
z
Name Transfer Unit Fuser Unit 120(110-120V)/220(220-240V)
Remaining Amount E******F E******F
Part Numbers 3022 3020/3021
C H E C K P O IN T
The language in which the Status Sheet is printed changes depending on the selected language. (The sheet is printed in English in 2-byte linguistic area in Asia.)
Prints printed date only when time set is synchronized. MMMM: Month DD: Day YYYY: Year HH: Hour MM: Minutes Network Menu The IP, SM, and GW addresses are printed only when GetIPAddress=Panel, but not when the value is Auto. If the setting value is changed, the IP address is printed in the next startup. (The IP address in operation is printed on the Network Status Sheet.) NetWare, AppleTalk, MS Network, Rendezvous, and Link Speed are printed. Information Describes Name (English only, 36-digit), Remaining Amount (10-digit), Warning (20-digit), and Model Number (30-digit) of consumables that can be replaced by the user. "Needed soon" is added when the amount reaches the level where a warning occurs.
Name Toner Cartridge Cyan Toner Cartridge Magenta Toner Cartridge Yellow Toner Cartridge Black Photoconductor Unit Remaining Amount E******F E******F E******F E******F E******F Part Numbers 0244 0243 0242 0245 1109
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Status Sheet
72

When options installed The Status Sheet shows the descriptions below: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. RAM DIMM: Type-B I/F: Memory size is added to Installed Memory and Available Memory. AUX is added to Installed Interface.
Revision A
Lower Cassette: Lower Cassette 2/3 is added to Other Options. HDD: P5C: Hard Disk xGB is added to Other Options. Displayed up to one decimal place. PC5 is added to Installed Emulation. Adds 5-digit Version separately by spaces in Firmware Revision. In the order as Installed Emulation.
Time to Sleep Sleep Mode = prints only by Enable Sleep Mode = dose not print by Disable.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Status Sheet
73
Revision A
THE LOWEST DESCRIPTION SECTION OF THE STATUS SHEET

Description IAddyme * Date of the firmware "*" appears when DIMM can be written "space" appears when DIMM cannot be written Color Look Up Table version "@xxxx" appears when the optional ROM CMTD is installed in expansion slot Engine controller version which is 10 digits number starts with MC (ex: Engine controller Ver.1.23.45, NVM Ver.0.67.89; MC1234506789) Explanation
Axxxx
MC3012030100
MCxxxxxxxxxx
Last five digits : NVM Version (Ver. 3.0.10.0) First five digits : MCU Version (Ver. 3.0.12.0)
36PxxxxxxxxxxYMMDD USB serial number (Reference: See USB interface specifications (p38)) Latest USB connection Mode H: HS F: FS Space: no connection Latest USB connection Mode D: connected D4 supported device Space: D4 non supported device Type-B level 3: Type-B L3 Space: other than L3 When "e" = ECP, when "n" = Nibble, when " " = Compatibility
3 e
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Status Sheet
74
Revision A
Description JCxxxxxx
Explanation 6-digit number that starts with JC indicates the number of paper jam occurred before. 12-digit number that starts with IC indicates the number of the replacement of the toner cartridge; cccmmmyyykkk and 12digit number indicates the number of the recovery from the NonGenuine error. Those values are separated with a space. 3-digit number for each color (000-255)
ICcccmmmyyykkk CCCMMMYYYKKK
COLOR CALIBRATION DESCRIPTION NOTE: This function is implemented in the service utility. This indicates G: Increase Gradation, D: Increase Definition, 1200: 1200dpi, 600: 600 dpi, and also means 600 dpi, and calibration data for Increase Gradation depending on combination, and is displayed only when calibration data are registered in the EEPROM. This indicates YYYY: Year, DD: Day, MMMM: Month, HH: Hour, and MM: Minute of the date and time when the calibration table is created.
Figure 1-10. Status Sheet
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Status Sheet
75
Revision A
1.21 Engine Status Sheet/Print Log Report

C A U T IO N
Do not disclose this information to users.
It can be output from the Maintenance Menu. For details, refer to Chapter6 MAINTENANCE for the Engine Status Sheet/Print Log Report.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Engine Status Sheet/Print Log Report
76
Revision A
1.22 Color Registration Sheet

This sheet is for checking the amount of differences between Black and Yellow/ Magenta/Cyan in the laser scanning direction (vertical direction and paper feed direction). Differential amount of each color with Black is quantitatively measured according to overlap ratio of the cyclic Black pattern and the cyclic Yellow/Magenta/ Cyan pattern where the cycle is different from that of Black.
Feeding direction
Figure 1-11. Color Registration Sheet
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Color Registration Sheet
77
Revision A
1.23 Form Overlay List

The following shows the sample of Form Overlay List. The color information (color or monochrome) of Form that is registered in the last row will be added to all the models that follows the AcuLaser C4200.
EPSON
Name Form1 Form2 Form3
AL-C4200
Comment A4 Portrait 600dpi A4 Lanscape 300dpi A4 Portrait Test Date Nov 07 Nov 31 Dec 31 Mode Color Mono Color
Figure 1-12. Form Overlay List
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Form Overlay List
78
Revision A
1.24 Paper Handling Algorithm

The relationship between paper type and size is shown below ENGINE CONTROL, CM
.
Table 1-49. Engine control, CM

Page Size Envelope*1 PaperType EJL PAPER FACE Paper Source Paper Type (set by driver) MP or LC1-4 Type*2 Plain Letterhead Recycled Color Transparency Labels Engine Control (Video Media TypeType, Gloss*3) Envelope (06h, H) Plain Paper L (00h, N) Plain Paper H (01h, N) Transparency (PPM Dpwn) (0Fh, S) Label H (0Ah, S) Plain Paper L (00h, N) Plain Paper H (01h, N) Plain Paper L (00h, N) Plain Paper H (01h, N) Plain Paper L (00h, H) Plain Paper L (01h, S) Plain Paper H (PPM Down) (0Eh, S) Label H (0Ah, S) Heavier Paper-L (04h, H) Heavier Paper-H (05h, S) Transparency(PPM Down) (0Fh, S) CM Plain Paper Refer to P80, CM 1 Refer to P80, CM 1 Refer to P80, CM 1 Refer to P80, CM 2 Refer to P80, CM 2
Specified Auto Normal Not specified Other than Envelope SemiThk Other than Auto
Labels Other than labels
SemiThk
Plain Paper Plain Paper Plain Paper Plain Paper OHP
Thick ExtraThk Transparency
FRONT BACK
Note : For details on print speed, refer to 1.2.2 Printer Basic Specifications (p9). Note *1: *2: *3: DL, IB5 Type of paper set by the panel for the paper source where paper is actually fed N=Normal Gloss, H=High Gloss, S=Super High Gloss
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Paper Handling Algorithm
79
Revision A
Table 1-50. CM 1
CM Media Type MP or LC1-4 Type*1 CM Plain Letterhead Recycled Color Labels Transparency Option 1 Option 2 Note
PAPER SOURCE Table 1-52. Paper Source

Page Size Plain paper Envelope*1, CTM OHP Option 1 Option 2 Note *1: Paper Type ExtraThk Transparency Paper Feeder MP Tray MP Tray
Off
In cases not described in the table, the paper source is determined by Paper Source, paper type specified by driver (host), and algorithm provided by MP or LC1-4 Type.
Note : DL, IB5
:For details on print speed, refer to 1.2.2 Printer Basic Specifications (p9). Type of paper set by the panel for the paper source where paper is actually fed
Note *1:
DUPLEX Table 1-51. CM 2

CM Media Type Off Option 1 Option 2 CM Plain paper Option 1 Option 2 A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, EXE, GLG Page Size
Table 1-53. Duplex

Paper Type Normal Thick SemiThk Auto duplex Effective
Note : Duplex printing is not possible with paper other than the above.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Paper Handling Algorithm
80
CHAPTER
2
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
Revision A
2.1 Print Process

2.1.1 Print Process Overview
This printer is a full-color laser printer that uses the principle of electrophotographic recording. This printer uses a tandem-type engine that equips exclusive drums and developer units for each Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black (abbreviated to Y, M, C, and K), and prints images in full color by laying images of four colors on papers through the three intermediate drum transfers (IDT1 x 2, IDT2 x 1).
Drum (Y) Drum (M) Drum (C) Drum (K)
(1) Charging
(1) Charging
(1) Charging
(1) Charging
(2) Exposure
(2) Exposure
(2) Exposure
(2) Exposure
(3) Development
(3) Development
(3) Development
(3) Development
The major steps of the print process are described below. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) Charging Exposure Development Primary transfer Secondary transfer Cleaning Third transfer Cleaning Discharging : The drum surface is charged. : Image areas are exposed on the drum by a laser beam. : Image areas on the drum are developed with toner. : The toner image on the drum is transferred to the IDT1 (Intermediate Transfer Drum). : The toner image on the the IDT1 is transferred to the IDT2. : The IDT1 is cleaned. : The 4-color complete toner image on the IDT2 is transferred to the paper. : The IDT2 is cleaned. : The electrical charge of the paper is removed. : Toner on the paper is fixed with heat and pressure. : Remnants of toner on the drums and the intermediate drum transfers are removed.
Paper (9) Discharging BTR (4) Primary transfer (Drum IDT1)
Intermediate Transfer Drum (IDT1)
(4) Primary transfer (Drum IDT1)

(6) Cleaning (IDT1)
(6) Cleaning (IDT1)
(5) Secondary transfer (IDT1 IDT2)

(8) Cleaning (IDT2) (7) Third transfer (IDT2 Paper)
(11)Cleaning
(Entirely)
(10) Fusing (11) Cleaning
(10) Fusing engine principle0001FA
Figure 2-1. Print Process Overview
Print Process
82
Revision A
2.1.2 Print Process Diagram

The diagram below illustrates the entire print process. Most of the main parts involved with printing process are integrated into the PHD ASSY and the FRAME ASSY DEVE. The diagram below shows their configuration.
Laser beam Paper feed
Figure 2-3. PHD ASSY and FRAME ASSY DEVE

Ida_Sec06_014GA
Figure 2-2. Print Process Diagram
Print Process
83
Revision A
2.1.3 Technical Explanation of Print Process

2.1.3.1 Charging
At the Charging process, RTC (Rubber Tube Charger) applies a uniform negative potential to the drum which rotates at a fixed speed. This process is performed simultaneously for each of the yellow, magenta, cyan and black colors. The RTC is a conductive roller and keeps contact with the drum to move together with it. The HVPS supplies discharge voltages to the RTC, and then RTC discharges negative DC voltage. The drum surface is uniformly charged to a negative potential with DC bias voltage. The Drum surface is made of conductive material coated with a photosensitive material that becomes insulating in darkness and becomes conductive when it is subjected to light. The Refresher is a conductive brush and is negatively charged by negative DC voltages sent from the HVPS. It attracts positively charged toner on the drum, which is transferred back to the drum from the IDT. The Refresher also works to eliminate discharge products.
HVPS Refresher RTC
+ + +
Photosensitive Material Conductive Material
Drum
engine principle0004FB
Drum Surface
Drum Surface Potential
engine principle0006FA engine principle0005FA
Figure 2-4. Charging Process
Print Process
84
Revision A
charge on the drum flows to the positive side, and the potential on the surface of the drum is reduced in the result. The section of the drum surface where the potential has reduced becomes the electrostatic latent image.
ROS ASSY
2.1.3.2 Exposure
At the Exposure process, a laser beam is applied to the negatively charged surface of the drum to form an invisible electrostatic latent image onto the drum. This process is performed simultaneously for each of the yellow, magenta, cyan and black colors. The laser beams for each color emitted from laser diodes in the ROS ASSY are directed by the rotating polygon mirror, fixed mirrors and lenses, which are attached to the Scanner Motor Assy in the ROS ASSY to scan across each drum surface from side to side.
: Laser Beam (Y) : Laser Beam (M) : Laser Beam (C) : Laser Beam (K)
:Negative Charge :Positive Charge
Photosensitive Material (Laser beam) Conductive Material Drum Surface Drum
Mirror Mirror Mirror Drum (Y)
Laser Beam
Polygon Mirror Quad Beam Laser Diode Lens
Mirror Lens
Drum (M)
engine principle0008FA
Electrostatic latent image

Leg_Sec06_011FA
Drum (C) Mirror Drum (K)
Conceptual Diagram on the Drum Laser Beam Electrostatic latent image
Mirror Mirror Mirror Mirror

Photosensitive Material
Drum Surface Potential Laser Beam
-V
Conductive Material
0
Leg_Sec06_010FA
Figure 2-5. Path followed by the Laser Beam
Leg_Sec06_012FA
Figure 2-6. Exposure Process The laser beam is irradiated according to the print data (image data) from the printer controller. The laser beam is output only when a pixel data (minute dot composing the print data) exists. (On parts to be developed by toner, the laser diode turns ON, and on parts not to be developed, the laser diode turns OFF.) The drum surface irradiated by the laser beam becomes a conductor, the negative
Print Process
85
Revision A
2.1.3.3 Development
At the Development process, toner is electrically applied to the invisible electrostatic latent image on the drum, to form a visible image on it. This process is performed simultaneously for each of the yellow, magenta, cyan and black colors. Toner in the Toner Cartridge is stirred by an Agitator, and is supplied to the DISPENSER ASSY. Then the toner is transferred to the tube that connects the DISPENSER ASSY and the DEVE ASSY by the Auger in the assy., and then reaches to the DEVE ASSY by the Auger in the tube. The Agitator and Augers are spiral-shaped stirrers driven by the toner motor at the rear of the Toner Cartridge. The amount of toner transferred to the DEVE ASSY is calculated based on the number of prints. This is called toner dispense and performed using two types of control (PCDC and ADC) in combination. Refer to 2.8.4 Process Control (p125) for details on the PCDC and ADC. Toner transferred to the DEVE ASSY and developer (carrier) in the DEVE ASSY is stirred by the Auger, and are supplied to the Magnet Roll located near the drum surface. The toner and the carrier are charged by the triboelectricity (toner: negative, carrier: positive), and they are attracted to each other. As the carrier is a magnetic body, it is attracted to the magnetized Magnet Roll, and a uniform layer of carrier is formed on the Magnet Roll by passing through the Timmer Rod and the Paddle. NOTE: The magnet Roll is located inside the DEVE ASSY. The surface of the Magnet Roll is covered with the conductive sleeve. The DB (Developing Bias) is supplied to the conductive sleeve from the HVPS. The DB voltage is a negative DC voltage that AC voltage is superimposed on it. The electrostatic latent image on the drum, the area hit by the laser, carries less negative charges than the other area on the drum. As the uniform negative charge on the Magnet Roll is kept at a certain level by the DC voltage, the potential difference between the Magnet Roll and the drum surface becomes as follows; the electrostatic image area is higher than the Magnet Roll, and the other area is lower than the Magnet Roll. The superimposed AC voltage vibrates the carrier on the Magnet Roll surface making it easier for toner to jump to the drum. Thus, the negatively charged toner on the Magnet Roll is only attracted to the electrostatic latent image and forms a toner image on the drum. Once the toner adheres to the image area on the drum, no more toner is attracted to the area as negative charges of the area are increasd.
Drum Surface
-V TCRU ASSY (Toner Cartridge) Agitator Auger Trimmer Rod DISPENSER ASSY Paddle Auger Auger Magnet Roll
- : Negative Charge + : Positive Charge

Toner Carrier
+ + + + Drum
HVPS DEVE ASSY
Ida_06_016A
Drum Surface Potential
Developing Bias
Toner Image
0
Figure 2-7. Development Process
Print Process
86
Revision A
2.1.3.4 Primary Transfer (Drum IDT1)

At the Primary transfer process, the toner image formed on the Drum is transferred to the IDT1 (Intermediate Drum Transfer 1). This printer equips two IDT1s. The one is for transferring yellow and magenta toner images, and the other is for transferring cyan and black toner images. IDT1 is a conductive roll and a high positive voltage is supplied to it from the HVPS. A negatively charged toner image on the drum is attracted and transferred to the IDT1 surface that is charged positively. The potential on the Drum surface is neutralized by the IDT1 at this time.
- Negative Charge + Positive Charge Drum (Y)
Drum Surface (Yellow Toner Image)
IDI1Surface
Yellow Toner Image Magenta Toner Image
Drum Surface (Magenta Toner Image)
Toner
- -
+ + + + + + + -
+ +
IDT1
Drum (M)
+ +
Drum Surface (Cyan Toner Image) IDI1Surface
- -
Drum (C)
- -
+ + + + + + + -
+ +
IDT1
Cyan Toner Image
Drum Surface (Black Toner Image)

+ +
HVPS
Black Toner Image
Drum (K)
- -
engine priniple0017FA
Figure 2-8. Primary Transfer (1)
Figure 2-9. Primary Transfer (2)
Print Process
87
Revision A
2.1.3.5 Secondary Transfer (IDT1 IDT2)

At the Secondary transfer process, the two-colored toner image formed on each of the two IDT1s is transferred to the IDT2 (Intermediate Drum Transfer 2). Complete toner image in full color is then formed on the IDT2. The IDT2 is a conductive roll and a high positive voltage is supplied to it from the HVPS. Though both the IDT1 and the IDT2 are positively charged, the voltage supplied to the IDT2 is higher than that for the IDT1 to attract/transfer the toner image on the IDT1 to the IDT2.
+
IDT1
Positive Charge
2.1.3.6 Cleaning (IDT1)

At the Cleaning (IDT1) process, the toner remaining on the IDT1 surface is temporarily stored in the IDT1 Cleaner after the toner image is transferred to the IDT2. IDT1 Cleaner is a conductive roll brush and a high positive voltage is supplied to it from the HVPS. The IDT1 Cleaner is in contact with the IDT1 to attract and temporarily store remnants of toner on the IDT1 after the secondary transfer is finished. The stored toner is retrieved either at the end of the printing or at the cleaning cycle. (Refer to 2.1.3.11 Cleaning (Entirely) (p90))
IDI1Surface
Toner
IDT1 Cleaner
+ + + + + + + +
IDT2
+ + + + + + + + + +
IDT1
IDI2 Surface
+ +
++ + +
IDI1Surface
Cyan Toner Image Black Toner Image
HVPS
Cyan Toner Image Black Toner Image
HVPS IDT1 Cleaner
Figure 2-11. Secondary Transfer and Cleaning (2)

Figure 2-10. Secondary Transfer and Cleaning (1)
Print Process
88
Revision A
2.1.3.7 Third Transfer (IDT2 Paper)

In the Third transfer process, the complete toner image formed on the IDT2 is transferred to paper by supplying voltage to the BTR (Bias Transfer Roll). The BTR is located inside the BTR ASSY. It is a conductive roll and constant positive current is supplied to it from the HVPS. The toner image on the IDT2 is transferred to a paper by applying the positive voltage to the backside of the paper when it passes between the IDT2 and the BTR. The potential of the BTR is set higher than that of the IDT2 at this time.
:Negative Charge :Positive Charge

:Toner
2.1.3.8 Cleaning (IDT2)

In the Cleaning (IDT2) process, the toner remaining on the IDT2 surface is temporarily stored in the IDT2 Cleaner after the toner image is transferred to the paper. The IDT2 Cleaner is a conductive roll brush and a high positive voltage is supplied to it from the HVPS. The IDT2 Cleaner is in contact with the IDT2 to wipe off and temporarily store remnants of toner on the IDT2 after the third transfer is finished. The stored toner is retrieved either at the end of the printing or at the cleaning cycle. (Refer to 2.1.3.11 Cleaning (Entirely) (p90))
2.1.3.9 Discharging
In the Discharging process, the charge on the paper is neutralized/removed by applying DC voltage to the backside of the paper with the Detack Saw. Detack Saw is kept charged at a constant voltage by the Valistor. If the Detack Saw fails to remove the electrical charge on the paper properly, the toner transferred on the paper will scatter due to the positive charges applied for the third transfer and cause print quality troubles. Figure 2-12. Third Transfer, Cleaning and Discharging
Print Process
89
Revision A
2.1.3.10 Fusing
In the Fusing process, toner is fixed on paper with heat and pressure. As the complete toner image clings to the paper only by the electrostatic force, one light touch of a finger can remove the image easily. To fix the image firmly onto the paper, the paper is transferred to the Fusing section immediately after the third transfer. The toner is melted by the Heat Roll heated by the Heater Lamp, and then the toner is fixed on the paper by being pressed between the Heat Roll and the Belt, which puts pressure against the Heat Roll.
2.1.3.11 Cleaning (Entirely)

In the Cleaning (Entirely) process, the toners stored in the RTC, Refresher, IDT1 Cleaner and the IDT2 Cleaner are removed after the complete toner image is transferred on the paper. Remnants of toner after performing the Secondary transfer and the Third transfer are temporarily stored in the IDT1 Cleaner and the IDT2 Cleaner. Toner whose polarity is reversed and returned to the Drum is stored in the Refresher. Toner slipped through the Refresher sometimes adheres to the RTC. These toner can be cleaned up when the printing is finished. Method for retrieving toner stored in the IDT1 Cleaner and the IDT2 Cleaner is different from the one for retrieving toner stored in the Refresher and the RTC. Continue to the next page.
Table 2-1. Heater Lamp Conditions

Warm up Main Heater Lamp Sub Heater Lamp ON ON Stand by ON (assist) ON (main) Printing ON (main) ON (assist)
Paper Fixed Toner
Not Fixed Toner
Figure 2-13. Fusing
Print Process
90

1. IDT1 Cleaner and IDT2 Cleaner High voltages equivalent to the bias used for the second and third transfer process are applied to the IDT1, IDT2, and the BTR. By turning the charge of the IDT1 Cleaner and the IDT2 Cleaner to 0 V, remnants of toner (polarity: negative) stored in the IDT1 Cleaner and the IDT2 Cleaner are transferred electrically to the IDT1 and the IDT2. And the remnants of toner on the IDT1 and IDT2 are then collected directly on the BTR, which carries the highest positive charges among them, just as the complete toner image is attracted to paper.
+ + +
IDT1
Revision A
By turning the charge of the Refresher and the RTC to 0 V, remnants of toner (polarity: positive) stored in the Refresher and the RTC are transferred electrically to the Drum. The remnants of toner are then transferred to the IDT1 and IDT2, and collected directly on the BTR, which carries the highest positive charges among them, just as the complete toner image is attracted to paper.
RTC Refresher
Negative Charge
Drum
Toner
+ Positive Charge
Toner
Refresher
- - IDT1
+ + + + + + +
IDT1 Cleaner
RTC IDT2 Cleaner
Refresher
+ + + +
IDT2
Drum
IDT2
BTR
RTC
+ + + + +
HVPS IDT1
+ + + + + +
HVPS
+ + + BTR + + + Refresher RTC
Drum
IDT1
HVPS Urethane blade HVPS
Drum
HVPS HVPS
Urethane blade
IDT1 Cleaner
Ida_Sec06_022FA
Ida_Sec06_019FA
Figure 2-14. IDT1 Cleaner and IDT2 Cleaner 2. Refresher and RTC High negative voltages (the polarity is opposite to the bias used for the transfer process) are applied to the IDT1, IDT2, and the BTR. At this time, the Drum surface is negatively charged by the negative voltage of the IDT1.
IDT1 Voltage > IDT2 Voltage > BTR Voltage
Figure 2-15. Refresher and RTC The remnants of toner transferred to the BTR surface is scraped off by the Urethane blade that is in contact with the BTR, and collected in the waste toner box inside the BTR ASSY.
Print Process
91
Revision A
2.2 Flow of Print Data

Host (electric signal)
2.2.1 Data Flow

Print data (electric signals) from the Printer Controller follows the flow shown right to become a print image.
Printer Controller (electric signal)
PWBA (electric signal)
ROS ASSY (Laser Beam)
Electrostatic Latent Image (invisible)
Toner Image on the Drum
Toner Image on the IDT1
Complete Image on the IDT2
Complete Toner Image on Paper
Printed Paper is ejected

Ida_Sec06_026FA
Figure 2-16. Data Flow
Flow of Print Data
92
Revision A
2.3 Drive Transmission Path

2.3.1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN
Drive force of DRIVE ASSY MAIN is transmitted as follows:
DRIVE ASSY MAIN
BTR
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT PHD ASSY
BTR ASSY IDT 2
GEAR IDLER IN
CLUTCH REGI
CLUTCH TURN
GEAR MSI DRIVE ASSY MAIN
GEAR IDLER FEED
ROLL REGI RUBBER
ROLL TURN MSI

ROLL ASSY RETARD (MSI)
GEAR IDLER IN
GEAR FEED H1
ROLL REGI METAL CHUTE ASSY REGI
GEAR P1
GEAR IDLER FEED / GEAR FEED 2 PICK UP ASSY GEAR FEED 2
GEAR FEED H1
GEAR FEED H2
GEAR IDLER TURN
GEAR FEED 2 ROLL ASSY FEED (Nudger Roll) ROLL ASSY RETARD (Cassette)
GEAR FEED 2 ROLL ASSY FEED (Feed Roll)
GEAR TURN
FRONT
GEAR FEED H2 / GEAR FEED H1 Ida_06_001B DRIVE ASSY MAIN
ROLL ASSY TURN
PICK UP ASSY
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER

CHUTE ASSY REGI
CLUTCH REGI
GEAR P1
GEAR MSI
IDT2
CLUTCH TURN
ROLL ASSY FEED CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
IDT1 (2)
GEAR TURN GEAR IDLER TURN
Drum (4) ROLL ASSY RETARD (MSI) BTR ASSY

Ida_06_030B
PHD ASSY
PICK UP ASSY
FRONT
Ida_06_002B
Figure 2-17. Drive Transmission Flow (DRIVE ASSY MAIN)
Figure 2-18. Drive Transmission Path (DRIVE ASSY MAIN)
Drive Transmission Path
93
Revision A
2.3.2 DRIVE ASSY DEVE

Drive force of the DRIVE ASSY DEVE activates the Developers of each color inside the FRAME ASSY DEVE. Switching between the monochrome and the full-color mode is enabled by changing the rotation direction of the Deve Drive Motor in the DRIVE ASSY DEVE. Black and White Mode
Black and White Mode

DRIVE ASSY DEVE
DEVE DRIVE MOTOR

DRIVE MOTOR
GEAR D2-IN
DRIVE MOTOR GEAR GEAR D2-IN GEAR D8
GEAR D5 (1 WAY CLUTCH)
GEAR D7
GEAR DEVE INPUT (K)
GEAR D5
GEAR D7
GEAR D8
FRONT Ida_06_023A
GEAR DEVE INPUT (K)
Figure 2-20. Drive Transmission Path (DRIVE ASSY DEVE)
MAG ROLL (K) DEVE ASSY (K)

Ida_Sec06_029FA
Figure 2-19. Drive Transmission Flow (DRIVE ASSY DEVE)
94

Full Color Mode
DEVE DRIVE MOTOR
GEAR D8 GEAR D4
Revision A
Full Color Mode
GEAR D6 GEAR D6
GEAR D2-IN
GEAR DEVE INPUT (Y) GEAR D8 DRIVE MOTOR DRIVE MOTOR GEAR GEAR D3 GEAR D2-IN GEAR D2-OUT
GEAR D2-OUT
GEAR DEVE INPUT (M) GEAR D8
GEAR D3 (1 WAT CLUTCH)

GEAR DEVE INPUT (C)
GEAR D8 GEAR DEVE INPUT (K)
GEAR D5
GEAR D6
GEAR D6
GEAR D7
GEAR D7
GEAR D8
GEAR D8
GEAR D8
GEAR D8
DRIVE ASSY DEVE FRONT
GEAR DEVE INPUT (Y)
GEAR DEVE INPUT (M)
GEAR DEVE INPUT (C)
GEAR DEVE INPUT (K)
Ida_06_024A
MAG ROLL (Y) DEVE ASSY (Y) MAG ROLL (M) DEVE ASSY (M) MAG ROLL (C) DEVE ASSY (C) MAG ROLL (K)
Figure 2-22. Drive Transmission Path (DRIVE ASSY DEVE)

DEVE ASSY (K)
Ida_Sec06_028FA
Figure 2-21. Drive Transmission Flow (DRIVE ASSY DEVE)
95
Revision A
2.3.3 DISPENSER ASSY (Y, M, C, K)

The Toner Motor inside the DISPENSER ASSY drives both the Agitator in the Toner Cartridge (supplies toner from Toner Cartridge to DISPENSER ASSY) and the Auger in the DISPENSER ASSY (supplies toner to the Developer in the FRAME ASSY DEVE). There are four DISPENSER ASSYs in total corresponding Y, M, C, and K, and they operate in the same way.
Agitator Film
Gear Gear TCRU Gear Agitator pipe Auger Auger Assy Gear Idler Agitator 2 Gear Idler Agitator 1
Toner Motor
Gear Auger Gear Idler 2 Gear Idler 1 Toner Motor Assy
Gear Idler Agitator 1
Gear Idler 1
Ida_06_130A
Figure 2-24. Drive Transmission Path (DISPENSER ASSY)

Gear Idler Agitator 2 Gear Idler 2
Gear Agitator
Gear TCRU
Gear Auger
Gear
Auger Assy DISPENSER ASSY
Film
Agitator Toner Cartridge

Ida_06_021A
Figure 2-23. Drive Transmission Flow (DISPENSER ASSY)
96
Revision A
2.3.4 DRIVE ASSY FUSER

The DRIVE ASSY FUSER drives the FUSER ASSY.
Roll Assy Exit FUSER ASSY
DRIVE ASSY FUSER

Gear Exit Pinch Roll
Fuser Belt
Heat Roll
Heat Roll Gear
Gear Exit
Fuser Motor
DRIVE ASSY FUSER
Roll Assy Exit
FUSER ASSY
FRONT
Ida_06_131A
Figure 2-26. Drive Transmission Path (DRIVE ASSY FUSER) Figure 2-25. Drive Transmission Flow (DRIVE ASSY FUSER)
97
Revision A
2.3.5 MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM

The drive force of the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM is transmitted as shown in the flow chart below. Printed papers are ejected when the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM rotates normally, and reverse rotation of it transports the papers for duplex printing.
GEAR EXIT / DUP MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM GEAR 52
MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM

GEAR 40 / 66H GEAR 41
GEAR 40/66H
GEAR 40/66H
GEAR 40 / 66H GEAR 41
GEAR 52
GEAR 41
GEAR EXIT / DUP CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
GEAR EXIT/DUP
GEAR 41
FRONT
ROLL EXIT
GEAR EXIT/DUP
Ida_06_003B
Figure 2-28. Drive Transmission Path (MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM)

CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT ROLL DUP
Ida_06_031A
Figure 2-27. Drive Transmission Flow (MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM)
98
Revision A
2.3.6 DRIVE ASSY (550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit)

C A U T IO N
On the following pages, the feeder of the paper tray at the bottom of the printer and the optional 550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit are referred to as "tray 1" and "tray 2" respectively.
Drive force of DRIVE ASSY is transmitted as follows:
DRIVE ASSY
GEAR 24
GEAR IDLER FEED GEAR FEED 2
GEAR IDLER 21/29

CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC
CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC ROLL ASSY TURN
GEAR IDLER FEED
GEAR IDLER 21/29 GEAR 24
GEAR FEED H2
GEAR FEED H1
DRIVE ASSY
GEAR FEED 2
GEAR FEED 2
FRONT
GEAR FEED H2
GEAR FEED H1
GEAR FEED 2 Ida_1T_06_101A
PICK UP ASSY 2T
ROLL ASSY FEED (Nudger Roll)
ROLL ASSY FEED (Feed Roll)

Ida_1T_06_106A
Figure 2-30. Drive Transmission Path
Figure 2-29. Drive Transmission Flow
99
Revision A
2.3.7 DRIVE ASSY 2ND (1,100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit)

C A U T IO N
On the following pages, the feeder section of the paper tray at the bottom of the printer is named "Tray 1", and the two trays included in the optional 1,100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit are referred to as "Tray 2" and "Tray 3" from the top.
Drive force of DRIVE ASSY 2ND is transmitted as follows:

DRIVE ASSY 2ND
GEAR 24
GEAR 24
GEAR IDLER FEED GEAR FEED 2
GEAR IDLER 21/29
CLUTCH ASSY
CLUTCH ASSY GEAR IDLER FEED
GEAR IDLER 21/29

ROLL ASSY TURN GEAR FEED H2 GEAR FEED H1
GEAR FEED 2 GEAR FEED H1 GEAR FEED H2 GEAR 24 (DRIVE ASSY) GEAR IDLER 21/29
GEAR 24 DRIVE ASSY 2ND CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC GEAR IDLER FEED
GEAR FEED 2
GEAR FEED 2
PICK UP ASSY 2T
GEAR IDLER 21/29
GEAR FEED 2
CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC ROLL ASSY TURN GEAR IDLER FEED
GEAR FEED H2
GEAR FEED H1
FRONT
GEAR FEED 2 GEAR FEED 2
GEAR FEED H2
GEAR FEED H1
GEAR FEED 2 Ida_2T_06_201B
PICK UP ASSY 3T
Figure 2-32. Drive Transmission Path

Ida_2T_06_206A
Figure 2-31. Drive Transmission Flow
100
Revision A
2.4 Feeding Paper

ACTUATOR FULL STACK SENSOR FULL STACK ROLL EXIT
2.4.1 Paper Feed Path (When options are not installed)

Papers supplied from the paper tray and the MSI in the main unit are transferred as shown in the flow chart below.
ROLL PINCH EXIT
Actuator Exit Roll Assy Exit Exit Sensor Pinch Roll PHD ASSY ACTUATOR DUP Fuser Belt SENSOR DUP JAM ROLL REGI RUBBER ROLL REGI METAL Heat Roll ROLL PINCH DUP IDT2 SENSOR OHP ACTUATOR REGI BTR SENSOR NO PAPER (MSI) ROLL DUP
Paper Tray 1
MSI
ROLL ASSY FEED (PICK UP ASSY)
ROLL ASSY FEED (MSI) and ROLL ASSY RETARD
ROLL ASSY FEED (PICK UP ASSY) ROLL ASSY RETARD (Paper Cassette)
ROLL ASSY TURN and CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
SENSOR REGI ROLL PINCH TURN ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI
ROLL TURN MSI and ROLL PINCH TURN
ROLL TURN MSI ROLL ASSY FEED (MSI)
ROLL REGI RUBBER in CHUTE ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL
ROLL ASSY FEED (PICK UP ASSY 1T) ROLL ASSY RETARD (MSI)
IDT2 in PHD ASSY and BTR in BTR ASSY

CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
HEAT ROLL in FUSER ASSY and FUSER BELT

ROLL ASSY RETARD (CST)
ROLL ASSY TURN (PICK UP ASSY 1T)
ROLL ASSY EXIT in FUSER ASSY and PINCH ROLL
Ida_06_132B
Figure 2-34. Paper Feed Path Layout

ROLL EXIT in CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT and ROLL PINCH EXIT
Ejects Paper
ROLL EXIT rotates backward to transport paper to duplex path
ROLL DUP and ROLL PINCH DUP
Ida_06_027B
Figure 2-33. Paper Feed Flow
Feeding Paper
101
Revision A
2.4.2 Paper Feed Path (When the 550-sheet Paper Cassette is installed)
When the OPTION FEEDER (Single Tray) is installed, papers are fed in the following order.
ACTUATOR FULL STACK
Paper Tray 2
Paper Tray 1
MSI
SENSOR FULL STACK ROLL EXIT
ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray 2)
ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray)
Actuator Exit ROLL PINCH EXIT PHD ASSY Pinch Roll Roll Assy Exit Exit Sensor ACTUATOR DUP Fuser Belt SENSOR DUP JAM ROLL REGI RUBBER Heat Roll ROLL REGI METAL SENSOR OHP ACTUATOR REGI IDT2 BTR ROLL PINCH DUP ROLL DUP
ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray 2) ROLL ASSY RETARD (Paper Cassette)
ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray) ROLL ASSY RETARD (Paper Cassette)
ROLL ASSY TURN (Tray 2) and CHUTE ASSY FEEDER (Tray 2)

SENSOR REGI
SENSOR NO PAPER (MSI)
ROLL PINCH TURN ROLL TURN MSI
ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI
ROLL ASSY FEED (PICK UP ASSY 1T)
ROLL ASSY FEED (MSI)
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
ROLL ASSY FEED (PICK UP ASSY 2T) CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
ROLL ASSY RETARD (CST) ROLL ASSY TURN (PICK UP ASSY 2T)
Ejects Paper
Transports the paper to the duplex path by rotating the ROLL EXIT backward.
Ida_1T_06_132B

Ida_1T_06_105A
Feeding Paper
102
Revision A
2.4.3 Paper Feed Path (When the 1100-sheet Paper Cassette is installed)
When the 1100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit is installed, papers are fed in the following order.
Paper Tray 3 Paper Tray 2 Paper Tray 1 MSI
ACTUATOR FULL STACK SENSOR FULL STACK ROLL EXIT
Actuator Exit ROLL PINCH EXIT PHD ASSY Pinch Roll Roll Assy Exit Exit Sensor ACTUATOR DUP Fuser Belt SENSOR DUP JAM ROLL REGI RUBBER ROLL REGI METAL Heat Roll ROLL PINCH DUP IDT2 SENSOR OHP BTR ACTUATOR REGI SENSOR REGI SENSOR NO PAPER (MSI) ROLL DUP


ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray)

ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray) ROLL ASSY RETARD (Paper Cassette)
ROLL ASSY TURN (Tray 3) and CHUTE ASSY FEEDER (Tray 3)
ROLL ASSY TURN(Tray 2) and CHUTE ASSY FEEDER (Tray 2)
ROLL PINCH TURN ROLL TURN MSI
ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI

ROLL ASSY FEED (MSI) ROLL ASSY FEED (PICK UP ASSY 1T) ROLL ASSY RETARD (MSI)
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER

ROLL ASSY FEED (PICK UP ASSY 3RD)
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
ROLL ASSY TURN (PICK UP ASSY 3RD)
ROLL ASSY FEED (PICK UP ASSY 4TH) CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
Ejects Paper
Transports the paper to the duplex path by rotating the ROLL EXIT backward.
ROLL ASSY RETARD (CST) ROLL ASSY TURN (PICK UP ASSY 4TH)
Ida_2T_06_132B
Ida_2T_06_205A
Feeding Paper
103
Revision A
2.5 Main Structure and Function

This section explains and illustrates the main functional components that are involved with paper transferring. The explanations are given for each of the components (section) and items listed below. Paper Cassette Paper Feeder Retard & Regi Assy Chute Assy In Chute Assy Out BTR Assy & Fuser Assy Xerographics Toner Cartridge Frame & Drive Electrical
2.5.1 Paper Cassette

MAIN FUNCTIONS GUIDE SIDE (R/L) The GUIDE SIDE (R/L) moves crossways of the paper feed direction, and trues up the left and right edges of sheets of paper. GUIDE END The GUIDE END moves parallel to the paper feed direction, and determines the paper size. When the GUIDE END is moved, the ACTUATOR SIZE is activated by the ACTUATOR GUIDE END which moves together with the GUIDE END, and the SWITCH ASSY SIZE (See 2.5.2 Paper Feeder (p105)) is turned ON or OFF to detect the paper size. ROLL ASSY RETARD (Paper Cassette) Paper in the cassette is fed into the printer by being caught between the ROLL ASSY RETARD (Paper Cassette) and the ROLL ASSY FEED (PICK UP ASSY) (See 2.5.2 Paper Feeder (p105)).
GUIDE END
PLATE ASSY BTM
GUIDE SIDE L
ACTUATOR GUIDE END
ACTUATOR SIZE
GUIDE SIDE R ROLL ASSY RETARD (Paper Cassette) Ida_06_004C
Figure 2-39. Paper Cassette
Main Structure and Function
104
Revision A
2.5.2 Paper Feeder

MAIN FUNCTIONS SWITCH ASSY SIZE Detects paper size and the presence of the paper tray. SENSOR NO PAPER Detects presence of papers in the paper tray according to the change in position of the Actuator. (No paper state: Shielding the sensor) SENSOR LOW PAPER * The Actuator comes down in accordance with remaining amount of the papers in the paper tray. When the Actuator comes down to a level where the Actuator shields the sensor, the sensor detects that remaining amount of the papers is low. Note*: Installed before shipment (option) SOLENOID FEED Controls the operation of the ROLL ASSY FEED (rotating/halt) by controlling the rotation of the GEAR FEED H2. ROLL ASSY FEED When the SOLENOID FEED is activated, the SPRING FEED H moves the GEAR FEED H1 and the GEAR IDLER FEED into engagement to transmit the drive force of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to rotate the GEAR FEED H1/H2. The GEAR FEED H1/H2 drive the GEAR FEED 2, and the GEAR FEED 2 makes the ROLL ASSY FEED rotate to feed a paper in the paper tray into the printer. A notch on the GEAR FEED H1 moves the GEAR FEED H1 and the GEAR IDLER FEED out of engagement when the GEAR FEED H1 makes one revolution. This cuts the drive force from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN and stops the ROLL ASSY FEED. Thus, the papers in the paper tray can be fed one by one. ROLL ASSY TURN This is rotated by the driving of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN by way of the GEAR IDLER TURN and the GEAR TURN. This rotation transports papers fed from the paper tray to the CHUTE ASSY REGI (Regi Roll) (See 2.5.5 Retard & Regi Assy (p110)). SENSOR HUM Detects temperature and humidity inside the printer. This sensor calibrates the charging voltage, supply voltage for various transfer rolls, and developing bias based on detected temperature and humidity.
SWITCH ASSY SIZE CHUTE ASSY FEEDER SOLENOID FEED ROLL ASSY FEED (Feed Roll) ROLL ASSY TURN ROLL ASSY FEED (Nudger Roll) SENSOR LOW PAPER
SENSOR NO PAPER SENSOR HUM
ROLL ASSY TURN ROLL ASSY FEED (Feed Roll) ROLL ASSY FEED (Nudger Roll) CHUTE ASSY FEEDER ROLL ASSY RETARD (Paper Cassette) Ida_06_005B
Figure 2-40. Paper Feeder
105
Revision A
ROLL ASSY TURN (Tray 2) This is rotated by the drive force of the DRIVE ASSY transmitted via the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC. Transports the paper fed from the paper tray toward the Tray 1.
2.5.3 Optional Feeder (550-sheet Paper Cassette)

This section explains and illustrates the main functional components that make up the 550-sheet Paper Cassette unit (optional single feeder). The explanation is divided into two sections shown below according to the locations of the components. Optional Single Feeder (1) Optional Single Feeder (2)
ROLL ASSY TURN
ROLL ASSY FEED (Nudger Roll) SENSOR NO PAPER
2.5.3.1 Option Single Feeder (1)

MAIN FUNCTIONS SWITCH ASSY SIZE (Tray 2) Detects paper size and presence of papers. SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 2) Detects presence of papers in the paper tray according to the change in position of the Actuator. (No paper state: Shielding the sensor) SOLENOID FEED (Tray 2) Controls the operation of the ROLL ASSY FEED (rotating/halt) by controlling the rotation of the GEAR FEED H1 and the GEAR FEED H2. CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC (Tray 2) Transmits the driving from the DRIVE ASSY to the ROLL ASSY TURN. ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray 2) When the SOLENOID FEED is activated, the SPRING FEED H moves the GEAR FEED H1 and the GEAR IDLER FEED into engagement to transmit the drive force of the DRIVE ASSY to rotate the GEAR FEED H1/H2. The GEAR FEED H1/H2 drive the GEAR FEED 2, and the GEAR FEED 2 makes the ROLL ASSY FEED rotate to feed a paper in the paper tray into the printer. A notch on the GEAR FEED H1 moves the GEAR FEED H1 and the GEAR IDLER FEED out of engagement when the GEAR FEED H1 makes one revolution. This cuts the drive force from the DRIVE ASSY and stops the ROLL ASSY FEED. Thus, the papers in the paper tray can be fed one by one.
SWITCH ASSY SIZE SOLENOID FEED
DRIVE ASSY
Ida_1T_06_103C
Figure 2-41. Optional Single Feeder (1)
106
Revision A
2.5.3.2 Optional Single Feeder (2)

MAIN FUNCTIONS SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray 2) The Actuator comes down in accordance with remaining amount of the papers in the paper tray. When the Actuator comes down to a level where the Actuator shields the sensor, the sensor detects that remaining amount of the papers is low. PWBA OPTFDR 1T Controls the paper feeding operations to the DRIVE ASSY by communicating with the PWBA MCU IDTN and analyzing the information from the sensors and switches. The main functions are as follows. Communicates with the PWBA MCU IDTN Receives information from the sensors and the switches Controls the DRIVE ASSY, solenoids, and clutches Controls the paper feeding operations Allocates the low DC voltage output from the main unit among each component DRIVE ASSY Supplies the driving to the ROLL ASSY FEED and the ROLL ASSY TURN of the tray through the gears.
DRIVE ASSY Ida_1T_06_104C PWBA OPTFDR 1T SENSOR LOW PAPER
Figure 2-42. Optional Single Feeder (2)
107
Revision A
2.5.4 Optional Feeder (1100-sheet Paper Cassette)

This section explains and illustrates the main functional components that make up the 1100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit (Optional double feeder). The explanation is divided into two sections shown below according to the locations of the components. Optional Double Feeder (1) Optional Double Feeder (2)
ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray 2/Feed Roll) ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray 2/Nudger Roll) ROLL ASSY TURN (Tray 2) CLUTCH ASSY (Tray 2) SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 2)
2.5.4.1 Optional Double Feeder (1)

MAIN FUNCTIONS
SWITCH ASSY SIZE (Tray 2)
SOLENOID FEED (Tray 2)
SWITCH ASSY SIZE (Tray 2/Tray 3) Detects paper size and presence of papers. SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 2/Tray 3) Detects presence of papers in the paper tray according to the change in position of the Actuator. (No paper state: Shielding the sensor) SOLENOID FEED (Tray 2/Tray 3) Controls the operation of the ROLL ASSY FEED (rotating/halt) by controlling the rotation of the GEAR FEED H2. CLUTCH ASSY (Tray 2)/CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC (Tray 3) Transmits the driving from the DRIVE ASSY 2ND to the ROLL ASSY TURN. ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray 2/Tray 3) When the SOLENOID FEED is activated, the SPRING FEED H moves the GEAR FEED H1 and the GEAR IDLER FEED into engagement to transmit the drive force of the DRIVE ASSY 2ND to rotate the GEAR FEED H1/H2. The GEAR FEED H1/H2 drive the GEAR FEED 2, and the GEAR FEED 2 makes the ROLL ASSY FEED rotate to feed a paper in the paper tray into the printer. A notch on the GEAR FEED H1 moves the GEAR FEED H1 and the GEAR IDLER FEED out of engagement when the GEAR FEED H1 makes one revolution. This cuts the drive force from the DRIVE ASSY and stops the ROLL ASSY FEED. Thus, the papers in the paper tray can be fed one by one. ROLL ASSY TURN (Tray 2/Tray 3) This is rotated by the drive force of the DRIVE ASSY 2ND transmitted via the CLUTCH ASSY/CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC. Transports the paper fed from the paper tray toward the Tray 1.
ROLL ASSY TURN (Tray 3) ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray 3/Feed Roll) ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray 3/Nudger Roll)
SWITCH ASSY SIZE (Tray 3) SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 3) SOLENOID FEED (Tray 3) CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC (Tray 3)
DRIVE ASSY 2ND
Ida_2T_06_203B
Figure 2-43. Optional Double Feeder (1)
108
Revision A
2.5.4.2 Optional Double Feeder (2)

MAIN FUNCTIONS SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray 2/Tray 3) The Actuator comes down in accordance with remaining amount of the papers in the paper tray. When the Actuator comes down to a level where the Actuator shields the sensor, the sensor detects that remaining amount of the papers is low. PWBA OPTFDR 2T Controls the paper feeding operations to the DRIVE ASSY 2ND by communicating with the PWBA MCU IDTN and analyzing the information from the sensors and switches. The main functions are as follows. Communicates with the PWBA MCU IDTN Receives information from the sensors and the switches Controls the DRIVE ASSY 2ND, solenoids, and clutches Controls the paper feeding operations Allocates the low DC voltage output from the main unit among each component DRIVE ASSY 2ND Supplies the driving to the ROLL ASSY FEED and the ROLL ASSY TURN in each of the trays through the gears.
SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray 2) PWBA OPTFDR 2T (Tray 2)
PWBA OPTFDR 2T (Tray 3)
DRIVE ASSY 2ND SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray 3) Ida_2T_06_204B
Figure 2-44. Optional Double Feeder (2)
109
Revision A
2.5.5 Retard & Regi Assy

MAIN FUNCTIONS CLUTCH TURN Transmits the driving from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to the ROLL TURN MSI. ROLL TURN MSI This is rotated by the drive force of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN transmitted via the CLUTCH TURN (MSI). Transports the paper fed from the paper tray, manual tray, or the duplex path to the CHUTE ASSY REGI (Regi Roll). SENSOR REGI This sensor detects that the leading edge of the paper has reached the CHUTE ASSY REGI. CLUTCH REGI Transmits the driving from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to the ROLL REGI RUBBER to transport papers from the paper tray, MSI, and duplex path toward the PHD ASSY. SENSOR OHP Irradiates light on the media and detects the media by perceiving the reflected light. As transparencies do not reflect light as much as papers do, the SENSOR OHP cannot perceive the reflected light when the media is transparency. Thus, the SENSOR OHP determines whether the media that is fed from the MSI is transparency or paper.
SENSOR OHP ROLL REGI METAL SENSOR REGI
ROLL REGI RUBBER
CLUTCH REGI
ROLL TURN MSI
CLUTCH TURN
ROLL PINCH TURN
ROLL TURN MSI ROLL ASSY RETARD (MSI)
Ida_06_006D
Figure 2-45. Retard & Regi Assy
110
Revision A
2.5.6 Front Assy In

MAIN FUNCTIONS HOLDER ASSY CTD Reads the density of the toner image formed on the BTR surface in the BTR ASSY (See2.5.8 BTR Assy & Fuser Assy (p114)) and sends the result to the process control section. Refer to 2.8.4 Process Control (p125). SENSOR TNR FULL Detects that the waste toner box in the BTR ASSY (See 2.5.8 BTR Assy & Fuser Assy (p114)) is full. DRIVE ASSY FUSER Supplies the driving to the FUSER ASSY (See 2.5.8 BTR Assy & Fuser Assy (p114)). LATCH R and LATCH L Pushing up the LATCH R (button A) activates the LATCH L, which is connected to the LATCH R with the SHAFT LATCH, to open the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN toward front.
LATCH L
CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
LATCH R
CHUTE ASSY DUP IN MAIN CHASSIS
LATCH L
LATCH R CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
LATCH R
Ida_06_133B
DRIVE ASSY FUSER
Figure 2-47. Front Assy In (2)

HOLDER ASSY CTD SENSOR TNR FULL Ida_06_007C
Figure 2-46. Front Assy In (1)
111
Revision A
2.5.7 Chute Assy Out

MAIN FUNCTIONS
ROLL EXIT SENSOR FULL STACK
SENSOR FULL STACK Detects that the amount of ejected papers on the top cover exceeded a certain level based on the change in position of the Actuator. (Full stack: Light enters the sensor) SENSOR DUP JAM Detects that the paper has reached/passed the ROLL DUP based on the change in position of the Actuator. (Paper present: Light enters the sensor) SENSOR NO PAPER Detects presence of papers on the MSI according to the change in position of the Actuator. (No paper state: Shielding the sensor)
MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM
HOLDER LEVER OUT SENSOR DUP JAM
SOLENOID FEED MSI Controls the operation of the ROLL ASSY FEED (MSI) (rotating/halt) by controlling the rotation of the GEAR MSI. ROLL ASSY FEED (MSI) When the SOLENOID FEED MSI is activated, the SPRING FEED MSI moves the GEAR MSI and the GEAR IDLER IN into engagement, and the ROLL ASSY FEED (MSI) starts to rotate by the transmitted drive force of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to feed a paper from the manual paper tray. A notch on the GEAR MSI moves the GEAR MSI and the GEAR IDLER IN out of engagement when the GEAR MSI makes one revolution. This cuts the drive force from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN and stops the ROLL ASSY FEED (MSI). Thus, the papers in the manual paper tray can be fed one by one. ROLL DUP This is rotated by the driving of the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM, and transports a one-side printed paper that comes back from the CHUTE ASSY REGI to the ROLL TURN MSI (See 2.5.5 Retard & Regi Assy (p110)). MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM Transmits the driving to the ROLL EXIT and the ROLL DUP. ROLL EXIT This is rotated by the driving of the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM, and transfers the paper, which is already fixed, to the top cover. When performing duplex printing, it reverses the direction of rotation to transfer the fixed one-side printed paper toward the Regi.
PLATE LATCH ROLL DUP
GEAR MSI SENSOR NO PAPER (MSI) SOLENOID FEED MSI ROLL ASSY FEED (MSI) ROLL PINCH TURN
ROLL TURN MSI ROLL ASSY RETARD (MSI) Ida_06_008C
Figure 2-48. Chute Assy Out (1)
112

PLATE LATCH Pressing the HOLDER LEVER OUT (button B) pushes the PLATE LATCH, releases the PLATE LATCH from the tab of the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN, and opens the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT toward front of the printer.
Revision A
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
HOLDER LEVER OUT
PLATE LATCH
PLATE LATCH
CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
HOLDER LEVER OUT
PLATE LATCH
Ida_06_134B
Figure 2-49. Chute Assy Out (2)
113
Revision A
2.5.8 BTR Assy & Fuser Assy

MAIN FUNCTIONS
FAN FRONT
FUSER ASSY The FUSER ASSY fixes the unsteady toner on the paper by the heat and the pressure, and also transfers the paper before and after the fixing. The FUSER ASSY mainly consists of the components shown below.
Heat Roll Heater Lamp (MAIN/SUB) Thermostat Thermistor Fuser NCS Chute Exit Dup Belt Unit Roll Assy Exit Exit Sensor Fuser EEPROM (option) STS
FUSER ASSY
Exit Sensor Detects the current position of the fixed paper based on the change in position of the Actuator.
Exit Sensor
BTR ASSY The BTR ASSY consists of the BTR (Bias Transfer Roll) and the Waste Toner Collection System. The BTR is located on the opposite side of the IDT2 included in the PHD ASSY, and transfers the toner image on the IDT2 to the paper. FAN FRONT Fan to cool the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY.
BTR ASSY Ida_06_009C
Figure 2-50. BTR Assy and Fuser Assy (1) Continue to the next page.
114
Revision A
Thermostat Fuser NCS STS
Lever Jam Lever Jam Chute Exit Dup Lever Nip
Heat Roll
Heater Lamp
HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC
Fuser Belt
FRONT
Actuator Exit Sensor
Lever Jam Lever Jam

Heat Roll
Chute Exit Dup
Fuser Belt
FRONT
Ida_06_135A.eps
Figure 2-52. BTR Assy and Fuser Assy (3)
FRONT
Ida_06_138C
Figure 2-51. BTR Assy and Fuser Assy (2)
115
Revision A
FRAME ASSY DEVE The FRAME ASSY DEVE handles developing in the print process. The FRAME ASSY DEVE consists of the following parts:
Developer (Y) Developer (M) Developer (C) Developer (K)
2.5.9 Xerographics
MAIN FUNCTIONS ROS ASSY ROS ASSY (Raster Output Scanner Assembly) is the exposure unit that outputs the laser beam to make the electrostatic latent image on the drum surface. In this manual, items concerning the ROS ASSY are simply called ROS. The ROS ASSY mainly consists of the components shown below.
Quad Beam Laser Diode Scanner Motor Assy SOS PWB Lens Mirror Window
FRAME ASSY DEVE ROS ASSY
PHD ASSY
PHD ASSY The PHD ASSY handles a sequence of charging and transferring in the print process. The PHS ASSY consists of the following parts:
Drum (Y) Drum (M) Drum (C) Drum (K) RTC (Y) RTC (M) RTC (C) RTC (K) IDT1 (two) IDT1 Cleaner (two) Refresher (Y) Refresher (M) Refresher (C) Refresher (K) IDT2 IDT2 Cleaner Tricle
DEVE ASSY
Ida_06_010B
Figure 2-53. Xerographics
116
Revision A
2.5.10 Toner Cartridge

MAIN FUNCTIONS COIL ASSY CRUM READER This PWB consists of the toner bottle switches and the CRUMs for each color. Toner Bottle Switch Detects whether the Toner Cartridges (Toner Bottles) for each color are installed or not. CRUM Stores information specific to the printer. SENSOR NO TNR (Y) SENSOR NO TNR (M) SENSOR NO TNR (C) SENSOR NO TNR (K) Detects whether toner for each color is left or not. DISPENSER ASSY (Y) (Toner Motor: Y) DISPENSER ASSY (M) (Toner Motor: M) DISPENSER ASSY (C) (Toner Motor: C) DISPENSER ASSY (K) (Toner Motor: K) The Toner Motor in the DISPENSER ASSY for each color drives both the Agitator in the Toner Cartridge and the Auger in the DISPENSER ASSY, and delivers toner to the Developer in the FRAME ASSY DEVE. The Nozzle of the DIPENSER ASSY, which is connected to the FRAME ASSY DEVE, moves back and forth in conjunction with opening and closing of the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. Toner Cartridge (Y) Toner Cartridge (M) Toner Cartridge (C) Toner Cartridge (K) Toner bottles that contain toner for each color. Figure 2-54. Toner Cartridge (1)
DISPENSER ASSY(Y) (Toner Motor : Y) DISPENSER ASSY(K) (Toner Motor : K) DISPENSER ASSY Toner Bottle Switch CRUM ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 TCRU ASSY TCRU ASSY
TCRU ASSY(Y) TCRU ASSY(M) COIL ASSY CRUM READER TCRU ASSY(C) TCRU ASSY(K)
DISPENSER ASSY(C) (Toner Motor : C) DISPENSER ASSY(M) (Toner Motor : M)
SENSOR NO TNR(Y) SENSOR NO TNR(M) SENSOR NO TNR(C) SENSOR NO TNR(K) Ida_06_011C
117
Revision A
COVER ASSY TOP PHD GUIDE FRAME DEVE L
STUD TOP
NOZZLE
FRAME ASSY DEVE
PHD ASSY
STUD TOP
COVER ASSY TOP PHD
GUIDE FRAME DEVE L
NOZZLE
FRAME ASSY DEVE
PHD ASSY
Ida_06_137A
Figure 2-55. Toner Cartridge (2)
118
Revision A
2.5.11 Frame & Drive

MAIN FUNCTIONS DRIVE ASSY MAIN Supplies the driving to the parts shown below and other parts.
PICK UP ASSY HOLDER ASSY RETARD CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT (MSI section) CHUTE ASSY REGI PHD ASSY (IDT2, IDT1, Drum) BTR ASSY
DRIVE ASSY DEVE Supplies the driving to the parts shown below and other parts.
FRAME ASSY DEVE (Develper)
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT PHD ASSY
DRIVE ASSY DEVE
DRIVE ASSY MAIN
FRAME ASSY DEVE
GEAR DEVE INPUT(Y) IDT 2 BTR ASSY Main Motor GEAR MSI Magnet Roll GEAR DEVE INPUT(M) Magnet Roll GEAR DEVE INPUT(C) Magnet Roll GEAR DEVE INPUT(K) GEAR IDLER IN DRIVE ASSY MAIN PICK UP ASSY DRIVE ASSY DEVE FRONT FRONT Ida_06_012C Magnet Roll Deve Motor
Figure 2-56. Frame and Drive
119
Revision A
PWBA EEPROM Stores information specific to each printer. HARNESS ASSY AC INLET Consists of the connector section connected to the LVPS and the inlet section connected to the power cord, and supplies the AC voltage to the LVPS from the power source.
PWBA ESS MAIN (PWB CONTROLLER) HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK PWBA EEPROM FAN REAR
2.5.12 Electrical
MAIN FUNCTIONS FAN REAR Prevents overheating inside the printer by exhausting/inhaling the ambient air. SWITCH Operates the main switch of the LVPS. LVPS There are two types of the LVPS; 100/120 V and 230 V. The LVPS not only provides AC voltage to the FUSER ASSY heater from the power source, but generates/supplies stable low DC voltage that is required for parts such as the logic circuit. The LVPS consists of the power circuit and the control circuit for the FUSER ASSY heater. PWBA MCU IDTN Controls the print operations by communicating with the printer controller and analyzing the information from the sensors and switches. The main functions are as follows. Communicates with the printer controller Receives information from the sensors and the switches Controls the DRIVE ASSY MAIN, DRIVE ASSY DEVE, DRIVE ASSY FUSER, MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM, and Toner Motor in the DISPENSER ASSY. Allocates the low DC voltage output from the LVPS among each component Controls the ROS ASSY HVPS Supplies the high voltage, which is required for charging, developing, primary transfer, secondary transfer, third transfer, and cleaning in the print process, to the BTR ASSY and the parts shown below located inside the FRAME ASSY DEVE, and PHD ASSY.
RTC Refresher Developer IDT1 IDT2 IDT1 Cleaner IDT2 Cleaner
HVPS
LVPS
HARNESS ASSY AC INLET
PWBA MCU IDTN
SWITCH Ida_06_013D
Figure 2-57. Electrical
120

HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK Turns off when any one of the front covers (the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD and the COVER ASSY TOP PHD) is opened, and cuts off the output circuit (24 VDC) from the LVPS.
Revision A
COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD
LATCH TOP IR R
COVER ASSY TOP PHD
COVER ASSY TOP PHD COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD LATCH TOP IR R
LVPS
LVPS
HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK
Electrical (1)
Ida_06_139A
Figure 2-58. Interlock Off
Figure 2-59. Interlock On
121
Revision A
2.6 Switch and Sensor

ACTUATOR DUP ACTUATOR FULL STACK
The following diagrams shows the switches and the sensors on/in the Aculaser C4200. For the functions of each component, refer to 2.5 Main Structure and Function (p104).
SENSOR DUP JAM
SENSOR FULL STACK
FUSER ASSY (Exit Sensor, Actuator)
ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI SENSOR NO PAPER (MSI)
HOLDER ASSY CTD
SENSOR TNR FULL
Toner Bottle Switch Toner Bottle Switch Toner Bottle Switch
Toner Bottle Switch
SENSOR NO TNR (K)
SENSOR NO TNR (C) SENSOR HUM SENSOR NO TNR (M)
SENSOR NO TNR (Y) SENSOR OHP
ACTUATOR REGI
SWITCH ASSY SIZE
SENSOR REGI
SENSOR NO PAPER ACTUATOR NO PAPER ACTUATOR LOW PAPER

ida_06_140C
SENSOR LOW PAPER
Figure 2-60. Switch and Sensor
Switch and Sensor
122
Revision A
2.7 Mode
2.7.1 Printing Mode
The printing modes shown in the table below are provided for the printer. Switching between the modes is controlled by the printer controller. Color Printing Mode Normal Slow 1 Slow 1 Slow 2 Slow 3 Normal Slow 1 Slow 1 Full color Slow 2 Slow 3 Printing Speed 225 mm/s 112.5 mm/s 112.5 mm/s 75 mm/s 75 mm/s 161 mm/s 112.5 mm/s 112.5 mm/s 112.5 mm/s 75 mm/s Resolution 600 dpi 600 dpi 1200 dpi 600 dpi 600 dpi 600 dpi 600 dpi 1200 dpi 600 dpi 600 dpi Paper Type Plain Plain, Thick, Envelope Plain, Thick, Envelope Plain, Thick, Extra thick, Label Plain (High gloss), Transparency Plain Plain, Thick, Envelope Plain, Thick, Envelope Plain, Thick, Extra thick, Label Plain (High gloss), Transparency
2.7.2 Operating Modes

The printer has the following six operating modes; Wait Mode Adjusting print image quality Ready Mode The printer is ready to print Printing Mode Printing is in progress Error Mode The printer has detected an error Initializing Mode The printer detected that new parts is installed at the moment (e.g. Idling after new Deve Unit is installed) Checking Unit Mode Checking the consumables
B/W
Mode
123
Revision A
2.8 Control
2.8.1 Paper Size Control
The following tabel shows the ON/OFF status of the Paper Size Switch in the SWITCH ASSY SIZE according to the paper size.
C A U T IO N
2.8.2 Paper Feeder Selection Control

Unless specified by the printer controller, tray 1 is selected as a default feeder at power-on.
C A U T IO N
The Paper Size Switches are referred to as SW1, SW2, and SW3 from the top.
The feeder section of the paper tray at the bottom of the printer is named tray 1, and the three trays of the optional Paper Cassette Unit are referred to as tray 2, tray 3, and tray 4 from the top.
2.8.3 ROS Light Intensity Control

Table 2-2. Paper Size Control
Paper size: LEGAL14" (SEF) LEGAL13" (SEF) EXECUTIVE (SEF) B5 (SEF) A4 (SEF) LETTER (SEF) A5 No cassette Paper Size Switch SW1 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF SW2 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF SW3 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF
An image data converted to electric signals (translates the data into differences in voltage) is sent to the laser diode in the ROS ASSY, and the laser diode converts the electric signals to the light signals (controls ON/OFF of the laser beam). The laser diode monitors and controls the light intensity of the laser beam to create stable electrostatic latent image without being affected by the fluctuations of the laser beam intensity, optical system (such as lenses) and drum sensitivity. The ROS of this printer has laser diodes for each yellow, magenta, cyan, and black, and the light intensity for each color is automatically adjusted.
Control
124
Revision A
Overview of the control is described below. 1. Sets the target value for the drum charging voltage and the developer DC voltage by detecting temperature and humidity with the SENSOR HUM (temperature and humidity sensor). Creates four patches (yellow, magenta, cyan, and black) onto the BTR for bias control. For the configuration of the patches, see the figure below.
Approx.11mm
2.8.4 Process Control

In order to perform stabilized printing, it is necessary to adjust the parameters related to forming images on a timely basis. The control of whole print process including adjustment of the parameters is referred to as process control. The main controls are as follows: Electric potential control Toner density control The additional controls to cover the above two controls are as follows: High Area Coverage Mode Admix Mode LED light intensity setting by the HOLDER ASSY CTD ELECTRIC POTENTIAL CONTROL To acquire stabilized print image density, the drum charging voltage and the developer DC charging voltage should be adjusted depending on the developing performance which can be changed by various factors. The adjusted drum charging voltage and the developer DC voltage are reflected in the print process control every time the adjustments are made. Electric potential control is performed just before the printing when any of the following is met. At the first print out after the power-on The number of the printed pages after the power-on is exceeded 25 pages When performing cleaning cycle during continuous printing
2.
Approx. 12mm Approx. 3mm
Approx. 57mm
K
Figure 2-61. Patches for Bias Control 3. 4. The density of the patches and the none-toner area on the BTR is measured with the HOLDER ASSY CTD (density sensor). Changes the drum charging voltage and the developer DC voltage individually for each color in accordance with the differences between the density measured in step 3 and the target value set in step 1.
Control
125

3.
Revision A
Toner Dispense Example The time that the Toner Motor spend for one revolution is predetermined and fixed. The toner dispense time described in 1) and 2) is calculated as the number of revolutions of the Toner Motor. In the following explanations, the number of revolutions of the Toner Motor is called Dispense Count. The Dispense Count calculated in the ADC process is completed during printing eight pages. For example, if the Dispense Count is judged to be lacking and require 16 times addition, the required 16 times are divided by eight and the additional revolutions are made two times per one page printing. At that time, the Dispense Count calculated in the PCDC process are added. When the ADC Dispense Count is judged to require 16 times decrease, the 16 times are subtracted from the PCDC Dispense Count during subsequent print jobs (eight pages). If the decreasing times exceeds the PCDC Dispense Count, unfinished decreasing is performed during printing the next eight pages.
TONER DENSITY CONTROL To acquire stabilized print images, toner density should be kept constant. To keep the toner density constant, the amount of toner to be refilled should be exact the same as the amount used for printing. The mechanism to enable the exact refill is called PCDC. However, as the PCDC alone is not enough to adjust the toner density, another mechanism to support the PCDC is required. This mechanism is called toner density control by the HOLDER ASSY CTD. These two mechanisms are referred to as the toner density control.
1.
PCDC (Pixel Conut Dispense Control) Calculates the amount of toner to be used in the developing process by counting the video signals that are input to the ROS ASSY. The video signal is counted by counting the number of charging and discharging of the capacitor in the CR circuit which is arranged in parallel with the video signal lines. The amount of consumed toner is calculated as toner dispense time. Refilling toner as much as the consumed amount can be made by driving the corresponding Toner Motor(s) in the DISPENSER ASSY for the calculated period of time (toner dispense time). ADC (Auto Density Control) Creates four patches (yellow, magenta, cyan, and black) on the BTR under the given electrical conditions, and measures their density with the HOLDER ASSY CTD. The measured density is compared with the reference one, and the toner dispense time is increased/decreased in subsequent print process when the measured density is lower/higher than the reference density. The amount of toner to be refilled is calculated as toner dispense time. This is calculated for each of the four colors. The ADC is performed after a print job is finished when any of the following is met. The number of the printed pages after the power-on is exceeded 25 pages When performing cleaning cycle during continuous printing
Total Dispense Count When adding 16 is required by ADC PCDC Dispense Count When subtrasting 8 is required by ADC Total Dispense Count
Additional 16 times are divided up evenly between the next 8 pages
2.
Figure 2-62. Toner Dispense
Control
126
Revision A
The light intensity is determined (light intensity setting) and adjusted (light intensity adjustment) as described below. 1. Light Intensity Setting The amount of reflected light can change a lot after replacing the BTR ASSY or cleaning the HOLDER ASSY CTD. Therefore, the light intensity setting is performed when the printer is turned on, and when the front cover is opened/ closed. In the setting, the output value from the HOLDER ASSY CTD is monitored while gradually increasing the light intensity of the LED, and the light intensity is determined just after the output value exceeds the prescribed level. If the output value does not reach the prescribed level with the highest light intensity, the printer judges that the HOLDER ASSY CTD should be cleaned. When an extremely high output value is detected, the printer judges it as HOLDER ASSY CTD failure. Light Intensity Adjustment This adjustment is performed just before creating patches for controlling toner density in the ADC process. The LED emits light at currently set intensity to check if the output value from the HOLDER ASSY CTD is within the prescribed range. When the detected output value is below the prescribed level, the LED light intensity is increased at the next ADC process, and when that is higher, the light intensity is decreased at the next ADC process. If the output value is below the level 1 lower limit, the printer judges that the sensor becomes soiled and causes a warning. If the value is lower than the level 2 lower limit, the printer judges that the sensor should be cleaned and stops a print job.
HIGH AREA COVERAGE MODE The Toner Dispense control cannot keep up with heavy consumption of toner, such as printing pages with high print ratio continuously, and leads to lower the toner density. High Area Coverage Mode is provided to resolve the problem. In this mode, if the Dispense Count reaches to a certain level during performing continuous printing, feeding the next paper is temporarily stopped to perform the toner dispense.
ADMIX MODE Even with the High Area Coverage Mode, there are some cases that cannot prevent the toner density from lowering. For example, if the printer used in a hot and humid place is moved to a cold and dry place, it will make a big difference between the reference toner density and that measured with the HOLDER ASSY CTD because the reference density level has been set for corresponding with the environment condition. Admix Mode is used in such case to stabilize the toner density. If the measured toner density with the HOLDER ASSY CTD is substantially below the reference level, toner dispense is performed immediately after the measurement.
2.
LED LIGHT INTENSITY CONTROL BY HOLDER ASSY CTD The HOLDER ASSY CTD is a reflective sensor. It emits light against the target (patches and non-toner area on the BTR) and detects the reflected light from the target with its light-sensitive element. According to the detected amount of light, it outputs electric signals. To take an accurate measurement, the sensor output value (amount of reflected light) obtained when emitting light against non-toner area on the BTR should be adjusted to the prescribed level, as the amount of reflected light depends on whether the BTR surface and HOLDER ASSY CTD surface are clean or not. To obtain the prescribed amount of reflected light regardless of the conditions, the light intensity emitted by the LED is controlled.
Control
127
Revision A
Overview of the control is described below. 1. 2. Measures the output value of the HOLDER ASSY CTD when it is detecting nontoner area on the BTR, and determines the threshold value. Creates color registration control patches on the BTR. The patches are bold lines with a width of 10 mm and arranged in the order of K, K, C, K, M, K, Y as shown in the figure below (the first K-black line is created once, and the subsequent six lines are repeated four times).
K K C K M K Y
2.8.5 Color Registration Control

This printer uses a tandem-type engine that equips exclusive drums and developer units for each Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black. As a full-color print image is generated by overlaying four images formed on the drums for each color, there is a possibility that color shift may occur. To prevent this, color registration control calculates the amount of the registration shift and adjusts the writing timing of the ROS. Also, the lateral registration control adjusts the color shift of four colors in the lateral direction. Color registration control is performed when executing the process control based on the change of temperature inside the printer and the number of printed pages.
About the perimeter of BTR
Figure 2-63. Color Registration Control Patch 3. 4. 5. Measures the density of the created patches with the HOLDER ASSY CTD. Calculates the registration shift amount by comparing the threshold value determined in Step 1 and the measured value in Step 3. Changes the ROS writing timing based on the obtained shift amount.
Control
128
Revision A
2.8.6 BTR ASSY Control

BTR ASSY ATTACHMENT DETECTION The printer detects whether the BTR ASSY is properly installed or not at power-on or when opening/closing the front cover. There is no dedicated sensor for detecting it, so the detection is made by detecting output from the HOLDER ASSY CTD. The printer judges that the BTR ASSY is installed when the HOLDER ASSY CTD output value is within the prescribed range. If the value is below the prescribed level, the BTR is turned one-half to let the HOLDER ASSY CTD to output again for the different area on the BTR, because the low output might have been caused by toner image on the BTR which is remained due to paper jam. If the output value obtained by the retry is the same or more than the prescribed level, the printer judges that the BTR ASSY is installed, if not, the printer determines that the assy is not installed.
BTR ASSY LIFE DETECTION The BTR ASSY consists of the BTR and the waste toner collection system. The life of the assy is detected by sensing full state of the Waste Toner Space. Full state of the waste toner space is detected by the SENSOR TNR FULL.
Timing to check if the waste toner space is full At power-on, or when opening/closing the front cover When ejecting papers Outputting BTR Life Warning (Worn Transfer Unit) Once the SENSOR TNR FULL detects the full state, the BTR Life Warning (Worn Transfer Unit) message is displayed. Outputting BTR Life Error (Replace Transfer Unit) After the BTR Life Warning (Worn Transfer Unit) occurs, the printer starts to count the number of printed pages and the toner dispense time, and when the cumulated value exceeds a certain level, it causes a BTR Life Error (Replace Transfer Unit). Releasing BTR Life Warning (Worn Transfer Unit)/BTR Life Error (Replace Transfer Unit) If the SENSOR TNR FULL does not detect the full state at power-on or when opening/closing the front cover, the BTR Life Error (Replace Transfer Unit) and the BTR Life Warning (Worn Transfer Unit) are canceled.
Control
129
Revision A
Releasing the No Toner Warning (uuuu Toner Low)/No Toner Error (Replace Toner uuuu) Toner dispensing is performed for 1.7 seconds when a new Toner Cartridge is installed to detect the toner presence. And then, when the SENSOR NO TNR detects that the cartridge has toner, the No Toner Warning (uuuu Toner Low) or the No Toner Error (Replace Toner uuuu) is canceled. However, the one detection by the SENSOR NO TNR cannot change the no toner status condition inside the printer. The condition recovers to normal when the printer detects toner presence signal from the SENSOR NO TNR more than three times in a row after the toner dispensing. Outputting Toner Tape Remaining Error (Install uuuu TnrCart) Toner dispensing is performed for 1.7 seconds when a new Toner Cartridge is installed to detect the toner presence. When toner presence is not detected, the toner dispensing is performed again for 1.7 seconds after 5 seconds interval. If the printer fails to detect toner presence after performing toner dispensing three times, and if the toner dispensing time is 0, the printer judges that the tape is still attached to the toner cartridge. (Install uuuu TnrCart). The printer also causes the error when the toner sensor detects no toner status during printing with insufficient dispensing time.
2.8.7 Toner Control

The Toner Cartridge Switch in the COIL ASSY CRUM READER detects whether the Toner Cartridge is installed or not, and the presence of toner in the Toner Cartridge is detected by the SENSOR NO TNR. Toner Cartridges for each color have own switches and sensors, and they detect the status individually.
ABOUT SENSOR NO TNR Toner Cartridges for each color have their own SENSOR NO TNRs. The SENSOR NO TNR, which is located on the DISPENSER ASSY, detects the Toner Cartridge presence delivered from the Toner Cartridge into the DISPENSER ASSY by the Toner Motor. Since the SENSOR NO TNR malfunctions if the surface is contaminated by toner or something, it is cleaned up by the film attached near the Auger inside the DISPENSER ASSY when dispensing toner. This film rotates together with the Auger when dispensing toner, and scrapes off the remaining toner on the surface of the SENSTOR NO TNR. Because the film rotates and contacts with the SENSOR NO TNR as mentioned above, it may hinder the sensors operation causing a false detection depending on the position of the film when the Toner Motor stops. However, this false detection is avoided by the internal control of the engine controller. TONER PRESENCE CONTROL Overview of the control is described below. Execution Timing At power-on, or when opening/closing the front cover During printing Outputting No Toner Warning (uuuu Toner Low) The printer causes No Toner Warning (uuu Toner Low) when the counter of the Toner Cartridge reaches a certain level. Outputting No Toner Error (Replace Toner uuuu) When the SENSOR NO TNR detected No Toner with certainty, No Toner Error (Replace Toner uuuu) occurs.
Control
130
Revision A
2.8.8 Fuser Control

FUSER TEMPERATURE CONTROL The Fuser Temperature Control sets up the target temperature at all times, and turns On/Off the Heater Lamp so that the surface temperature of the Heat Roll becomes the target temperature. The surface temperature of the Heat Roll is detected by the Fuser NCS (non-contact temp sensor) located at the center of the Heat Roll and the STS (Soft Touch Sensor). The NCS detects the temperature every 10 ms. The Heater Lamp is turned off if the measured temperature is higher than the target, on the other hand, the Heater Lamp is turned on if the measured temperature is lower than the target. If the STS comes off from the Heat Roll, correct temperature detection becomes impossible. It may cause the FUSER ASSY to melt or take fire during warm-up process because the printer heats up the FUSER ASSY according to the false temperature which is lower than the actual one. In order to prevent this, the Heater Lamp is automatically turned off if the temperature of the FUSER ASSY does not reach a predetermined level within specified period of time. The target temperature varies depending on conditions such as during standby, printing, or executing process control. The target temperature also changes according to the temperature detected by the SENSOR HUM (temperature and humidity sensor), temperature difference between the center and the edges of the Heat Roll, print mode, and input power voltage.
SENSOR WARMUP The Fuser NCS (non-contact sensor) located at the center of the Heat Roll cannot detect temperature correctly if the temperature of the sensor itself is minus 5 degrees C or lower. If the printer detects the condition, it warms up the sensor until the sensor temperature becomes 0 degree C. This is called sensor warm-up.
COOL-DOWN When the printing is continued for a certain period of time, temperature distribution on the Heat Roll surface becomes uneven. Cool-down is performed to equalize the surface temperature of the Heat Roll by not feeding papers for a while.If the temperature of the Heat Roll edges is high, the printer stops feeding paper until the temperature falls to the target level.
Control
131
Revision A
2.9 Detection Mechanisms

The following shows a list of detection functions. Table 2-3. Sensors
Unit MP tray Detection Item Paper presence detection Paper size detection Remaining paper detection Standard Paper Cassette Unit Cassette presence detection Paper size detection Paper presence detection Remaining paper detection (5020 sheets) Paper ejection from printer Other Full detection OHP sensor (Reference) Temperature detection (Reference) Humidity detection (Reference) Density detection Toner Cartridge New part detection Presence Detection Color detection (Misinstallation detection) Near-end detection End detection Photoconductor Unit (PHD) New part detection Unit detection Near-end detection End detection Availability Available Not available Not available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Actuator + Photo-interruptive sensor Reflective photosensor Environment sensor Environment sensor Reflective density sensor CRUM Switch + CRUM Different configuration + CRUM Software counter Photosensor CRUM CRUM Software counter Software counter Actuator + Photo-interruptive sensor Switch Detection Method Actuator + Photo-interruptive sensor One sensor detects both cassette presence and paper size. One sensor detects both cassette presence and paper size. Enter the paper size from control panel or printer driver Remarks
Detection Mechanisms
132

Table 2-3. Sensors
Unit Fuser Unit Detection Item New part detection Unit detection Near-end detection End detection Transfer Unit (BTR) New part detection Unit detection Waste toner full detection Near-end detection End detection 550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit Unit detection Cassette presence detection Option Feeder Unit Paper presence detection Remaining paper detection Paper size detection 1,100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit Unit detection Cassette presence detection Paper presence detection Remaining paper detection Paper size detection Availability Available Available Available Available Not available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Actuator + Photo-interruptive sensor Electrical continuity Switch Actuator + Photo-interruptive sensor CRUM Electrical continuity Software counter Software counter Density sensor Photosensor + software counter Waste toner full detection Software counter Electrical continuity Switch Detection Method Remarks
Revision A
One sensor detects both cassette presence and paper size. One sensor detects both cassette presence and paper size.
One sensor detects both cassette presence and paper size. One sensor detects both cassette presence and paper size.
Detection Mechanisms
133
Revision A
Table 2-4. List of Controller Outline Specifications
Item Description Connector specifications Device capacity Font Extended ROM slot Optional ROM SDRAM Specifications Standard SDRAM SDRAM slot PWM Device Specifications 90pin DIMM C533PROG, FLASH 16MB Built-in PROG 1 slot PCL5C DDR333 200pin SO DIMM 128 MB 2 slot SP4NX-C (E05C031A) Wide panel Switch x 6 LED x 3 with back light IEEE1284 compliance Built-in FAIO USB2.0 HS Installed LPHD5 40 GB C82385* SUB 100Base-TX/10Base-T ROM
2.10 Features of the Controller

MAIN FEATURES A4 color tandem engine (manufactured by FX ppm: 25 ppm (Color)/35 ppm (Monochrome)) Resolution: 600 dpi/1200 dpi (printing speed reduces by half at 1200 dpi) Clock frequency: 166.7 MHz PowerPC 750FX 600 MHz equipped DDR333 SDRAM standard: 128 MB (Max. 1 GB) Wide panel (with back light) I/F: IEEE1284, USB2.0, Network Program ROM DIMM: 16 MB (standard), ROM DIMM PCL5C (option) OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS The following shows the outline specifications of the controller.
Parallel Control panel
Max. SDRAM capacity 1 GB
Item Transceiver Specifications Specifications HDD HDDBoard Specifications
Table 2-4. List of Controller Outline Specifications

Item Engine specifications Specifications Printing speed CPU ASIC Device Memory ASICVideo ASIC I/O ASIC Panel Clock Reset Clock driver Clock frequency Reset IC Color: 25 ppm B/W: 35 ppm PowerPC 750FX-600 FMV + PLD FAIO PCC HD151TS311 166.7 MHz M51957BFP Description A4 color tandem USB TypeB Optional IDE Network standard
Features of the Controller
134
Revision A
DIAGRAM Overview concerning connections of the clock and the data bus is shown below.
IC Name CPU FMV FAIO
Table 2-5. Main element explanation

Reference IC101 IC102 IC401 IC103 IC602 EEPROM IC402 SSCG (Spread Spectrum Clock Generator) PCC RESET IC Function/Specification Device: PoserPC 750FX-600 Clock speed: 600MHz ASIC for memory control and video control ASIC for I/O control Interface between CPU and FMV Pulse duration of video signal control IC Controls frequency between FMV and engine I/F. Stores printer setting information, history, and so on. Capacity: 256 Kbyte Clock generator Controls emission noise from devices by fluctuating frequency among them. Panel control IC Resets the system by detecting power-on, power-off, and intermittent discontinuity.
PLD (Programable Logic Device) PWM (Pulth Width Modulation)
IC501 IC400 IC502
Table 2-6. Signal explanaiton

Signal Name CPUCLK SPD EVCLK PDCLK VIDEOX CMYK HSYNCX CMYK PD CMYK VSYNCX CMYK CMD STS FAIOCLK CPSCLK Function System clock for CPU A signal for getting DIMM information Video clock PWM clock Video signal Hsync signal Video data Vsync signal Engine command signal Engine status signal System clock for FAIO System clock for PCC
Figure 2-64. Block Diagram of the Circuitry
135
Revision A
2.10.1 Power Supply

The power source diagram is shown below.
Figure 2-65. Power Source Diagram
136
CHAPTER
3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Revision A
3.1 Procedure for Troubleshooting

For efficient troubleshooting, verify the condition of the trouble carefully using FIP (Fault Isolation Procedures) with reference to Chapter7 Connectors (p.471) and Chapter2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES (p.81).
3.1.2 Preliminary Check

Before starting troubleshooting, make sure that the following conditions are all met. 1. 2. The power supply voltage must be within the specification limits. (Measure the voltage at the wall socket.) The power cord must be free from damage, short circuit or breaking, and should be connected properly to the power source. The printer must be grounded properly. The printer should not be located in a place where it can be exposed to too high or low temperature, too high or low humidity, or abrupt temperature change. The printer should not be located near waterworks, humidifiers, heaters or flames, in a dusty atmosphere, or in a place where the printer can be exposed to air blasts from an air conditioner. The printer should not be located in a place where volatile or inflammable gasses are produced. The printer should not be located in a place where it can be exposed to direct sunlight. The printer must be located in a well-ventilated place. The printer must be placed on a solid, stable and flat surface.
3.1.1 Procedure for Troubleshooting

Perform troubleshooting work according to the following flowchart.
3. 4. 5.
Check the installation status
6.
Check the trouble condition Chapter2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES (p.81) Chapter7 Connectors (p.471)
7. 8. 9.
Troubleshoot using FIP
Reference Check if the trouble returns to normal
10. The paper used must conform to the specifications. (Standard paper is recommended.) 11. There should be no errors in handling of the printer.
Finish
12. The Regular Replacement Parts must have been replaced every time their respective specified number of sheets has been printed. 13. Be sure to make a test print with a new paper after reinstalling the Photoconductor unit and the FRAME ASSY DEVE.
Figure 3-1. Procedure for Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING
Procedure for Troubleshooting
138
Revision A
3.1.3 Precautions in Performing Troubleshooting Work

1. Be sure to unplug the power cord before starting troubleshooting work unless instructed to plug it in.
W A R N IN G
Never touch any live parts unnecessarily when the power is on. The power switch/inlet part of the LVPS is alive even when the power switch is turned OFF. Take care not to touch any live parts.
2.
If you perform work with the power turned ON, covers removed, and the interlock and safety switches turned ON, be sure to disconnect the ROS ASSY connector (P/ J151), except when its connection is required.
W A R N IN G
If you perform work with the power turned ON, covers removed, and the interlock and safety switches turned ON, there is a danger of the laser beam being emitted from ROS ASSY. Be sure to disconnect the ROS ASSY connector (P/J151), except when its connection is required.
3.
If you perform work with the power turned ON, the LEFT COVER removed, be sure to disconnect the HVPS connector (P/J141), except when its connection is required.
W A R N IN G
If you perform work with the power turned ON, the LEFT COVER removed, be sure to disconnect the HVPS connector (P/J141) as the HVPS may output high voltage. Be extremely careful not to touch the HVPS and the parts that output high voltage while connecting P/J141 connector on the HVPS following the instructions in FIP.
4. 5.
When touching any hot surfaces, take care not to burn yourself. Wear a wrist strap to discharge static electricity from your body.
TROUBLESHOOTING
139
Revision A
7. Taking P/J1-2PIN P/J3-4PIN as an example, the minus side P/J3-4PIN is AG (Analog Ground), SG (Signal Ground), or RTN (Return). Therefore it is possible to connect to another AG, SG, or RTN pin as the minus side instead of P/J34PIN. Before doing so, check that each AG-to-AG, SG-to-SG, or RTN-to-RTN has continuity properly. Be careful not to connect to a wrong pin since the level of AG, SG and RTN are different from each other. When measuring the voltage, perform measurement with the Photoconductor unit, Fuser unit, Transfer unit and paper cassette loaded, FRONT-COVER ASSY closed, and power ON. All voltage values given in the FIP are approximate values. Actual measured values should not be completely the same as those given in the FIP.
3.1.4 Notes on Using FIP

1. The troubleshooting method described here assumes that there is no malfunction in the printer controller (PWB CONTROLLER). If you cannot fix a problem even by following the troubleshooting procedure, replace the printer controller with a normal one and then follow the same procedure. If you cannot recover the printer from the trouble even with the printer controller replaced, replace the Possible parts that caused the error shown in FIP and related parts with new ones one by one, and repeat operation checks. Have spares of the MCU PWB, Photoconductor unit, and any other part in advance as they may be required to identify the cause of the trouble in FIP troubleshooting. Be sure to unplug the power code before starting troubleshooting work unless instructed to plug it in. Never touch any live parts unnecessarily with the power cord connected. Conventions used to represent connectors are as follows: P/J12: Indicates P/J12 connectors are connected. P12: Indicates the disconnected plug side. (except when connecting directly on the board) J12: Indicates the disconnected jack side. (except when connecting directly on the board) When, for example, P/J1-2PIN P/J3-4PIN is indicated in FIP for the voltage check, set the plus side of a measuring tool to 2PIN on P/J1 and set the minus side of the tool to 4PIN on P/J3. When, for example, P/J1 P/J2 is indicated in FIP for the voltage check, check for all the relating terminals between P/J1 and P/J2 with reference to the Chapter7 Connectors (p.471).
8.
2.
9.
3.
10. Note that FIP does not provide any description on removal of parts which are supposed to be removed to remove the target part, and the procedures. 11. Any parts listed in Possible parts that caused the error in the FIP are regarded as the source of the trouble and signifies that the parts or the assemblies (HIGH ASSY) containing those parts should be replaced with normal ones one by one, and checking should be repeated. 12. In the FIP, the paper feeder is called Tray1, the optional feeder is called tray2 (upper one), tray3 (lower one). 13. FIP may contain descriptions that distinguish between certain specifications. Be sure to follow such instructions properly to remedy the problem.
4.
5.
6.
TROUBLESHOOTING
140
Revision A
3.2 Paper Jam

If the paper jam occurs, the printer stops the operation and displays the error code on the panel.
W A R N IN G
When removing the jammed paper, be sure to wait until the Fuser unit or any other metal part in the printer cools down enough to work.
Perform paper jam-related troubleshooting work according to the following flowchart.
Ask the operator about the conditions of the trouble. Was the operator operating the printer correctly? Y
Teach the operator the right way.
Is an error code displayed on the panel? Y
Ask the operator again to verify the condition at the time of jamming, and execute a print job in the same conditions. Y N
Is the error code described in 3.2.3 Check Points for Frequent Paper Jam? Y N
Perform the troubleshooting following the instructions in 3.2.3 Check Points for Frequent Paper Jam.
Perform the troubleshooting with reference to the Paper Jam FIP.
Perform the troubleshooting with reference to the FIP given for the error message.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Paper Jam
141
Revision A
3.2.1 Paper Transferring Path and The Main Components

The diagram below shows the paper transferring path and the main sensors.
: Paper feed direction : Jam detection sensors : Paper state detection sensors FRONT SENSOR FULL STACK ROLL EXIT FUSER ASSY Exit Sensor SENSOR DUP JAM
DRUM
ROLL DUP
BTR
Base Engine
ROLL ASSY FEED (MSI) SENSOR NO PAPER
CLUTCH REGI SENSOR OHP SENSOR REGI CLUTCH TURN SENSOR LOW PAPER SENSOR NO PAPER
ROLL ASSY TURN (PICK UP ASSY) ROLL ASSY FEED (FEED) ROLL ASSY FEED (NUDGER)
1 Tray Feeder*
SENSOR LOW PAPER SENSOR NO PAPER
CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC ROLL ASSY FEED (FEED) ROLL ASSY FEED (NUDGER)
SENSOR LOW PAPER SENSOR NO PAPER 2 Tray Feeder*
CLUTCH ASSY
ROLL ASSY FEED (FEED) ROLL ASSY FEED (NUDGER)
SENSOR LOW PAPER SENSOR NO PAPER
CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC ROLL ASSY FEED (FEED) ROLL ASSY FEED (NUDGER)
Ida_01_021B
- Note "*"1 Tray Feeder: 550-sheet paper cassette 2 Tray Feeder: 1100-sheet paper cassette
TROUBLESHOOTING
Paper Jam
142

The diagram below shows the main components that are related to paper transferring
: Paper feed direction MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM
Revision A
DRIVE ASSY FUSER DRIVE ASSY MAIN SOLENOID FEED MSI CLUTCH REGI CLUTCH TURN SOLENOID FEED SWITCH ASSY SIZE Base Engine SWITCH ASSY SIZE SWITCH ASSY SIZE
Ida_01_041A
DRIVE ASSY SOLENOID FEED
CLUTCH ASSY
SOLENOID FEED CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC
TROUBLESHOOTING
Paper Jam
2 Tray Feeder
DRIVE ASSY 2ND
1 Tray Feeder
SOLENOID FEED
SWITCH ASSY SIZE
143
Revision A
3.2.2 Paper Jam Handling (FIP)

Handle the paper jam according to where it occurred. Close covers after removing the jammed paper. When the jammed paper completely removed, the printer will cancel the alarm and restart printing automatically. If the paper jam occurs frequently, check the cause of the paper jam with reference to 3.2.3 Check Points for Frequent Paper Jam, and perform cleaning for each roller if necessary.
C H E C K P O IN T
FIP-J1 Paper Jam in MP Tray / Paper Cassette [Paper Jam in MP Tray] The paper jammed in the MP tray should be removed in the following steps. 1. Pull out the jammed paper from the MP tray to remove the paper.
Always follow the procedure in this manual when removing the jammed paper. If you try to pull out the jammed paper forcedly, it will tear and the remaining pieces of paper may prevent the paper being transmitted normally. Confirm that the paper has been removed completely. Most paper jam can be resolved by removing the paper completely. Once the jammed paper has been removed, the printer starts to print the queue data first. The queue data cannot be printed first depending on where the paper jam occurred.
Ida_01_022B
2. 3.
Temporarily close the MP tray. Push up the button A located on the front side , and open the front cover . Then, check to see if any pieces of torn paper remain inside the printer.
W A R N IN G
Wait for the parts on which a label indicating CAUTION, HOT (e.g. Fuser and its surroundings) is attached to cool sufficiently before touching them. Otherwise, you will burn yourself.
Ida_01_023B
4.
Close the front cover.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Paper Jam
144

[Paper Jam in Standard Tray] The paper jammed in the standard tray should be removed in the following steps. 1. Pull the paper tray out slowly and remove it from the printer. 4. If the jammed paper cannot be seen, lower the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER located inside the opening in which the paper tray has been installed , and pull out the jammed paper .
Revision A
Ida_01_027B
5.
Ida_01_024B
2.
Remove the jammed paper or the wrinkled paper.
Push up the button A located on the front side , and open the front cover . Then, check to see if any pieces of torn paper remain inside the printer.
Ida_01_025A
6. 7.
3.
When pulling out the paper jammed inside the printer, be careful not to tear it.
Close the front cover. Push the paper tray all the way into the printer.
Id
01 023B
Ida_01_026B
Ida_01_028B
C A U T IO N
Do not push in the tray forcedly. Otherwise, the tray or the inside of the printer may be damaged.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Paper Jam
145
Revision A
FIP-J2 Paper Jam inside Printer 1. Push up the button A located on the front side , and open the front cover . 3. Return the levers located on both sides of the Fuser Unit to their original positions.
Ida_01_032B Ida_01_031B
4.
2.
Push down the levers on both ends of the Fuser Unit, and remove the jammed paper. If the paper tears, remove the pieces of paper that remain inside the printer.
Ida_01_030B
Ida_01_029A
C A U T IO N
Do not touch the fuser section as it is hot. Otherwise, you will burn yourself.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Paper Jam
146

4. Close the front cover.
Revision A
FIP-J3 Paper Jam in Paper Eject Section 1. Push up the button B located on the right side , and open the upper part of the front cover .
Ida_01_033B
5.
Push up the button A located on the front side , and open the front cover .
Ida_01_031B
2.
Push up the levers on both ends of the Fuser Unit, and remove the jammed paper. If the paper tears, remove the pieces of paper that remain inside the printer.
Ida_01_023B
6.
Ida_01_032B
C A U T IO N
Do not touch the fuser section as it is hot. Otherwise, you will burn yourself. Remove the Fuser unit and check if the paper remains in the printer.
If the jammed paper can be seen, remove it and proceed to Step 7. If the jammed paper cannot be seen, close the front cover. In this case, the following steps are not required.
3.
Return the levers located on both sides of the Fuser Unit to their original positions.
Ida_01_034B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Paper Jam
147

7. Close the front cover. 10. When pulling out the paper jammed inside the printer, be careful not to tear it.
Revision A
Ida_01_026B
Ida_01_030B
C A U T IO N
When the paper jam occurs in the fuser section, the next paper may have been already fed from the paper tray. Make sure to check that no paper is remaining in the printer following Step 8 through 14.
11. If the jammed paper cannot be seen, lower the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER located inside the opening in which the paper tray has been installed , and pull out the jammed paper .
8.
Pull the paper tray out slowly and remove it from the printer. If the optional paper cassette unit is installed, remove the lower tray first.
Ida_01_027B
12. Push up the button A located on the front side , and open the front cover . Then, check to see if any pieces of torn paper remain inside the printer.
Ida_01_024B
9.

Ida_01_023B
Ida_01_025A
TROUBLESHOOTING
Paper Jam
148

13. Close the front cover.
Revision A
FIP-J4 Paper Jam in the Duplex Assy 1. Push up the button B located on the right side , and open the upper part of the front cover .
Ida_01_030B
14. Push the paper tray all the way into the printer.
Ida_01_031B
2.
Remove the jammed paper. If the paper tears, remove the pieces of paper that remain inside the printer.
Ida_01_028B
C A U T IO N
Ida_01_035A
3.
Ida_01_033B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Paper Jam
149

4. Push up the button A located on the front side , and open the front cover . Then, check to see if any pieces of torn paper remain inside the printer.
Revision A
FIP-J5 Paper Jam in the Option Cassette 1. Remove the cassettes beginning at the bottom one to find the jammed paper.
Ida_01_038B
5.
Ida_01_036B
C A U T IO N
If paper is jammed just after being fed from the tray, the paper may be in contact with the bottom of the upper tray. The upper cassette or the standard tray may not be removed due to the paper jammed in the cassette located lower than them.
Ida_01_039B
2.
6.
Push the paper tray all the way into the printer.
Ida_01_025A
3.
When pulling out the paper jammed inside the printer, be careful not to tear it. If the paper tears, pieces of torn paper remain inside the printer.
C A U T IO N
Ida_01_040B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Paper Jam
150
Revision A
3.2.3 Check Points for Frequent Paper Jam

When paper jams occur frequently, check the following: Table 3-1. Check Points for Frequent Paper Jam
LED Message Areas where the paper jam is occurring Common to all areas Check point Both type and size of the paper used should meet the specifications for the printer. The paper used should be new, dry and free from any curl or damage. The paper should be loaded in the tray properly. It should not be placed separately, and aligned against the side and end guide properly. There should be no foreign matters on the paper transferring path. The parts comprising the paper transferring path should not have any burrs, scratches, and damages. The amount of the paper loaded in the tray should be within the specification. The Photoconductor unit should be installed properly. Remedy
---
---
Paper Jam A C (Feed Jam)
The lower part of the Photoconductor The following rollers should be installed properly without dirt or misalignment. unit ROLL ASSY FEED Option Feeder ROLL ASSY RETARD (MSI) ROLL TURN MSI ROLL ASSY TURN CHUTE ASSY FEEDER ROLL ASSY FEED ROLL ASSY RETARD (Paper Cassette) On the path from the MP tray or the paper tray to the Photoconductor unit. The Photoconductor unit should be installed properly. The ROLL REGI RUBBER and ROLL REGI METAL should be installed properly without dirt or misalignment. The SENSOR REGI should be installed properly. The Actuator of the above sensor should be installed properly without dirt or misalignment.
FIP-J1 (p144), FIP-J5 (p150)
Paper Jam A (Regi Jam)
FIP-J2 (p146)
On the path from the Photoconductor unit to the Fuser unit Paper Jam A B (Fuser Jam)
The rollers inside the Transfer unit should be installed properly without dirt or misalignment. The rollers inside the Fuser unit should be installed properly without dirt or misalignment. The rollers inside the ROLL EXIT and ROLL PINCH ASSY should be installed properly without dirt or misalignment. The Exit Sensor inside the Fuser unit should be installed properly. The Actuator of the above sensor should be installed properly without dirt or misalignment. The ROLL DUP and ROLL PINCH DUP should be installed properly without dirt or misalignment. The SENSOR REGI and SENSOR DUP should be installed properly. The Actuator of the above sensor should be installed properly without dirt or misalignment.
FIP-J3 (p147)
Paper Jam B (Duplex Jam)
On the path from the Duplex Assy exit to the Photoconductor unit
FIP-J4 (p149)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Paper Jam
151
Revision A
3.3 Level 1 FIP

3.3.1 Level 1 FIP
The Level 1 FIP is the first step to diagnose troubles. The Level 1 FIP diagnoses a error code and various types of trouble conditions, and the Level 2 FIP provides instructions for troubleshooting.
3.3.2 The flow of Level 1 FIP
Ask the operator about the conditions of the trouble. Was the operator operating the printer correctly? Y
Turn the power switch off and back on.
Instruct the operator how to operate the printer.
Does the error recur when making a printout in a condition in which the error occurred? Y
End of procedure
When a LCD massage is displayed.
Refer to 3.4.1 List of Warnings and Errors. Refer to 3.4.3 Engine-related Trouble FIP.
When paper jam is occurring.
Refer to 3.2 Paper Jam.
When a print quality problem is occurring.
Refer to 3.4.5 Print Quality Trouble FIP.
When abnormal noise is being generated.
Refer to 3.5.1 Abnormal Noise-related Troubleshooting Entry Chart. Refer to 3.5.2 Abnormal Noise-related FIP.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 1 FIP
152
Revision A
3.4 Level 2 FIP

The Level 2 FIP is failure diagnosis procedure that is classified based on error codes or various types of trouble conditions. The cause of trouble can be determined in short period of time by using the procedures described in the FIP or check points.
3.4.1 List of Warnings and Errors

3.4.1.1 Main Unit
Table 3-2. List of Warnings and Errors (Main Unit)
Class LCD Message Y Toner Low M Toner Low C Toner Low K Toner Low Description A remaining amount of yellow toner fell to below about 20 %. A remaining amount of magenta toner fell to below about 20 %. Operation* Solution The printer continues printing. Replace the Toner cartridge (Y). The printer continues printing. Replace the Toner cartridge (M). A remaining amount of cyan toner fell to below about 20 %. A remaining amount of black toner fell to below about 20 %. The printer continues printing. Replace the Toner cartridge (C). The printer continues printing. Replace the Toner cartridge (K). Worn Photoconductor Photoconductor unit reached the end of its life cycle. Warning Worn Transfer Unit Worn Fuser Worn Y Dev Unit Worn M Dev Unit Worn C Dev Unit Worn K Dev Unit Transfer unit is approaching the end of its life cycle. Fuser unit reached the end of its life cycle. The printer continues printing. Replace the Photoconductor unit. The printer continues printing. Replace the Transfer unit. The printer continues printing. Replace the Fuser unit. DEVE ASSY (Y) is approaching the end of its life cycle. DEVE ASSY (M) is approaching the end of its life cycle. The printer continues printing. Replace the DEVE ASSY (Y). The printer continues printing. Replace the DEVE ASSY (M). DEVE ASSY (C) is approaching the end of its life cycle. DEVE ASSY (K) is approaching the end of its life cycle. The printer continues printing. Replace the DEVE ASSY (C). The printer continues printing. Replace the DEVE ASSY (K). FIP-24 (p.181) FIP-24 (p.181) FIP-24 (p.181) FIP-24 (p.181) FIP-32 (p.188) FIP-31 (p.187) FIP-22 (p.180) FIP-30 (p.186) FIP-29 (p.185) FIP-28 (p.184) FIP-27 (p.183) See FIP
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
153

Class LCD Message Install Y TnrCart Description The Toner Bottle Switch detected Toner cartridge (Y) was not installed. A toner tape has not been pulled out from Toner cartridge (Y). Install M TnrCart The Toner Bottle Switch detected Toner cartridge (M) was not installed. The printer cannot print. Install Toner cartridge (Y). The printer cannot print. Pull out the toner tape and install the toner cartridge. The printer cannot print. Install Toner cartridge (M). A toner tape has not been pulled out from Toner cartridge (M). Install C TnrCart The Toner Bottle Switch detected Toner cartridge (C) was not installed. The printer cannot print. Pull out the toner tape. The printer cannot print. Install Toner cartridge (C). A toner tape has not been pulled out from Toner cartridge (C). Install K TnrCart Error The Toner Bottle Switch detected Toner cartridge (K) was not installed. The printer cannot print. Pull out the toner tape. The printer cannot print. Install Toner cartridge (K). A toner tape has not been pulled out from Toner cartridge (K). Install Photoconductor Photoconductor unit is not installed. Install Transfer Unit Install Fuser Transfer unit is not installed. The printer cannot print. Pull out the toner tape. The printer cannot print. Install Photoconductor unit. The printer cannot print. Install Transfer unit. The printer detected that Fuser unit was not installed. The ID of the Fuser unit differs from the recorded one. Replace Toner Y Replace Toner M Toner cartridge (Y) is empty. The printer cannot print. Install the Fuser unit. The printer cannot print. Replace the Fuser unit. The printer cannot print. Replace the Toner cartridge (Y). Toner cartridge (M) is empty. The printer cannot print. Replace the Toner cartridge (M). Operation* Solution
Revision A
See FIP
FIP-1 (p.163) FIP-45 (p.199) FIP-2 (p.163) FIP-44 (p.198) FIP-3 (p.164) FIP-44 (p.198) FIP-4 (p.164) FIP-44 (p.198) FIP-5 (p.165) FIP-6 (p.166) FIP-7 (p.167) FIP-43 (p.197) FIP-35 (p.190) FIP-36 (p.191)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
154

Class LCD Message Replace Toner C Replace Toner K Replace Photoconductor Toner cartridge (C) is empty. Description The printer cannot print. Replace the Toner cartridge (C). Toner cartridge (K) is empty. Photoconductor unit is approaching the end of its life cycle. The printer cannot print. Replace the Toner cartridge (K). The printer continues printing. Replace the Photoconductor unit. The printer cannot print. Replace the Transfer unit. Wrong Photoconductor Wrong Toner Y Wrong Toner M Error Wrong Toner C Wrong Toner K TonerCart Error Y TonerCart Error M TonerCart Error C TonerCart Error K Clean Sensor The ID of the Photoconductor unit differs from the recorded one. The ID of the Toner cartridge (Y) differs from the recorded one. The printer cannot print. Replace the Photoconductor unit. The printer cannot print. Replace the Toner cartridge (Y). The ID of the Toner cartridge (M) differs from the recorded one. The ID of the Toner cartridge (C) differs from the recorded one. The printer cannot print. Replace the Toner cartridge (M). The printer cannot print. Replace the Toner cartridge (C). The ID of the Toner cartridge (K) differs from the recorded one. Toner cartridge (Y) CRUM communication error occurred. The printer cannot print. Replace the Toner cartridge (K). The printer cannot print. Turn the printer off and back on. Toner cartridge (M) CRUM communication error occurred. Toner cartridge (C) CRUM communication error occurred. The printer cannot print. Turn the printer off and back on. The printer cannot print. Turn the printer off and back on. Toner cartridge (K) CRUM communication error occurred. The signal level of the HOLDER ASSY CTD is out of specified range. The printer cannot print. Turn the printer off and back on. The printer cannot print. Clean the HOLDER ASSY CTD and close the front cover. Operation* Solution
Revision A
See FIP
FIP-37 (p.192) FIP-38 (p.193) FIP-39 (p.194) FIP-40 (p.195) FIP-8 (p.167) FIP-42 (p.196) FIP-42 (p.196) FIP-42 (p.196) FIP-42 (p.196) FIP-44 (p.198) FIP-44 (p.198) FIP-44 (p.198) FIP-44 (p.198) FIP-25 (p.181)
Replace Transfer Unit The Transfer unit reached the end of its life cycle.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
155

Class LCD Message Printer Open Paper Out ttt sss The front cover is opened. The paper cassette has run out of paper. Description The printer cannot print. Close the front cover. The printer continues printing feeding papers from another paper cassette. Load sss-sized paper in the ttt cassette. Install LC1 The standard paper cassette is not installed, or not installed properly. The printer continues printing feeding papers from another paper cassette. Insert the paper cassette properly. Face-down Full LC3 error 001 A full state of the Paper Eject Tray was detected. The printer cannot print. Take out the printed papers on the Paper Eject Tray. The printer detected that two optional 550-sheet paper cassettes are installed. Plain paper is detected while transparency is selected as media. Transparency is detected while plain paper is selected as media. Transparency is detected at power-on, or when the interlock is closed. The SENSOR REGI could not detect paper within the specified time. The printer cannot print. Remove one of the cassette units following the option installation specification. The printer cannot print. Remove the jammed paper and turn the printer off and back on. The printer does not feed the next paper after ejecting the current paper. Open the cassette or Cover A to remove the jammed paper, then close the front cover. Paper Jam A Operation* Solution
Revision A
See FIP
FIP-26 (p.182)
FIP-32 (p.188)
FIP-33 (p.189)
FIP-34 (p.189)
FIP-46 (p.199)
Error
Check Transparency
FIP-9 (p.168)
Paper Jam A C
FIP-10 (p.169)
The SENSOR REGI could not detect paper within the specified time, or the The printer cannot print. sensor detected paper presence when the printer was turned on or when the Open Cover A, or opening cover D and removing the Photoconductor FIP-11 (p.171) interlock was closed. Unit may be required to remove the jammed paper. Then close the front cover. The Exit Sensor in the Fuser could not detect paper within the specified time, or the sensor detected paper presence when the printer was turned on or when the interlock was closed. The printer cannot print. Open Cover A and Cover B to remove the jammed paper, then close the FIP-12 (p.172) front cover. FIP-13 (p.173)
Paper Jam A B
Paper Jam B
The SENSOR DUP JAM could not detect paper within the specified time, or The printer cannot print. the sensor detected paper presence when the printer was turned on or when Open Cover B to remove the jammed paper, then close the front cover. the interlock was closed.
Note *:
Describes the printer action when the warning or error occurs.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
156
Revision A
3.4.1.2 Options
Table 3-3. List of Errors (550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit) Class LCD Message
Paper Jam A C
Description
The SENSOR REGI could not detect paper within the specified time.
Operation* Solution
Open the cassette or Cover A to remove the jammed paper, then open and close the front cover.
See FIP
The printer does not feed the next paper after ejecting the current paper. FIP-O1 (p200)
Error
Paper Out ttt sss
The optional 550-sheet paper cassette has run out of set-sized (sss) paper.
The printer continues printing feeding papers from another paper cassette. Load the sss-sized paper in the cassette. The printer continues printing feeding papers from another paper cassette. Insert the paper cassette correctly.
FIP-O2 (p202)
Install LC1
The optional 550-sheet paper cassette is not installed, or not installed properly.
FIP-O3 (p202)
Note *:
Table 3-4. List of Errors (1100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit) Class LCD Message
Paper Jam A C
Description
The SENSOR REGI could not detect paper within the specified time.
Operation* Solution
Open the cassette or Cover A to remove the jammed paper, then open and close the front cover.
See FIP
The printer does not feed the next paper after ejecting the current paper. FIP-O5 (p204)
Error
Paper Out LC3, LC4, The optional 1100-sheet paper cassette has run out of set-sized (sss) paper. (LC2) sss Install LC1 (LC2, LC3) The optional 1100-sheet paper cassette is not installed, or not installed properly.
The printer continues printing feeding papers from another paper cassette. Load the sss-sized paper in the cassette. The printer continues printing feeding papers from another paper cassette. Insert the paper cassette correctly.
FIP-O6 (p207)
FIP-O7 (p207)
Note *:
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
157
Revision A
3.4.2 List of Service Request

1
Table 3-5. List of Service Request

Class Code 100 101 Laser power has weakened. SOS signal cannot be detected. Description The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. FIP-15 (p.174) Operation* Solution See FIP FIP-14 (p.174)
Engine Related (E)
The printer detected that the Temp Sensor is broken. The printer cannot print. Abnormal high temperature was detected (approx. 250 degrees C or more). Go to FIP. Abnormal low temperature was detected during printing (approx. 100 degrees or lower). Abnormal temperature difference was detected between the center and the end of the Fuser Roll. The printer detected that the circuit for the Fuser Roll center sensor is in failure. The printer detected that the Fuser Roll center sensor is abnormal. Abnormal warm-up time was detected. (Ready waiting time exceeded 60 seconds.) Abnormal low temperature was detected (approx. 180 seconds or more). Abnormal Temp sensor warm-up time was detected (approx. 30 minutes or more at 0 degree C or less). NV-RAM error The HOLDER ASSY CTD power has weakened. Fan Motor failure. Motor failure (Main Drive Motor/Deve Motor/Fuser Motor) Firmware error Temperature of 100 degrees or more, or 20 degrees or less was detected. Humidity of 100 % or more was detected. DEVE ASSY (Y) reached its end of life. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP.
102 103 104 105 106 107 201
FIP-16 (p.175) FIP-17 (p.175) FIP-18 (p.176) FIP-19 (p.177) FIP-20 (p.178) FIP-21 (p.179) FIP-41 (p.195)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
158

Class Code 202 203 204 205 206 207 Engine Related (E) 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 Description DEVE ASSY (M) reached its end of life. DEVE ASSY (M) and (Y) reached its end of life. DEVE ASSY (C) reached its end of life. DEVE ASSY (C) and (Y) reached its end of life. DEVE ASSY (C) and (M) reached its end of life. DEVE ASSY (C), (M) and (Y) reached its end of life. DEVE ASSY (K) reached its end of life. DEVE ASSY (K) reached its end of life. DEVE ASSY (K) and (Y) reached its end of life. DEVE ASSY (K), (M) and (Y) reached its end of life. DEVE ASSY (K) and (C) reached its end of life. DEVE ASSY (K), (C) and (Y) reached its end of life. DEVE ASSY (K), (C) and (M) reached its end of life. DEVE ASSY (K), (C), (M) and (Y) reached its end of life. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. Operation* Solution
Revision A
See FIP
FIP-41 (p.195)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
159

Class Code 0017 0081 0082 0083 0084 Controller Related (C) 0085 0086 0087 0088 0089 0090 0091 0092 Description CPU error (undefined interruption) CPU error (TLB modification exception) CPU error (TLB miss exception [Load/Fetch]) CPU error (TLB miss exception [Store]) CPU error (address error exception [Load/Fetch]) CPU error (address error exception [Store]) CPU error (bus error exception [Fetch]) CPU error (bus error exception [Load/Store]) CPU error (SYSCALL exception) CPU error (Break exception) CPU error (reserving command exception) CPU error (unused coprocessor exception) CPU error (FPU exception) The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. Operation* Solution
Revision A
See FIP
3.4.4 Controllerrelated Trouble FIP (p209)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
160

Class Code 0093 0094 0095 0096 0097 Controller Related (C) 0098 0128-0254 0255 0256 0257 0258 0800 0998 CPU error (TLB exception) CPU error (XTLB exception) CPU error (cache exception) CPU error (Trap exception) CPU error (FPU exception) CPU error (watch exception) CPU error (undefined trap) CPU error (NMI exception) CPU error (divide by 0) CPU error (arithmetic overflow) CPU error (break occurrence) IPL error (controller defect) Engine communication error (only when power-on) Description The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. Operation* Solution
Revision A
See FIP
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
161

Class Code 999 1000 1001 1002 Controller Related (C) 1020 1021 1400 1700 1702 1999 0017 Note *: Description Engine flash ROM has no program data Standard RAM error (not installed, etc.) Standard RAM error (standard stack is undefined, etc.) Standard RAM error (standard size is undefined, etc.) RAM error (slot 0) RAM error (slot 1) Engine initialization error Loopback test failure of network board Network board uninstalled Other hardware errors CPU error (undefined interruption) The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. The printer cannot print. Go to FIP. Operation* Solution
Revision A
See FIP
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
162
Revision A
3.4.3 Engine-related Trouble FIP

3.4.3.1 Main Unit
FIP-1 Install Y Tnrcart
Step Check Yes No
FIP-2 Install M TnrCart

Step Check Yes No
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Toner cartridge (Y) COLL ASSY CRUM READER ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 (Y) HARNESS ASSY TNR Continuity Check of the Toner Bottle Switch(Y) 1. Disconnect P/J342 connector of COIL ASSY CRUM READER. 2. While pressing the Toner Bottle Switch(Y), check the P3425PIN<=>P342-4PIN for continuity. Is there normal continuity between them? Go to Step [3]. Replace the COIL ASSY CRUM READER. (p340)
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Toner cartridge (M) COIL ASSY CRUM READER ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 (M) HARNESS ASSY TNR Continuity Check of the Toner Bottle Switch Go to Step [3]. (M) 1. Disconnect P/J342 connector of COIL ASSY CRUM READER. 2. While pressing the Toner Bottle Switch(M), check the P3425PIN<=>P342-3PIN for continuity. Is there normal continuity between them? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Replace the TNR PWBA MCU 1. Disconnect P/J342 connector on the COIL IDTN. (p351) ASSY CRUM READER, and P/J51 connector of PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J51<=>J342. Is there normal continuity between them? Replace the COIL ASSY CRUM READER. (p340)
3
Replace the HARNESS ASSY TNR.
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Replace the TNR PWBA MCU 1. Disconnect P/J342 connector on the COIL IDTN. (p351) ASSY CRUM READER, and P/J51 connector of PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J51<=>J342. Is there normal continuity between them?
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY TNR (J51-J342)
C H E C K P O IN T
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
163
Revision A
FIP-3 Install C TnrCart

Step Check Yes No
FIP-4 Install K TnrCart

Step Check Yes No
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Toner cartridge (C) COIL ASSY CRUM READER ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 (C) HARNESS ASSY TNR Continuity Check of the Toner Bottle Go to Step [3]. Switch(C) 1. Disconnect P/J342 connector of COIL ASSY CRUM READER. 2. While pressing the Toner Bottle Switch (C), check the P342-5PIN<=>P342-2PIN for continuity. Is there normal continuity between them? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Replace the TNR PWBA MCU 1. Disconnect P/J342 connector on the COIL IDTN. (p351) ASSY CRUM READER, and P/J51 connector of PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J51<=>J342. Is there normal continuity between them? Replace the COIL ASSY CRUM READER. (p340)
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Toner cartridge (K) COIL ASSY CRUM READER ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 (K) HARNESS ASSY TNR Continuity Check of the Toner Bottle Go to Step [3]. Switch(K) 1. Disconnect P/J342 connector of the COIL ASSY CRUM READER. 2. While pressing the Toner Bottle Switch (K), check the P342-5PIN<=>P342-1PIN for continuity. Is there normal continuity between them? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Replace the TNR PWBA MCU 1. Disconnect P/J342 connector on the COIL IDTN. (p351) ASSY CRUM READER, and P/J51 connector of PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J51<=>J342. Is there normal continuity between them? Replace the COIL ASSY CRUM READER. (p340)
C H E C K P O IN T
C H E C K P O IN T
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
164
Revision A
FIP-5 Install Photoconductor

Step Check Yes No
1 2 3
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Photoconductor unit PWBA CRUM in the Photoconductor unit Connection Check of the PWBA CRUM Is the PWBA CRUM connector connected to the harness connector correctly? Go to Step [3]. Reconnect the HARNESS ASSY PHD2. Replace the HARNESS ASSY PHD2.
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. PHD2 1. Disconnect P/J710 connector on the FRAME ASSY DEVE and P/J484 connector of the HARNESS ASSY FAN/ PHD/MOT. 2. Check the continuity of J710<=>J484. Is there normal continuity between them? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT 1. Disconnect P/J484 connector of the HARNESS ASSY PHD2, and P/J48 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of P484<=>J48. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the Photoconductor unit Replace the Photoconductor unit with a new one. Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [5].
Replace the HARNESS ASSY FAN/ PHD/MOT.
Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351)
End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY PHD2 (J710-J484) HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT (P484-J48)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
165
Revision A
FIP-6 Install Transfer Unit

Step Check Yes No
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC (J136-J36)
1 2 3 4 5
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Transfer unit HOLDER ASSY CTD Cleaning of the Transfer unit Check the BTR surface for dirt, and clean it. Does the error still occur? Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
Cleaning of the HOLDER ASSY CTD Go to Step [4]. Clean the detection part of the HOLDER ASSY CTD with a soft cloth. Does the error still occur? Connection Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [5]. FSR/ADC Is the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC is securely connected to the HOLDER ASSY CTD? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC 1. Disconnect P/J136 connector on the HOLDER ASSY CTD, and P/J36 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J136<=>J36. Is there normal continuity between them? Go to Step [6].
End of procedure
Reinstall the part(s) correctly.
Replace the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC.
Check of the HOLDER ASSY CTD Go to Step [7]. Replace the HOLDER ASSY CTD with a new one. (p291) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Check of the Transfer unit Replace the Transfer unit with a new one. (p290) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351)
End of procedure
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
166
Revision A
FIP-7 Install Fuser

Step Check Yes No
FIP-8 Wrong Photoconductor

Step Check Yes No
1 2
Initial Check Reinstall the part Go to Step [2]. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? correctly. Fuser unit Check of the Fuser unit 1. Remove the Fuser unit. (p289) 2. Measure the resistance value of P361B5<=>P361-B4. Is the measured value 400K or less? Check of the Fuser unit 1. Remove the Fuser unit. (p289) 2. Measure the resistance value of P361B2<=>P361-B3. Is the measured value 7000K or less? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC 1. Disconnect P/J361 connector of the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC, and P/J36 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J36<=>J361. Is there normal continuity between them? Go to Step [3]. Replace the Fuser unit. (p289)
1 2 3
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Photoconductor unit PWBA CRUM in the Photoconductor unit Connection Check of the PWBA CRUM Is the PWBA CRUM connector connected to the harness connector correctly? Go to Step [3]. Reconnect the HARNESS ASSY PHD2. Replace the HARNESS ASSY PHD2.
Go to Step [4].
Replace the Fuser unit. (p289)
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. PHD2 1. Disconnect P/J710 connector on the FRAME ASSY DEVE and P/J484 connector of the HARNESS ASSY FAN/ PHD/MOT. 2. Check the continuity of J710<=>J484. Is there normal continuity between them? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT 1. Disconnect P/J484 connector of the HARNESS ASSY PHD2, and P/J48 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of P484<=>J48. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the Photoconductor unit Replace the Photoconductor unit with a new one. Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [5].
C H E C K P O IN T
End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
167
Revision A
FIP-9 Check Transparency

Step Check Yes No
1 2
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? SENSOR OHP CHUTE REGI IN Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY OHP 1. Disconnect P/J201 connector of the SENSOR OHP, and P/J20 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J201<=>J20. Is there normal continuity between them? Replacing Check of the SENSOR OHP Replace the SENSOR OHP with a new one. (p281) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [3]. Replace the HARNESS ASSY OHP.
End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY OHP (J20-J201)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
168
Revision A
FIP-10 Paper Jam A C If multi-feed error occurs, refer to the Multi-Feed in the FIP (p227).
Step
Check
Yes
No Go to Step [6].
5 6
C A U T IO N
Operation Check of the Main Drive Motor Go to Step [9]. Does the Main Drive Motor rotate when making a test print? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT 1. Disconnect P/J481 connector on the DRIVE ASSY MAIN, and P/J48 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J481<=>J48. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN Replace the DRIVE ASSY MAIN with a new one. (p344) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [7].
Step
Check Initial Check Check for the following items. Is there anything wrong among them? Installation state of the paper cassette. Condition of the papers in the cassette. Wear or damage of the roller or gear in the feeder. Paper dust or foreign material on the paper path. Installation state of the SENSOR REGI. Installation state of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN.
Yes Reinstall the part(s) correctly or replace the defective part.
No Go to Step [2].
Go to Step [8].
End of procedure
8 9
Check the Interlock Switch Go to FIP-DC Is the Interlock Switch pressed down normally? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [10]. FRONTCLH 1. Disconnect P/J191 connector of the CLUTCH TURN, and P/J19 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J191<=>J19. Is there normal continuity between them? Check the CLUTCH TURN Replace the CLUTCH TURN with a new one. (p287) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Operation Check of the SOLENOID FEED Does the Feed Gear in the Feeder rotate when making a test print?
Reinstall the part(s) correctly. Replace the HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH.
2 3
Connection Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. REGI SNS Is the HARNESS ASSY REGI SNS connected to the SENSOR REGI connector correctly? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY REGI SNS 1. Disconnect P/J181 connector of the SENSOR REGI, and P/J18 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J181<=>J18. Is there normal continuity between them? Check the SENSOR REGI Replace the SENSOR REGI with a new one. (p279) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [4].
Replace the HARNESS ASSY REGI SNS.
10
Go to Step [11] if End of procedure the jam occurs in Tray. Go to Step [14] if the jam occurs in MSI. Replace the paper Go to Step [12]. if there is no missing part or any other abnormality.
Go to Step [5].
End of procedure
11
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
169
Revision A
Step
Check
Yes
No Replace the HARNESS ASSY FDR.
Step
Check Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP 1. Disconnect P/J132 connector of the SOLENOID FEED MSI, and P/J13 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J13<=>P132. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the SOLENOID FEED MSI Replace the SOLENOID FEED MSI with a new one. (p296) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
Yes Go to Step [17].
No Replace the HARNESS ASSY FRONT/ DUP.
12
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [13]. FDR 1. 1. Disconnect P/J474 connector of the SOLENOID FEED, and P/J47 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J47<=>J474. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the SOLENOID FEED Replace the SOLENOID FEED with a new one. (p273) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
16
13
Check if the End of procedure spring or stopper is securely attached on the SOLENOID FEED. Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN if the error still occurs. (p351) Replace the paper Go to Step [16]. if there is no missing part or any other abnormality. Check if the Go to Step [16]. spring or stopper is securely attached on the SOLENOID FEED MSI. Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN if the error still occurs. (p351)
17
Check if the End of procedure spring or stopper is securely attached on the SOLENOID FEED MSI. Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN if the error still occurs. (p351)
14 15
Operation Check of the SOLENOID FEED MSI Does the Feed Gear in the MSI rotate when making a test print? Check of the SOLENOID FEED MSI Close the Interlock Switch before checking. Does the SOLENOID FEED MSI function normally?
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY REGISNS (J181-J18) HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT (P481-J48) HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH (P191-J19) HARNESS ASSY FDR (J47-J474) HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP (J13-P132)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
170
Revision A
FIP-11 Paper Jam A

Step Check Yes No
Step
Check Check of the CHUTE ASSY REGI Does the Roll rotate smoothly when turning it with your hand?
Yes
No
1 2 3
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? ACTUATOR REGI CHUTE ASSY REGI Connection Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. REGI SNS Is the HARNESS ASSY REGI SNS connected to the SENSOR REGI connector correctly? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY REGI SNS 1. Disconnect P/J181 connector of the SENSOR REGI, and P/J18 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J181<=>J18. Is there normal continuity between them? Check the SENSOR REGI Replace the SENSOR REGI with a new one. (p279) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [4]. Reinstall the part(s) correctly.
Check the Replace the CHUTE ASSY CHUTE ASSY REGI if its gear is REGI. (p283) engaged correctly. Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN if the error still occurs. (p351)
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY REGISNS (J181-J18) HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH (P191-J19)
Go to Step [5].
End of procedure
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [6]. FRONTCLH 1. Disconnect P/J192 connector of the CLUTCH REGI, and P/J19 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of P192<=>J19. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the CLUTCH REGI Replace the CLUTCH REGI with a new one. (p286) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [7].
Replace the HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH.
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
171
Revision A
FIP-12 Paper Jam A B

Step Check Yes No
Step
Check
Yes
No End of procedure
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Actuator in the Exit Sensor Fuser unit Cover CHUTE DUP IN Transfer unit Photoconductor unit Check of the Fuser unit connector Disconnect the Fuser unit. Are the connector pins bent or broken? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC 1. Disconnect P/J361 connector of the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC, and P/J36 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J361<=>J36. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the Fuser unit Replace the Fuser unit with a new one. (p289) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [3]. Replace the defective part. Replace the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC.
Check of the Fuser Motor Replace the Replace the DRIVE ASSY FUSER with a new PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351) one. (p294) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC (J361-J36) HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR (J52-J521)
2 3
Go to Step [4].
4 5 6
Go to Step [5].
End of procedure
Operation Check of the Fuser Motor Check if the gears Go to Step [6]. Does the Fuser Motor rotate when making a test are properly engaged. print? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR 1. Disconnect P/J521 connector of the DRIVE ASSY FUSER, and P/J52 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J52<=>J521. Is there normal continuity between them? Go to Step [7]. Replace the HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
172
Revision A
FIP-13 Paper Jam B

Step Check Yes No
Step
Check Does the Exit Roll rotate smoothly when turning it with your hand?
Yes Check if the papers are bent or warped. Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN if the error still occurs. (p351)
No Check if there is any foreign material on the gears.
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM ACTUATOR DUP CHUTE DUP OUT Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. FRONT/DUP 1. Disconnect P/J133 connector of the SENSOR DUP JAM, and P/J13 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J133<=>J13. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the SENSOR DUP JAM Replace the SENSOR DUP JAM with a new one. (p305) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [4]. Replace the HARNESS ASSY FRONT/ DUP.
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP (J133-J13, J13-P501)
End of procedure
4 5
Operation Check of the Dup Motor Go to Step [7]. While making a test print, is the paper reversed properly by the motor operation? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP 1. Disconnect P/J501 connector of the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM, and P/J13 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J13<=>P501. Is there normal continuity between them? Go to Step [6].
Go to Step [5].
Replace the HARNESS ASSY FRONT/ DUP.
Check of the Dup Motor Replace the Replace the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM with a PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351) new one. (p308) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
173
Revision A
FIP-14 Service Req E100 (ROS Failure)

Step Check Yes No End of procedure
FIP-15 Service Req E101 (Fuser Failure)

Step Check Yes No
Connection Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [2]. ROS Disconnect and reconnect the HARNESS ASSY ROS connector. Does the error recur even when the power is turned off and back on again? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. ROS 1. Disconnect P/J151 connector of the ROS ASSY, and P/J15 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J15<=>J151. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (p320) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351)
Replace the HARNESS ASSY ROS.
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Fuser unit W A R N IN G Do not turn the printer On and Off with the Fuser unit removed. Otherwise you may get an electric shock. Check of the Fuser unit connector Disconnect the Fuser unit. Are the connector pins bent or broken? Check of the Fuser unit Replace the Fuser unit with a new one. (p289) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Check of the LVPS Replace the LVPS with a new one. (p347) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [3]. Replace the defective part. End of procedure
2 3
Go to Step [4].
End of procedure
End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY ROS (J15-J151)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
174
Revision A
FIP-16 Service Req E102 (NV RAM Error)

Step Check Yes No End of procedure End of procedure
FIP-17 Service Req E103 (CTD Sensor Error)

Step Check Yes No
1 2
Does the error recur even when the power is Go to Step [2]. turned off and back on again? Remove the part below, and reinstall it securely. Replace the PWBA MCU PWBA MCU IDTN Does the error recur even when the power is IDTN. (p351) turned off and back on again?
1 2
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? HOLDER ASSY CTD Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC 1. Disconnect P/J136 connector on the HOLDER ASSY CTD, and P/J36 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J136<=>J36. Is there normal continuity between them? Go to Step [3]. Replace the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC.
Check of the HOLDER ASSY CTD Replace the Replace the HOLDER ASSY CTD with a new PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351) one. (p291) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
175
Revision A
FIP-18 Service Req E104 (Fan Motor Failure)

Step Check Yes No
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY LV RPG (J164-J311) HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT (J48-P482)
1 2 3 4 5
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? FAN FRONT FAN REAR Finding a failure FAN Is it the FAN REAR that does not rotate when making a test print? Go to Step [3]. Go to Step [6].
Check of the FAN REAR Go to Step [4]. Replace the FAN REAR with a new one. (p247) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Check of the LVPS Replace the LVPS with a new one. (p347) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY LV RPG 1. Disconnect P/J164 connector on the LVPS, and P/J311 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J164<=>J311. Is there normal continuity between them? Go to Step [5].
End of procedure
End of procedure
Replace the HARNESS ASSY LV RPG.
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [7]. FAN/PHD/MOT 1. Disconnect P/J482 connector of the FAN FRONT, and P/J48 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J48<=>P482. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the FAN FRONT Replace the FAN FRONT with a new one. (p319) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351)
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
176
Revision A
FIP-19 Service Req E105 (Motor Failure)

Step Check Yes No
Step
Check Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR 1. Disconnect P/J521 connector of the DRIVE ASSY FUSER, and P/J52 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J521<=>J52. Is there normal continuity between them?
Yes Go to Step [8].
No Replace the HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR.
Initial Check Replace the Go to Step [2] defective part(s). when some Check for the following items. Is there anything troubles are found wrong among them? in the DRIVE Installation state of the DRIVE ASSY ASSY MAIN. MAIN, and wear or damage of the gears. Go to Step [6] Installation state of the DRIVE ASSY when some FUSER, and wear or damage of the gears. troubles are found Installation state of the DRIVE ASSY in the DRIVE DEVE, and wear or damage of the gears. ASSY FUSER. Wear or damage of the rollers or gears in the Go to Step [10] unit. when some Foreign material in the unit. troubles are found in the DRIVE ASSY DEVE. Check of the Main Drive Motor Go to Step [3]. Does the rotor rotate smoothly when turning it with your hand? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT 1. Disconnect P/J481 connector of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN, and P/J48 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J481<=>J48. Is there normal continuity between them? Check the Main Drive Motor Replace the DRIVE ASSY MAIN with a new one. (p344) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [4]. Reinstall the part(s) correctly. Replace the HARNESS ASSY FAN/ PHD/MOT.
Check of the Fuser Motor Go to Step [9]. Replace the DRIVE ASSY FUSER with a new one. (p294) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Check of the Interlock Switch Go to FIP-DC Is the Interlock Switch pressed down normally? Check of the Deve Motor Go to Step [11]. Does the rotor rotate smoothly when turning it with your hand? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT 1. Disconnect P/J491 connector of the DRIVE ASSY DEVE, and P/J48 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J491<=>J48. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the Deve Motor Replace the DRIVE ASSY DEVE with a new one. (p342) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [12].
End of procedure
9 10 11
Reinstall the part(s) correctly. Reinstall the part(s) correctly. Replace the HARNESS ASSY FAN/ PHD/MOT.
2 3
12
Go to Step [5]. End of procedure
Go to Step [13].
End of procedure
13
Reinstall the part(s) correctly. Reinstall the part(s) correctly.
C H E C K P O IN T
Check of the Interlock Switch Go to FIP-DC Is the Interlock Switch pressed down normally?
5 6
Check of the Interlock Switch Go to FIP-DC Is the Interlock Switch pressed down normally? Check of the Fuser Motor Go to Step [7]. Does the rotor rotate smoothly when turning it with your hand?
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT (J481-J48, J491-J48) HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR (J521-J52)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
177
Revision A
FIP-20 Service Req E106 (Firmware Error)

Step Check Yes No
Step
Check Check of the PWBA EEPROM Replace the PWBA EEPROM. (p350) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
Yes Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351)
No End of procedure
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? PWBA MCU IDTN HVPS PWBA EEPROM Check of the HVPS Does the error recur even after reinstalling the HVPS? Check of the PWBA EEPROM Does the error recur even after reinstalling the PWBA EEPROM? Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
2 3 4
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY HVPS (J16-J141) HARNESS ASSY EEPROM (J191-J144)
Go to Step [4].
End of procedure
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [5]. HVPS 1. Disconnect P/J16 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN, and P/J141 connector on the HVPS. 2. Check the continuity of J16<=>J141. Is there normal continuity between them? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [6]. EEPROM 1. Disconnect P/J191 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN, and P/J144 connector on the PWBA EEPROM. 2. Check the continuity of J191<=>J144. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the PWBA MCU IDTN Does the error recur even after reinstalling the PWBA MCU IDTN? Check of the HVPS Replace the HVPS. (p356) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [7].
Replace the HARNESS ASSY HVPS.
Replace the HARNESS ASSY EEPROM.
6 7
End of procedure
Go to Step [8].
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
178
Revision A
FIP-21 Service Req E107 (Environment Sensor Error)

Step Check Initial Check Is the part below installed incorrectly? SENSOR HUM Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY TMP 1. Disconnect P/J231 connector of the SENSOR HUM, and P/J24 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J231<=>J24. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the SENSOR HUM. Replace the SENSOR HUM with a new one. (p355) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Yes No
1 2
Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Go to Step [3]. Replace the HARNESS ASSY TMP.
End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY TMP (J231-J24)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
179
Revision A
FIP-22 Worn Photoconductor

Step Check Yes No
FIP-23 Worn Fuser

Step Check Yes No Go to Step [2].
1 2 3
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Photoconductor unit PWBA CRUM in the Photoconductor unit Connection Check of the PWBA CRUM Go to Step [3]. Connection check of the PWBA CRUM Is the PWBA CRUM connector connected to the harness connector correctly? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY PHD2 1. Disconnect P/J710 connector of the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC. 2. Disconnect P/J484 connector of the HARNESS ASSY PHD2 and the HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT. 3. Check the continuity of J710<=>J484. Is there normal continuity between them? Go to Step [4]. Reinstall the HARNESS ASSY PHD2. Replace the HARNESS ASSY PHD2.
Initial Check Reinstall the Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s). Fuser unit J361 connector of the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC Replacing Check of the Fuser unit Replace the Fuser unit. (p289) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351)
End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [5]. FAN/PHD/MOT 1. Disconnect P/J48 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J484<=>J48. Is there normal continuity between them? Photoconductor unit Replace the Photoconductor unit with a new one. Does the error still occur after the replacement? Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351)
End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
180
Revision A
FIP-24 Worn C/M/Y/K Dev Unit

Step Check Yes No
FIP-25 Clean Sensor

Step Check Yes No
1 2
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? FRAME ASSY DEVE DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K) Replacing Check of the DEVE ASSY (Y/M/ Replace the C/K) PWBA MCU Replace the DEVE ASSY that caused the error. IDTN. (p351) (p325) Does the error still occur after the replacement? End of procedure
1 2 3
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Transfer unit HOLDER ASSY CTD Cleaning of the HOLDER ASSY CTD Go to Step [3]. Clean the detection part of the HOLDER ASSY CTD with a soft cloth. Does the error still occur? Connection Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. FSR/ADC 1. Remove the Transfer unit. (p290) 2. Check P/J136 connector of the HOLDER ASSY CTD for its connection state. Is the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC is securely connected to the HOLDER ASSY CTD? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [5]. FSR/ADC 1. Disconnect P/J136 connector of the HOLDER ASSY CTD. 2. Disconnect P/J36 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J136<=>J36. Is there normal continuity between them? HOLDER ASSY CTD Replace the HOLDER ASSY CTD. (p291) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351) End of procedure
Reconnect the harness correctly.
End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
181
Revision A
FIP-26 Printer Open

Step Check Yes No
1 2
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Front Cover HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK Replace the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK. (p349) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY LV Go to Step [4]. 1. Disconnect P/J165 connector of the LVPS. 2. Disconnect P/J61 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J165<=>J61. Is there normal continuity between them? LVPS Replace the LVPS. (p345) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351)
Replace the HARNESS ASSY LV.
End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY LV (J165-J61)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
182
Revision A
FIP-27 Y Toner Low

Step Check Yes No
Step
Check DISPENSER ASSY (Y) Replace the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). (p329) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
No End of procedure
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? SENSOR NO TNR Toner cartridge (Y) Toner Motor (Y) Check of the Toner cartridge(Y) Replace the Toner cartridge (Y). Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY TNR (J701-J51, J511-J51)
2 3
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. TNR 1. Disconnect P/J701 connector of the SENSOR NO TNR. 2. Disconnect P/J51 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J701<=>J51. Is there normal continuity between them? SENSOR NO TNR Replace the SENSOR NO TNR. (p337) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Check of the Toner Motor (Y) Does the Toner Motor (Y) function normally? Go to Step [6].
4 5 6
End of procedure
Go to Step [6].
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [7]. TNR 1. Disconnect P/J511 connector of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). 2. Disconnect P/J51 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J511<=>J51. Is there normal continuity between them?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
183
Revision A
FIP-28 M Toner Low

Step Check Yes No
Step
Check DISPENSER ASSY (M) Replace the DISPENSER ASSY (M). (p331) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
No End of procedure
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? SENSOR NO TNR Toner cartridge (M) Toner Motor (M) Check of the Toner cartridge(M) Replace the Toner cartridge (M). Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
2 3
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. TNR 1. Disconnect P/J702 connector of the SENSOR NO TNR. 2. Disconnect P/J51 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J702<=>J51. Is there normal continuity between them? SENSOR NO TNR Replace the SENSOR NO TNR. (p337) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Check of the Toner Motor (M) Does the Toner Motor (M) function normally? Go to Step [6].
4 5 6
End of procedure
Go to Step [6].
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [7]. TNR 1. Disconnect P/J512 connector of the DISPENSER ASSY (M). 2. Disconnect P/J51 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J512<=>J51. Is there normal continuity between them?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
184
Revision A
FIP-29 C Toner Low

Step Check Yes No
Step
Check DISPENSER ASSY (C) Replace the DISPENSER ASSY (C). (p333) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
No End of procedure
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? SENSOR NO TNR Toner cartridge (C) Toner Motor (C) Check of the Toner cartridge(C) Replace the Toner cartridge (C). Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
2 3
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. TNR 1. Disconnect P/J703 connector of the SENSOR NO TNR. 2. Disconnect P/J51 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J703<=>J51. Is there normal continuity between them? SENSOR NO TNR Replace the SENSOR NO TNR. (p337) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Check of the Toner Motor (C) Does the Toner Motor (C) function normally? Go to Step [6].
4 5 6
End of procedure
Go to Step [6].
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [7]. TNR 1. Disconnect P/J513 connector of the DISPENSER ASSY (C). 2. Disconnect P/J51 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J513<=>J51. Is there normal continuity between them?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
185
Revision A
FIP-30 K Toner Low

Step Check Yes No
Step
Check DISPENSER ASSY (K) Replace the DISPENSER ASSY (K). (p335) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
No End of procedure
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? SENSOR NO TNR Toner cartridge(K) Toner Motor (K) Check of the Toner cartridge(K) Replace the Toner cartridge (K). Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
2 3
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. TNR 1. Disconnect P/J704 connector of the SENSOR NO TNR. 2. Disconnect P/J51 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J704<=>J51. Is there normal continuity between them? SENSOR NO TNR Replace the SENSOR NO TNR. (p337) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Check of the Toner Motor (K) Does the Toner Motor (K) function normally? Go to Step [6].
4 5 6
End of procedure
Go to Step [6].
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [7]. TNR 1. Disconnect P/J514 connector of the DISPENSER ASSY (K). 2. Disconnect P/J51 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J514<=>J51. Is there normal continuity between them?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
186
Revision A
FIP-31 Worn Transfer Unit

Step Check Yes No
1 2
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Transfer unit SENSOR TNR FULL Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. TNRFULL/FSR 1. Disconnect P/J142 connector of the SENSOR TNR FULL. 2. Disconnect P/J52 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J142<=>J52. Is there normal continuity between them? SENSOR TNR FULL Replace the SENSOR TNR FULL. Does the error still occur after the replacement? Transfer unit Replace the Transfer unit with a new one. (p290) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [4]. Replace the HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR.
3 4
End of procedure
End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR (J142-J52)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
187
Revision A
FIP-32 Paper Out ttt sss

Step Check Yes No Go to Step [2] if the error occurs in Tray. Go to Step [5] if the error occurs in MSI. End of procedure Replace the HARNESS ASSY FDR.
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY FDR (J472-J47) HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP (J135-J13)
Initial Check Reinstall the Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s) correctly. SENSOR NO PAPER SENSOR NO PAPER ACTUATOR NO PAPER ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI Does the error recur even after loading papers in Go to Step [3]. the tray? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. FDR 1. Disconnect P/J472 connector of the SENSOR NO PAPER. 2. Disconnect P/J47 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J472<=>J47. Is there normal continuity between them? SENSOR NO PAPER Replace the SENSOR NO PAPER. (p271) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351)
2 3
4 5 6
End of procedure
Does the error recur even after loading papers in Go to Step [6]. the MSI? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [7]. FRONT/DUP 1. Disconnect P/J135 connector of the SENSOR NO PAPER. 2. Disconnect P/J13 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J135<=>J13. Is there normal continuity between them? SENSOR NO PAPER Replace the SENSOR NO PAPER. (p299) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351)
End of procedure Replace the HARNESS ASSY FRONT/ DUP.
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
188
Revision A
FIP-33 Install LC1

Step Check Yes No Go to Step [2].
FIP-34 Face-down Full

Step Check Yes No
Initial Check Reinstall the Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s) correctly. SW ITCH ASSY SIZE ACTUATOR SIZE 550-Sheet Cassette Assy Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. FDR 1. Disconnect P/J471 connector of the SWITCH ASSY SIZE. 2. Disconnect P/J47 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J471<=>J47. Is there normal continuity between them? SWITCH ASSY SIZE Replace the SWITCH ASSY SIZE. (p266) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351)
1 2
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? SENSOR FULL STACK ACTUATOR FULL STACK Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. FRONT/DUP 1. Disconnect P/J134 connector of the SENSOR FULL STACK. 2. Disconnect P/J13 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J134<=>J13. Is there normal continuity between them? SENSOR FULL STACK Replace the SENSOR FULL STACK. (p304) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351) Replace the HARNESS ASSY FRONT/ DUP.
Replace the HARNESS ASSY FDR.
End of procedure
End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY FDR (J471-J47)
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP (J134-J13)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
189
Revision A
FIP-35 Replace Toner Y

Step Check Yes No
Step
Check DISPENSER ASSY (Y) Replace the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). (p329) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
No End of procedure
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? SENSOR NO TNR Toner cartridge (Y) Toner Motor (Y) Check of the Toner cartridge (Y) Replace the Toner cartridge (Y). Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
2 3
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. TNR 1. Disconnect P/J701 connector of the SENSOR NO TNR. 2. Disconnect P/J51 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J701<=>J51. Is there normal continuity between them? SENSOR NO TNR Replace the SENSOR NO TNR. (p337) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Check of the Toner Motor (Y) Does the Toner Motor (Y) function normally? Go to Step [6].
4 5 6
End of procedure
Go to Step [6].
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [7]. TNR 1. Disconnect P/J511 connector of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). 2. Disconnect P/J51 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J511<=<J51. Is there normal continuity between them?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
190
Revision A
FIP-36 Replace Toner M

Step Check Yes No
Step
Check DISPENSER ASSY (M) Replace the DISPENSER ASSY (M). (p331) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
No End of procedure
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? SENSOR NO TNR Toner cartridge (M) Toner Motor (M) Check of the Toner cartridge (M) Replace the Toner cartridge (M). Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
2 3
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. TNR 1. Disconnect P/J702 connector of the SENSOR NO TNR. 2. Disconnect P/J51 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J702<=>J51. Is there normal continuity between them? SENSOR NO TNR Replace the SENSOR NO TNR. (p337) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Check of the Toner Motor (M) Does the Toner Motor (M) function normally? Go to Step [6].
4 5 6
End of procedure
Go to Step [6].
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [7]. TNR 1. Disconnect P/J512 connector of the DISPENSER ASSY (M). 2. Disconnect P/J51 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J512<=>J51. Is there normal continuity between them?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
191
Revision A
FIP-37 Replace Toner C

Step Check Yes No
Step
Check DISPENSER ASSY (C) Replace the DISPENSER ASSY (C). (p333) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
No End of procedure
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? SENSOR NO TNR Toner cartridge (C) Toner Motor (C) Check of the Toner cartridge(C) Replace the Toner cartridge (C). Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
2 3
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. TNR 1. Disconnect P/J703 connector of the SENSOR NO TNR. 2. Disconnect P/J51 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J703<=>J51. Is there normal continuity between them? SENSOR NO TNR Replace the SENSOR NO TNR. (p337) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Check of the Toner Motor (C) Does the Toner Motor (C) function normally? Go to Step [6].
4 5 6
End of procedure
Go to Step [6].
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [7]. TNR 1. Disconnect P/J513 connector of the DISPENSER ASSY (C). 2. Disconnect P/J51 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J513<=>J51. Is there normal continuity between them?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
192
Revision A
FIP-38 Replace Toner K

Step Check Yes No
Step
Check DISPENSER ASSY (K) Replace the DISPENSER ASSY (K). (p335) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
No End of procedure
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? SENSOR NO TNR Toner cartridge (K) Toner Motor (K) Check of the Toner cartridge (K) Replace the Toner cartridge (K). Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
2 3
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. TNR 1. Disconnect P/J704 connector of the SENSOR NO TNR. 2. Disconnect P/J51 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J704<=>J51. Is there normal continuity between them? SENSOR NO TNR Replace the SENSOR NO TNR. (p337) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Check of the Toner Motor (K) Does the Toner Motor (K) function normally? Go to Step [6].
4 5 6
End of procedure
Go to Step [6].
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [7]. TNR 1. Disconnect P/J514 connector of the DISPENSER ASSY (K). 2. Disconnect P/J51 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J514<=>J51. Is there normal continuity between them?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
193
Revision A
FIP-39 Replace Photoconductor

Step Check Yes No
C H E C K P O IN T
1 2
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Photoconductor unit PWBA CRUM in the Photoconductor unit Connection Check of the Go to Step [3]. CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC 1. Check the connection state between the PWBA CRUM and the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC. 2. Check the connection state between the PWBA CRUM and the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC. Is the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC connected correctly? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY PHD2 1. Disconnect P/J710 connector of the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC. 2. Disconnect P/J484 connector of the HARNESS ASSY PHD2 and the HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT. 3. Check the continuity of J710<=>J484. Is there normal continuity between them? Go to Step [4]. Replace the CONN_ASSY_C RUM_MC. (p324)
Replace the HARNESS ASSY PHD2.
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [5]. FAN/PHD/MOT 1. Disconnect P/J48 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of P484<=>J48. Is there normal continuity between them? Photoconductor unit Replace the Photoconductor unit with a new one. Does the error still occur after the replacement? Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351)
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
194
Revision A
FIP-40 Replace Transfer Unit

Step Check Yes No
FIP-41 Service Req E201, E202, E203, E204, E205, E206, E207, E208, E209, E210, E211, E212, E213, E214, E215 (DEVE ASSY Life Over)
Step Check Yes No
1 2
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Transfer unit SENSOR TNR FULL Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. TNRFULL/FSR 1. Disconnect P/J142 connector of the SENSOR TNR FULL. 2. Disconnect P/J52 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J142<=>J52. J142<=Is there normal continuity between them? SENSOR TNR FULL Replace the SENSOR TNR FULL. Does the error still occur after the replacement? Transfer unit Replace the Transfer unit with a new one. (p290) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [4]. Replace the HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR.
1 2
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s) correctly. FRAME ASSY DEVE DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K) Replacing Check of the DEVE ASSY (Y/M/ Replace the C/K) PWBA MCU Replace the DEVE ASSY that caused the error. IDTN. (p351) (p325) Does the error still occur after the replacement? End of procedure
3 4
End of procedure
End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR (J142-J52)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
195
Revision A
FIP-42 Wrong Toner Y/M/C/K

Step Check Yes No
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY FRID (J3411-J34) HARNESS ASSY FRID2 (J341-J3411)
1 2 3
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Toner cartridge (Y/M/C/K) COIL ASSY CRUM READER Connection Check of the COIL ASSY Go to Step [3]. CRUM READER Is P/J341 connector of the COIL ASSY CRUM READER connected to the harness connector correctly? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. RFID2 1. Disconnect P/J341 connector of the COIL ASSY CRUM READER. (p340) 2. Disconnect P/J3411 connector of the HARNESS ASSY RFID2 and the HARNESS ASSY RFID. 3. Check the continuity of J341<=>J3411. Is there normal continuity between them? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [5]. RFID 1. Disconnect P/J3411 connector of the HARNESS ASSY RFID and the HARNESS ASSY RFID2. 2. Disconnect P/J34 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J3411<=>J34. Is there normal continuity between them? Toner cartridge(Y/M/C/K) Replace the Toner cartridge (Y/M/C/K) with new ones. Does the error still occur after the replacement? Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351) Reconnect the connectors correctly.
Replace the HARNESS ASSY PHD2.
Replace the HARNESS ASSY FRID.
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
196
Revision A
FIP-43 Install Fuser

Step Check Yes No
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Fuser unit P/J361 connector of the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. FSR/ADC 1. Remove the Fuser unit. (p289) 2. Disconnect P/J361 connector of the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC. 3. Disconnect P/J36 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 4. Check the continuity of J361<=>J36. Is there normal continuity between them? Fuser unit Replace the Fuser unit. (p289) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351) Replace the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC.
End of procedure
C H E C K P O IN T
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
197
Revision A
FIP-44 Toner Cart Error Y/M/C/K

Step Check Yes No
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY FRID (J3411-J34) HARNESS ASSY FRID2 (J341-J3411)
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? Toner cartridge (Y/M/C/K) Toner cartridge (Y/M/C/K) (each of them installed in their correct position?) COIL ASSY CRUM READER Connection Check of the COIL ASSY Go to Step [3]. CRUM READER Is P/J341 connector of the COIL ASSY CRUM READER connected to the harness connector correctly? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. RFID2 1. Disconnect P/J341 connector of the COIL ASSY CRUM READER. (p340) 2. Disconnect P/J3411 connector of the HARNESS ASSY RFID2 and the HARNESS ASSY RFID. 3. Check the continuity of J341<=>J3411. Is there normal continuity between them? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [5]. RFID 1. Disconnect P/J3411 connector of the HARNESS ASSY RFID and the HARNESS ASSY RFID2. 2. Disconnect P/J34 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J3411<=>J34. Is there normal continuity between them? Toner cartridge(Y/M/C/K) Replace the Toner cartridge (Y/M/C/K) with new ones. Does the error still occur after the replacement? Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351) Reinstall the part(s) correctly.
2 3
Replace the HARNESS ASSY FRID2.
Replace the HARNESS ASSY FRID.
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
198
Revision A
FIP-45 Install Y/M/C/K Tnr Cart

Step Check Initial Check Are there any toner tapes that have not been pulled out from the Toner cartridges? Yes No
FIP-46 LC3 Error 001

Step Check Initial Check Yes No Go to Step [2].
1 2
Pull out the toner Go to Step [2]. tape(s).
1 2
Remove the one 550-sheet Paper Are the two 550-sheet Paper Cassettes installed Cassette. in the printer? PWBA OPTFDR 1T Replace the PWBA OPTFDR 1T. (p365) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351)
Toner cartridge (Y/M/C/K) Reinstall the Toner cartridge (Y/M/C/K). Does the error still occur after the reinstalling?
End of procedure Go to the following FIP. Y: FIP-35 M: FIP-36 C: FIP-37 K: FIP-38
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
199
Revision A
3.4.3.2 Options
FIP-O1 Paper Jam A C (550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit) If multi-feed error occurs, refer to FIP-O4 Multi-Feed (p203).
Step
Check Operation Check of the Main Drive Motor Does the Main Drive Motor rotate when making a test print? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT 1. Disconnect P/J481 connector on the DRIVE ASSY MAIN, and P/J48 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J481<=>J48. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN Replace the DRIVE ASSY MAIN with a new one. (p344) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
No Go to Step [6].
5 6
C A U T IO N
Go to Step [7].
Step
Check Initial Check Are there anything wrong with the following items? Installation state of the paper cassette. Condition of the papers in the cassette. Wear or damage of the roller or gear in the feeder. Paper dust or foreign material on the paper path. Installation state of the SENSOR REGI. Installation state of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN.
Yes
No
Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly or replace the defective part(s).
Go to Step [8].
End of procedure
8 9
Reconnect the harness correctly.
Check the Interlock Switch Go to FIP-DC Is the Interlock Switch pressed down normally? Check of the CLUTCH TURN Close the Interlock Switch before checking. Does the CLUTCH TURN function normally? Go to Step [12].
Reinstall the part(s) correctly. Go to Step [10].
2 3
Connection Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. REGI SNS Is the HARNESS ASSY REGI SNS connected to the SENSOR REGI connector correctly? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY REGI SNS 1. Disconnect P/J181 connector of the SENSOR REGI, and P/J18 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J181<=>J18. Is there normal continuity between them? Check the SENSOR REGI Replace the SENSOR REGI with a new one. (p279) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [4].
10
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [11]. FRONTCLH 1. Disconnect P/J191 connector of the CLUTCH TURN, and P/J19 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of P191<=>J19. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the CLUTCH TURN Replace the CLUTCH TURN with a new one. (p287) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [12].
Replace the HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH.
11
End of procedure
Go to Step [5].
End of procedure
12
Operation Check of the Option Feed Motor Go to Step [17]. Does the Option Feed Motor rotate when making a test print?
Go to Step [13].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
200
Revision A
Step
Check Check of the PWBA OPTFDR 1T. Replace the PWBA OPTFDR 1T with a new one. (p365) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC 1. Disconnect P/J83 connector on the PWBA OPTFDR, and P/J171 connector on the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG. 2. Check the continuity of J83<=>J171. Is there normal continuity between them? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG 1. Disconnect P/J171 connector of the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG, and P/J17 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of P171<=>J17. Is there normal continuity between them?
No End of procedure
Step
Check Check of the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC Replace the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC with a new one. (p377) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Operation Check of the SOLENOID FEED Does the Feed Gear in the Feeder rotate when make a test print?
No End of procedure
13
19
14
Go to Step [15].
Replace the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC.
20 21
Replace the paper Go to Step [21]. if there is no missing part or any other abnormality. Replace the HARNESS ASSY OPFDR.
15
Go to Step [16].
Replace the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG.
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [22]. OPFDR 1. Disconnect P/J824 connector of the SOLENOID FEED, and P/J85 connector on the PWBA OPTFDR IT. 2. Check the continuity of P824<=>J85. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the SOLENOID FEED Replace the SOLENOID FEED with a new one. (p273) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
16
Operation Check of the Option Feed Motor Go to Step [17]. Replace the DRIVE ASSY with a new one. (p382) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Operation Check of the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC Does the Turn Roll in the Feeder rotate when making a test print? Go to Step [20].
End of procedure
22
17 18
Go to Step [18].
Check if the End of procedure spring or stopper is securely attached on the SOLENOID FEED. Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN if the error still occurs. (p351)
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [19]. OPFDR 1. Disconnect P/J825 connector of the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC, and P/J85 connector on the PWBA OPTFDR IT. 2. Check the continuity of P825<=>J85. Is there normal continuity between them?
Replace the HARNESS ASSY OPFDR.
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY REGISNS (J181-J18) HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT (P481-J48) HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH (P191-J19) HARNESS ASSY OPFREC (J83-J171) HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG (J17-P171) HARNESS ASSY OPFDR (P825-J85AP824-J85)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
201
Revision A
FIP-O2 Paper Out ttt sss (550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit)

Step Check Yes No
FIP-O3 FIP-O3 Install LC1 (550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit)

Step Check Yes No
1 2 3
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? SENSOR NO PAPER ACTUATOR NO PAPER Does the error recur even after loading papers in Go to Step [3]. the tray? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY OPFDR 1. Disconnect P/J822 connector of the SENSOR NO PAPER. 2. Disconnect the connector P/J85 of the PWBA OPTFDR 1T. 3. Check the continuity of J822<=>J85. Is there normal continuity between them? SENSOR NO PAPER Replace the SENSOR NO PAPER. (p271) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [4]. End of procedure Replace the HARNESS ASSY OPFDR.
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? SW ITCH ASSY SIZE ACTUATOR SIZE 550-Sheet Paper Cassette Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY SIZE 1. Disconnect P/J821 connector of the SWITCH ASSY SIZE. 2. Disconnect the connector P/J80 of the PWBA OPTFDR 1T. 3. Check the continuity of J821<=>J80. Is there normal continuity between them? SWITCH ASSY SIZE Replace the SWITCH ASSY SIZE. (p266) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [3]. Replace the HARNESS ASSY SIZE.
Replace the End of procedure PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351) Replace the PWBA OPTFDR 1T. (p365)
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY OPFDR (J822-J85)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
202
Revision A
FIP-O4 Multi-Feed (550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit)

Step Check Initial Check Are there anything wrong with the following items? Installation state of the paper guide. Condition of the papers in the cassette. Paper quality Check of the MSI Does the multi-feed occurs at the MSI? Yes Reinstall the guide or replace the paper. No Go to Step [2].
2 3
Go to Step [3].
Go to Step [5]. End of procedure (Ask the user to store the papers in a place where the humidity level is low) End of procedure
Check of the Loaded Paper Go to Step [4]. Make a test print with a new paper. Does the multi-feed still occur after replacing the paper?
Check of the ROS ASSY RETARD Replace the Replace the ROLL ASSY RETARD with a new ROLL ASSY FEED.(p276) one. (p282) Does the multi-feed still occur after replacing the paper? Check of the Loaded Paper Go to Step [6]. Make a test print with a new paper. Does the multi-feed still occur after replacing the paper?
End of procedure (Ask the user to store the papers in a place where the humidity level is low) Replace the ROLL ASSY RETARD of the defective cassette. (p276), (p387)
Check of the Cassette Make a test print after reinstalling the cassette. Does the multi-feed still occur after reinstalling the cassette?
Replace the ROLL ASSY FEED of the defective Feeder. (p276), (p302)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
203
Revision A
FIP-O5 Paper Jam A C (1100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit) If multi-feed error occurs, refer to FIP-8 Multi-Feed.
Step
Check Operation Check of the Main Drive Motor Does the Main Drive Motor rotate when making a test print? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT 1. Disconnect P/J481 connector on the DRIVE ASSY MAIN, and P/J48 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J481<=>J48. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. Replace the DRIVE ASSY MAIN with a new one. (p344) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
Yes Go to Step [9].
No Go to Step [6].
5 6
C A U T IO N
Go to Step [7].
Step
Check Initial Check Are there anything wrong with the following items? Installation state of the paper cassette. Condition of the papers in the cassette. Wear or damage of the roller or gear in the feeder. Paper dust or foreign material on the paper path. Installation state of the SENSOR REGI. Installation state of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN.
Yes
No
Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly.
Go to Step [8].
End of procedure
8 9
Check of the Interlock Switch Go to FIP-DC Is the Interlock Switch pressed down normally? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [10]. FRONTCLH 1. Disconnect P/J191 connector of the CLUTCH TURN, and P/J19 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of P191<=>J19. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the CLUTCH TURN. Replace the CLUTCH TURN with a new one. (p287) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Operation Check of the Option Feed Motor Does the Option Feed Motor rotate when making a test print? Go to Step [11].
Reinstall the part(s) correctly. Replace the HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH.
2 3
Connection Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. REGI SNS Is the HARNESS ASSY REGI SNS connected to the SENSOR REGI connector correctly? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY REGI SNS 1. Disconnect P/J181 connector of the SENSOR REGI, and P/J18 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of J181<=>J18. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the SENSOR REGI Replace the SENSOR REGI with a new one. (p279) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [4].
10
End of procedure
11
Go to Step [5]. End of procedure
Go to Step [2] Go to Step [12]. if the jam occurs in Tray 2. Go to Step [22] if the jam error occurs in Tray 3.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
204
Revision A
Step
Check Check of the PWBA OPTFDR 2T Replace the PWBA OPTFDR 2T with a new one. (p403) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC 1. Disconnect P/J83 connector on the PWBA OPTFDR 2T, and P/J172/171 connectors of the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG. 2. Check the continuity of J83<=>J172. Is there normal continuity between them?
No End of procedure
Step
Check Check of the CLUTCH ASSY Replace the CLUTCH ASSY with a new one. (p338) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Operation Check of the SOLENOID FEED Does the Feed Gear in the Feeder rotate when making a test print?
No End of procedure
12
18
13
Go to Step [14].
Replace the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2.
19 20
Replace the paper Go to Step [20]. if there is no missing part or any other abnormality. Replace the HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2.
14
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [15]. OPFPLG 1. Disconnect P/J172/171 connectors of the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG, and P/J17 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of P171<=>J17. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the Option Feed Motor Replace the DRIVE ASSY 2ND with a new one. (p404) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
Replace the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG.
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [21]. OPFDR2 1. Disconnect P/J824 connector of the SOLENOID FEED, and P/J85 connector on the PWBA OPTFDR 2T. 2. Check the continuity of P824<=>J85. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the SOLENOID FEED Replace the SOLENOID FEED with a new one. (p273) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
21
15
Go to Step [2] End of procedure if the jam occurs in Tray 2. Go to Step [22] if the jam error occurs in Tray 3. Go to Step [19]. Go to Step [17].
Check if the End of procedure spring or stopper is securely attached on the SOLENOID FEED. Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN if the error still occurs. (p351) Go to Step [25]. Go to Step [23].
16 17
Operation Check of the CLUTCH ASSY Does the Turn Roll in the Feeder rotate when make a test print?
22
Operation Check of the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC Does the Turn Roll in the Feeder rotate when make a test print?
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [18]. OPFDR2 1. Disconnect P/J825 connector of the CLUTCH ASSY, and P/J85 connector on the PWBA OPTFDR 2T. 2. Check the continuity of P825<=>J85. Is there normal continuity between them?
Replace the HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
205
Revision A
Step
Check
Yes
No Replace the HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2.
23
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [24]. OPFDR2 1. Disconnect P/J825 connector of the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC, and P/J85 connector on the PWBA OPTFDR 2T. 2. Check the continuity of P825<=>J85. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC Replace the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC with a new one. (p422) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Operation Check of the SOLENOID FEED Does the Feed Gear in the Feeder rotate when making a test print? Go to Step [25].
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY REGISNS (J181-J18) HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT (P481-J48) HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH (P191-J19) HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 (J83-J172) HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG (J17-P171) HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2 (P825-J85, P824-J85)
24
End of procedure
25 26
Replace the paper Go to Step [26]. if there is no missing part or any other abnormality. Replace the HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2.
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [27]. OPFDR2 1. Disconnect P/J824 connector of the SOLENOID FEED, and P/J85 connector on the PWBA OPTFDR 2T. 2. Check the continuity of P824<=>J85. Is there normal continuity between them? Check of the SOLENOID FEED Replace the SOLENOID FEED with a new one. (p273) Does the error still occur after the replacement?
27
Check if the End of procedure spring or stopper is securely attached on the SOLENOID FEED. Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN if the error still occurs. (p351)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
206
Revision A
FIP-O6 Paper Out LC3, LC4, (LC2) (1100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit)
Step Check Yes No
FIP-O7 Install L1 (L2, L3) (1100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit)

Step Check Yes No
1 2 3
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? SENSOR NO PAPER ACTUATOR NO PAPER Does the error recur even after loading papers in Go to Step [3]. the tray? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2 1. Disconnect P/J822 connector of the SENSOR NO PAPER. 2. Disconnect the connector P/J85 of the PWBA OPTFDR 2T. 3. Check the continuity of J822<=>J85. Is there normal continuity between them? SENSOR NO PAPER Replace the SENSOR NO PAPER. (p271) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [4]. End of procedure Replace the HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2.
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. part(s) correctly. Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? SW ITCH ASSY SIZE ACTUATOR SIZE 1100-Sheet Paper Cassette Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY SIZE2 1. Disconnect P/J821 connector of the SWITCH ASSY SIZE. 2. Disconnect the connector P/J80 of the PWBA OPTFDR 2T. 3. Check the continuity of J821<=>J80. Is there normal continuity between them? SWITCH ASSY SIZE Replace the SWITCH ASSY SIZE. (p266) Does the error still occur after the replacement? Go to Step [3]. Replace the HARNESS ASSY SIZE2.
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2 (J822-J85)
C H E C K P O IN T
Error-Related Harness(es) HARNESS ASSY SIZE2 (J821-J80)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
207
Revision A
FIP-O8 Multi-Feed (1100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit)

Step Check Initial Check Is there anything wrong with the following items? Installation state of the paper guide. Condition of the papers in the cassette. Paper quality Check of the MSI Does the multi-feed occurs at the MSI? Yes Reinstall the guide correctly, or replace the paper. No Go to Step [2].
2 3
Go to Step [3].
Check of the Loaded Paper Go to Step [4]. Make a test print with a new paper. Does the multi-feed still occur after replacing the paper?
Check of the ROS ASSY RETARD Replace the Replace the ROLL ASSY RETARD with a new ROLL ASSY FEED. (p415) one. (p282) Does the multi-feed still occur after replacing the paper? Check of the Loaded Paper Go to Step [6]. Make a test print with a new paper. Does the multi-feed still occur after replacing the paper?
End of procedure (Ask the user to store the papers in a place where the humidity level is low) Replace the ROLL ASSY RETARD of the defective cassette. (p276), (p431)
Replace the ROLL ASSY FEED of the defective Feeder. (p276), (p415), (p428)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
208
Revision A
3.4.4 Controller-related Trouble FIP

When a controller related error occurs, make sure to check the initial check items listed below first. If the error still occurs after that, replace the part given on an error basis in the Failed Parts List on the next page to perform troubleshooting. Initial Check Check that the printer is grounded properly. Check that the connectors are connected to the controller board securely and correctly. Check that the DIMM is connected to the controller board securely and correctly. Power the printer off and on several times. Check that the printer is not in electrically noisy environments.
C A U T IO N
When powering the printer off and on again, do not turn it on immediately after turning it off. Make sure to wait at least for a few seconds before the power-on.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
209

Failed Parts List
Engine Controller Board
Revision A
Opt. ROM DIMM
Opt. RAM DIMM
Std. RAM DIMM
Controller Board
Program DIMM
Video I/F Cable
Network Board
Error Code C0017 C0081 C0082 C0083 C0084 C0085 C0086 C0087 C0088 C0089 C0090 C0091 C0092 C0093 C0094 C0095 C0096 C0097 C0098 C0128C0254 C0255 C0256 C0257 C0258 C0800 C0998 C999 C1000
Description CPU error (undefined interruption) CPU error (TLB modification exception) CPU error (TLB miss exception [Load/Fetch]) CPU error (TLB miss exception [Store]) CPU error (address error exception [Load/Fetch]) CPU error (address error exception [Store]) CPU error (bus error exception [Fetch]) CPU error (bus error exception [Load/Store]) CPU error (SYSCALL exception) CPU error (Break exception) CPU error (reserving command exception) CPU error (unused coprocessor exception) CPU error (FPU exception) CPU error (TLB exception) CPU error (XTLB exception) CPU error (cache exception) CPU error (Trap exception) CPU error (FPU exception) CPU error (watch exception) CPU error (undefined trap) CPU error (NMI exception) CPU error (divide by 0) CPU error (arithmetic overflow) CPU error (break occurrence) IPL error (controller defect) Engine communication error (only when power-on) Engine flash ROM has no program data Standard RAM error (not installed, etc.)
Error Code C1001 C1002 C1020 C1021 C1022 C1100 C1101 C1120 C1121 C1122 C1123 C1180 C1181 C1185 C1200 C1210 C1400 C1700 C1702 C1999 C2000
Description Standard RAM error (standard stack is undefined, etc.) Standard RAM error (standard size is undefined, etc.) RAM error (slot 0) RAM error (slot 1) RAM error (slot 2) ROM checksum error (bit 0 to 15) (font) ROM checksum error (bit 16 to 31) (font) ROM checksum error (bit 0 to 7) (program) ROM checksum error (bit 8 to 15) (program) ROM checksum error (bit 16 to 23) (program) ROM checksum error (bit 24 to 31) (program) Optional ROM module A checksum error Optional ROM module B checksum error ROM module unsupported EEPROM writing error EEPROM writing times limit Engine initialization error Loopback test failure of network board Network board uninstalled Other hardware errors Software error
@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
@ @
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
210
Engine Controller Board
Opt. ROM DIMM
Opt. RAM DIMM
Std. RAM DIMM
Controller Board
Program DIMM
Video I/F Cable
Network Board
Revision A
To reliably judge and understand the trouble to perform the correct remedy efficiently when a print quality-related trouble occurs, make a test print, and use the FIPs described in the following pages. When the trouble still occurs even after performing the troubleshooting according to the FIP, check again using the FIP, and then replace the parts indicated as Possible parts one by one checking if the printer returns to normal. Make sure that all ASSYs are properly grounded. Always refer to Chapter 7 APPENDIX when checking connection state and electric continuity.
3.4.5 Print Quality Trouble FIP

Workflow
Start
Make a test print
Is there any FIP that applies to the symptom?
No
The printing quality-related FIPs are provided as follows for the typical symptoms. FIP-P1 "Printed Image is Light and Faint"
Replace the Photoconductor Unit and the Fuser Assy in that order.
Yes
Perform the troubleshooting provided in the FIP.
FIP-P2 "Completely Blank Pages are Printed" FIP-P3 "Completely Black Pages are Printed"
No
Does the printer return to normal?
No
Does the printer return to normal?
FIP-P4 "Vertical White or Faint Bands" FIP-P5 "Horizontal White or Faint Bands"
Yes End End
Yes
FIP-P6 "Black or Colored Small Smudges" FIP-P7 "Color Fogged"
Leg_Sec001_001FA
FIP-P8 "Skew Print" FIP-P9 "Printed Paper is Wrinkled"
C A U T IO N
The printing-quality troubleshooting described here is based on a condition that the printer controller has no problems. However, making a test print with only the engine side, allows you to find out roughly which side (controller side or engine side) is causing the trouble, except for cases that cannot be checked by the test print. Test print with the engine alone is normal Printer controller trouble Test print on engine alone is abnormal Printer engine trouble If the probable cause is printer controller trouble, replace the controller with a normal one and check if the printer returns to normal. If the trouble recurs after replacing with the normal parts, check on the host side, and use the printer quality FIPs to perform efficient troubleshooting.
FIP-P10 "Fusing Trouble" FIP-P11 "Vertical Streaks" FIP-P12 "Residual Images" FIP-P13 "Areas of Images are Missing" FIP-P14 "Horizontal Streaks"
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
211
Revision A
3.4.5.1 Precautions for Print Quality Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting for print quality troubles should be carried out according to the corresponding FIP. In addition to that, make sure to check the environment condition, daily used paper type, the remaining amount of the consumables life and the replacement interval of the parts that require periodic replacement when the trouble occurs constantly or abnormal printouts are made. Environment Condition Should satisfy the conditions described in 3.1.2 Preliminary Check. Daily Used Paper Type Should meet the specification. (Standard paper is recommended.) Consumables and Periodic Replacement Parts 1. 2. The consumables should have sufficient life spans. The Periodic Replacement Parts must have been replaced every time their respective specified number of sheets has been printed.
3.4.5.2 Basics for Print Quality Recovery

Recovering the print quality basically requires cleaning of the internal parts. The HOLDER ASSY CTD, parts for paper transferring, Fuser unit, and Transfer unit should be cleaned. Considerable dust and dirt on the internal parts, especially when they are formed in a short time, are heavily caused by the environment conditions. The trouble may occur again unless the environment conditions are improved.
The table below shows the rollers that have possibilities of causing print quality troubles and the intervals of their traces which appear on printouts.
Part Magnet Roll Drum BTR RTC IDT 1 IDT 2 IDT 1 Cleaner IDT 2 Cleaner Refresher Heat Roll Belt Part Name DEVE ASSY Photoconductor unit Photoconductor unit Photoconductor unit Photoconductor unit Photoconductor unit Photoconductor unit Photoconductor unit Photoconductor unit Fuser unit Fuser unit Interval of Traces 44 mm 75 mm 65 mm 32 mm 132 mm 132 mm 34 mm 56 mm 55 mm 82 mm 95 mm
Host Computer Check Check if the trouble is caused by application failure. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Send the same print job to the printer from another computer. Send a print job to the printer using another application. Send a print job stored in another file to the printer. Uninstall and reinstall the printer driver. Uninstall and reinstall the application. Check the system environment.
For Safety Do not touch the surface of the parts listed below directly with your hands. 1. 2. 3. Transfer unit Drum (Photoconductor unit) Heat Roll (Fuser unit)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
212
Revision A
3.4.5.3 Print Quality FIP

FIP-P1 Printed Image is Light and Faint
Symptom / Possible Parts Symptom Vertical white bands or faint colored bands appear on the printed image. Possible Parts HVPS DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K) DISPENSER ASSY (Y/M/C/K) Fuser unit
Step
Check
Yes
No
Laser Beam Path Remove the dirt, Go to Step [5]. 1. Check the laser beam path from the ROSS dust or foreign ASSY to the drum in the Photoconductor material. unit. 2. Check if the laser exit window on the ROS ASSY is clean. Is there any dirt, dust, or foreign material on the path? ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (p320) Does the printing density get back to normal? Transfer unit Replace the Transfer unit.(p290) Does the printing density get back to normal? PWBA MCU IDTN Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351) Does the printing density get back to normal? End of procedure Go to Step [6].
5 6 7
End of procedure Go to Step [7].
Step
Check Initial Check Check the Possible Parts for the following: specification, installation state, damage, deformation, dirt or foreign material. Is there something wrong with any one of the parts? HOLDER ASSY CTD Replace the HOLDER ASSY CTD. (p291) Does the printing density get back to normal? Photoconductor unit Replace the Photoconductor unit. Does the printing density get back to normal?
Yes
No
1 2 3
Get them back to Go to Step [2]. normal.
End of procedure Replace the possible parts one by one.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
213
Revision A
FIP-P2 Completely Blank Pages are Printed

Symptom / Possible Parts Symptom Nothing is printed on the paper. Possible Parts HVPS DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K) DISPENSER ASSY (Y/M/C/K) Fuser unit
Step
Check Transfer unit Replace the Transfer unit. (p290) Are images printed normally? PWBA MCU IDTN Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN.(p351) Are images printed normally?
Yes
No
5 6
Step
Check Initial Check Check the Possible Parts for the following: specification, installation state, damage, deformation, dirt or foreign material. Is there something wrong with any one of the parts?
Yes
No
1 2
Laser Beam Path Remove the dirt, Go to Step [3]. 1. Check the laser beam path from the ROSS dust or foreign ASSY to the drum in the Photoconductor material. unit. 2. Check if the laser exit window on the ROS ASSY is clean. Is there any dirt, dust, or foreign material on the path? ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (p320) Are images printed normally? Photoconductor unit Replace the Photoconductor unit. Are images printed normally? End of procedure Go to Step [4].
3 4
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
214
Revision A
FIP-P3 Completely Black Pages are Printed

Symptom / Possible Parts Symptom All over the printed paper is black. Possible Parts HVPS DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K) DISPENSER ASSY (Y/M/C/K) Fuser unit Transfer unit
Step
Check Initial Check Check the Possible Parts for the following: specification, installation state, damage, deformation, dirt or foreign material. Is there something wrong with any one of the parts? Check if it is exposing failure Cover half of the window of ROS ASSY and execute a test print. Is the print, half white and half black? ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (p320) Are images printed normally? Photoconductor unit Replace the Photoconductor unit. Are images printed normally? PWBA MCU IDTN Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351) Are images printed normally?
Yes
No
1 2 3 4 5
Go to Step [4].
Go to Step [3].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
215
Revision A
FIP-P4 Vertical White or Faint Bands

Symptom / Possible Parts Symptom Vertical white bands or faint colored bands appear on the printed image. Possible Parts HVPS DISPENSER ASSY (Y/M/C/K) Fuser unit Transfer unit
Step
Check
Yes
No
5 6
DEVE ASSY (C/M/Y/K) End of procedure Go to Step [6]. Replace the DEVE ASSY. (p325) Does the printing quality get back to normal? PWBA MCU IDTN End of procedure Replace the possible parts one Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351) by one. Does the printing quality get back to normal?
Step
Yes
No
1 2 3
Photoconductor unit End of procedure Go to Step [3]. Replace the Photoconductor unit. Does the printing quality get back to normal? Laser Beam Path Remove the dirt, Go to Step [4]. 1. Check the laser beam path from the ROSS dust or foreign ASSY to the drum in the Photoconductor material. unit. 2. Check if the laser exit window on the ROS ASSY is clean. Is there any dirt, dust, or foreign material on the path? ROS ASSY End of procedure Go to Step [5]. Replace the ROS ASSY. (p320) Does the printing quality get back to normal?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
216
Revision A
FIP-P5 Horizontal White or Faint Bands

Symptom / Possible Parts Symptom Horizontal white bands or faint colored bands appear on the printed image. Possible Parts HVPS Fuser unit
Step
Check
Yes
No
6 7
ROS ASSY End of procedure Go to Step [7]. Replace the ROS ASSY. (p320) Does the printing quality get back to normal? PWBA MCU IDTN End of procedure Replace the possible parts one Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351) by one. Does the printing quality get back to normal?
Step
Check Initial Check Check the Possible Parts for the following: specification, installation state, damage, deformation, dirt or foreign material. Is there something wrong with any one of the parts? Check the bands. Do they appear at regular intervals?
Yes
No
1 2 3 4 5
Refer to 3.4.5.2 and replace the corresponding part.
Go to Step [3].
Photoconductor unit End of procedure Go to Step [4]. Replace the Photoconductor unit. Does the printing quality get back to normal? Transfer unit End of procedure Go to Step [5]. Replace the Transfer unit. (p290) Does the printing quality get back to normal? HSG ASSY BIAS End of procedure Go to Step [6]. Replace the HSG ASSY BIAS. (p321) Does the printing quality get back to normal?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
217
Revision A
FIP-P6 Black or Colored Small Smudges

Symptom / Possible Parts Symptom Solid black circles appear on the printed image. Possible Parts PWBA MCU IDTN DISPENSER ASSY (Y/M/C/K) ROS ASSY
Step
Yes
No
1 2 3 4
Photoconductor unit End of procedure Go to Step [3]. Replace the Photoconductor unit. Does the printing quality get back to normal? Fuser unit End of procedure Go to Step [4]. Replace the Fuser unit. (p289) Does the printing quality get back to normal? DEVE ASSY(C/M/Y/K) End of procedure Replace the possible parts one Replace the DEVE ASSY. (p325) by one. Does the printing quality get back to normal?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
218
Revision A
FIP-P7 Color Fogged

Symptom / Possible Parts Symptom Printed images are fogged and toner smudges appear on the margins. Possible Parts HVPS DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K) DISPENSER ASSY (Y/M/C/K) Fuser unit
Step
Check
Yes
No
Laser Beam Path Remove the dirt, Go to Step [5]. 1. Check the laser beam path from the ROSS dust or foreign ASSY to the drum in the Photoconductor material. unit. 2. Check if the laser exit window on the ROS ASSY is clean. Is there any dirt, dust, or foreign material on the path? ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (p320) Does the printing density get back to normal? Transfer unit Replace the Transfer unit. (p290) Does the printing density get back to normal? PWBA MCU IDTN Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351) Does the printing density get back to normal? End of procedure Go to Step [6].
5 6
Step
Check Initial Check Check the Possible Parts for the following: specification, installation state, damage, deformation, dirt or foreign material. Is there something wrong with any one of the parts? HOLDER ASSY CTD Replace the HOLDER ASSY CTD. (p291) Does the printing density get back to normal? Photoconductor unit Replace the Photoconductor unit. Does the printing density get back to normal?
Yes
No
1 2 3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
219
Revision A
FIP-P8 Skew Print

Symptom / Possible Parts Symptom Printed image is skewed. Possible Parts ROS ASSY PICK UP ASSY CHUTE ASSY REGI
Step
Check Installation state of the Transfer unit Is the Transfer unit installed correctly? Photoconductor unit Replace the Photoconductor unit. Are images printed normally?
Yes Go to Step [7].
No Reinstall the assy correctly.
6 7
Step
Check Initial Check Check the Possible Parts for the following: specification, installation state, damage, deformation, dirt or foreign material. Is there something wrong with any one of the parts? Installation state of the paper cassette and papers Are the cassette and papers installed/loaded correctly?
Yes
No
1 2 3 4 5
Go to Step [3].
Install/load the cassette or papers correctly. (ask the client to do so)
Paper Transferring Path Clean the part or Go to Step [4]. Is there any flashes, foreign material or dirt on replace it. the path? Paper Feed Roll Does the roller feed papers normally? Go to Step [5]. Clean the roller or replace it.
Paper Transferring Roll Clean the roller or Go to Step [6]. Is there any abnormality with the rollers, such as replace it. foreign material, dirt, deformation, or operation failure?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
220
Revision A
FIP-P9 Printed Paper is Wrinkled

Symptom / Possible Parts Symptom Printed out papers are wrinkled. Possible Parts Transfer unit Photoconductor unit PICK UP ASSY CHUTE ASSY REGI
Step
Check
Yes
No
Paper Transferring Roll Clean the roller or Replace the possible parts one Is there any abnormality with the rollers, such as replace it. by one. foreign material, dirt, deformation, or operation failure?
Step
Yes
No
1 2
Check if the paper is damp Go to Step [3]. Does the printer recover from the trouble when using a new paper that is took out from the newly opened package?
Replace the papers. (Ask the user to store the papers in a place where the humidity level is low)
3 4 5
Fuser unit Replace the Fuser unit. (p289) Are images printed normally? Check if paper is skewed. Is paper transferred diagonally?
Go to FIP-P8 "Skew Print"
Go to Step [5].
Paper Transferring Path Clean the roller or Go to Step [4]. Is there any flashes, foreign material or dirt on replace it. the path?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
221
Revision A
FIP-P10 Fusing Trouble

Symptom / Possible Parts Symptom If you touch or rub the printed images, the toner can be easily removed. Possible Parts PWBA MCU IDTN LVPS
FIP-P11 Vertical Streaks

Symptom / Possible Parts Symptom Vertical black or colored lines appear on the printed image. Possible Parts DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K) DISPENSER ASSY (Y/M/C/K) Transfer unit
Step
Yes
No Step Check Initial Check Check the Possible Parts for the following: specification, installation state, damage, deformation, dirt or foreign material. Is there something wrong with any one of the parts? Check the lines Do they appear at regular intervals? Yes No
1 2 3
1 2 3 4
Paper Thickness Go to Step [3]. Does the printer recover from the trouble when using a thin paper? Fuser unit Replace the Fuser unit. (p289) Are images printed normally?
Replace the papers.
Go to Step [3].
Photoconductor unit End of procedure Go to Step [4]. Replace the Photoconductor unit. Does the printing quality get back to normal? Fuser unit Replace the Fuser unit. (p289) End of procedure Replace the possible parts one by one.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
222
Revision A
FIP-P12 Residual Images

Symptom / Possible Parts Symptom An image of the previous page or part of the currently printing page laps over like a ghost. Possible Parts PWBA MCU IDTN
FIP-P13 Areas of Images are Missing

Symptom / Possible Parts Symptom Some areas of the printed image are missing or extremely faint. The symptom appears within a narrow range. Possible Parts ROS ASSY DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K) PWBA MCU IDTN
Step
Check Initial Check Check the Possible Parts for the following: specification, installation state, damage, deformation, dirt or foreign material. Is there something wrong with any one of the parts? Print a high density image (picture or photo) and then print a normal density image. Do areas of the high density images appear on the normal density image? Photoconductor unit Replace the Photoconductor unit. Are images printed normally?
Yes
No Step Check Initial Check Check the Possible Parts for the following: specification, installation state, damage, deformation, dirt or foreign material. Is there something wrong with any one of the parts? Yes No
1 2 3
1 2 3
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure (Replace the Photoconductor unit if the trouble occurs again)
Photoconductor unit End of procedure Go to Step [4]. Replace the Photoconductor unit. Does the printing quality get back to normal? Transfer unit End of procedure Replace the possible parts one Replace the Transfer unit. (p290) by one. Does the printing quality get back to normal?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
223
Revision A
FIP-P14 Horizontal Streaks

Symptom / Possible Parts Symptom Horizontal black or colored lines appear on the printed image. Possible Parts DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K) Fuser unit Transfer unit
Step
Check Initial Check Check the Possible Parts for the following: specification, installation state, damage, deformation, dirt or foreign material. Is there something wrong with any one of the parts? Check the lines Do they appear at regular intervals?
Yes
No
1 2 3 4
Go to Step [3].
Photoconductor unit End of procedure Go to Step [4]. Replace the Photoconductor unit. Does the printing quality get back to normal? ROS ASSY End of procedure Replace the possible parts one Replace the ROS ASSY. (p320) by one. Does the printing quality get back to normal?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
224
Revision A
3.4.6 Other FIP

The following FIPs are provided for power supply-related troubles. FIP-AC
Step Check Initial Check Is there anything wrong with the following items? The power cord is disconnected, or broken. Power supply voltage failure (the power source for the printer is wrong or not normal). Yes No
Connect or Go to Step [2]. replace the power code, or change the power source.
Continuity Check of the AC SW Replace the 1. Disconnect the power code and wait for a LVPS. (p347) minute. 2. Check if the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET has normal continuity. Is there normal continuity between the INLET and J160?
Replace the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET. (p348)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
225
Revision A
FIP-DC
Step Check Initial Check Is there anything wrong with the following items? FUSE in the LVPS (broken?) Power supply voltage failure (the power source for the printer is wrong or not normal). Check of the LVPS Disconnect J163, J165, and J164 connector on the LVPS and turn the AC SW on. Close the Interlock Switch before checking. The voltage of P163-1PIN<=>P163-2PIN is +24VDC? Check of the LVPS The voltage of P165-2PIN<=>P165-3PIN is +5VDC? Check of the LVPS The voltage of P165-4PIN<=>P165-3PIN is +3.3VDC? Yes No
Step
Check
Yes
No Check if the HARNESS ASSY 24V is damaged or shorted.
Repair broken or Go to Step [2]. shorted part or change the power source.
Check of 24V of the HARNESS ASSY End of procedure 1. Turn the AC SW off and connect J163 to the LVPS. 2. After connecting it, turn the AC SW on. The voltage of P/J163-1PIN<=>P/J163-2PIN is +24VDC?
Go to Step [3].
Replace the LVPS. (p347)
3 4 5
Go to Step [4].
Replace the LVPS. (p347) Replace the LVPS. (p347) Check if the HARNESS ASSY LV RPG has normal continuity.
Go to Step [5].
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [6]. LV RPG 1. Turn the AC SW off and connect J164 to the LVPS. 2. After connecting it, turn the AC SW on. The voltage of P164-1PIN<=>P164-4PIN is +3.3VDC? Continuity Check of HARNESS ASSY LV Go to Step [7]. 1. Turn the AC SW off and connect J165 to the LVPS. 2. After connecting it, turn the AC SW on. The voltage of P/J165-2PIN<=>P/J165-3PIN is +5VDC?
Check if the HARNESS ASSY LV is damaged or shorted.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
226
Revision A
FIP-MULTI-FEED
Step Check Initial Check Is there anything wrong with the following items? Installation state of the paper guide. Condition of the papers in the cassette. Paper quality Check of the MSI Does the multi-feed occurs at the MSI? Yes No
Step
Check
Yes
No End of procedure
Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. guide correctly or replace the papers.
Check of the ROS ASSY RETARD Replace the Replace the ROLL ASSY RETARD with a new ROLL ASSY FEED. (p276) one. (p255) Does the multi-feed still occur after replacing the paper?
2 3
Go to Step [3].
Check of Paper Go to Step [4]. Make a test print with a new paper. Does the multi-feed still occur after replacing the paper?
Check of the ROLL ASSY RETARD Replace the Replace the ROLL ASSY RETARD with a new ROLL ASSY FEED. (p302) one. (p282) Does the multi-feed still occur after replacing the paper? Check of Paper Make a test print with a new paper. Does the multi-feed still occur after replacing the paper? When an option cassette is installed Go to Step [6]. When an option cassette is Not installed Go to Step [7]. Replace the ROLL ASSY FEED of the defective Feeder. (p276), (p302), (p415), (p428)
End of procedure (Ask the user to store the papers in a place where the humidity level is low)
Replace the ROLL ASSY RETARD of the defective Feeder. (p255), (p387), (p431)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Level 2 FIP
227
Revision A
3.5 Abnormal Noise-related Trouble

3.5.1 Abnormal Noise-related Troubleshooting Entry Chart
The check items surrounded by Do you hear abnormal noise during initialization after power-on? Y N are for main unit only.
Check the operation table at power-on, and check for foreign material or damage. (Refer to FIP-N1 (p229), FIP-N5 (p231), FIP-N7 (p232)).
Do you hear abnormal noise in the Standby mode? N
Check the operation table in the Standby mode, and check for foreign material and damage. (Refer to FIP-N2 (p229)).
Do you hear abnormal noise during printing (one-side)? N
Check the operation table during printing (one-side), and check for foreign material and damage. (Refer to FIP-N3 (p230), FIP-N6 (p231), FIP-N8 (p232)).
Do you hear abnormal noise during duplex printing?
Check the operation table during duplex printing, and check for foreign material and damage. (Refer to FIP-N4 (p231))
TROUBLESHOOTING
Abnormal Noise-related Trouble
228
Revision A
3.5.2 Abnormal Noise-related FIP

3.5.2.1 Main Unit
FIP-N1 At Power On
Possible parts that caused the error DRIVE ASSY FUSER Fuser unit MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT DRIVE ASSY DEVE DRIVE ASSY MAIN PICK UP ASSY Step Check Is abnormal noise being generated by DRIVE ASSY FUSER? Yes Replace the DRIVE ASSY FUSER. No Go to Step [2].
FIP-N2 At Standby
Possible parts that caused the error FAN REAR FAN FRONT LVPS Step Check Is abnormal noise being generated by FAN REAR? Is abnormal noise being generated by FAN FRONT? Is abnormal noise being generated by the LVPS? Yes No
1 2 3
Clean or replace Go to Step [2]. the FAN REAR. Clean or replace Go to Step [3]. the FAN FRONT. Replace the LVPS. (p345) ---
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Is abnormal noise being generated by Fuser unit Clean or replace that is driven by DRIVE ASSY FUSER? the Fuser unit. (p289) Is abnormal noise being generated by MOTOR Replace the ASSY DUP 17PM? MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM. Is abnormal noise being generated by the Clean or replace CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT that is driven by the the CHUTE MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM? ASSY DUP OUT. Is abnormal noise being generated by DRIVE ASSY DEVE? Is abnormal noise being generated by the DRIVE ASSY MAIN? Replace the DRIVE ASSY DEVE. Replace the DRIVE ASSY MAIN.
Go to Step [3].
Go to Step [4].
Go to Step [5].
Go to Step [6].
Go to Step [7].
Is abnormal noise being generated by PICK UP Clean or replace ASSY that is driven by DRIVE ASSY MAIN? the PICK UP ASSY.
---
TROUBLESHOOTING
229
Revision A
FIP-N3 At Printing (One Side)

Possible parts that caused the error DRIVE ASSY FUSER Fuser unit MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM ROLL EXIT DISPENSER ASSY HI DRIVE ASSY DEVE DEVE ASSY DRIVE ASSY MAIN PICK UP ASSY CHUTE ASSY REGI HOLDER ASSY RETARD Transfer unit Photoconductor unit ROS ASSY Step Check Yes No Go to Step [2].
Step
Check
Yes
No
5 6 7 8 9
Does the abnormal noise sound when the printer Clean or replace Go to Step [6]. starts printing operation and starts to feed the DRIVE ASSY paper? DEVE and the DEVE ASSY. Does the abnormal noise sound while the printer Clean or replace is transferring paper? the PICK UP ASSY. Does the abnormal noise sound about one second after the printer starts transferring paper? Does the abnormal noise sound several times while performing a continuous printing? Clean or replace the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p283) Go to Step [7].
Go to Step [8].
Clean or replace Go to Step [9]. the DISPENSER TONER HI ASSY. Replace the ROS ASSY. (p320) ---
Is the abnormal noise high-pitched sound?
1 2 3 4
Is abnormal noise being generated by the Paper Clean or replace Feeder? the PICK UP ASSY.
Is abnormal noise being generated by the MSI? Clean or replace Go to Step [3]. the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. Does the abnormal noise sound immediately after starting printing operation? Clean or replace Go to Step [4]. the DRIVE ASSY Clean or replace the Fuser unit. (p289)
Does the abnormal noise keep sounding from Clean or replace Go to Step [5]. when starting printing until the job is finished? the DRIVE ASSY MAIN, Transfer unit, ROLL EXIT, and the Photoconductor unit.
TROUBLESHOOTING
230
Revision A
FIP-N4 At Duplex Printing

Possible parts that caused the error MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM ROLL DUP ROLL EXIT Step Check Yes No Go to Step [2].
3.5.2.2 550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit

FIP-N5 At Power On
Possible parts that caused the error PICK UP ASSY Step Check Yes No ---
1 2
Does the abnormal noise sound while the printer Clean or replace is reversing the paper? the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM and the ROLL EXIT. Does the abnormal noise sound while the printer Clean or replace is transferring paper? the ROLL DUP.
---
FIP-N6 When Printing

Possible parts that caused the error PICK UP ASSY Step Check Yes No ---
TROUBLESHOOTING
231
Revision A
3.5.2.3 1100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit

FIP-N7 At Power On
Possible parts that caused the error PICK UP ASSY 3RD PICK UP ASSY 4TH Step Check Yes No Go to Step [2].
1 2
Is abnormal noise being generated by the upper Clean or replace Paper Feeder? the PICK UP ASSY. Is abnormal noise being generated by the lower Clean or replace Paper Feeder? the PICK UP ASSY.
FIP-N8 When Printing

Possible parts that caused the error PICK UP ASSY 3RD PICK UP ASSY 4TH Step Check Yes No Go to Step [2].
1 2
Is abnormal noise being generated by the upper Clean or replace Paper Feeder? the PICK UP ASSY. Is abnormal noise being generated by the lower Clean or replace Paper Feeder? the PICK UP ASSY.
TROUBLESHOOTING
232
Revision A
3.6 Test Print

OVERVIEW To check the engine operation, it is possible to print engine controller built-in sample at the continuous printing speed without being routed through the main controller. If the problem does not occur on the engine controller built-in sample, the cause of the problem may be with the main controller. PRINTING PROCEDURE OF TEST PRINT PATTERN 1. 2. Remove the PWBA ESS MAIN. (p358) Load papers on either MP tray or standard lower paper cassette and turn the power on.
W A R N IN G
P31
Never touch the energized or driving part when performing the following procedure.
Ida_Sec02_100GA
Figure 3-2. Printing Test Print Pattern
3. 4. 5.
Short the two pins of the P31 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN with a screwdriver or a similar tool. The printer starts printing (duplex continuous printing) after it shifts to ready mode. To stop printing, pull back the screwdriver to disconnect the connection of the two pins.
C H E C K P O IN T
Papers should be loaded on the MP tray or standard lower paper cassette. If you disconnect the two connectors during cleaning cycle, or if the printer enters cleaning cycle while disconnecting the connectors, blank sheet will be printed. If the printer is in error condition, printing will not be started. For details on ready mode, refer to 2.7.2 Operating Modes (p123).
TROUBLESHOOTING
Test Print
233
Revision A
TEST PRINT PATTERN Test print pattern is a checked pattern that shifts its color every horizontal 128 dots x vertical 140 dots in the order corresponding to black (K), cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y).
engine diag0002FC
Figure 3-3. Test Print Pattern
TROUBLESHOOTING
Test Print
234
CHAPTER
4
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
Revision A
4.1 Overview
This section describes procedures for disassembling the main components and specific parts of the product. Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be reassembled by reversing the disassembly procedure. Procedures which, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury are described under the heading WARNING. CAUTION signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment. Important tips for procedures are described under the heading CHECK POINT. If the assembly procedure is different from the reversed disassembly procedure, the correct procedure is described under the heading REASSEMBLY. Any adjustments required after reassembly of components or parts are described under the heading ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED. When you have to remove any units or parts that are not described in this chapter, refer to the exploded diagrams in the appendix.
4.1.1 Precautions
The precautions below (WARNING and CAUTION), must always be followed during disassembly and assembly.
W A R N IN G
Disconnect the power cable before disassembling or assembling the printer. If you need to work on the printer with power applied, strictly follow the instructions in this manual. Always wear gloves for disassembly and reassembly to avoid injury from sharp metal edges. To protect sensitive microprocessors and circuitry, use static discharge equipment, such as anti-static wrist straps, when accessing internal components. Never replace the fuse on the Power Supply Board in any circumstances. Be aware that letting the laser beam get into your eyes directly could result in loss of vision. Never open any cover on which a Warning Label for Laser Beam is attached. Use extreme caution to avoid injury of yourself and anyone around you with a clear understanding of hazardous nature of the laser beam. The Fuser unit and other high-temperature parts remain at hazardous temperature for a certain period of time even after stop of operation and turning off of the power. To prevent suffering a burn, be sure to wait after turning off the power until the temperature of the parts cools down to a safe level, and then start working on the printer. To avoid dust explosion or ignition, never bring any consumables close to flame or throw them into fire. When developer or oil stuck to your skin or clothes, wipe it off with a dry cloth carefully and wash it off with water immediately.
Overview
236
Revision A
W A R N IN G
Be careful not to let the developer or toner get into your eyes or mouth, and not to inhale it. The same caution should be taken for people around you. (Spread a sheet of paper inside and around the printer to prevent soiling.) As there are many types of different screws, pay attention not to attach them at the wrong positions. If a screw for plastic is mistakenly used for a screw for metal plates, its threads will be broken. Be extremely careful of the difference between the screws for plastic and those for metal plates. Do not pick up the spilt toner with a vacuum cleaner for home use. To do so may cause the sucked toner particles to catch fire by sparks of the electric contacts. If the toner has spilt on the floor, etc., clean it with a broom or wipe it with a cloth moistened with neural detergent. If it is necessary to clean a lot of spilt toner with a cleaner, use a cleaner exclusively designed for toner.
W A R N IN G
Use only recommended tools for disassembling, assembling or adjusting the printer. Apply lubricants and adhesives as specified. Make the specified adjustments when you disassemble the printer. (Refer to Chapter 5 for details.)
Leg_Sec001_014EA
Overview
237
Revision A
Turn the printer OFF, and disconnect the power cord before starting work. If necessary, remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN, the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT and the PHD ASSY before disassembling the printer. Before performing work around FUSER ASSY, allow the FUSER ASSY and its surrounding area to sufficiently cool down. Extra caution is required during work as exerting unnecessary force may damage parts or cause them to malfunction. Wear a wrist strap to discharge static electricity from the human body, whenever possible. Once the COVER ASSY TOP, PHD ASSY, TCRU ASSY, PAPER CASSETTE are removed, place them out of the way so as not to cause an obstruction for your work. (Depending on the parts you are working on, it is not lways necessary to remove those parts.)
4.1.2 Before starting work

This chapter describes the procedures for removing and attaching the main parts of the printer by breaking them down into 11 main components.
Category COVER PAPER CASSETTE PAPER FEEDER RETARD & REGI ASSY CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT XEROGRAPHICS DEVELOPMENT DRIVE ELECTRICAL ONE TRAY OPTION FEEDER TWO TRAY OPTION FEEDER
C A U T IO N
Disassembly/Reassembly Reference Page (Section No.) p.242 (4.2) p.255 (4.3) p.261 (4.4) p.278 (4.5) p.289 (4.6) p.320 (4.7) p.322 (4.8) p.342 (4.9) p.345 (4.10) p.362 (4.11) p.393 (4.12)
When performing work on parts controlled as spare parts which the disassembling procedures are not given in this manual, fully observe how they are attached before starting work. For details about option parts, refer to the document supplied with the parts. In principle, options must already have been removed before starting work, however, if there is no need to remove them, it is allowed to service with them attached.
Overview
238
Revision A
4.1.3 Screws
Many types of screws are used on this printer. Do not mistakenly attach them at the wrong positions. Pay special attention when handling screws for plastic and screws for metal plates. If you mix up these screws, screw holes will be damaged. Screw threads also will be damaged, which may cause further trouble.
C A U T IO N
The letter TAP on the board or plate indicates the position to be screwed with a tapping screw for plastic.
Table 4-1. List of Screws

No. 1 Screw for plastic Silver tapping 2 Screw for plastic Black tapping 3 Screw for metal plate Silver 4 Screw for metal plate Gold 5 Screw for metal plate Silver with external toothed washer Metal plate
Part, etc. Plastic
Type
Application Plastic
Shape
How to Recognize Screw Type Silver colored Screw threads are rougher than metal plate TYPE Screw tip is fine. Black colored Screw threads are rougher than metal plate TYPE Screw tip is fine. Silver colored Uniform screw diameter
Cautions This is a self-tapping screw. It threads the screw hole, so take care not to screw it diagonally.
Parts
Rough
Part, etc. Plastic
Plastic
Rough
Part, etc. Plastic
This is a self-tapping screw. It threads the screw hole, so take care not to screw it diagonally.
Plastic
Part, etc.
Plastic
Metal plate
Part, etc. Plastic
Gold colored Uniform screw diameter
Silver colored With external toothed washer Uniform screw diameter
Parts where each grounding wire is fixed.
Overview
239
Revision A
4.1.4 Tools
Use only specified tools to avoid damaging the printer. All are commercially available, and should be made ready beforehand.
Name Phillips screwdriver No.1 Phillips screwdriver No.2 Flat-blade screwdriver Long-nose pliers Tweezers E-Ring holder Code B743800100 B743800500 B743000100 B740400100 -----
Overview
240
Revision A
Black arrows in illustrations indicate that the part should be moved in the indicated direction. When black arrows are given a consecutive number, this indicates that they should be moved in the indicated order. For details on positions of connectors (P/J), refer to Chapter 7 APPENDIX. Latch A Release and Latch B Release that are described in the disassembly procedures indicate to release the latches shown in the figures below. Latch A
4.1.5 Conventions used in descriptions of procedures

Expressions relating to directions in procedures are defined as follows: FRONT : Near-side direction facing the front side of the printer REAR : Far-side direction facing the front side of the printer LEFT : Left direction facing the front side of the printer
RIGHT : Right direction facing the front side of the printer
Ida_03_125C
Latch B
Ida_03_097A
Figure 4-1. Definition of Printer Orientation
Remove screws shown in the figures with a Phillips screwdriver unless otherwise specified.
1
Ida_03_126C
Figure 4-2. Releasing Latches
Overview
241
Revision A
5. 6. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Attach the COVER ASSY TOP. (p.254)
5)
4.2 COVERS
4.2.1 COVER TOP MAIN
C H E C K P O IN T
[CAUTION] in the figure indicates a "CAUTION" note or precaution for reinstalling.

COVER TOP MAIN
4)
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP. (p.254) Release latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secure the COVER TOP MAIN.
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT COVER ASSY TOP PHD
6) 4)
Release the two tabs that secure the rear of the COVER TOP MAIN. With the COVER ASSY TOP PHD slightly opened, pull out the COVER TOP MAIN toward rear of the printer to remove it.
STUD TOP
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
Before reinstalling the COVER TOP MAIN, make sure that the right STUD TOP is pressed down completely.
[CAUTION]
1. 2. 3. 4.
With the COVER ASSY TOP PHD slightly opened, insert the COVER TOP MAIN from rear of the printer. Lock the two tabs on the rear of the COVER TOP MAIN. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD and attach the COVER TOP MAIN with the 2 screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm). Close the COVER ASSY TOP PHD.
Ida_03_001B
Figure 4-3. Removing the COVER TOP MAIN
COVERS
242
Revision A
4.2.2 CONSOLE PANEL

REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244) Release the three tabs that secure the CONSOLE PANEL to the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD, and remove the CONSOLE PANEL.
2)-1
2)-1
REINSTALLATION 1. Insert the two bosses on the CONSOLE PANEL into the holes on the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD, and secure the CONSOLE PANEL by locking the three tabs. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244)
2.
COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD
2)-2
CONSOLE PANEL Ida_03_104B
Figure 4-4. Removing the CONSOLE PANEL
COVERS
243
Revision A
4.2.3 COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD

3) 2) 3)
C H E C K P O IN T
Numbers in the square bracket [ ] in the figure indicate the steps of reinstallation procedure.
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Release latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Remove the 2 screws (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secure the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. Release the four tabs that secure the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, take care not to move COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD too far from the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT as they are connected with a cable.
4. 5. 6.
Move the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD slightly away from the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Disconnect P/J220 connector from the CONSOLE PANEL. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD from the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
5)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Connect P/J220 connector to the CONSOLE PANEL. Insert the four bosses on the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD into the holes on the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and secure the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD with the four tabs. Secure the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD with the 2 screws (silver, tapping, 10mm). Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD
[2)]
Ida_03_003B
Figure 4-5. Removing the COVER FRONT HEAD 3. 4.
COVERS
244
Revision A
4.2.4 COVER ASSY TOP PHD

REMOVAL
4)-2
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Pull out the two STUD TOPs that secure the COVER ASSY TOP PHD to the main unit. While releasing the bosses on both the GUIDE FRAME DEVE L and the GUIDE FRAME DEVE R from the grooves on both ends of the COVER ASSY TOP PHD, remove the COVER ASSY TOP PHD.
COVER ASSY TOP PHD STUD TOP
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert the bosses on both the GUIDE FRAME DEVE L and the GUIDE FRAME DEVE R into the grooves on both ends of the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. Match the two holes on the COVER ASSY TOP PHD with the holes on the main unit, and insert the two STUD TOPs to secure the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
3)
3)
STUD TOP
COVER ASSY TOP PHD
GUIDE FRAME DEVE R
4)-1
Ida_03_004A
Figure 4-6. Removing the COVER ASSY TOP PHD
COVERS
245
Revision A
4.2.5 COVER REAR ASSY

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Disconnect P/J166 connector from the LVPS. Release the two clamps and remove the harness. Lift the COVER REAR ASSY a little to remove it toward rear of the printer.
5)
[CAUTION]
COVER REAR ASSY
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Attach the COVER REAR ASSY to the main unit and secure the COVER REAR ASSY with the seven tabs. Route the harness through the two clamps.
C A U T IO N
J166
Lead the harness of the FAN REAR through the harness guide and the clamp. Make sure to route the harness as shown.
LVPS 6)
3. 4. 5. 6.
Connect P/J166 connector to the LVPS.

Ida_03_005B
Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
Figure 4-7. Removing the COVER REAR ASSY
COVERS
246
Revision A
4.2.6 FAN REAR

C H E C K P O IN T
[CAUTION] in the figure indicates a "CAUTION" for reinstalling.
COVER REAR
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 35 mm) that secure the FAN REAR. Remove the FAN REAR.
5)
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
LABEL [CAUTION] FAN REAR 5) 6) J166

Figure 4-8. Removing the FAN REAR
Ida_03_006A
Pay attention to the attachment orientation of the FAN. (Attach the FAN with its label facing toward the inside of the printer.)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Secure the FAN REAR with the 2 screws (silver, tapping, 35mm) with its label facing toward the inside of the printer. Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
COVERS
247
Revision A
4.2.7 COVER SIDE R ASSY

C H E C K P O IN T
2)
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secures the COVER SIDE R ASSY. Release the tab that secures the COVER SIDE R ASSY. Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY from the main unit.
4)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert the tab on the bottom of the COVER SIDE R ASSY into the groove on the main unit. Secure the tab of the COVER SIDE R ASSY to the main unit. Secure the COVER SIDE R ASSY with the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm). Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
COVER SIDE R
3) [1)]
Ida_03_007A
Figure 4-9. Removing the COVER SIDE R ASSY
COVERS
248
Revision A
4.2.8 COVER FRONT R

C H E C K P O IN T
[CAUTION] in the figure indicates a note for reinstalling.
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Release latch A and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secures the COVER FRONT R. Release the two tabs that secure the COVER FRONT R. Release latch B, fully open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT and half-open the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. Remove the COVER FRONT R while pulling it toward you.
2)
3)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Release latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Release latch A and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. Insert the two bosses on the COVER FRONT R into the holes on the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN with lifting the latch A, and secure the COVER FRONT R with the two tabs. Secure the COVER FRONT R with the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm). Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
5)
COVER FRONT R
[NOET]
4. 5. 6.
LATCH R
COVER FRONT R
Ida_03_008B
Figure 4-10. Removing COVER FRONT R
COVERS
249
Revision A
4.2.9 TRAY ASSY MSI BASE

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the COVER FRONT L ASSY. (p.252) Open the COVER ASSY MSI. Pull out the right and left bosses of the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE while pressing the elongate holes on both sides of the COVER ASSY MSI outward. Release latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Rotate the HOLDER TRAY L at the left base of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT clockwise and remove the HOLDER TRAY L. Release the left boss and pull out the right boss of the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE, and remove the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE together with the HOLDER TRAY R.
TRAY ASSY MSI BASE 6) HOLDER TRAY R
HOLDER TRAY L
3) 3)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Attach the HOLDER TRAY R to the right boss of the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE, and attach them to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Attach the HOLDER TRAY L to the left base of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and secure the left boss of the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE with the HOLDER TRAY L. Secure the HOLDER TRAY L by turning it counterclockwise. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Put the right and left bosses of the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE into the elongate holes on both sides of the COVER ASSY MSI. Attach the COVER FRONT L ASSY. (p.252) Figure 4-11. Removing TRAY ASSY MSI BASE
5)-1
5)-2 4)
3. 4. 5. 6.
Ida_03_009A
COVERS
250
Revision A
4.2.10 COVER ASSY MSI

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Open the COVER ASSY MSI. Pull out the right and left bosses of the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE while pressing the elongate holes on both sides of the COVER ASSY MSI outward. Slide the COVER ASSY MSI rightward to pull out its two bosses and remove the COVER ASSY MSI.
TRAY ASSY MSI BASE
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Slide the COVER ASSY MSI leftward to insert its two bosses into the holes on the bottom of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Put the right and left bosses of the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE into the elongate holes on both sides of the COVER ASSY MSI. Close the COVER ASSY MSI.
2) 3)
2)
COVER ASSY MSI Ida_03_010B
Figure 4-12. Removing COVER ASSY MSI
COVERS
251
Revision A
4.2.11 COVER FRONT L ASSY

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Release latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244) Release the three tabs that secure the COVER FRONT L ASSY and remove the COVER FRONT L ASSY.
C H E C K P O IN T
When releasing the three tabs, release the lowest tab first, and the middle one, then the upper one to make the work easier.
3)-1
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Release latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Insert the two bosses on the COVER FRONT L ASSY into the holes on the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and secure the COVER FRONT L ASSY with the three tabs. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244) Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
COVER ASSY MSI
3)-2
3. 4.
COVER FRONT L ASSY

Figure 4-13. Removing the COVER FRONT L ASSY
Ida_03_011A
COVERS
252
Revision A
4.2.12 COVER SIDE L ASSY

C H E C K P O IN T
2)
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secures the COVER SIDE L ASSY. Release the tab that secures the COVER SIDE L ASSY. Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY from the main unit.
4)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert the tab on the bottom of the COVER SIDE L ASSY into the groove on the main unit. Secure the tab of the COVER SIDE L ASSY to the main unit. Secure the COVER SIDE L ASSY with the screw (silver, tapping, 10mm). Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
[1)]
COVER SIDE L ASSY 3)
Ida_03_012A
Figure 4-14. Removing the COVER SIDE L ASSY
COVERS
253
Revision A
4.2.13 COVER ASSY TOP, COVER TOP STOPPER

REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP upward. While bending the COVER TOP STOPPER, pull out its two bosses one by one to remove the COVER ASSY STOPPER from the COVER ASSY TOP.
COVER ASSY TOP
COVER TOP STOPPER
REINSTALLATION 1. While bending the COVER TOP STOPPER, put its two bosses into the COVER ASSY TOP one by one to attach the COVER ASSY STOPPER to the COVER ASSY TOP. Attach the COVER ASSY TOP.
2.
Ida_03_123B
Figure 4-15. Removing the COVER ASSY TOP and COVER TOP STOPPER
COVERS
254
Revision A
4.3 PAPER CASSETTE

4.3.1 ROLL ASSY RETARD
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Draw out the CASSETTE from the main unit. Remove the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (p.256) Release the tab that secures the SHAFT ASSY RETARD to the HOLDER RETARD, and remove the SHAFT ASSY RETARD together with the ROLL ASSY RETARD and the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION. Pull out the ROLL ASSY RETARD and the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION from the SHAFT ASSY RETARD.
4) CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION
SHAFT ASSY RETARD
4.
ROLL ASSY RETARD
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
When installing the SHAFT ASSY RETARD, pay attention to its orientation.
3)-1 3)-2
1. 2.
Insert the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION into the SHAFT ASSY RETARD. Insert the SHAFT ASSY RETARD into the ROLL ASSY RETARD with the cross-shaped dent side of the ROLL ASSY RETARD facing the shaft, and engage the ROLL ASSY RETARD with the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION. Attach the SHAFT ASSY RETARD, on which the ROLL ASSY RETARD and the CLUTCH ASSY FRICION are attached, to the HOLDER RETARD and secure them with the tab. Attach the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (p.256) Install the CASSETTE to the main unit.
3.
4. 5.
HOLDER RETARD
Ida_03_013A
Figure 4-16. Removing the ROLL ASSY RETARD.
PAPER CASSETTE
255
Revision A
4.3.2 HOLDER ASSY RETARD

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Draw out the CASSETTE from the main unit. Press the two (right and left) tabs of the CHUTE TURN CST inward to release them, and open the CHUTE TURN CST. Release the tab that secures the HOLDER ASSY RETARD to the CASSETTE, rotate the HOLDER ASSY RETARD upward, and remove the HOLDER ASSY RETARD toward left.
HOLDER ASSY RETARD
3)-3
3)-2
CHUTE TURN CST
2)-1
3)-1
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Match the two holes on the HOLDER ASSY RETARD with the bosses on the CASSETTE, attach HOLDER ASSY RETARD, and secure them with the tab. Close the CHUTE TURN CST. Install the CASSETTE to the main unit.
2)-2
2)-1
CASSETTE
Ida_03_015B
Figure 4-17. Removing the HLDER ASSY RETARD
PAPER CASSETTE
256
Revision A
4.3.3 KIT GUIDE SIDE L, KIT GUIDE SIDE R

C H E C K P O IN T
4)
2 1
PLATE ASSY BTM 5)
REMOVAL
HOOK
1. 2.
Draw out the CASSETTE from the main unit. Hold down the PLATE ASSY BTM, release the tabs on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R located on right-and-left bottom of the CASSETTE, and lift the PLATE ASSY BTM. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the STOPPER BLOCK to the HOUSING CST. Release the PLATE ASSY BTM from the tab on the right side of the HOUSIGN CST.
PLATE ASSY BTM
3. 4. 5.
STOPPER BLOCK 3)
1 2
Raise the PLATE ASSY BTM as indicated with black arrow in Figure 4-18.
PLATE ASSY BTM
Ida_03_11
Figure 4-18. Removing the KIT GUIDE SIDE L and KIT GUIDE SIDE R
PAPER CASSETTE
257

6. 7. 8. Release the tab of the GEAR MANUAL to remove the GEAR MANUAL. Slide the KIT GUIDE SIDE L inward as far as it will go to remove upward. Slide the KIT GUIDE SIDE R inward as far as it will go to remove upward.
C A U T IO N
Revision A
KIT GUIDE SIDE R KIT GUIDE SIDE R GEAR MANUAL 6) 8) HOOK 7) KIT GUIDE SIDE L
When removing the KIT GUIDE SIDE R, be careful not to lose the GUIDE STOPPER and the SPRING STOPPER GUIDE SIDE as they may come off.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Attach the KIT GUIDE SIDE R to the HOUSING CST, and slide it outward as far as it will go. Attach the KIT GUIDE SIDE L to the HOUSING CST, tune the scale of the LEVER GUIDE SIDE to "8.5", and slide it outward as far as it will go.
C A U T IO N
HOOK
[2)] LEVER GUIDE KIT GUIDE SIDE SIDE L
Attaching the LEVER GUIDE SIDE without tuning its scale to "8.5" may cause pattern misalignment or paper jam because papers are not loaded properly in this state.
3. 4.
Attach the GEAR MANUAL. Match the SPRING N/F with the tab on the backside of the PLATE ASSY BTM, and install them by securing with the tabs on the right side of the PLATE ASSY BTM. Attach the STOPPER BLOCK with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm). Lower the PLATE ASSY BTM, and secure the PLATE ASSY BTM with the locks on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R. Install the CASSETTE to the main unit.
Ida_03_117A
HOOKs
5. 6. 7.
Figure 4-19. Removing the KIT GUIDE SIDE L, KIT GUIDE SIDE R (2)
PAPER CASSETTE
258
Revision A
4.3.4 KIT GUIDE END

3
REMOVAL
KIT GUIDE END
6)
1. 2.
Draw out the CASSETTE from the main unit. Hold down the PLATE ASSY BTM, release the tabs on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R located on right-and-left bottom of the CASSETTE, and lift the PLATE ASSY BTM. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the STOPPER BLOCK to the HOUSING CST. Release the PLATE ASSY BTM from the tab on the right side of the HOUSING CST. Raise the PLATE ASSY BTM as indicated with black arrow in Figure 4-20. Release the notch of the ACTUATOR GUIDE END from the HOUSING CST, rotate the ACTUATOR GUIDE END 90 degrees centering around the shaft of the KIT GUIDE END, and remove the ACTUATOR GUIDE END.
HOOK ACTUATOR GUIDE END
3. 4. 5. 6.
Ida_03_118B
PLATE ASSY BTM 4)

2 1
5)
Figure 4-21. Removing the KIT GUIDE END (2)
HOOK
PLATE ASSY BTM
STOPPER BLOCK 3)
1 2
PLATE ASSY BTM
Ida_03_116B
PAPER CASSETTE
259

7. Slide the KIT GUIDE END forward to release its tab from the HOUSING CST, and remove the KIT GUIDE END upward.
C A U T IO N
Revision A
KIT GUIDE END
When removing the KIT GUIDE END, be careful not to lose the LATCH GUIDE END and the SPRING LATCH GUIDE END as they may come off from the back side.
7)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Attach the KIT GUIDE END to the HOUSING CST, and slide it toward rear overleaping the tab. Insert the ACTUATOR GUIDE END to the shaft of the KIT GUIDE END, and slide it forward with its notch set in the HOUSING CST. Match the SPRING N/F with the tab on the backside of the PLATE ASSY BTM, and install them by securing with the tabs on the right side of the PLATE ASSY BTM. Attach the STOPPER BLOCK with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm). Lower the PLATE ASSY BTM, and secure the PLATE ASSY BTM with the locks on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R. Install the CASSETTE to the main unit.
Ida_03_119B
HOOK
4. 5. 6.
PAPER CASSETTE
260
Revision A
4.4 PAPER FEEDER

4.4.1 CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
REMOVAL
2)
1. 2. 3. Draw out the CASSETTE from the main unit. Press down the concave portions on the right-and-left side of the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER with your fingers, and rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER downward. Lift up the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER, slide it forward overleaping the rib, insert its shaft to the hole on the left, and remove the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER by releasing its right edge first.
2)
REINSTALLATION 1. Insert the bosses on the right-and-left edges of the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER to the FEEDER (left-side edge should be inserted first), and push the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER deeply into the FEEDER overleaping the rib. Rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER toward you and lock it. Install the CASSETTE to the main unit.
3)-1
2. 3.
3)-3 3)-2
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
3)-1
Ida_03_016A
Figure 4-23. Removing the COVER ASSY FEEDER
PAPER FEEDER
261
Revision A
4.4.2 COVER CST

REMOVAL 1. 2. Pull in the upper side of the COVER CST toward you, and remove the COVER CST from the upper attaching part of the FEEDER ASSY. Remove the COVER CST from the lower attaching part of the FEEDER ASSY.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Hitch the COVER CST to the lower attaching part of the FEEDER ASSY. Push the upper side of the COVER CST into the upper attaching part of the FEEDER ASSY to install the COVER CST.
COVER CST
Ida_03_017A
Figure 4-24. Removing the COVER CST
PAPER FEEDER
262
Revision A
4.4.3 FEEDER ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY)

C H E C K P O IN T
16)
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Draw out the CASSETTE from the main unit. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283) Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN. (p.280) Remove the HVPS. (p.356) Remove the BRACKET TEMP. (Refer to p355)
15) 15) 15)
15) 16) 15) 15) 16)
15)
15) 18)
SUPPORT LINK 10)

PWBA MCU IDTN
10. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secures the SUPPORT LINK, and remove the SUPPORT LINK. 11. Disconnect all the connectors on the LVPS. 12. Disconnect P/J17 connector connected to the PWBA MCU IDTN of the main unit from the FEEDER ASSY. 13. Disconnect P/J47 connector connected to the PWBA MCU IDTN of the main unit from the FEEDER ASSY.
J47 FRAME FEEDER F 15)
J17
17)
FEEDER ASSY
12) Ida_03_018C 13) Figure 4-25. Removing the FEEDER ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY) (1)
PAPER FEEDER
263
Revision A
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, be careful not to overlook the screw (silver, 6 mm) beneath the CHUTE ASSY REGI.
14. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secure the GUIDE HARNESS F and release the GUIDE HARNESS F. 15. Remove the five screws (silver, 6mm) and four screws (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secure the FEEDER ASSY to the main unit. 16. Remove the three SCREW M3X110s that secure the FEEDER ASSY to the main unit. 17. Release the two harnesses of P/J17 and P/J47 connectors from the bottom plate slit on the lower main unit toward the FEEDER. 18. Remove the FRAME FEEDER F from both the main unit and the FEEDER ASSY by releasing four tabs.
C A U T IO N
GUIDE HARNESS F 14) 14)
The upper main unit should be lifted up by two persons. When removing the upper main unit from the FEEDER ASSY, pay attention not to drop or damage the upper main unit.
Ida_03_199A
19. Lift up the upper main unit and separate it from the FEEDER ASSY.
Figure 4-26. Removing the FEEDER ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY) (2)
PAPER FEEDER
264

15. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) 16. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY.
C A U T IO N
Revision A
REINSTALLATION The upper main unit should be lifted up by two persons. When installing the upper main unit onto the FEEDER ASSY, make sure that the harness of the FEEDER ASSY is not pinched.
17. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) 18. Install the CASSETTE to the main unit.
[CAUTION]
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Lift the upper main unit onto the FEEDER ASSY paying attention to the position of the bosses on the front of the upper main unit. Secure the FRAME FEEDER F both to the main unit and the FEEDER ASSY with four tabs. Secure the upper main unit with the three SCREW M3X110s. Secure the upper main unit with the five screws (silver, 6 mm) and the four screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm). Secure the GUIDE HARNESS F to the printer body with the two screws (silver, tapping, 10mm).
C A U T IO N
HARNESS ASSY 24V
LVPS P/J161
P/J163 P/J164 P/J165
When connecting the connectors in the following steps, route the harnesses as shown in the figure.
P/J162
6. 7. 8. 9.
Connect P/J47 connector of the FEEDER ASSY to the PWBA MCU IDTN of the main unit. Connect P/J17 connector of the FEEDER ASSY to the PWBA MCU IDTN of the main unit. Connect all the connectors on the LVPS. Attach the SUPPORT LINK with the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm).
PWBA MCU IDTN
P/J60
P/J22 HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE 2 P/J17 HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG
P/J47 HARNESS ASSY FDR
Ida_03_150B
Figure 4-27. Installing the FEEDER ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY)
10. Attach the BRACKET TEMP. (Refer to p355) 11. Attach the HVPS. (p.356) 12. Attach the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN. 13. Attach the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283) 14. Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246)
PAPER FEEDER
265
Revision A
4.4.4 SWITCH ASSY SIZE

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263) Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secures the SWITCH ASSY SIZE from the FEEDER R. Disconnect P/J471 connector connected to the SWITCH ASSY SIZE, and release the tab of the SWITCH ASSY SIZE to remove the SWITCH ASSY SIZE.
2) SWITCH ASSY SIZE
J471 3)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Connect P/J471 connector to the SWITCH ASSY SIZE. Hitch the tab on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE, match the two bosses with the holes of the FEEDER R, and secure them with the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm). Install the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263)
FEEDER R
Ida_03_019A
Figure 4-28. Removing the SWITCH ASSY SIZE
PAPER FEEDER
266
Revision A
4.4.5 SWITCH
C H E C K P O IN T
C A U T IO N
Operate the SWITCH to make sure that the SHAFT LINK S/W is installed correctly and the SWITCH operates smoothly.
4. REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263) Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secures the HOLDER SWITCH.
C A U T IO N
Attach the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263)

2)
HOLDER SWITCH 3)
When removing the HOLDER SWITCH, be careful not to drop the SWITCH and the SHAFT LINK SWITCH.
4) SHAFT LINK S/W
SWITCH
3. 4. 5.
Remove the HOLDER SWITCH. Remove the SHAFT LINK S/W. Remove the SWITCH.
5)
REINSTALLATION 1. Insert the SHAFT LINK S/W into the hole of the SWITCH.
C A U T IO N
When installing the SWITCH, pay attention to its direction.

[CAUTION] Off Power On
2. 3.
Attach the SWITCH to the shaft of the HOLDER SWITCH. Insert the SHAFT LINK S/W into the hole of the switch that is on the LVPS, and secure the HOLDER SWITCH to the FEEDER ASSY with a screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm).
FEEDER R Ida_03_020B
Figure 4-29. Removing the SWITCH
PAPER FEEDER
267
Revision A
4.4.6 HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263) Release the harness of the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG from the harness guide of the FEEDER R. Release the two tabs that secure the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG to the FEEDER R. Pull out the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG downward from the FEEDER R.
2)
J17
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG from the bottom of the FEEDER R. Attach the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG by locking the two tabs of the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG. Route the harness of the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG through the harness guide of the FEEDER R. Install the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263)
3)
FEEDER R
3)
HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG P171
4)
Ida_03_021A
Figure 4-30. Removing the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG.
PAPER FEEDER
268
Revision A
4.4.7 PICK UP ASSY

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263) Remove the CHUTE UPPER. (p.275) Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secure the PICK UP ASSY to the FEEDER ASSY. Disconnect P/J472 connector of the SENSOR NO PAPER and P/J474 connector of the SOLENOID FEED. Lift up the PICK UP ASSY from the FEEDER ASSY, disconnect P/J473 connector of the SENSOR LOW PAPER, and remove the PICK UP ASSY. (Refer to p272)
J473
3)
PICK UP ASSY
3)
REINSTALLATION 1. Connect P/J473 connector of the SENSOR LOW PAPER, match the two bosses on the right-and-left edges of the FEEDER ASSY with the holes of the PICK UP ASSY, and place the PICK UP ASSY onto the FEEDER ASSY. (Refer to p272) Install the PICK UP ASSY to the FEEDER ASSY with the two screws (silver, tapping, 10mm). Connect P/J472 connector of the SENSOR NO PAPER and P/J474 connector of the SOLENOID FEED. Attach the CHUTE UPPER. (p.275) Install the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263)
SENSOR LOW PAPER J473 J472 4) SENSOR NO PAPER J474 4)
SENSOR LOW PAPER SOLENOID FEED
2. 3. 4. 5.
FEEDER ASSY
Ida_03_022A
Figure 4-31. Removing the PICK UP ASSY
PAPER FEEDER
269
Revision A
4. 5. 6. 7. Attach the GEAR TURN to the shaft on the right side of the ROLL ASSY TURN. Attach the GEAR IDLER IN to the shaft on the right side of the FEEDER ASSY. Rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER toward you and lock it. (Refer to p261) Install the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263)
ROLL ASSY TURN 8) PICK UP ASSY BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC 7) 5) GEAR IDLER IN 3) 5) 4) BEARING EARTH GEAR TURN 6)
4.4.8 ROLL ASSY TURN, BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC

REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263) Press down the concave portions on the right-and-left side of the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER with your fingers, and rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER downward. (Refer to p261) Release the tab that secures the GEAR IDLER IN to the shaft on the right side of the PICK UP ASSY, and pull out the GEAR IDLER IN. Release the tab that secures the GEAR TURN to the shaft of the ROLL ASSY TURN, and pull out the GEAR TURN. Remove the two E-rings on the right-and-left side of the ROLL ASSY TURN that secure ROLL ASSY TURN to the PICK UP ASSY. Remove the right BEARING EARTH securing the ROLL ASSY TURN to the PICK UP ASSY. Remove the left BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC securing the ROLL ASSY TURN to the PICK UP ASSY. Temporarily slide the ROLL ASSY TURN toward right, release the left-side edge of the ROLL ASSY TURN from the bearing of the PICK UP ASSY, and remove the ROLL ASSY TURN toward upper left.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
REINSTALLATION
Ida_03_023A
1.
Insert the right-side edge of the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right bearing of the PICK UP ASSY, slide the ROLL ASSY TURN toward left, and insert the left-side edge of the ROLL ASSY TURN to the left bearing of the PICK UP ASSY. Attach the BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC to the left side of the ROLL ASSY TURN, and secure them with E-ring. Attach the BEARING EARTH to the right side of the ROLL ASSY TURN, and secure them with E-ring.
Figure 4-32. Removing the ROLL ASSY TURN and the BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC
2. 3.
PAPER FEEDER
270
Revision A
4.4.9 SENSOR NO PAPER

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263) Remove the CHUTE UPPER. (p.275) Remove the PICK UP ASSY. (p.269) Release the three tabs that secure the SENSOR NO PAPER to the PICK UP ASSY. Remove the SENSOR NO PAPER from the PICK UP ASSY paying attention not to hit the ACTUATOR NO PAPER.
4)
ACTUATOR NO PAPER SENSOR NO PAPER 5)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Attach the SENSOR NO PAPER to the PICK UP ASSY by locking the three tabs with attention not to hit the ACTUATOR NO PAPER. Install the PICK UP ASSY. (p.269) Install the CHUTE UPPER. (p.275) Install the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263)
PICK UP ASSY
Ida_03_024A
Figure 4-33. Removing the SENSOR NO PAPAER
PAPER FEEDER
271
Revision A
4.4.10 SENSOR LOW PAPER

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263) Remove the CHUTE UPPER. (p.275) Release the three tabs that secure the SENSOR LOW PAPER to the PICK UP ASSY. Disconnect P/J473 connector connected to the SENSOR LOW PAPER, and remove the SENSOR LOW PAPER.
3)
PICK UP ASSY
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect P/J473 connector to the SENSOR LOW PAPER. Attach the SENSOR LOW PAER to the PICK UP ASSY by locking the three tabs. Install the CHUTE UPPER. (p.275) Install the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263)
4)-1 J473
4)-2 SENSOR LOW PAPER

Ida_03_025B
Figure 4-34. Removing the SENSOR LOW PAPER
PAPER FEEDER
272
Revision A
4.4.11 SOLENOID FEED

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263) Remove the CHUTE UPPER. (p.275) Remove the PICK UP ASSY. (p.269) Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) that secures SOLENOID FEED to the PICK UP ASSY, and remove the SOLENOID FEED.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Match the hole positions of the SOLENOID FEED with the two bosses on the PICK UP ASSY, and attach the SOLENOID FEED with the screw (silver, 6mm). Install the PICK UP ASSY. (p.269) Install the CHUTE UPPER. (p.275) Install the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263)
SOLENOID FEED PICK UP ASSY J474 4)
Ida_03_026A
Figure 4-35. Removing the SOLENOID FEED
PAPER FEEDER
273
Revision A
4.4.12 ACTUATOR LOW PAPER

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the CHUTE UPPER. (p.275) Reverse the CHUTE UPPER. Release the tab on the CHUTE UPPER that secures ACTUATOR LOW PAPER, and remove the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER by releasing one edge of the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER.
3)-1
REINSTALLATION 1. Insert one edge of the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER into the hole of the CHUTE UPPER, lock the other edge with the tab, and install the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER. Attach the CHUTE UPPER. (p.275)
2.
CHUTE UPPER
3)-2 ACUATOR LOW PAPER

Ida_03_027A
Figure 4-36. Removing the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER
PAPER FEEDER
274
Revision A
4.4.13 CHUTE UPPER (REFERENCE ONLY)

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Draw out the CASSETTE from the main unit. Remove the COVER CST. (p.262) Release the two tabs that secure the CHUTE UPPER to the PICK UP ASSY, temporarily slide the CHUTE UPPER rearward to remove the four hooks, and remove the CHUTE UPPER downward.
C A U T IO N
[CAUTION]
FRAME ASSY DRIVE HOOKs 3)-1 HOOKs
Looking from the rear with both the CASSETTE and the COVER CST removed, the two hooks should be located on upper surface of the PICK UP ASSY. The upper main unit is removed in the illustration to make it easier to understand.
PICK UP ASSY 3)-1
CHUTE UPPER
REINSTALLATION
C H E C K P O IN T
The following work can be performed easily by removing the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. (Refer to p261)
HOOKs
1. 2. 3.
Hitch the four hooks on the CHUTE UPPER to the holes of the PICK UP ASSY, and install the CHUTE UPPER by locking the two hooks. Attach the COVER CST. (p.262) Install the CASSETTE to the main unit.
3)-2
CHUTE UPPER
Ida_03_028A
Figure 4-37. Removing the CHUTE UPPER (REFERENCE ONLY)
PAPER FEEDER
275
Revision A
4.4.14 ROLL ASSY FEED

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Draw out the CASSETTE from the main unit. Release the tab that secures the ROLL ASSY FEED to the SHAFT FEED, and pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED to remove it. Release the tab that secures the ROLL ASSY FEED to the SHAFT ASSY NUDGER, and pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED to remove it.
DITCH
PIN
ROLL ASSY FEED 3)
ROLL ASSY FEED 2)
REINSTALLATION 1. With the cross-shaped notch of the ROLL ASSY FEED matched with the pin of the SHAFT ASSY NUDGER, insert the ROLL ASSY FEED into the SHAFT ASSY NUDGER, and secure it with lock. With the cross-shaped notch of the ROLL ASSY FEED matched with the pin of the SHAFT ASSY FEED, insert the ROLL ASSY FEED into the SHAFT ASSY FEED, and secure it with lock. Install the CASSETTE to the main unit.
2.
3.
SHAFT ASSY NUDGER SHAFT ASSY FEED
Ida_03_029A
Figure 4-38. Removing the ROLL ASSY FEED
PAPER FEEDER
276
Revision A
4.4.15 ACTUATOR NO PAPER

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263) Remove the CHUTE UPPER. (p.275) Remove the PICK UP ASSY. (p.269) Reverse the PICK UP ASSY. Release the tab that secures the ACUTUATOR NO PAPER to the PICK UP ASSY. Draw forth the ACTUATOR NO PAPER slightly, and move the thin part of the shaft from the attaching hole to the oblong square hole. As moving the tab side of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER in the direction of an arrow, remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER from the oblong square hole of the PICK UP ASSY.
5)
6)
ACTUATOR NO PAPER
ACTUATOR NO PAPER
PICK UP ASSY
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Insert the ACTUATOR NO PAPER into the oblong square hole of the PICK UP ASSY. Move the thin part of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER from the oblong square hole of the PICK UP ASSY to the attaching hole of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER in order to set up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER. Insert the boss on the ACTUATOR NO PAPER into the hole of the PICK UP ASSY, and secure them with locks. Install the PICK UP ASSY. (p.269) Install the CHUTE UPPER. (p.275) Install the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263)
7)-2
3. 4. 5. 6.
7)-1 ACTUATOR NO PAPER

Ida_03_030A
Figure 4-39. Removing the ACTUATOR NO PAPER
PAPER FEEDER
277
Revision A
4.5 RETARD & REGI ASSY

4.5.1 ACTUATOR REGI
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283) Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN. (p.280) Rotate the ACUATOR REGI in the direction of an arrow, lift up the shaft edge on the spring-side, draw out the other edge from the attaching hole, and remove the ACTUATOR REGI. Remove the SPRING SENSOR REGI.
4) SPRING SENSOR REGI ACTUATOR REGI 3) CHUTE ASSY REGI IN
4.
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
When installing the SPRING SENSOR REGI, beware of its mounting direction. Hitch the SPRING SENSOR REGI firmly.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Attach the SPRING SENSOR REGI to the ACTUATOR REGI. Hitch one end of the SPRING SENSOR REGI to the ACTUATOR REGI, and the other end to the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN. Install the ACTUATOR REGI to the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN. Install the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN. (p.280) Install the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283)
Ida_03_031C
Figure 4-40. Removing the ACTUATOR REGI
RETARD & REGI ASSY
278
Revision A
4.5.2 SENSOR REGI

4)-2 SENSOR REGI
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283) Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN. (p.280) Remove the ACTUATOR REGI. (p.278) Release the three tabs that secure the SENSOR REGI to the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN, and remove the SENSOR REGI.
CHUTE ASSY REGI IN
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Attach the SENSOR REGI to the CHUTE ASSY REGI by locking the three tabs. Install the ACTUATOR REGI. (p.278) Install the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN. (p.280) Install the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283) Figure 4-41. Removing the SENSOR REGI
Ida_03_032B 4)-1
RETARD & REGI ASSY
279
Revision A
4.5.3 CHUTE ASSY REGI IN

3)
REMOVAL 1. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283)

C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, take care not to move the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN too far from the main unit as they are connected with a connector.
SENSOR REGI CHUTE ASSY REGI IN
2. 3. 4.
Lift up the rear of the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN slightly, draw out rearward, and remove the CHUTE ASST REGI IN. Disconnect P/J181 connector of the SENSOR REGI that is connected to the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN. Disconnect P/J200 relay connector of the HARNESS ASSY OHP and the HARNESS ASSY OHP MCU.
2)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Connect P/J200 relay connector of the HARNESS ASSY OHP and the HARNESS ASSY OHP MCU. Connect P/J181 connector to the SENSOR REGI on the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN. Insert the three tabs on the front of the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN into the three holes of the main unit frame, and tuck the two projections on the rear of the CHUTE ASSY into the attaching holes. Install the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283)
HARNESS ASSY SENSOR OHP
CHUTE ASSY REGI IN
J181 P/J200
4.
HARNESS ASSY OHP MCU
Ida_03_034B
Figure 4-42. Removing the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN
RETARD & REGI ASSY
280
Revision A
4.5.4 SENSOR OHP

3)
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283) Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN. (p.280) Remove the one screw (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secures the SENSOR OHP to the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN with the HOLDER OHP. Disconnect P/J201 connector that is connected to the SENSOR OHP and then remove the SENSOR OHP from the HOLDER OHP.
SENSOR REGI CHUTE ASSY REGI IN
REINSTALLATION
2)
1.
Connect P/J201 connector to the SENSOR OHP and install the SENSOR OHP to the HOLDER OHP.
C A U T IO N
Make sure to match the attaching hole of the SENSOR OHP with the projection of the HOLDER OHP.
HARNESS ASSY SENSOR OHP
2. 3. 4.
Secure the HOLDER OHP with the SENSOR OHP to the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN with the one screw. Install the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN. (p.280) Install the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283)
CHUTE ASSY REGI IN J181 P/J200
HARNESS ASSY OHP MCU
Ida_03_034B
Figure 4-43. Removing the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN
RETARD & REGI ASSY
281
Revision A

REMOVAL 1. 2. Release latch A and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. Remove the BTR ASSY. (p.290)
C A U T IO N
Before performing the following work, cover the whole of the DEVE ASSY with papers or similar sheets to prevent toner from adhering to your clothes.
3)-2 HOLDER ASSY RETARD 3)-1
3. 4.
Rotate the HOLDER ASSY RETARD upward, lift up its left edge, and remove the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. Release the tab that secures the SHAFT RETARD to the HOLDER ASSY RETARD, and remove the SHAFT RETARD together with the ROLL ASSY RETARD. Pull out and remove both the ROLL ASSY RETARD and the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION from the SHAFT RETARD.
SHAFT RETARD 4)
5.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION into the SHAFT RETARD. Insert the ROLL ASSY FRICTION into the SHAFT RETARD and engage them with the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION. Install the SHAFT RETARD on the HOLDER ASSY RETARD by locking the tab. Insert the HOLDER ASSY RETARD to the main unit (the right edge should be inserted first), and install the HOLDER ASSY RETARD by rotating it toward you.
C A U T IO N
HOLDER RETARD 5)
HOLDER RETARD
Make sure to remove the papers that cover the DEVE ASSY.
SHAFT RETARD CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION ROLL ASSY RETARD

Ida_03_036A
5. 6.
Install the BTR ASSY. (p.290) Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.
Figure 4-44. Removing the ROLL ASSY RETARD
RETARD & REGI ASSY
282
Revision A
4.5.6 CHUTE ASSY REGI

C H E C K P O IN T
C A U T IO N
Numbers in the square bracket [ ] in the figure indicate the steps of reinstallation procedure. 5. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.
4), [1)]
REMOVAL 1. Release latch A and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.
J191 J192
C A U T IO N
Before performing the following work, cover the whole of the DEVE ASSY with papers or similar sheets to prevent toner from adhering to your clothes.
CHUTE ASSY REGI CHUTE ASSY REGI
2. 3. 4. 5.
Disconnect P/J191 and P/J192 connectors on the harness that is connected to the CHUTE ASSY REGI, and remove the harness from the harness guide. Remove the four screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secure the CHUTE ASSY REGI to the main unit. Lift up the CLUTCH gear on the right side of the CHUTE ASSY REGI for about 5 mm, and release the gear engagement. Move the CHUTE ASSY REGI toward left, and remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI by lifting upward.
CHUTE ASSY REGI J192 J191 2) 3) 3)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert the CLUTCH gear on the right side of the CHUTE ASSY REGI into the hole of the main unit, and engage the gears. Insert the two bosses on the main unit into the holes of the CHUTE ASSY REGI. Secure the CHUTE ASSY REGI with the four screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm). Connect P/J191 and P/J192 connectors that connects the CHUTE ASSY REGI to the main unit, and put the harness within the harness guide.
3) 5)
Ida_03_037B
Figure 4-45. Removing the CHUTE ASSY REGI
RETARD & REGI ASSY
283
Revision A
5. 6. Hitch the PLATE REGI to the right-and-left shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL. Install the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283)
4.5.7 ROLL REGI METAL

C H E C K P O IN T

GEAR REGI METAL ROLL REGI METAL
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283) Remove the two PLATE REGIs on the right-and-left side of the ROLL REGI METAL. Remove the E-ring that secures the right shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL to the CHUTE REGI, and remove the BEARING METAL R. Remove the E-ring that secures GEAR REGI METAL to the ROLL REGI METAL, and remove the GEAR REGI METAL. Remove the BEARING METAL L that secures left shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL to the CHUTE REGI. Temporarily slide the ROLL REGI METAL toward left, and remove the ROLL REGI METAL upward from the CHUTE REGI.
3)-1 3)-2 4)-2
CHUTE REGI [CAUTION]
ROLL REGI METAL GEAR REGI METAL
6) 5)
4)-1
BEARING METAL L
REINSTALLATION
BEARING METAL R
2)
PLATE REGI
1. 2. 3.
Attach the ROLL REGI METAL to the CHUTE REGI. Insert the BEARING METAL L into the left shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL. Insert the GEAR REGI METAL into the left shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL, and attach the E-ring.
C A U T IO N
When installing the GEAR REGI METAL in the following procedures, pay attention to the direction to insert the GEAR REGI METAL.
Ida_03_038C
Figure 4-46. Removing the ROLL REGI METAL 4. Insert the BEARING METAL R into the right shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL, and attach the E-ring.
RETARD & REGI ASSY
284
Revision A
4.5.8 ROLL REGI RUBBER

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283) Remove the two PLATE REGI on the right-and-left side of the ROLL REGI METAL. Remove the CLUTCH REGI. (p.286) Remove the BEARING that secures the right shaft of the REGI RUBBER to the CHUTE REGI. Remove the E-ring that secures GEAR REGI RUBBER to the ROLL REGI RUBBER, and remove the GEAR REGI RUBBER. Remove the BEARING EARTH that secures the left shaft of the ROLL REGI RUBBER to the CHUTE REGI. Temporarily slide the ROLL REGI RUBBER toward right, and remove the ROLL REGI RUBBER upward from the CHUTE REGI.
ROLL REGI RUBBER GEAR REGI RUBBER PLATE REGI GEAR REGI RUBBER ROLL REGI RUBBER
[CAUTION]
5)-1
7)
5)-2
6)
PLATE REGI
BEARING EARTH
BEARING
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Attach the ROLL REGI RUBBER to the CHUTE REGI. Insert the BEARING EARTH into the left shaft of the ROLL REGI RUBBER.
C A U T IO N
CHUTE REGI
4)
When installing the GEAR REGI RUBBER in the following procedures, pay attention to the direction to insert the GEAR REGI RUBBER.
Ida_03_039C
Figure 4-47. Removing the ROLL REGI RUBBER
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Insert the GEAR REGI RUBBER into the left shaft of the ROLL REGI RUBBER, and attach the E-ring. Insert the BEARING into the right shaft of the ROLL REGI RUBBER. Attach the CLUTCH REGI. (p.286) Hitch the PLATE REGI to the right-and-left shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL. Install the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283)
RETARD & REGI ASSY
285
Revision A
4.5.9 CLUTCH REGI

C H E C K P O IN T
CLUTCH REGI
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283) Remove the E-ring that secures the CLUTCH REGI to the ROLL REGI RUBBER. Pull out and remove the CLUTCH REGI from the ROLL REGI RUBBER.
ROLL REGI RUBBER CLUTCH REGI CHUTE REGI
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Insert the CLUTCH REGI into the shaft of the ROLL REGI RUBBER. Fit the CLUTCH fixing part of the CHUTE REGI between the two projections on the CLUTCH TURN. Attach the E-ring to the ROLL REGI RUBBER.
C A U T IO N
3)
Route the harness as shown in the figure.
[2)]
2)
4.
Install the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283)
J192 Ida_03_040B
Figure 4-48. Removing the CLUTCH REGI
RETARD & REGI ASSY
286
Revision A
4.5.10 CLUTCH TURN

C H E C K P O IN T
Numbers in the square bracket [ ] in the figure indicate the steps of reinstallation procedure. [CAUTION] in the figure indicates a "CAUTION" for reinstalling.
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283) Remove the E-ring that secures GEAR P1 to the ROLL TURN MSI, and remove the GEAR P1. Pull out and remove the CLUTCH TURN from the ROLL TURN MSI.
J191 CHUTE REGI
CLUTCH TURN
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Insert the CLUTCH TURN into the shaft of the ROLL TURN MSI. Fit the CLUTCH fixing part of the CHUTE REGI between the two projections on the CLUTCH TURN.
C A U T IO N
ROLL TURN MSI
3)
GEAR P1
2)-2
When installing the GEAR P1 in the following procedures, pay attention to the direction to insert the GEAR P1.
[2)]
CLUTCH TURN
2)-1
3.
Insert the GEAR P1 into the shaft of the ROLL TURN MSI, and attach the E-ring.
C A U T IO N

ROLL TURN MSI
GEAR P1
4.
Install the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283)
[CAUTION]
Ida_03_041C
Figure 4-49. Removing the CLUTCH TURN
RETARD & REGI ASSY
287
Revision A
4.5.11 ROLL TURN MSI

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283) Remove the CLUTCH TURN. (p.287) Remove the BEARING that secures the right shaft of the ROLL TURN MSI to the CHUTE REGI. Remove the E-ring that secures the left shaft of the ROLL TURN MSI to the CHUTE REGI, and remove the BEARING EARTH. Temporarily slide the ROLL TURN MSI toward right, and remove the ROLL TURN MSI downward from the CHUTE REGI.
5) 3) 4)-1 4)-2
BEARING EARTH CHUTE REGI
BEARING
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Attach the ROLL TURN MSI to the CHUTE REGI. Insert the BEARING EARTH into the left shaft of the ROLL TURN MSI, and attach the E-ring. Insert the BEARING into the right shaft of the ROLL TURN MSI. Attach the CLUTCH TURN. (p.287) Install the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283) Figure 4-50. Removing the ROLL TURN MSI
ROLL TURN MSI
Ida_03_042B
RETARD & REGI ASSY
288
Revision A
4.6 CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT

FUSER ASSY 2)-2
4.6.1 FUSER ASSY

REMOVAL
C A U T IO N
As the Fuser unit remains at hazardous temperature for a certain period of time after turning the power off, be careful not to burn yourself when performing the following work.
LEVER-FUSER
2)-1
1. 2.
Release latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Release the LEVER-FUSER, hold the right-and-left handles on the FUSER ASSY, and remove the FUSER ASSY.
2)-1 LEVER-FUSER
REINSTALLATION 1. Hold the right-and-left handles on the FUSER ASSY, match both the boss on the bottom of the FUSER ASSY and the connector with the hole of the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN, and install the FUSER ASSY. Hold down the LEVER-FUSER and secure the FUSER ASSY.
CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
2. 3.
Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Figure 4-51. Removing the FUSER ASSY
Ida_03_043B
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
289
Revision A
4.6.2 BTR ASSY

2)-1
REMOVAL
C A U T IO N
As the Fuser unit remains at hazardous temperature for a certain period of time after turning the power off, be careful not to burn yourself when performing the following work.
2)-1
1. 2.
Release latch A and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. Hold the tabs on the right-and-left of the BTR ASSY with your fingers that secure the BTR ASSY to the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN, and rotate the BTR ASSY rearward. Remove the BTR ASSY from the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.
BTR ASSY CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
2)-1
3.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Match the projection on the lower right-and-left side of the BTR ASSY with the groove, and put the BTR ASSY on the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. Hold the tabs on the right-and-left side of the BTR ASSY with your fingers, rotate and secure the BTR ASSY by locking the tab. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.
C A U T IO N
Depending on the printer status upon replacement, it is required to reset the life counter after replacing the BTR ASSY. When the error or the warning that indicates the end of life ("Worn Transfer Unit" or "Replace Transfer Unit") has occurred: No need to reset the life counter. When the error or the warning that indicates the end of life ("Worn Transfer Unit" or "Replace Transfer Unit") has NOT occurred: Execute Reset TransferCounter in the Maintenance Menu to reset the life counter (Refer to Ch. 6 Maintenance). Figure 4-52. Removing the BTR ASSY
Ida_03_044B
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
290
Revision A
4.6.3 HOLDER ASSY CTD

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Release latch A and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. Remove the BTR ASSY. (p.290) Hold the two tabs that secure the HOLDER ASSY CTD to the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN with your fingers, unlock the lock, and remove the HOLDER ASSY CTD. Disconnect P/J136 connector connected to the HOLDER ASSY CTD, and remove the HOLDER ASSY CTD. Remove the SPRING CTD from the HOLDER ASSY CTD.
HOLDER ASSY CTD
4) 5) J136 SPRING CTD
4. 5.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Attach the SPRING CTD to the HOLDER ASSY CTD. Connect P/J136 connector to the HOLDER ASSY CTD. While holding the two tabs on the HOLDER ASSY CTD, insert the HOLDER ASSY CTD into the hole on the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN, and secure them by locking the tab. Install the BTR ASSY. (p.290) Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.
3)-1 3)-1 3)-2
4. 5.
HOLDER ASSY CTD

Ida_03_045A
Figure 4-53. Removing the HOLDER ASSY CTD
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
291
Revision A
4.6.4 SENSOR TNR FULL

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Release latch A and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. Remove the BTR ASSY. (p.290) Temporarily close the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. Release latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Remove the STRAP from the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT by releasing the tab.
C A U T IO N
6)
When removing the LINK FRONT in the following procedure, make sure not to turn over the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT violently in order to avoid damaging the part.
STRAP CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT

Ida_03_054A
7.
While supporting the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT with your hands, release the LINK FRONT from the boss on the left frame of the main unit.
7)
SPRING LINK
LINK FRONT
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
Ida_03_101A
Figure 4-54. Removing the SENSOR TNR FULL (1)
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
292

8. Draw forth the CASSETTE halfway from the main unit, spread some papers or similar sheets over the CASSETTE, and place the fully-opened CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT on the CASSETTE. Release the three tabs that secure the SENSOR TNR FULL to the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN, and remove the SENSOR TNR FULL.
Revision A
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
9.
10. Release latch A and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. 11. Disconnect P/J142 connector connected to the SENSOR TNR FULL, and remove the SENSOR TNR FULL.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Connect P/J142 connector to the SENSOR TNR FULL. Push the tab on the SENSOR TNR FULL into the hole of the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN,and attach the SENSOR TNR FULL by securing with the tab. Install the BTR ASSY. (p.290) Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. Attach the LINK FRONT to the boss on the left frame of the main unit. Attach the STARP to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Push in the CASSETTE.
8) CASSETTE 9)
Ida_03_046A
11)
SENSOR TNR FULL J142
Ida_03_047A
Figure 4-55. Removing the SENSOR TNR FULL (2)
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
293
Revision A
4.6.5 DRIVE ASSY FUSER

C H E C K P O IN T
LINK FRONT SPRING LINK
6)
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER FRONT R. (p.249) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the two screws (silver, tapping , 10 mm) that secure the GUIDE HARNESS F to release the GUIDE HARNESS F. Remove the SPRING LINK on the right side of the main unit. Release the hole at the center of the LINK FRONT, which is located on the right side of the main unit, from the boss.
4) 5) 4)
GUIDE HARNESS F
Ida_03_110B
Figure 4-56. Removing the DRIVE ASSY FUSER (1)
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
294

7. 8. 9. Remove the screw (silver, with external toothed washer, 5 mm) securing the ground wire on the bottom plate of the main unit, and remove the ground wire. Remove the three screws (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secure the DRIVE ASSY FUSER to the CHUTE ASSY DUP. Disconnect P/J521 connector from the DRIVE ASSY FUSER.
Revision A
10. Disconnect the ground wire connected to the DRIVE ASSY FUSER from the harness guide, and remove the DRIVE ASSY FUSER.
CHUTE ASSY DUP IN

REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Connect PJ/521 connector to the DRIVE ASSY FUSER. Secure the DRIVE ASSY FUSER to the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN with the three screws (silver, tapping, 10mm). Lead the ground wire connected to the DRIVE ASSY FUSER into the harness guide. Insert the boss on the right side of the main unit into the INK FRONT hole. Attach the SPRING LINK to the LINK FRONT on the right side of the main unit. Secure the GUIDE HARNESS F to the main unit with the two screws (silver, tapping, 10mm). Secure the ground wire on the bottom plate of the main unit with the screw (silver, with external toothed washer, 5 mm). Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Attach the COVER FRONT R. (p.249)
[3)]
10)
8) 9) 8) 8) J521
10. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
7)
Ida_03_049B
Figure 4-57. Removing the DRIVE ASSY FUSER (2)
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
295
Revision A
4.6.6 SOLENOID FEED MSI

REMOVAL
5)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER FRONT R. (p.249) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Release latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Remove the STRAP from the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT by releasing the tab.
C A U T IO N
6.
While supporting the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT with your hands, release the LINK FRONT from the boss on the left frame of the main unit.
Ida_03_054A_1
6) SPRING LINK LINK FRONT
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
Ida_03_101A_1
Figure 4-58. Removing the SOLENOID FEED MSI (1)
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
296

7. Draw forth the CASSETTE halfway from the main unit, spread some papers or similar sheets over the CASSETTE, and place the fully-opened CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT on the CASSETTE. Remove the harness connected to the SOLENOID FEED MSI from the GUIDE HARNESS F on the right side of the main unit, and disconnect P/J132 connector.
C A U T IO N
Revision A
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
SOLENOID FEED MSI
GUIDE HARNESS F
8.
Be careful not to damage other harnesses when cutting the cable tie in the following step.
9.
Cut off the cable tie that bundles the harnesses on the right side of the main unit.
J132 8) 7)
CASSETTE 9)
Ida_03_050A
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
297

10. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8mm) that secures both the SOLENOID FEED MSI and the WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. 11. Remove the SOLENOID FEED MSI.
Revision A
REINSTALLATION 1. Match the two bosses on the right side of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT with the positioning holes on the SOLENOID FEED MSI, and secure them together with the WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm). Lead the harness into the GUIDE HARNESS F, and connect P/J132 connector. Bundle the harnesses on the right side of the main unit and strap them with the cable tie. Attach the LINK FRONT to the boss on the left frame of the main unit. Attach the STARP to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Push in the CASSETTE. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Attach the COVER FRONT R. (p.249)
Ida_03_051A
SOLENOID FEED MSI 10) 11) WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
J132
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
298
Revision A
9. Attach the COVER FRONT L ASSY. (p.252)

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (p.289) Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244) Remove the COVER FRONT R. (p.249) Remove the COVER FRONT L ASSY. (p.252) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE. (p.250) Remove the COVER ASSY MSI. (p.251)
10. Attach the COVER FRONT R. (p.249) 11. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. 12. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) 13. Attach the FUSER ASSY. (p.289)
12)
SENSOR NO PAPER J135 13)
10. Remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. (p.315) 11. Remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI. (p.300) 12. Rlease the tab that secures the SENSOR NO PAPER to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and remove the SENSOR NO PAPER together with the harness. 13. Disconnect P/J135 connector connected to the SENSOR NO PAPER, and remove the SENSOR NO PAPER. REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Connect P/J135 connector to the SENSOR NO PAPER. Attach the SENSOR NO PAPER to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Attach the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI. (p.300) Attach the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. (p.315) Attach the COVER ASSY MSI. (p.251) Attach the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE. (p.250) Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248)
Ida_03_052A
Figure 4-61. Removing the SENSOR NO PAPER
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
299
Revision A
4.6.8 ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI

C H E C K P O IN T
[CAUTION]
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (p.289) Remove the COVER TOP MAIN ASSY. (p.242) Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244) Remove the COVER FRONT R. (p.249) Remove the COVER FRONT L ASSY. (p.252) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE. (p.250) Remove the COVER ASSY MSI. (p.251)
ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI SPRING NO PAPER MSI 12)-2 12)-1 13)
10. Remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. (p.315) 11. Release the four tabs that secure the CHUTE FEED UP to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and remove the CHUTE FEED UP. 12. Release one end of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI from the notch of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, pull out the other end of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI from the attaching hole, and remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI together with the SPRING NO PAPER MSI. 13. Remove the SPRING NO PAPER MSI from the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI.
11)-1
11)-1
11)-1 11)-1
11)-2
CHUTE FEED UP
Ida_03_053A
Figure 4-62. Removing the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
300
Revision A
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, install the SPRING firmly with attention to its mounting direction.
1. 2.
Attach the SPRING NO PAPER MSI to the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI. Insert one end of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI into the hole on the side of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, insert the other end to the notch, and install the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI. Hitch one end of the SPRING NO PAPER MSI to the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI and the other end to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Attach the the CHUTE FEED UP to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and secure the CHUTE FEED UP with the four tabs. Attach the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. (p.315) Attach the COVER ASSY MSI. (p.251) Attach the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE. (p.250) Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248)
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Attach the COVER FRONT L ASSY. (p.252) 11. Attach the COVER FRONT R. (p.249) 12. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244) 13. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN ASSY. (p.242) 14. Attach the FUSER ASSY. (p.289)
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
301
Revision A

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Release latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Remove the STRAP from the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT by releasing the tab.
C A U T IO N
4)
STRAP
5. While supporting the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT with your hands, release the LINK FRONT from the boss on the left frame of the main unit.
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT

Ida_03_054A_2
5) SPRING LINK LINK FRONT
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
Ida_03_101A_2
Figure 4-63. Removing the ROLL ASSY FEED (1)
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
302

6. Draw forth the CASSETTE halfway from the main unit, spread some papers or similar sheets over the CASSETTE, and place the fully-opened CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT on the CASSETTE. Release the tab that secures the CORE ROLL RETARD to the SHAFT MSI, and slide the CORE ROLL RETARD to the left. While holding down the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM, slide the ROLL ASSY FEED toward left, and remove the ROLL ASSY FEED when the pin on the SHAFT MSI appears.
Revision A
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
7. 8.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Install the ROLLER ASSY FEED so that the pin on the SHAFT MSI fits the groove on the ROLL ASSY FEED. Slide the CORE ROLL RETARD and secure it by locking the tab. Attach the LINK FRONT to the boss on the left frame of the main unit. Attach the STARP to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Push in the CASSETTE. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
6) CASSETTE PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 8)-1

Ida_03_146A
ROLL ASSY FEED
8)-2 8)-3
CORE ROLL RETARD 7)
SHAFT MSI
Ida_03_102A
Figure 4-64. Removing the ROLL ASSY FEED (2)
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
303
Revision A
4.6.10 SENSOR FULL STACK

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244) Remove the ACTUATOR FULL STACK. Release the three tabs that secure the SENSOR FULL STACK to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Disconnect P/J134 connector connected to the SENSOR FULL STACK, and remove the SENSOR FULL STACK.
3)
SENSOR FULL STACK J134 4)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect P/J134 connector to the SENSOR FULL STACK. Match the three tabs on the SENSOR FULL STACK with the holes on the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and secure them with lock. Attach the ACTUATOR FULL STACK. (p.307) Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244)
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
Ida_03_055A
Figure 4-65. Removing the SENSOR FULL STACK
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
304
Revision A
4.6.11 SENSOR DUP JAM

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the COVER ASSY MSI. Release latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Release the three tabs that secure the HOLDER SENSOR DUP to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Disconnect P/J133 connector connected to the SENSOR DUP JAM. Release the three tabs that secure the SENSOR DUP JAM to the HOLDER SENSOR DUP, and remove the SENSOR DUP JAM.
HOLDER SENSOR DUP J133 4)
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
5)-2 SENSOR DUP JAM
COVER ASSY MSI
5)-1
3)
Ida_03_057A
Figure 4-67. Removing the SENSOR DUP JAM (2)

Ida_03_056B
Figure 4-66. Removing the SENSOR DUP JAM (1)
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
305
Revision A
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Match the three tabs on the SENSOR DUP JAM with the holes on the HOLDER SENSOR DUP, and install the SENSOR DUP JAM. Connect P/J133 connector to the SENSOR DUP JAM. Match the three tabs on the HOLDER SENSOR DUP with the holes on the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and install the HOLDER SENSOR DUP. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Close the COVER ASSY MSI.
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
306
Revision A
4.6.12 ACTUATOR FULL STACK

REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244) With the center of the ACTUATOR FULL STACK bowed a little, release the right-side shaft from the attaching hole, and remove the ACTUATOR FULL STACK.
ACTUATOR FULL STACK 2)-2 2)-3 2)-1
REINSTALLATION 1. Match the left-side shaft with the attaching hole with the center of the ACTUATOR FULL STACK bowed a little, and install the ACTUATOR FULL STACK. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244)
2.
Ida_03_058A
Figure 4-68. Removing the ACTUATOR FULL STACK
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
307
Revision A
6. 7. 8. Install the GEAR EXIT/DUP to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and secure them with a lock. Attch the COVER GEAR DUP OUT to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT with the two screws (silver, tapping, with flange, 8mm). Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244)
4.6.13 MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM

REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244) Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, with flange, 8mm) that secure the COVER GEAR DUP OUT to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and remove the COVER GEAR DUP OUT. Release the tab on the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT GEAR attached to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Remove the GEAR 52 attached to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Release the tab on the GEAR 41 attached to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Remove the two gears 40/66H that are engaged with the gear of the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM. Disconnect P/J501 connector connected to the harness of the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM. Remove the two screws (silver, 6mm) that secure the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM to the MOTOR ASSY DUP OUT, and remove the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
3)-1
8)-2
GEAR EXIT/DUP 3)-2 4) GEAR 52 GEAR 40/66H 2)-2 2)-1 2)-1 5)-2 GEAR 41 COVER GEAR DUP OUT 5)-1
6)
MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM
8)-1 7) J501
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Install the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT with the two screws (silver,6mm). Connect P/J501 connector on the harness of the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM. Attach the two gears 40/66H to the gears on both sides of the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM. Install the GEAR 41 to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and secure them with a lock. Attach the GEAR 52 to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
Ida_03_059B
Figure 4-69. Removing the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
308
Revision A
4.6.14 ACTUATOR DUP

C H E C K P O IN T
2)
REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the SENSOR DUP JAM. (p.305) Press down the shaft of the ACTUATOR DUP with a small screw driver or a similar tool from the two holes of the HOLDER SENSOR DUP, and remove the ACTUATOR DUP. Remove the SPRING SENSOR DUP from the ACTUATOR DUP.
HOLDER SENSOR DUP
3.
ACTUATOR DUP
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
When installing the SPRING, beware of its mounting direction. Hitch the SPRING firmly.
3)
1. 2. 3. 4. Attach the SPRING SENSOR DUP to the ACTUATOR DUP. Hitch one end of the SPRING SENSOR DUP to the ACTUATOR DUP, and the other end to the HOLDER SENSOR DUP. Attach the ACTUATOR DUP to the grooves of the HOLDER SENSOR. Attach the SENSOR DUP JAM. (p.305)
SPRING SENSOR DUP [CAUTION]
Ida_03_060A
Figure 4-70. Removing the ACTUATOR DUP
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
309
Revision A
4.6.15 ROLL DUP

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Release latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Release the tab on the GEAR EXIT/DUP attached on the shaft of the ROLL DUP from the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and remove the GEAR EXIT/DUP. Remove the E-ring that secures the BEARING to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and slide the BEARING to the right. Remove the KL clip that secures right-side shaft of the ROLL DUP to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Pull out the BEARING EARTH that secures right-side shaft of the ROLL DUP to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Temporarily slide the ROLL DUP toward left, release its right edge from the right bearing of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, pull out the ROLL DUP toward upper right, and remove the ROLL DUP together with the BEARING. Remove the BEARING from the ROLL DUP.
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT 7)
BEARING EARTH 4) KL CLIP 6) GEAR EXIT/DUP 2)-2 5) ROLL DUP BEARING
7.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Attach the BEARING to the D-cut shaped shaft of the ROLL DUP. Insert the D-cut shaped shaft of the ROLL DUP into the left bearing of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, insert the right shaft of the ROLL DUP into the right bearing of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and install the ROLL DUP together with the BEARING. Insert the BEARING EARTH into the right shaft of the ROLL DUP. Secure the right shaft of the ROLL DUP with KL clip. Insert the BEARING to the left shaft of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and secure them with E-ring. Install the GEAR EXIT/DUP to the left shaft of the ROLL DUP, and secure them with a lock. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
3)-1 3)-2
BEARING
2)-1
Ida_03_061A
Figure 4-71. Removing the ROLL DUP
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
310
Revision A
4.6.16 ROLL EXIT

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Release latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Release the tab on the GEAR EXIT/DUP attached on the shaft of the ROLL EXIT from the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and remove the GEAR EXIT/DUP. Remove the KL-ring that secures right-side shaft of the ROLL EXIT to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Pull out the BEARING EARTH that secures right-side shaft of the ROLL EXIT to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Temporarily slide the ROLL EXIT toward right, release its left edge from the left bearing of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, pull out the ROLL EXIT toward upper left, and remove the ROLL EXIT together with the BEARING. Remove the BEARING and the E-ring from the ROLL EXIT.
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT BEARING EARTH 3) 4) KL CLIP 5)
ROLL EXIT 6)-2 BEARING 6)-1 GEAR EXIT/DUP
2)-2
6.
2)-1
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Attach both E-ring and the BEARING to the D-cut shaped shaft of the ROLL EXIT. Insert the D-cut shaped shaft of the ROLL EXIT into the left shaft of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, insert the right shaft of the ROLL EXIT into the right bearing of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and install the ROLL EXIT together with the BEARING. Insert the BEARING EARTH into the right shaft of the ROLL EXIT. Secure the right shaft of the ROLL EXIT with KL ring. Install the GEAR EXIT/DUP to the left shaft of the ROLL EXIT, and secure them with a lock. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
Ida_03_062A
Figure 4-72. Removing the ROLL EXIT
3. 4. 5. 6.
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
311
Revision A
4.6.17 CHUTE ASSY DUP IN

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (p.289) Remove the BTR ASSY. (p.290) Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244) Remove the COVER FRONT R. (p.249) Remove the COVER FRONT L ASSY. (p.252) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE. (p.250)
GUIDE HARNESS R
14) 13) 16) J36 15) J162 CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS
PWBA MCU IDTN 12) J52
10. Remove the COVER ASSY MSI. (p.251) 11. Remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. (p.315) 12. Remove the screw (silver, with external toothed washer, 5 mm) securing the ground wire to the right side of the bottom plate, and remove the ground wire. 13. Disconnect P/J162 connector that is connected to the LVPS from the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. 14. Remove the CLAMP GUDIE HARNESS from the GUIDE HARNESS R on the right side of the main unit. 15. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC from the GUIDE HARNESS R on the right side of the main unit. 16. Disconnect P/J36 and P/J52 connectors that are connected to the PWBA MCU IDTN from the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.
WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH
Ida_03_109A
Figure 4-73. Removing the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN (1)
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
312

17. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC from the harness guide located between right side of the main unit and the bottom plate. 18. Remove the SPRING LINK on the right side of the main unit. 19. Release the hole at the center of the LINK FRONT, which is located on the right side of the main unit, from the boss.
C A U T IO N
CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
Revision A
COVER ASSY TOP PHD
21)
When removing the SHAFT PIVOT in the following procedure, be careful not to drop or damage the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.
20. While supporting the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN with your hands, pull out both the SHAFT PIVOT R and the SHAFT PIVOT L. 21. Release the latch of the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN, and remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.
20)
LINK FRONT
SHAFT PIVOT L
20)
19)
J162
SHAFT PIVOT R
Ida_03_111B
18) 17)
SPRING LINK HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC
Ida_03_120B
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
313
Revision A
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. While supporting the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN with your hands, insert both the SHAFT PIVOT R and the SHAFT PIVOT L until half of the shafts are tucked. Insert the boss on the right side of the main unit into the INK FRONT hole. Attach the SPRING LINK to the LINK FRONT on the right side of the main unit. Lead the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC to the harness guide located between right side of the main unit and the bottom plate. Connect PJ/36 and P/J52 connectors to the PWBA MCU IDTN. Lead the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC to the GUIDE HARNESS R on the right side of the main unit. Attach the CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS to the GUIDE HARNESS R on the right side of the main unit. Connect P/J162 connector to the LVPS. Secure the ground wire to the right side of the bottom plate with the screw (silver, with external toothed washer, 5 mm).
10. Install the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. (p.315) 11. Attach the COVER ASSY MSI. (p.251) 12. Attach the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE. (p.250) 13. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) 14. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) 15. Attach the COVER FRONT L ASSY. (p.252) 16. Attach the COVER FRONT R. (p.249) 17. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244) 18. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) 19. Install the BTR ASSY. (p.290) 20. Install the FUSER ASSY. (p.289)
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
314
Revision A
4.6.18 CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT

C H E C K P O IN T

J22 HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE SE GUIDE HARNESS F
11)
PWBA MCU IDTN
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (p.289) Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244) Remove the COVER FRONT R. (p.249) Remove the COVER FRONT L ASSY. (p.252) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248)
WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH
10)
J13 HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP
Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE. (p.250) Remove the COVER ASSY MSI. (p.251)
[CAUTION]
HARNESS ASSY FAN/MOT/DUP
10. Remove the screw (silver, with external toothed washer, 5 mm) securing the ground wire to the right side of the bottom plate, and remove the ground wire.
HARNESS ASSY 24V
LVPS
11. Disconnect P/J13 and P/J22 connectors, which are connected to the PWBA MCU IDTN, from the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
PWBA MCU IDTN HARNESS ASSY FDR
P/J60
P/J HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE SE HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG

Ida_03_105D
Figure 4-76. Removing the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT (1)
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
315

12. Remove the two CLAMP GUIDE HARNESSes from the GUIDE HARNESS R on the right side of the main unit. 13. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secure the GUIDE HARNESS R to the main unit. 14. Release the tab on the front side of the GUIDE HARNESS R from the hole of the DRIVE ASSY DEVE, and release the GUIDE HARNESS R. 15. Disconnect P/J491 connector on the DRIVE ASSY DEVE, P/J481 connector on the DRIVE ASSY MAIN, the relay connector P/J484 to the HARNESS ASSY PHD2, and P/J48 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN.
C A U T IO N
Revision A
CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS 13) 12) GUIDE HARNESS R 12) 13) CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS 14)
When disconnecting P/J481 and P/J491 connectors, be careful not to lose the CORE RING 19.
16. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FAN/ PHD/ MOT , HARNESS ASSY FRONT/ DUP , and HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE SE , which are connected to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, from each harness guide. 17. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secure the GUIDE HARNESS F on the right side of the main unit, and remove the GUIDE HARNESS F.
Ida_03_121B
15) J484
J484
DRIVE ASSY DEVE DRIVE ASSY MAIN GUIDE HARNESS R 15) J491 15) GUIDE HARNESS F PWBA MCU IDTN 15) J48 16) 17)
Ida_03_122C
HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT J481
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
316

18. Remove the SPRING LINK on the left side of the main unit. 19. Release the hole at the center of the LINK FRONT, which is located on the left side of the main unit, from the boss. 20. Remove the two E-rings that secure both the SHAFT PIVOT R and the SHAFT PIVOT L from the bottom of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
C A U T IO N
20) 21)
Revision A
When pulling out the SHAFT PIVOT and removing the STRAP in the following procedure, be careful not to drop or damage the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
21)
SHAFT PIVOT L 21)
21. While supporting the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT with your hands, draw forth both the SHAFT PIVOT R and the SHAFT PIVOT L halfway. 22. Release the latch of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, release the tab that secures the STRAP, and remove the STRAP. 23. Remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
SHAFT PIVOT R
Ida_03_107B
23)
18) 19) SPRING LINK LINK FRONT CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
22)

Ida_03_101A_3 Ida_03_108B
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
317
Revision A
11. Secure the GUIDE HARNESS R to the main unit with the two screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm). 12. Attach the two CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS to the GUIDE HARNESS R. 13. Secure the ground wire to the right side of the bottom plate with the screw (silver, with external toothed washer, 5 mm). 14. Connect P/J13 and P/J22 connectors to the PWBA MCU IDTN. 15. Attach the COVER ASSY MSI. (p.251)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. While supporting the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT with your hands, insert both the SHAFT PIVOT R and the SHAFT PIVOT L. Attach the STARP to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Attach the two E-rings to both the SHAFT PIVOT R and the SHAFT PIVOT L on the bottom of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Insert the boss on the left side of the main unit into the LINK FRONT hole.
16. Attach the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE. (p.250) Attach the SPRING LINK to the LINK FRONT on the left side of the main unit. 17. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Secure the GUIDE HARNESS F on the right side of the main unit with the two screws (silver, tapping, 10mm).
C A U T IO N
18. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) 19. Attach the COVER FRONT L ASSY. (p.252)
When performing the following work, route the harnesses as shown in the Figure 4-76.
20. Attach the COVER FRONT R. (p.249) 21. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244) 22. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
7. 8.
Route the harness through the GUIDE HARNESS F on the right side of the main unit. Route the HARNESS ASSY FAN/ PHD/ MOT, HARNESS ASSY FRONT/ DUP, and HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE SE, which are connected to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, through each harness guide. Connect P/J491 connector on the DRIVE ASSY DEVE, P/J481 connector on the DRIVE ASSY MAIN, the relay connector P/J484 to the HARNESS ASSY PHD2, and P/J48 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN.
C A U T IO N
23. Install the FUSER ASSY. (p.289)
9.
Make sure that P/J481 and P/J491 connectors are led through the CORE RING 19.
10. Install the GUIDE HARNESS R by inserting the tab on the front side of the GUIDE HARNESS R into the hole of the DRIVE ASSY DEVE.
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
318
Revision A
4.6.19 FAN FRONT

C H E C K P O IN T
3)
3)
FAN FRONT
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244) Disconnect P/J482 connector of the harness that is connected to the FAN FRONT, and release the harness from the harness guide. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 20 mm) that secure the FAN FRONT to the FAN attaching part of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Lift up the FAN FRONT, pull out the harness from the hole on the front of the FAN attaching part.
LABEL [CAUTION]
4) 2) J482
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
When installing the FAN, beware of its mounting direction. Attach the FAN with its label facing downward.
Ida_03_113A
1. 2. 3. 4.
Put the harness of the FAN FRONT through the hole on the front of the FAN attaching part. Attach the FAN FRONT with its label side facing downward with the two screws (silver, tapping, 20 mm). Route the harness of the FAN FRONT through the harness guide, and connect P/ J482 connector. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244)
Figure 4-80. Removing the FAN FRONT
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT
319
Revision A
5. 6. Attach the DISPENSER ASSY-4. (p.326) Attach the HVPS. (p.356) Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248)
4.7 XEROGRAPHICS
4.7.1 ROS ASSY
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Remove the HVPS. (p.356) Remove the DISPENSER ASSY-4. (p.326) Disconnect P/J151 connector connected from the main unit to the ROS ASSY.
C A U T IO N
7. 8. 9.
When removing the ROS ASSY in the following procedure, be careful not to drop or damage the ROS ASSY.
ROS ASSY
8. 9.
Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, large, 10 mm) on the right-and-left of the ROS ASSY that secure the ROSS ASSY to the main unit. While supporting the ROS ASSY with your hands, remove the screw (silver, tapping, large, 10 mm) on the upper side.
9)
10)
10. Draw out and remove the ROS ASSY rearward.

J151 7)
8)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Match the hole on the right-and-left side of the ROSS ASSY with the bosses on the main unit, and insert the ROS ASSY into the main unit. Secure the ROS ASSY with the screw (silver, tapping, large, 10 mm). Secure the ROSS ASSY with the two screws (silver, tapping, large, 10 mm). Connect P/J151 connector to the ROS ASSY.
8)
Ida_03_063B
Figure 4-81. Removing the ROSS ASSY
XEROGRAPHICS
320
Revision A
4.7.2 HSG ASSY BIAS

C H E C K P O IN T
HOUSING-BASE, CRUM 6)-1
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Remove the HVPS. (p.356) Disconnect the two wires from the harness guides of the HOUSING-BASE, CRUM and the HSG ASSY BIAS. Remove the four screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secure the HSG ASSY BIAS to the main unit. Remove the HSG ASSY BIAS from the main unit.
6), [2)]
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Secure the HSG ASSY BIAS to the main unit with the four screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm). Route the two wires through the harness guides of the HOUSING-BASE, CRUM and the HSG ASSY BIAS. Attach the HVPS. (p.356) Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
7) 7) 7) 7) HSG ASSY BIAS

Ida_03_064A
Figure 4-82. Removing the HSG ASSY BIAS
XEROGRAPHICS
321
Revision A
4.8 DEVELOPMENT
4.8.1 FRAME ASSY DEVE
REMOVAL
C A U T IO N
Pay attention to prevent the GEAR ASSY DUCT from touching the COVER ASSY TOP PHD.
P/J484
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN ASSY. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Remove the HVPS. (p.356)
FRAME ASSY DEVE 6) [CAUTION]
GEAR ASSY DUCT

C A U T IO N
When removing the FRAME ASSY DEVE, cover the whole of the DEVE ASSY with papers or similar sheets to prevent toner from adhering to your clothes. When removing the FRAME ASSY DEVE, extra caution should be given as toner may fly in all directions. Once the FRAME ASSY DEVE is removed, make sure to place the part in the horizontal position with its handle facing upward.
8) 9)
6. 7. 8.
Disconnect P/J484 connector on the harness connected to the CRUM of the FRAME ASSY DEVE. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. Remove the four toner nozzles, which are connected to the FRAME ASSY DEVE, from the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and (K) by releasing the locks.
C A U T IO N
Make sure that the shutters of the toner nozzles are closed. Close them if they are open.
Ida_03_065A
Figure 4-83. Removing the FRAME ASSY DEVE 9. Holding its handle, remove the FRAME ASSY DEVE upward.
DEVELOPMENT
322
Revision A
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, take care to prevent the harness from being sandwiched between the main unit and the FRAME ASSY DEVE.
1.
Hold the handle of the FRAME ASSY DEVE, and install the FRAME ASSY DEVE slowly matching its groove with the slide projections on both the GUIDE FRAME DEVE R and the GUIDE FRAME DEVE L.
C A U T IO N
When installing the four (Y), (M), (C), and (K) toner nozzles, be sure to attach each toner nozzle to the corresponding DEVE ASSY.
2. 3. 4.
Attach the four toner nozzles to the FRAME ASSY DEVE and secure them with locks. Close the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. Connect P/J484 connector on the harness connected to the CRUM of the FRAME ASSY DEVE.
C A U T IO N
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Attach the HVPS. (p.356) Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Attach the COVER TOP MAIN ASSY. (p.242)
DEVELOPMENT
323
Revision A
4.8.2 CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Release latch A and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. Open the tab that secures the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC on the upper left of the FRAME ASSY DEVE, and remove the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC diagonally rearward. Disconnect P/J710 connector connected to the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC, and remove the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC.
CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC 4)
4.
REINSTALLATION
J710
1. 2. Connect P/J710 connector to the CRUM, and set the harness in the groove. Insert the CRUM to the upper-left section of the FRAME ASSY DEVE in the opposite direction of an arrow, secure them with the tab, and install the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC. Close the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.
3) 3)
3. 4.
Ida_03_067A
Figure 4-84. Removing the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC
DEVELOPMENT
324
Revision A
2. 3. Attach the FRAME ASSY DEVE. (p.322) Attach the HVPS. (p.356) Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Attach the COVER TOP MAIN ASSY. (p.242)
4.8.3 DEVE ASSY (Y), (M), (C), (K)

C A U T IO N
Removal procedure described below is common to each of the DEVE ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and (K).
4. 5. 6.
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN ASSY. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Remove the HVPS. (p.356) Remove HOUSING ASSY DEVE. (p.322)
C A U T IO N
7.
7)-1
When removing the DEVE ASSY, extra caution should be given as toner may fly in all directions.
(M) (C)
7. Release both the STOPPER DEVE R and the STOPPER DEVE L on the rightand-left side of the FRAME ASSY DEVE, and pull out the DEVE ASSY toward you.
(K) 7)-2 DEVE ASSY (Y)
Ida_03_068B
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
Figure 4-85. Removing the DEVE ASSY (Y), (M), (C), (K)
When performing the following work, pay attention to the attachment direction of each DEVE ASSY.
1.
Insert the DEVE ASSY into the FRAME ASSY DEVE, and install the DEVE ASSY by locking them up with the STOPPER DEVE R and the STOPPER DEVE L.
DEVELOPMENT
325
Revision A
4.8.4 DISPENSER ASSY-4 (REFERENCE ONLY)

REMOVAL
13) 9)
J342
W A R N IN G
Do not vacuum off spilled toner using a usual vacuum cleaner. There is a possibility of taking fire.
C A U T IO N
Before removing the DISPENSER ASSY-4, vacuum remaining toner on the DISPENSER ASSY-4 with a cleaner exclusively designed for toner. When vacuuming remaining toner on the DISPENSER ASSY4, be sure to attach a ground wire to the tip of the cleaner in order to discharge static electricity. When vacuuming the residual toner on the DISPENSER ASSY4, take care to prevent any toner from adhering to the sensors on the DISPENSER ASSY-4.
HOUSING-BASE, CRUM
6)
P/J3411
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Remove the HVPS. (p.356) Disconnect P/J3411 relay connector connected to the HARNESS ASSY RFID2 from behind the main unit. Release the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK from the harness guide of the DISPENSER ASSY-4. Disconnect P/J511-514 connectors on the motors of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and (K), and remove the harness from the harness guide. Remove the two red wires from the harness guide of the HOUSING-BASE, CRUM on the left side of the main unit.
P511 8)
P512 P513 P514
7)
DISPENSER ASSY-4
Ida_03_069B
Figure 4-86. Removing the DISPENSER ASSY-4 (1) (REFERENCE ONLY)
DEVELOPMENT
326

10. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. 11. Remove the four toner nozzles, which are connected to the FRAME ASSY DEVE, from the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and (K) by releasing the locks.
C A U T IO N
Revision A
DISPENSER ASSY-4
12)
12)
12)
12. Remove the two screws (silver, 6 mm) and two screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secure the DISPENSER ASSY-4 to the main unit. 13. Disconnect P/J342 connector from the COIL ASSY CRUM READER, and release the harness from the harness guide of the HOUSING-BASE, CRUM. (Refer to Figure 4-86) 14. Space the DISPENSER ASSY-4 from the main unit, disconnect P/J701-704 connectors from the four SENSOR NO TNR, and remove the HARNESS ASSY TNR from the two harness guide of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). 15. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY-4 from the main unit.
12)
11)
[CAUTION]
Ida_03_070A
Figure 4-87. Removing the DISPENSER ASSY-4 (2) (REFERENCE ONLY) (2)
DEVELOPMENT
327
Revision A
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Place the DISPENSER ASSY-4 on the main unit. Space the DISPENSER ASSY-4 from the main unit, route the HARNESS ASSY TNR for the CRUM READER through the two harness guides on the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), and connect P/J701-704 connectors of the four SENSOR NO TNR. Place the harness for the COIL ASSY CRUM READER through the harness guide of the HOUSING-BASE, CRUM, and connect P/J342 connector. Match the boss on the front side of the DISPENSER ASSY-4 with the main unit, and secure them with four screws (silver, 6 mm x 2 and silver, tapping, 10 mm x 2).
C A U T IO N
3. 4.
When installing the four (Y), (M), (C), and (K) toner nozzles, be sure to attach each toner nozzle to the corresponding DEVE ASSY.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Attach the four toner nozzles to each DISPENSER ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and (K). Close the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. Route the two red wires through the harness guide of the HOUSING-BASE, CRUM on the left side of the main unit. Connect P/J511-514 connectors on the motors of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and (K), and place the harness within the harness guide. Place the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK within the harness guide of the DISPENSER ASSY-4.
10. Connect P/J3411 relay connector connected to the HARNESS ASSY RFID2 behind the main unit. 11. Attach the HVPS. (p.356) 12. Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) 13. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) 14. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) 15. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
DEVELOPMENT
328
Revision A
10. Temporarily slide the DISPENSER ASSY (Y) to the right, and slightly lift it upward. 11. Release the harness from the tab on the underpart of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), and remove the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). 12. Disconnect P/J701 connector from the SENSOR NO TNR of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y).
4.8.5 DISPENSER ASSY (Y)

C H E C K P O IN T
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Remove the HVPS. (p.356) Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. Remove the toner nozzle, which is connected to the FRAME ASSY DEVE, from the DISPENSER ASSY (Y) by releasing the lock.
C A U T IO N
J511
8) 12) 10) BOSS DISPENSER ASSY (Y) J701
11)
8. 9. Disconnect P/J511 connector of the motor on the right side of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), and remove the harness from the clamp just above the motor. Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) on the right and the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) on the left side of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y) that secure the DISPENSER ASSY (Y).
C A U T IO N
[3)] 9) J701 J511
9)
When performing the following work, take care not to move the DISPENSER ASSY (Y) too far from the DISPENSER ASSY-4 as they are connected with a harness.
Ida_03_071A
Figure 4-88. Removing the DISPENSER ASSY (Y)
DEVELOPMENT
329
Revision A
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect P/J701 connector to the SENSOR NO TNR of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). Route the harness through the tab on the underpart of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). Insert the tab on the lower left of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y) into the groove of the COVER HOLDER CRUM, and slide the DISPENSER ASSY (Y) toward left. Insert the screw (silver, 6 mm) on the right and the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) on the left side of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y) and secure the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). Connect P/J511 connector on the motor of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), and route the harness through the clamp just above the motor. Attach the toner nozzle of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). Close the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. Attach the HVPS. (p.356) Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246)
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) 11. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) 12. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
DEVELOPMENT
330
Revision A
11. Temporarily slide the DISPENSER ASSY (M) to the right, and slightly lift it upward. 12. Disconnect P/J702 connector from the SENSOR NO TNR of the DISPENSER ASSY (M). 13. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (M).
4.8.6 DISPENSER ASSY (M)

C H E C K P O IN T
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Remove the HVPS. (p.356) Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. Remove the toner nozzle, which is connected to the FRAME ASSY DEVE, from the DISPENSER ASSY (M) by releasing the tab.
C A U T IO N
J512
8) 11) DISPENSER ASSY (M) BOSS J702 12)
[2)] 10) J702 J512 10)
8. 9.
Disconnect P/J512 connector of the motor on the right side of the DISPENSER ASSY (M), and remove the harness from the clamp just above the motor. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). (p.329)
10. Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) on the right and the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) on the left side of the DISPENSER ASSY (M) that secure the DISPENSER ASSY (M).
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, take care not to move DISPENSER ASSY (M) too far from the DISPENSER ASSY-4 as they are connected with a harness.
Ida_03_072A
Figure 4-89. Removing the DISPENSER ASSY (M)
DEVELOPMENT
331
Revision A
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Connect P/J702 connector to the SENSOR NO TNR of the DISPENSER ASSY (M). Insert the tab on the lower left of the DISPENSER ASSY (M) into the groove of the COVER HOLDER CRUM, and slide the DISPENSER ASSY (M) toward left. Secure the DISPENSER ASSY (M) with the screw (silver, 6 mm) on the right and the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) on the left side of the DISPENSER ASSY (M) that secure the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). Connect P/J512 connector on the motor of the DISPENSER ASSY (M), and route the harness through the clamp just above the motor. Attach the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). (p.329) Attach the toner nozzle of the DISPENSER ASSY (M). Close the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. Attach the HVPS. (p.356) Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246)
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) 11. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) 12. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
DEVELOPMENT
332
Revision A
12. Temporarily slide the DISPENSER ASSY (C) to the right, and slightly lift it upward. 13. Disconnect P/J703 connector from the SENSOR NO TNR of the DISPENSER ASSY (C). 14. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (C).
4.8.7 DISPENSER ASSY (C)

C H E C K P O IN T
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Remove the HVPS. (p.356) Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. Remove the toner nozzle, which is connected to the FRAME ASSY DEVE, from the DISPENSER ASSY (C) by releasing the tab.
C A U T IO N
J513
12) DISPENSER ASSY (C) BOSS
8) 13) J703
[2)]
8. 9. Disconnect P/J513 connector of the motor on the right side of the DISPENSER ASSY (C), and remove the harness from the clamp just above the motor. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). (p.329)
11)
11) J703 J513
10. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (M). (p.331) 11. Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) on the right and the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) on the left side of the DISPENSER ASSY (C) that secure the DISPENSER ASSY (C).
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, take care not to move DISPENSER ASSY (C) too far from the DISPENSER ASSY-4 as they are connected with a harness.
Ida_03_073A
Figure 4-90. Removing the DISPENSER ASSY (C)
DEVELOPMENT
333
Revision A
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Connect P/J703 connector to the SENSOR NO TNR of the DISPENSER ASSY (C). Insert the tab on the lower left of the DISPENSER ASSY (C) into the groove of the COVER HOLDER CRUM, and slide the DISPENSER ASSY (C) toward left. Secure the DISPENSER ASSY (C) with the screw (silver, 6 mm) on the right and the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) on the left side of the DISPENSER ASSY (C) that secure the DISPENSER ASSY (C). Connect P/J513 connector on the motor of the DISPENSER ASSY (C), and route the harness through the clamp just above the motor. Attach the DISPENSER ASSY (M). (p.331) Attach the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). (p.329) Attach the toner nozzle of the DISPENSER ASSY (C). Close the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. Attach the HVPS. (p.356)
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) 11. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) 12. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) 13. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
DEVELOPMENT
334
Revision A
4.8.8 DISPENSER ASSY (K)

C H E C K P O IN T
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, take care not to move DISPENSER ASSY (K) too far from the DISPENSER ASSY-4 as they are connected with a harness.
13. Temporarily slide the DISPENSER ASSY (K) to the right, and slightly lift it upward. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Remove the HVPS. (p.356) Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. Remove the toner nozzle, which is connected to the FRAME ASSY DEVE, from the DISPENSER ASSY (K) by releasing the tab.
C A U T IO N
14. Disconnect P/J704 connector from the SENSOR NO TNR of the DISPENSER ASSY (K). 15. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (K).
J514 13) DISPENSER ASSY (K) BOSS 8) 14) J704
[2)]
8. 9. Disconnect P/J514 connector of the motor on the right side of the DISPENSER ASSY (K), and remove the harness from the clamp just above the motor. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). (p.329)
12) J704 J514
12)
10. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (M). (p.331) 11. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (C). (p.333) 12. Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) on the right and the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) on the left side of the DISPENSER ASSY (K) that secure the DISPENSER ASSY (K).
Ida_03_074A
Figure 4-91. Removing the DISPENSER ASSY (K)
DEVELOPMENT
335
Revision A
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Connect P/J704 connector to the SENSOR NO TNR of the DISPENSER ASSY (K). Insert the tab on the lower left of the DISPENSER ASSY (K) into the groove of the COVER HOLDER CRUM, and slide the DISPENSER ASSY (K) toward left. Secure the DISPENSER ASSY (K) with the screw (silver, 6 mm) on the right and the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) on the left side of the DISPENSER ASSY (K) that secure the DISPENSER ASSY (K). Connect P/J514 connector on the motor of the DISPENSER ASSY (K), and route the harness through the clamp just above the motor. Attach the DISPENSER ASSY (C). (p.333) Attach the DISPENSER ASSY (M). (p.331) Attach the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). (p.329) Attach the toner nozzle of the DISPENSER ASSY (K). Close the COVER ASSY TOP PHD.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Attach the HVPS. (p.356) 11. Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) 12. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) 13. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) 14. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
DEVELOPMENT
336
Revision A
5. 6. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
4.8.9 SENSOR NO TNR (Y), (M), (C)

C A U T IO N
Removal procedure described below is common to each of the SENSOR NO TNR (Y), (M), and (C).
7.
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246)
C A U T IO N
There is no need to remove the toner nozzles or each harness when performing the following work. The SENSOR NO TNR can easily be removed by lifting up the DISPENSER ASSY, however, the DISPENSER ASSY should not be moved too far as the harness is connected to the DISPENSER ASSY.
7)
6) J701,J702,J703 P701,P702,P703 8)
5. 6. 7. 8.
Remove the DISPENSER ASSY. (p329 or p331 or p333) Disconnect P/J701, P/J702, or P/J703 connector from the SENSOR NO TNR. Release the four tabs that secure the SENSOR NO TNR to the DISPENSER ASSY. Remove the SENSOR NO TNR from the DISPENSER ASSY.
SENSOR NO TNR
Ida_03_075A
Figure 4-92. Removing the SENSOR NO TNR (Y), (M), (C) REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Attach the SENSOR NO TNR to the DISPENSER ASSY, and secure the SENSOR NO TNR with the four tabs. Connect P/J701, P/J702, or P/J703 connector to the SENSOR NO TNR. Install the DISPENSER ASSY.(p329 or p331 or p333) Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246)
DEVELOPMENT
337
Revision A
4.8.10 SENSOR NO TNR (K)

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Disconnect P/J704 connector from the SENSOR NO TNR of the DISPENSER ASSY (K). Release the four tabs that secure the SENSOR NO TNR to the DISPENSER ASSY (K). Remove the SENSOR NO TNR from the DISPENSER ASSY (K).
6)
5) J704
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Attach the SENSOR NO TNR to the DISPENSER ASSY (K), and secure the SENSOR NO TNR with the four tabs. Connect P/J704 connector to the SENSOR NO TNR. Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
P704 7) SENSOR NO TNR
Ida_03_076A
Figure 4-93. Removing the SENSOR NO TNR (K)
DEVELOPMENT
338
Revision A
5. 6. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
4.8.11 ACTUATOR SENSOR 2

C A U T IO N
Removal procedure described below is common to each of the ACTUATOR SENSOR 2.
7.
7)
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246)
C A U T IO N
BRACKET SENSOR 2
ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 6)
There is no need to remove the toner nozzles or each harness when performing the following work. The ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 can easily be removed by lifting up the DISPENSER ASSY, however, the DISPENSER ASSY should not be moved too far as the harness is connected to the DISPENSER ASSY.
5. 6. 7.
Remove the DISPENSER ASSY. (p329 or p331 or p333 or p335) Release the two tabs that secure the BRACKET SENSOR 2 to the DISPENSR ASSY using a mini screwdriver, and remove the BRACKET SENSOR 2. Rotate the ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 two times and remove the ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 from the BRACKET SENSOR 2.
REINSTALLATION
Ida_03_077A
1. 2. 3. 4.
Insert the ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 into the BRACKET SENSOR 2 in the opposite direction of an arrow. Attach the BRACKET SENSOR 2 to the DISPENSER ASSY. Attach the DISPENSER ASSY.(p329 or p331 or p333 or p335) Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246)
Figure 4-94. Removing the ACTUATOR SENSOR 2
DEVELOPMENT
339
Revision A
4.8.12 BOX ASSY CRUM READER

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Disconnect P/J3411 relay connector connected to the HARNESS ASSY RFID2 from behind the main unit. Disconnect P/J342 connector from the COIL ASSY CRUM READER, and release the harness from the harness guide of the HOUSING-BASE, CRUM. Remove the two red wires from the harness guide of the HOUSING-BASE, CRUM on the left side of the main unit. Remove the two screws (silver, 6 mm) and two screws (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secure the DISPENSER ASSY-4 to the main unit, and release the DISPENSER ASSY-4. Remove the four screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secure the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and (K) to the BOX ASSY CRUM READER.
6) J342 7)
J342
9.
HOOK 9)
9) 8)
10. Releasing the tabs on the bottom of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and (K), slide the BOX ASSY CRUM READER toward left to remove it.
9) 9) 8) P3411 J3411
BOX ASSY CRUM READER

Ida_03_078A
Figure 4-95. Removing BOX ASSY CRUM READER
DEVELOPMENT
340
Revision A
REINSTALLATION 1. Fit in the tabs at the bottom of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and (K), slide them toward right to match the bosses with the holes, and install the BOX ASSY CRUM READER. Secure the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and (K) to the BOX ASSY CRUM READER with the four screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm) Secure the DISPENSER ASSY-4 to the main unit with the two screws (silver, 6 mm) and two screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm). Secure the two red wires to the harness guide of the HOUSING-BASE, CRUM on the left side of the main unit. Connect P/J342 connector to the COIL ASSY CRUM READER, and route the harness through the harness guide of the HOUSING-BASE, DRUM. Connect P/J3411 relay connector connected to the HARNESS ASSY RFID2 behind the main unit. Attach the HVPS. (p.356) Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253)
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) 11. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
DEVELOPMENT
341
Revision A
4.9 DRIVE
4.9.1 DRIVE ASSY DEVE
DISPENSER ASSY-4
4)
C A U T IO N

6)
5) J161
GUIDE HARNESS R 7) 3) CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS 3) 3) CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS 3) 7) 8)-2
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the four CLAMP GUIDE HARNESSes from the GUIDE HARNESS R to remove the harness. Release the clamps on the DRIVE ASSY-4 and release the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK. Disconnect P/J161 connector from the LVPS. Take off the clamps on the DRIVE ASSY DEVE and release the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secure the GUIDE HARNESS R to the main unit. Release the tab on the front side of the GUIDE HARNESS R from the hole of the DRIVE ASSY DEVE, and remove the GUIDE HARNESS R.
[CAUTION] 8)-1
LVPS P/J161
GUIDE HARNESS R
Ida_03_079C
Figure 4-96. Removing the DRIVE ASSY DEVE (1)
DRIVE
342

9. Disconnect P/J491 connector from the DRIVE ASSY DEVE. 7. 8. 9.
Revision A
Install the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK to the clamp on the DISPENSER ASSY-4. Route the harness through the GUIDE HARNESS R, and attach the four pieces of CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248)
10. Remove the three screws (silver, tapping, large, 10 mm) that secure the DRIVE ASSY DEVE to the main unit. 11. Remove the DRIVE ASSY DEVE from the main unit.
10. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) REINSTALLATION

C A U T IO N
If the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK comes off when removing the DRIVE ASSY DEVE, refer to p349 to install the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK.
1. 2.
Secure the DRIVE ASSY DEVE to the main unit with the three screws (silver, tapping, large, 10 mm).
DRIVE ASSY DEVE
Connect P/J491 connector to the DRIVE ASSY DEVE.

C A U T IO N
Make sure that the HARNESS ASSY FAN /PHD/MOT is led through the CORE RING 19.
10)
3. 4.
Install the GUIDE HARNESS R by inserting the tab on the front side of the GUIDE HARNESS R into the hole of the DRIVE ASSY DEVE. Secure the GUIDE HARNESS R to the main unit with the two screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm).
C A U T IO N
10)
J491
10)
9)
Make sure that the gear of the DRIVE ASSY DEVE are engaged with the one of the main unit. When performing the following work, route the harnesses as shown in the figure.
HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT
Ida_03_080C
5. 6.
Install the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK to the clamp on the DRIVE ASSY DEVE. Connect P/J161 connector on the LVPS.
Figure 4-97. Removing the DRIVE ASSY DEVE (2)
DRIVE
343
Revision A
4.9.2 DRIVE ASSY MAIN

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Disconnect P/J481 connector from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. Remove the four screws (silver, tapping, large, 10 mm) that secure the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to the main unit. Remove the DRIVE ASSY MAIN from the main unit.
4) 3) 4) J481 DRIVE ASSY MAIN
REINSTALLATION 1. Secure the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to the main unit with the four screws (silver, tapping, large, 10 mm).
C A U T IO N
4) 4) HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT
Make sure that the gear of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN are engaged with the one of the main unit.
Ida_03_081C
Figure 4-98. Removing the DRIVE ASSY MAIN 2. Connect P/J481 connector to the DRIVE ASSY MAIN.
C A U T IO N
Make sure that the HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT is led through the CORE RING 19.
3. 4.
Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
DRIVE
344
Revision A
4.10 ELECTRICAL
4.10.1 LVPS ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY)
C H E C K P O IN T
LVPS ASSY 7) 161
8)
163 165 8) 164
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Remove the HVPS. (p.356) Remove the DISPENSER ASSY-4. (p.326) Disconnect P/J161, 162, 163, 164, and 165 connectors on the LVPS. Remove the three screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the LVPS ASSY to the main unit and one screw at the bottom. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secures the SUPPORT LINK, and remove the SUPPORT LINK.
SHAFT LINK S/W 10) SUPPORT LINK 9) 11)
162
8) 8) Ida_03_083C_1
10. Separate the SHAFT LINK S/W from the switch on the LVPS. 11. While releasing the SHAFT LINK S/W from the notch of the LVPS ASSY, lift up the LVPS to remove it.
Figure 4-99. Removing the LVPS ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY) (1)
ELECTRICAL
345
Revision A
REINSTALLATION 1. Lead the SHAFT LINK S/W into the notch of the LVPS ASSY, match the two bosses on the bottom of the main unit with the holes of the LVPS ASSY, and insert the LVPS ASSY. Insert the SHAFT LINK S/W to the switch on the LVPS. Attach the SUPPORT LINK with the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm). Secure the LVPS ASSY to the main unit with the three screws (silver, 6 mm) and one screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) at the bottom.
C A U T IO N
[CAUTION]
LVPS P/J161 P/J163
2. 3. 4.
P/J164 P/J165
Operate the SWITCH in order to confirm that all the switches work normally and the SHAFT LINK S/W is installed correctly. When connecting the connectors in the following steps, route the harnesses as shown in the figure.
P/J162
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Connect P/J161, 162, 163, 164, and 165 connectors on the LVPS. Attach the DISPENSER ASSY-4. (p.326) Attach the HVPS. (p.356) Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253)
Ida_03_083C_2
Figure 4-100. Removing the LVPS ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY) (2)
10. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) 11. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
ELECTRICAL
346
Revision A
4.10.2 LVPS
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Remove the HVPS. (p.356) Remove the DISPENSER ASSY-4. (p.326) Remove the LVPS ASSY. (p.345) Disconnect P/J160 connector of the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET. Remove the six screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the LVPS to the BOX ASSY LVPS.
BOX ASSY LVPS
LVPS
9)
9)
9) J160
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Secure the LVPS to the BOX ASSY LVPS with the six screws (silver, 10 mm). Connect P/J160 connector of the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET. Install the LVPS ASSY. (p.345) Attach the DISPENSER ASSY-4. (p.326) Attach the HVPS. (p.356) Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
9) 9) 8) HARNESS ASSY AC INLET 9) J160

Ida_03_084A
Figure 4-101. Removing the LVPS
ELECTRICAL
347
Revision A
9. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248)
4.10.3 HARNESS ASSY AC INLET

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Remove the HVPS. (p.356) Remove the DISPENSER ASSY-4. (p.326) Remove the LVPS ASSY. (p.345) Remove the LVPS. (p.347) Remove the screw (silver, with external toothed washer, 6 mm) that secures the ground wire to the BOX ASSY LVPS.
BOX ASSY LVPS
9)
10. Release the two tabs of the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET using a mini screwdriver or a similar tool, and then remove the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET from the attachment hole on the BOX ASSY LVPS.
10)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Insert the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET to the attaching hole of the BOS ASSY LVPS. Secure the ground lead to the BOX ASSY LVPS with the screw (silver, with external toothed washer, 6 mm). Attach the LVPS. (p.347) Install the LVPS ASSY. (p.345) Attach the DISPENSER ASSY-4. (p.326) Attach the HVPS. (p.356) Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253)
Ida_03_085A
Figure 4-102. Removing the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET
ELECTRICAL
348
Revision A
4.10.4 HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK

C H E C K P O IN T
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the DRIVE ASSY DEVE. (p.342) Remove the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK connected to the main unit.
J161 HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK
REINSTALLATION 1. Attach the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK to the main unit.

C A U T IO N
2. 3. 4.
Attach the DRIVE ASSY DEVE. (p.342)

HARNESS ASSY TNR
[CAUTION]
Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
LVPS P/J161 Ida_03_089C
Figure 4-103. Removing the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK.
ELECTRICAL
349
Revision A
5. 6. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
4.10.5 PWBA EEPROM

C A U T IO N
When the printer is turned on after replacing either the PWBA MCU IDTN ot the PWBA EEPROM, the information that specific to each printer unit is automatically stored on a memory of replaced circuit board. Due to this reason, the board becomes unique to specific printer unit, and the board is no longer usable on another printer unit. Do not reuse the board that previously installed on another printer unit. Do not replace both PWBA EEPROM and PWBA MCU IDTN at a time.
PWBA EEPROM
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secure the GUIDE HARNESS R. Release the tab on the front side of the GUIDE HARNESS R from the hole of the DRIVE ASSY DEVE, and release the GUIDE HARNESS R. Disconnect P/J144 connector connected to the SENSOR PWBA EEPROM. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secures the PWBA EEPROM to the main unit. Remove the PWBA EEPROM from the main unit.
5) 3) J144 6)
GUIDE HARNESS R 3)
4)-2
4)-1
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Secure the PWBA EEPROM to the main unit with the screw (silver, tapping, 10mm). Connect P/J144 connector to the PWBA EEPROM. Install the GUIDE HARNESS R by inserting the tab on the front side of the GUIDE HARNESS R into the hole of the DRIVE ASSY DEVE. Secure the GUIDE HARNESS R with the two screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm).
Ida_03_090C
Figure 4-104. Removing the PWBA EEPROM
ELECTRICAL
350
Revision A
4.10.6 PWBA MCU IDTN

C A U T IO N
When the printer is turned on after replacing either the PWBA MCU IDTN ot the PWBA EEPROM, the information that specific to each printer unit is automatically stored on a memory of replaced circuit board. Due to this reason, the board becomes unique to specific printer unit, and the board is no longer usable on another printer unit. Do not reuse the board that previously installed on another printer unit. When replacing the PWBA MCU IDTN, verify that the version of firmware and NVM on new PWBA MCU IDTN matches the version of previous PWBA MCU. If not, be sure to make them matches each other by either upgrading or downgrading the firmware and NVM. Make sure to replace the PWBA MCU IDTN only after matching the firmware and NVM version. Do not replace both PWBA EEPROM and PWBA MCU IDT at a time. [CAUTION] in the figure indicates a "CAUTION" for reinstalling.
P/J3411 7) P/J151 7) 7)
P/J141
C H E C K P O IN T
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn the printer OFF, and unplug the power cord from the outlet. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Remove the ESS BOX. (p.356) Disconnect P/J151, P/J141, and P/J3411 connectors from the rear of the main unit.
Ida_03_112B
Figure 4-105. Removing the PWBA MCU IDTN (1)
ELECTRICAL
351

8. Release the two tabs on the COVER ELEC to remove the COVER ELEC.
C A U T IO N
Revision A
Pay attention not to let the disconnected connector drawn into the inside of the printer.
8)
9.
Disconnect P/J18, P/J19, and P/J24 connectors inside the COVER ELEC.
10. Disconnect P/J20 connector inside the COVER ELEC.0 11. Remove the screw (silver, 4 mm) that secures the BRACKET ASSY MCU to the inside of the COVER ELEC of the main unit.
COVER ELEC
11) J24 9) 10) J20 9) 9) J18
J19
Ida_03_091B
ELECTRICAL
352

12. Remove the screw (silver, 4 mm) that secures the BRACKET ASSY MCU to the right side of the main unit. 13. Draw forth the BRACKET ASSY MCU from the right side of the main unit slightly, and disconnect all the connectors that can be seen on the PWBA MCU IDTN.
C A U T IO N
Revision A
13), 14)
(P31) (P34) (P311) (P15) (P61) (P51) (P14) (P36) (P22) (P17) (P60) (P47) (P13) (P52) (P191) (P48) N.C.
Pay attention not to let the disconnected connector drawn into the inside of the printer.
(P16) (P24) N.C. (P20)
(P18)
(P19)
14. Draw forth the BRACKET ASSY MCU furthermore, and disconnect all the connectors on the PWBA MCU IDTN.
12) 15)
BRACKET ASSY MCU
[CAUTION]
HARNESS ASSY 24V
PWBA MCU IDTN
P/J60
P/J47 P/J17 HARNESS ASSY HARNESS ASSY FDR OPFPLG
P/J22 HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE 2
Ida_03_092C
ELECTRICAL
353

15. Remove the BRACKET ASSY MCU from the main unit. 16. Remove the seven screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the PWBA MCU IDTN to the BRACKET ASSY MCU, and remove the PWBA MCU IDTN. 13. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) 14. Plug the power cord into the outlet and turn the printer on.
Revision A
PWBA MCU IDTN 16) 16)

REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Attach the PWBA MCU IDTN to the BRACKET ASSY MCU with the seven screws (silver, 6 mm). Connect the connector that is coming out of the interior of the printer to the PWBA MCU IDTN.
C A U T IO N
16) 16) 16) 16) 16)
When installing the PWBA MCU IDTN, pay attention to the routing of the harness. Be sure to secure the CORE TC-14-10-8 to the P/J34 connector with the cable tie.
BRACKET ASSY MCU [CAUTION]
Ida_03_094B
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Insert the BRACKET ASSY MCU to the right side of the main unit, and connect all the connectors. Connect P/J18, P/J19, and P/J24 connectors inside the COVER ELEC of the main unit to the PWBA MCU IDTN. Connect P/J20 connector inside the COVER ELEC of the main unit to the PWBA MCU IDTN. Secure the BRACKET ASSY MCU to the main unit with the two screws (silver, 4 mm). Install the COVER ELEC by locking the two tabs. Connect the three connectors (P/J151, P/J141, and P/J3411) to the rear surface of the main unit. Attach the ESS BOX. (p.356)
CORE TC-14-10-8
J34
10. Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) 11. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) 12. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248)
Ida_03_152B
ELECTRICAL
354
Revision A
4.10.7 SENSOR HUM

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Hold the tab on the BRCKET TEMP attached to the left side of the main unit, and push it down to release the boss. Pull up the BRACKET TEMP. Release the four tabs that secure the SENSOR HUM to the BRACKET TEMP, and remove the SENSOR HUM. Disconnect P/J231 connector connected to the SENSOR HUM, and remove the SENSOR HUM.
BRACKET TEMP 3)
J231 6) 5)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Connect P/J231 connector to the SENSOR HUM. Secure the SENSOR HUM to the BRACKET TEMP with four tabs. Insert the BRACKET TEMP to the notch of the bottom plate attached to the left side of the main unit. Hold the tab on the BRACKET TEMP, push it down to insert the two bosses into the holes, and lock them up. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Figure 4-109. Removing the SENSOR HUM
SENSOR HUM
Ida_03_095A
ELECTRICAL
355
Revision A
4.10.8 HVPS
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Disconnect P/J141 connector, WIRE ASSY BTR, and WIRE ASSY REGI on the HVPS. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm) and three screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the HVPS to the left side of the main unit. Remove the HVPS from the left side of the main unit by releasing the two tabs.
WIRE ASSY BTR 5) 6)
WIRE ASSY REGI 5)
J141 5)
BOSS
6)
HOOK
6)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Place the HVPS on the tab behind the left side of the main unit, and match the two bosses with the holes of the HVPS. Install the HVPS to the left side of the main unit with the two screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm) and three screws (silver, 6 mm). Connect P/J141 connector, WIRE ASSY BTR, and WIRE ASSY REGI to the HVPS. Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) REMOVAL Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) 1. 2. Remove the three SCREW ESSes that secure the ESS BOX. Remove the ESS BOX toward you.
6)
HVPS
BOSS 6)
Ida_03_096A
Figure 4-110. Removing the HVPS
4.10.9 ESS BOX (REFERENCE ONLY)
ELECTRICAL
356
Revision A
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
Insert the ESS BOX as far as it will go so the connectors of the PWBA ESS MAIN and the PWBA MCU IDTN are securely connected.
1. 2.
Insert the ESS BOX to the backside of the printer. Secure the ESS BOX with three SCREW ESSes.
2)
1)
1) 1)
Ida_03_082A
Figure 4-111. Removing the ESS BOX
ELECTRICAL
357
Revision A
4.10.10 PWBA ESS MAIN

C A U T IO N
[CAUTION] in the figure indicates the caution to note for reinstallation.
[CAUTION]
HOOK
SPRING EARTH TYPE B
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the PWBA ESS ROM. (p.360) Remove the PWBA NIC C533. (p.361) Remove the two screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the PANEL TYPE B to the PLATE REAR SE, and remove the PANEL TYPE B. Release the two tabs on the front of the GUIDE TYPE B, then release the two tabs on its rear to remove the GUIDE TYPE B.
4)-1 GUIDE TYPE B 4)-2 5)
4)-2
3) 4)-1 3)
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, make sure not to distort the SPRING EARTH TYPE B.
5.
Remove the SPRING EARTH TYPE B.
PANEL TYPE B
Ida_03_155A
Figure 4-112. Removing the PWBA ESS MAIN (1)
ELECTRICAL
358

6. Remove the following screws that secure the PLATE REAR SE. 1. Six screws (silver, 6 mm) 2. Three screws (silver, 6 mm, small) Release the tabs of the PANEL ESS L and the PANEL ESS R, and remove the PLATE REAR SE. Move the PANEL ESS L and the PANEL ESS R outward, pull the guide pin out of the PWBA ESS MAIN, and remove the PANEL ESS L and the PANEL ESS R. Remove the nine screws (silver, 6 mm) and the three SPACER HDDs that secure the PWBA ESS MAIN to the SHIELD PCB SE, and remove the PWBA ESS MAIN.
8)-2 9) 9) 9) 9)
Revision A
PLATE REAR SE 6)-1 6)-1 PANEL ESS R 8)-1 SPACER HDD 9) 9) 6)-1 6)-1 6)-2 6)-2 6)-1 6)-1 PWB ESS MAIN 9) 9) 9) 8)-1 9) 6)-1
7. 8. 9.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Secure the PWBA ESS MAIN to the SHIELD PCB SE with nine screws (silver, 6 mm) and three SPACER HDDs. Insert the guide pins of the PANEL ESS L and the PANEL ESS R into the hole of the PWBA ESS MAIN to install the PANEL ESS L and the PANEL ESS R. Secure the PANEL ESS L/PANEL ESS R to the PLATE REAR SE with tabs. Secure the PLATE REAR SE with six screws (silver, 6 mm) and three screws (silver, 6 mm, small) Install the SPRING EARTH TYPE B.
C A U T IO N
SHIELD PCB SE Ida_03_156A SPACER HDD 8)-2 SPACER HDD PANEL ESS L
Figure 4-113. Removing the PWBA ESS MAIN (2)
Be careful not to distort the SPRING EARTH TYPE B when handling the part. Secure the tabs of the SPRING EARTH TYPE B firmly.
6. 7. 8. 9.
Hitch the tabs on the rear of the GUIDE TYPE B to the PLATE REAR SE, secure the two front tabs to the PWBA ESS MAIN, and install the GUIDE TYPE B. Secure the PANEL TYPE B to the PLATE REAR SE with two screws (silver, 6 mm). Install the PWBA NIC C533. (p.361) Install the PWBA ESS ROM. (p.360)
ELECTRICAL
359
Revision A
4.10.11 PWBA ESS ROM

REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the ESS BOX. (p.356) Release the latch and remove the PWBA ESS ROM.
PWBA ESS ROM
REINSTALLATION 1. Insert the PWBA ESS ROM to the slot on the PWBA ESS MAIN, and secure the latch.
C A U T IO N
2)-2
Insert the PWBA ESS ROM as far as it will go, and secure the latch.
2)-1
2. Install the ESS BOX. (p.356)
Ida_03_154A
Figure 4-114. Removing the PWBA ESS ROM
ELECTRICAL
360
Revision A
4.10.12 PWBA NIC C533

REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the ESS BOX. (p.356) Remove the following screws that secure the PWBA NIC C533, and remove the PWBA NIC C533. 1. 1 screw (silver, 6 mm) 2. 2 screws (silver, 6 mm, small) Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) that secure the BRACKET ETHER BOARD to the PWBA NIC C533, and remove the BRACKET ETHER BOARD.
3) BRACKET ETHER BOARD 2)-2 2)-2 2)-1 PWBA NIC C533
3.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Secure the BRACKET ETHER BOARD to the PWBA NIC C533 with a screw (silver, 6 mm). Secure the PWBA NIC C533 with two screws (silver, 6 mm, small) and one screw (silver, 6 mm).
C A U T IO N
Make sure to connect the connectors of the PWBA NIC C533 and the PWBA ESS MAIN firmly.
3.
Install the ESS BOX. (p.356)
Ida_03_153A
Figure 4-115. Removing the PWBA NIC C533
ELECTRICAL
361
Revision A
4.11 ONE TRAY OPTION FEEDER

4.11.1 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY
2)
REMOVAL 1. 2. Draw out the CASSETTE from the main unit. Remove the four SCREW JOINT from the bottom plate of the main unit.
C A U T IO N
2)
The main unit should be lifted up by two persons.

SCREW JOINT
3.
Lift up the main unit and separate the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY from the main unit.
2) 2) 3)
1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
1. 2. 3.
Mount the main unit onto the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. Attach the four pieces of SCREW JOINT to the bottom plate of the FEEDER section of the main unit. Install the CASSETTE to the main unit.
Ida_1T_03_202C
Figure 4-116. Removing the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY
ONE TRAY OPTION FEEDER
362
Revision A
4.11.2 HARNESS ASSY OPFREC

6)
C H E C K P O IN T
J171 3)
PLATE ASSY PWBA ASSY
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the 1 TRAY FEEDER ASSY. (p.362) Remove the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the PLATE ASSY and the screw (silver, 6 mm) that secures the PWBA ASSY.
HOOK 4)-1
5) J83 3)
4)-2
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, take care not to remove the PWBA ASSY too far from the 1 TRAY FEEDER ASSY as they are connected by a connector.
HARNESS ASSY OPFREC HOUSING RIGHT
4. 5. 6.
Release the hook of the HOUSING RIGHT, and remove the PLATE ASSY and the PWBA ASSY. Disconnect P/J83 connector from the PWBA ASSY. Release the two tabs that secure the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC from behind the PLATE ASSY, and remove the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC.
NOTCH
[CAUTION]
PWBA OPTFDR 1T
HARNESS ASSY OPFREC

Ida_1T_03_203C
Figure 4-117. Removing the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC.
363
Revision A
REINSTALLATION 1. Secure the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC to the PLATE ASSY with the two tabs.
C A U T IO N
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Connect P/J83 connector to the PWBA ASSY. Match the PWBA ASSY with the two notches of the HOUSING RIGHT of the HOUSING RIGHT, and install the PLATE ASSY by securing with a hook. Secure the upper surface of the PLATE ASSY with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm). Secure the side surface of the PWBA ASSY with the screw (silver, 6 mm). Attach the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Install the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.362)
364
Revision A
4.11.3 PWBA OPTFDR 1T

C H E C K P O IN T
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Disconnect all the connectors connected to the PWBA OPTFDR 1T. Remove the two screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the PWBA OPTFDR 1T. Release the PWBA OPTFDR 1T from the two notches of the HOUSING RIGHT, and remove the PWBA OPTFDR 1T.
PWBA OPTFDR 1T
3)
3)
REINSTALLATION 1. Match the PWBA OPTFDR 1T with the two notches of the HOUSING RIGHT, and secure them with the two screws (silver, 6 mm).
C A U T IO N
4) NOTCH [CAUTION] 2) P84 P83 P81
When connecting the connectors in the following steps, route the harnesses as shown in the figure. P86 connector on the PWBA OPTFDR 1T is reserved.
PWBA OPTFDR 1T
2. 3.
Connect all the connectors except for P86 connector to the PWBA OPTFDR 1T. Attach the COVER RIGHT. (p.366)
P80 P85 P86 Not Connects P82
Ida_1T_03_204B
Figure 4-118. Removing the PWBA OPTFDR 1T
365
Revision A
4.11.4 COVER RIGHT

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Draw out the CASSETTE from the main unit. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) that secure the COVER RIGH. Release the two hooks on the rear side of the COVER RIGHT, and remove the COVER RIGHT.
HOUSING RIGHT
2)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Hitch the two hooks on the rear side of the COVER RIGHT to the HOUSING RIGHT. Secure the COVER RIGHT with the two screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm). Install the CASSETTE.
2) HOOK 3) COVER RIGHT 3)
HOOK
Ida_1T_03_205B
Figure 4-119. Removing the COVER RIGHT
366
Revision A
4.11.5 HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2

PLATE ASSY
C H E C K P O IN T
PWBA ASSY 3)
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.362) Remove the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Remove both the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the PLATE ASSY and the screw (silver, 6mm) that secures the PWBA ASSY.
C A U T IO N
5) HOOK J84 4)-1 3)
4)-2
NOTCH
4. 5. 6. Release the hook of the HOUSING RIGHT, and remove the PLATE ASSY and the PWBA ASSY. Disconnect P/J84 connector from the PWBA ASSY. Release the two tabs that secure the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2 to the HOUSING RIGHT, and remove the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2.
HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2 6) [CAUTION] PWBA OPTFDR 1T
HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2

Ida_1T_03_206C
Figure 4-120. Removing the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2
367
Revision A
REINSTALLATION 1. Secure the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2 to the HOUSING RIGHT with the tabs.
C A U T IO N
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Connect P/J84 connector to the PWBA ASSY. Match the PWBA ASSY with the two notches of the HOUSING RIGHT, and install the PLATE ASSY by securing with a hook. Secure the upper surface of the PLATE ASSY with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm). Secure the side surface of the PWBA ASSY with the screw (silver, 6 mm). Attach the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Install the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.362)
368
Revision A

REMOVAL 1. 2. Draw out the CASSETTE. Press down the concave portions on the right-and-left side of the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER with your fingers, and rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER downward.
C A U T IO N
2) 2)
The main unit is removed in the illustration to make it easier to understand.
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
3.
Lift up the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER, slide it forward overleaping the rib, insert its shaft to the hole on the left, and remove the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER by releasing its right edge first.
3)-1
REINSTALLATION 1. Insert the bosses on the right-and-left edges of the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER to the FEEDER (left-side edge should be inserted first), and push the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER deeply into the FEEDER overleaping the rib. Rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER toward you and lock it up. Install the CASSETTE.
3)-3 3)-2
2. 3.
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
3)-1
Ida_1T_03_016B
Figure 4-121. Removing the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
369
Revision A
4.11.7 COVER LEFT

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Draw out the CASSETTE. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) that secure the COVER LEFT. Release the two hooks on the rear side of the COVER LEFT, and remove the COVER LEFT.
2) HOUSING LEFT
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Hitch the two hooks on the rear side of the COVER LEFT to the HOUSING LEFT. Secure the COVER LEFT with the two screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm). Install the CASSETTE.
3)
3) HOOK
2) COVER LEFT HOOK Ida_1T_03_207B
Figure 4-122. Removing the COVER LEFT
370
Revision A

C H E C K P O IN T
5) SWITCH ASSY SIZE
J821
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.362) Remove the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Remove both the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the PLATE ASSY and the screw (silver, 6mm) that secures the PWBA ASSY.
C A U T IO N
6) PLATE ASSY
When performing the following work, take care not to remove the PWBA ASSY too far from the 1 TRAY FEEDER ASSY as they are connected with a connector.
4)
3)
4. 5. 6.
Release the hook on the HOUSING RIGHT, and remove both the PLATE ASSY and the PWBA ASSY. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the SWITCH ASSY SIZE to the HOUSING RIGHT, and release the SWITCH ASSY SIZE. Disconnect P/J821 connector from the SWITCH ASSY SIZE, and remove the SWITCH ASSY SIZE.
4)
HOUSING RIGHT
HOOK
BOSS
[2)]
Ida_1T_03_208B
371
Revision A
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Connect P/J821 connector to the SWITCH ASSY SIZE. Insert the hook on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE to the notch of the HOUSING RIGHT, match the two bosses with the holes of the HOUSING RIGHT, and secure them with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm). Match the PWBA ASSY with the two notches of the HOUSING RIGHT, and install the PLATE ASSY by securing with a hook. Secure the upper surface of the PLATE ASSY with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm). Secure the side surface of the PWBA ASSY with the screw (silver, 6 mm). Attach the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Install the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.362)
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
372
Revision A
4.11.9 PICK UP ASSY

C H E C K P O IN T
Numbers in the square bracket [ ] in the figure indicate the steps of reinstallation procedure. [CAUTION] in the figure indicates a "CAUTION" for reinstalling.
6) 6)
6)
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.362) Remove the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Remove the COVER LEFT. (p.370) Remove the DRIVE ASSY. (p.382) Press down the concave portions on the right-and-left side of the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER with your fingers, and rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER downward. Remove the two long screws (silver, 110 mm) and five screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the FRAME ASSY TOP (FRONT), and remove the FRAME ASSY TOP (FRONT).
6)
6)
6) FRAME ASSY TOP (FRONT)
5) CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
6)
Ida_1T_03_209B
Figure 4-124. Removing the PICK UP ASSY (1)
373

7. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the PLATE ASSY.
C A U T IO N
Revision A
10)
PICK UP ASSY 10) J81 9)
8. 9.
Release the hook of the HOUSING RIGHT, and remove the PLATE ASSY and the PWBA ASSY. Disconnect P/J81 and P/J85 connectors connected to the PWBA ASSY, and remove the harness connected to the PICK UP ASSY from both the harness guide and the clamp.
10) J85 10)
7)
PLATE ASSY
10. Remove the four screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secure the PICK UP ASSY to the FEEDER, and remove the PICK UP ASSY.
8)
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER [CAUTION] PWBA OPTFDR 1T
HOUSING RIGHT HOOKs
CLUMP HOOKs
[2)]
HARNESS ASSY OPFDR HARNESS ASSY LOWP

Figure 4-125. Removing the PICK UP ASSY (2)
Ida_1T_03_210C
374
Revision A
REINSTALLATION 1. Secure the PICK UP ASSY to the FEEDER with the four screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm).
C A U T IO N
2.
Route the harness connected to the PICK UP ASSY through both the harness guide and the clamp, and connect P/J81 and P/J85 connectors to the PWBA ASSY. Match the PWBA ASSY with the two notches of the HOUSING RIGHT of the HOUSING RIGHT, and install the PLATE ASSY by securing with a hook. Secure the upper surface of the PLATE ASSY with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm). Secure the FRAME ASSY TOP (FRONT) with the two long screws (silver, tapping, 110 mm) and five screws (silver, 6 mm). Rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER toward you and lock it. Install the DRIVE ASSY. (p.382) Attach the COVER LEFT. (p.370) Attach the COVER RIGHT. (p.366)
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Install the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.362)
375
Revision A
4.11.10 ROLL ASSY TURN

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the 1 TRAY FEEDER ASSY. (p.362) Remove the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Remove the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. (p.369) Remove the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC. (p.377) Remove the E-ring that secures the BEARING EARTH to the ROLL ASSY TURN, and remove the BEARING EARTH. Remove the KL CLIP that secures the BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC to the ROLL ASSY TURN, and remove the BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC. Slide the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right, and remove it upward.
ROLL ASSY TURN BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC FRAME PICKUP
6)-1 6)-2 KL CLIP 7) 5)-2 5)-1
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Insert the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right-and-left holes of the FRAME PICKUP. Insert the BEARING SLLEVE, PLASTIC to the left side of the ROLL ASSY TURN, and attach KL CLIP. Insert the BEARING EARTH into the right side of the ROLL ASSY TURN, and attach the E-ring. Attach the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC. (p.377) Install the CHUTE ASSY FEEDR. (p.369) Attach the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Install the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.362)
BEARING EARTH
Ida_1T_03_211B
Figure 4-126. Removing the ROLL ASSY TURN
376
Revision A
4.11.11 CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC

C H E C K P O IN T
3) ROLL ASSY TURN CLAMP
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the 1 TRAY FEEDER ASSY. (p.362) Remove the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Disconnect P/J825 connector on the harness that is connected to the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC, and release the harness from the clamp. Release the tab of the STOPPER CLUTCH, and remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. Pull out the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC from the ROLL ASSY TURN.
P/J825
J825
SHAFT
5) [2)]
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Insert the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC to the ROLL ASSY TURN. Insert the STOPPER CLUTCH to the shaft of the FRAME PICKUP, and install the STOPPER CLUTCH by matching its boss with the groove of the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC. Route the harness connected to the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC through the clamp, and connect P/J825 connector on the harness. Attach the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Install the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.362)
Ida_1T_03_212B
4) CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC STOPPER CLUTCH
3. 4. 5.
Figure 4-127. Removing the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC
377
Revision A

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the 1 TRAY FEEDER ASSY. (p.362) Remove the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Remove the COVER LEFT. (p.370) Remove the DRIVE ASSY. (p.382) Remove the PICK UP ASSY. (p.373) Disconnect P/J822 connector from the SENSOR NO PAPER. Put up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER, release the three tabs on the SENSOR NO PAPER, and remove the SENSOR NO PAPER.
ACTUATOR NO PAPER
7)-1
7)-2
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Put up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER and install the SENSOR NO PAPER. Connect P/J822 connector to the SENSOR NO PAPER. Install the PICK UP ASSY. (p.373) Install the DRIVE ASSY. (p.382) Attach the COVER LEFT. (p.370) Attach the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Install the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.362)
Ida_1T_03_213A
J822 6) SENSOR NO PAPER
378
Revision A

REMOVAL
6) 6)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Remove the 1 TRAY FEEDER ASSY. (p.362) Remove the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Remove the COVER LEFT. (p.370) Remove the CHUTE UPPER. (p.384) Press down the concave portions on the right-and-left side of the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER with your fingers, and rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER downward. Remove the two long screws (silver, 110 mm) and five screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the FRAME ASSY TOP (FRONT), and remove the FRAME ASSY TOP (FRONT).
6) 6) 6)
6) FRAME ASSY TOP (FRONT)
5) CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
6)
Ida_1T_03_209B
Figure 4-129. Removing the SENSOR LOW PAPER (1)
379

7. 8. Rlease the three tabs on the SENSOR LOW PAPER, and remove the SENSOR LOW PAPER. Disconnect P/J823 connector from the SENSOR LOW PAPER.
Revision A
7)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Connect P/J823 connector to the SENSOR LOW PAPER. Attach the SENSOR LOW PAPER to the FRAME PICKUP. Secure the FRAME ASSY TOP (FRONT) with the two long screws (silver, 110 mm) and five screws (silver, 6 mm). Rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER toward you and lock it. Attach the CHUTE UPPER. (p.384) Attach the COVER LEFT. (p.370) Attach the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Install the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.362)
FRAME PICKUP
J823
8)
SENSOR LOW PAPER
Ida_1T_03_214A
Figure 4-130. Removing the SENSOR LOW PAPER (2)
380
Revision A

C H E C K P O IN T
[CAUTION] in the figure indicates a "CAUTION"ote or precaution for reinstalling.
FRAME PICKUP
HARNES GUIDEs
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Release the harness that is connected to the SOLENOID FEED from the harness guide, and disconnect P/J824 connector of the harness. Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) that secures the SOLENOID FEED to the FRAME PICKUP, and remove the SOLENOID FEED.
2)-1 2)-2
P/J824
REINSTALLATION 1. Secure the SOLENOID FEED to the FRAME PICKUP with the screw (silver, 6 mm).
C A U T IO N
3)
SOLENOID FEED [CAUTION] PWBA OPTFDR 1T
2. 3.
Connect P/J824 connector of the harness that is connected to the SOLENOID FEED, and place the harness within the harness guide. Attach the COVER RIGHT. (p.366)
SOLENOID FEED
HARNESS ASSY OPFDR
Ida_1T_03_215B
381
Revision A
4.11.15 DRIVE ASSY

C H E C K P O IN T
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Disconnect P/J82 connector on the PWBA OPTFDR 1T that is connected to the DRIVE ASSY. Release the harness that is connected to the DRIVE ASSY from the harness guides. Remove the three screws (silver, 6 mm) that secures the DRIVE ASSY to the FRAME PICKUP, and remove the DRIVE ASSY.
3)
HOOKs J82
2)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Secure the DRIVE ASSY to the FRAME PICKUP with the three screws (silver, 6 mm). Route the harness that is connected to the DRIVE ASSY through the harness guides.
C A U T IO N
4)
FRAME PICKUP DRIVE ASSY
4) 4)
[CAUTION] PWBA OPTFDR 1T
3. 4.
Connect P/J82 connector on the PWBA OPTFDR 1T. Attach the COVER RIGHT. (p.366)
DRIVE ASSY Ida_1T_03_216C
Figure 4-132. Removing the DRIVE ASSY
382
Revision A

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the CHUTE UPPER. (p.384) Reverse the CHUTE UPPER. Release the tab on the CHUTE UPPER that secures ACTUATOR LOW PAPER, and remove the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER by releasing one edge of the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER.
3)-1
REINSTALLATION 1. Insert one end of the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER to the hole of the CHUTE UPPER, secure the other end with a tab, and attach the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER. Attach the CHUTE UPPER. (p.384)
2.
CHUTE UPPER 3)-2
ACTUATOR LOW PAPER

Ida_1T_03_027A
383
Revision A

REMOVAL 1. Draw out the CASSETTE.
C A U T IO N
[CAUTION]
Looking from the rear with the COVER CST removed, the two hooks of the CHUTE UPPER should be located on upper surface of the PICK UP ASSY. The FRAME ASSY TOP (FRONT) is removed in the illustration to make it easier to understand.
HOOKs
FRAME PICKUP HOOKs HOOKs
2.
Release the two hooks that secure the CHUTE UPPER to the PICK UP ASSY, temporarily slide the CHUTE UPPER rearward to remove the four hooks, and remove the CHUTE UPPER downward.
2)-1
HOOKs 2)-1
REINSTALLATION
C H E C K P O IN T
CHUTE UPPER
The CHUTE UPPER can be attached easily by removing the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. (Refer to p369)
HOOKs
1. 2.
Hitch the four hooks on the CHUTE UPPER to the holes of the PICK UP ASSY, and install the CHUTE UPPER by locking the two hooks. Install the CASSETTE.
PICK UP ASSY
2)-2
CHUTE UPPER
Ida_1T_03_217C
384
Revision A

REMOVAL
DITCH
1. 2. 3. Draw out the CASSETTE. Release the tab that secures the ROLL ASSY FEED to the SHAFT ASSY FEED, and pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED to remove it. Release the tab that secures the ROLL ASSY FEED to the SHAFT ASSY NUDGER, and pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED to remove it.
PIN
2)
ROLL ASSY FEED
REINSTALLATION 1. With the cross-shaped notch of the ROLL ASSY FEED matched with the pin of the SHAFT ASSY NUDGER, insert the ROLL ASSY FEED into the SHAFT ASSY NUDGER, and secure them with the tab. With the cross-shaped notch of the ROLL ASSY FEED matched with the pin of the SHAFT ASSY FEED, insert the ROLL ASSY FEED into the SHAFT ASSY FEED, and secure them with the tab. Install the CASSETTE.
ROLL ASSY FEED
3)
2.
3.
SHAFT ASSY NUDGER SHAFT ASSY FEED

Ida_1T_03_218A
385
Revision A

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.362) Remove the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Remove the COVER LEFT. (p.370) Remove the DRIVE ASSY. (p.382) Remove the PICK UP ASSY. (p.373) Reverse the PICK UP ASSY. Release the tab that secures the ACTUATOR NO PAPER to the PICK UP ASSY. Draw forth the ACTUATOR NO PAPER slightly, and move the thin part of the shaft from the attaching hole to the oblong square hole. As moving the tab side of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER in the direction of the arrow, remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER from the oblong square hole of the PICK UP ASSY.
7)
8)
ACTUATOR NO PAPER
ACTUATOR NO PAPER
PICK UP ASSY
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Insert the ACTUATOR NO PAPER into the oblong square hole of the PICK UP ASSY. Move the thin part of the shaft of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER from the oblong square hole of the PICK UP ASSY to the attaching hole of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER in order to set up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER. Insert the boss on the ACTUATOR NO PAPER into the hole of the PICK UP ASSY, and secure them with the tab. Install the PICK UP ASSY. (p.373) Install the DRIVE ASSY. (p.382) Attach the COVER LEFT. (p.370) Attach the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Install the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.362)
9)-2
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
ACTUATOR NO PAPER 9)-1

Ida_1T_03_030A
386
Revision A

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Draw out the CASSETTE. Remove the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (p.388) Release the tab that secures the SHAFT ASSY RETARD to the HOLDER RETARD, and remove the SHAFT ASSY RETARD together with the ROLL ASSY RETARD and the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION. Pull out the ROLL ASSY RETARD and the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION from the SHAFT ASSY RETARD.
SHAFT ASSY RETARD
4.
ROLL ASSY RETARD

REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
When installing the SHAFT ASSY RETARD, pay attention to its orientation.
3)-1 3)-2
1. 2.
Insert the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION into the SHAFT ASSY RETARD. Insert the SHAFT ASSY RETARD into the ROLL ASSY RETARD with the cross-shaped dent side of the ROLL ASSY RETARD facing the shaft, and engage the ROLL ASSY RETARD with the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION. Attach the SHAFT ASSY RETARD, on which the ROLL ASSY RETARD and the CLUTCH ASSY FRICION are attached, to the HOLDER RETARD and secure it with the tab. Attach the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (p.388) Install the CASSETTE.
3.
4. 5.
HOLDER RETARD
Ida_1T_03_013A
387
Revision A

3)-3
REMOVAL
HOLDER ASSY RETARD
1. 2. 3.
Draw out the CASSETTE. Press the two (right and left) tabs of the CHUTE TURN CST inward to release them, and open the CHUTE TURN CST. Release the tab that secures the HOLDER ASSY RETARD to the CASSETTE, rotate the RETARD ASSY upward, and remove the RETARD ASSY toward left.
3)-2
CHUTE TURN CST
2)-1
3)-1
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Match the two holes on the HOLDER ASSY RETARD with the bosses on the CASSETTE, attach HOLDER ASSY RETARD, and secure it with the tab. Close the CHUTE TURN CST. Install the CASSETTE.
2)-2
2)-1
CASSETTE
Ida_1T_03_015B
Figure 4-138. Removing the HOLDER ASSY RETARD
388
Revision A

C H E C K P O IN T
PLATE ASSY BTM 5) 4) 2 1
REMOVAL 1. 2. Draw out the CASSETTE. Hold down the PLATE ASSY BTM, release the tabs on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R located on right-and-left bottom of the CASSETTE, and lift the PLATE ASSY BTM. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the STOPPER BLOCK to the HOUSING CST. Release the PLATE ASSY BTM from the hook on the right side of the HOUSING CST. Raise the PLATE ASSY BTM as indicated with black arrow in Figure 4-132.
HOOK PLATE ASSY BTM
3. 4. 5.
STOPPER BLOCK 3) 1 2
PLATE ASSY BTM

Ida_1T_03_221B
Figure 4-139. Removing the KIT GUIDE SIDE L and KIT GUIDE SIDE R (1)
389

6. 7. 8. Release the tab of the GEAR MANUAL to remove the GEAR MANUAL. Slide the KIT GUIDE SIDE L inward as far as it will go to remove upward. Slide the KIT GUIDE SIDE R inward as far as it will go to remove upward.
Revision A
KIT GUIDE SIDE R KIT GUIDE SIDE R
C A U T IO N
GEAR MANUAL 6) 8) HOOK HOOK 7) KIT GUIDE SIDE L
C A U T IO N
[2)] LEVER GUIDE SIDE KIT GUIDE SIDE L
3. 4.
Attach the GEAR MANUAL. Match the SPRING N/Fs with the tabs on the backside of the PLATE ASSY BTM, and install them by securing with the hook on the right side of the PLATE ASSY BTM. Attach the STOPPER BLOCK with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm). Lower the PLATE ASSY BTM, and secure the PLATE ASSY BTM with the tabs on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R. Install the CASSETTE to the main unit.
HOOKs
Ida_1T_03_222A
5. 6. 7.
390
Revision A
4.11.23 KIT GUIDE END

REMOVAL 1. 2. Draw out the CASSETTE from the main unit. Hold down the PLATE ASSY BTM, release the tabs on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R located on right-and-left bottom of the CASSETTE, and lift the PLATE ASSY BTM. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the STOPPER BLOCK to the HOUSING CST. Release the PLATE ASSY BTM from the tab on the right side of the HOUSING CST. Raise the PLATE ASSY BTM as indicated with black arrow in Figure 4-134.
PLATE ASSY BTM 5) 4) 2 1
3. 4. 5.
HOOK PLATE ASSY BTM
PLATE ASSY BTM

Ida_1T_03_221B
391

6. Release the ACTUATOR GUIDE END from the hook of the HOUSING CST, rotate the ACTUATOR GUIDE END 90 degrees centering around the shaft of the KIT GUIDE END, and remove the ACTUATOR GUIDE END toward you. Slide the KIT GUIDE END forward, release its tab from the HOUSING CST, and remove the KIT GUIDE END.
C A U T IO N
KIT GUIDE END 2
Revision A
7.
6)
When removing the KIT GUIDE END, be careful not to lose the LATCH GUIDE END and the SPRING LATCH GUIDE END as they may come off from the rear side.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Attach the KIT GUIDE END to the HOUSING CST, and slide it toward rear overleaping the tab. Insert the ACTUATOR GUIDE END to the shaft of the KIT GUIDE END, and slide it forward with its notch set in the HOUSIGN CST. Match the SPRING N/Fs with the tabs on the backside of the PLATE ASSY BTM, and install them by securing with the hook on the right side of the PLATE ASSY BTM. Attach the STOPPER BLOCK with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm). Lower the PLATE ASSY BTM, and secure the PLATE ASSY BTM with the tabs on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R. Install the CASSETTE to the main unit.
7)
KIT GUIDE END
Ida_1T_03_223B
4. 5. 6.
HOOK
Ida_1T_03_224B
392
Revision A
4.12 TWO TRAY OPTION FEEDER

4.12.1 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY
2)
REMOVAL 1. 2. Draw out the CASSETTE from the main unit. Remove the four pieces of SCREW JOINT from the bottom plate of the main unit.
C A U T IO N
2)

SCREW JOINT 2)
3.
Lift up the main unit and separate the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY from the main unit.
2)
2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY
3)
REINSTALLATION The main unit should be lifted up by two persons.
C A U T IO N
1. 2. 3.
Mount the main unit onto the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. Attach the four pieces of SCREW JOINT to the bottom plate of the FEEDER section of the main unit. Install the CASSETTE to the main unit.
Ida_2T_03_302D
Figure 4-143. Removing the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY
TWO TRAY OPTION FEEDER
393
Revision A
4.12.2 COVER ASSY LEFT

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the five screws (silver, with flange, 8mm) that secure the COVER ASSY LEFT to the frame.
2) COVER ASSY LEFT 3) HOOK
Release the three hooks on the rear side of the COVER ASSY LEFT, and remove the COVER ASSY LEFT.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Hitch the three hooks on the rear side of the COVER ASSY LEFT to the hole of the frame. Secure the COVER ASSY LEFT with the five screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm).
2) 2) 2)
3)
3)
Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT.

2)
HOOK
Ida_2T_03_303C
Figure 4-144. Removing the COVER ASSY LEFT
394
Revision A
4.12.3 COVER ASSY RIGHT

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the five screws (silver, with flange, 8mm) that secure the COVER ASSY RIGHT to the frame. Release the three hooks on the rear side of the COVER ASSY RIGHT, and remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT.
COVER ASSY RIGHT 3) HOOK 2)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Hitch the three hooks on the rear side of the COVER ASSY RIGHT to the hole of the frame. Secure the COVER ASSY RIGHT with the five screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm). Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT.
3)
2)
2)
3) 2)
HOOK 2)
Ida_2T_03_304B
Figure 4-145. Removing the COVER ASSY RIGHT
395
Revision A
4.12.4 COVER ASSY FRONT

REMOVAL
2)
1. 2.
Draw out the CASSETTE. Release the two tabs that secure the COVER ASSY FRONT to the frame, and remove the COVER ASSY FRONT.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Insert the two projections on the COVER ASSY FRONT to the hole of the frame, and secure the COVER ASSY FRONT with the two tabs. Install the CASSETTE.
COVER ASSY FRONT
2)
Ida_2T_03_305C
Figure 4-146. Removing the COVER ASSY FRONT
396
Revision A
4.12.5 COVER CST

REMOVAL 1. Pull in the upper side of the COVER CST toward you, and remove the COVER CST from the upper attaching parts of both the FEEDER ASSY LEFT and the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. Remove the COVER CST from the lower attaching parts of both the FEEDER ASSY LEFT and the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT.
2.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Hitch the COVER CST to the lower attaching parts of both the FEEDER ASSY LEFT and the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. Push the upper side of the COVER CST into the upper attaching parts of both the FEEDER ASSY LEFT and the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT to install the COVER CST.
COVER CST
Ida_2T_03_334B
Figure 4-147. Removing the COVER CST
397
Revision A
4.12.6 FEEDER ASSY LEFT

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the COVER ASSY LEFT. Remove the COVER CST. Remove the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. Remove the six screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secure the FEEDER ASSY LEFT to the frame. Pull out the FEEDER ASSY LEFT toward you to remove it.
5) 5) 5) 5) 5) 5)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Insert the FEEDER ASSY LEFT into the frame. Secure the FEEDER ASSY LEFT with the six screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm). Install the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. Attach the COVER CST. Attach the COVER ASSY LEFT. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT.
Ida_2T_03_306C FEEDER ASSY LEFT
6)
Figure 4-148. Removing the FEEDER ASSY LEFT
398
Revision A
7. 8. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT.
4.12.7 FEEDER ASSY RIGHT

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Remove the COVER CST. Remove the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER.
C A U T IO N
Removal procedure 5 described below is only required when removing the upper FEEDER ASSY RIGHT.
7) 7)
7) 7)
5. 6. 7. 8.
Remove the DRIVE ASSY 2ND. Disconnect P/J821 connector from the SWITCH ASSY SIZE. Remove the six screws (silver, tapping, 8mm) that secure the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT to the frame. Tilt the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT, pull out the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT toward ahead of the frame, and remove the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT.
8)-2
FEEDER ASSY RIGHT
7) 7) 8)-1 6)
J821
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Insert the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT into the frame. Secure the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT with the six screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm). Connect P/J821 connector to the SWITCH ASSY SIZE.
SWITCH ASSY SIZE
C A U T IO N
Reinstallation procedure 4 described below is only required when installing the upper FEEDER ASSY RIGHT.
Ida_2T_03_307C
Figure 4-149. Removing the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT 4. 5. 6. Install the DRIVE ASSY 2ND. Install the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. Attach the COVER CST.
399
Revision A
7. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT.

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Remove the COVER CST. Remove the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER.
7)
C A U T IO N
Removal procedure 5 described below is only required when removing the upper FEEDER ASSY SIZE.
5. 6. 7.
Remove the DRIVE ASSY 2ND. Remove the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8mm) that secures the SWITCH ASSY SIZE to the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT, and remove the SWITCH ASSY SIZE.
FEEDER ASSY RIGHT
SWITCH ASSY SIZE
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Match the two bosses on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE with the holes of the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT, and secure them with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm). Install the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT.
C A U T IO N
Ida_2T_03_308A
Reinstallation procedure 3 described below is only required when installing the upper FEEDER ASSY SIZE.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Install the DRIVE ASSY 2ND. Install the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. Attach the COVER CST. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT.
400
Revision A

REMOVAL 1. 2. Draw out the CASSETTE. Press down the concave portions on the right-and-left side of the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER with your fingers, and rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER downward.
C A U T IO N
2) 2)
The main unit and the COVER ASSY FRONT is removed in the illustration to make it easier to understand.
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
3)-1
3. Lift up the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER, slide it forward overleaping the rib, insert its shaft to the hole on the left, and remove the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER by releasing its right edge first.
REINSTALLATION 1. Insert the bosses on the right-and-left edges of the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER to the FEEDER (left-side edge should be inserted first), and push the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER deeply into the FEEDER overleaping the rib. Rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER toward you and lock it up. Install the CASSETTE.
3)-3
3)-2 3)-1
2. 3.
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
Ida_2T_03_309B
Figure 4-151. Removing the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
401
Revision A
4.12.10 HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Disconnect P/J83 connector from the upper PWBA OPTFDR 2T. Release the harness of the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 from the clamp. Release the two tabs that secure the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2, and remove the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2.
HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2
6)
J83 4) 5) PWBA OPTFDR 2T
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Attach the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 to the frame. Route the harness of the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 through the clamp. Connect P/J83 connector to the upper PWBA OPTFDR 2T. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT. Install the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.393)
Ida_2T_03_310A
5)
Figure 4-152. Removing the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2
402
Revision A
4.12.11 PWBA OPTFDR 2T

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove COVER ASSY RIGHT. Disconnect all the connectors from the PWBA OPTFDR 2T. Remove the three screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the PWBA OPTFDR 2T to the frame, and remove the PWBA OPTFDR 2T.
3) P83 P80 PWB OPTFDR 2T
P84
P81
P85 P82 P86 Not Connects 4) 3) P84 Not Connects P81 4) P83 4) P80 P85 P82 Not Connects P86 Not Connects
Ida_2T_03_311B
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Secure the PWBA OPTFDR 2T to the frame with the three screws (silver, 6mm). Connect all the connectors except for P86 connector to the upper PWBA OPTFDR 2T. In a similar way, connect all the connectors except for P82, P84, and P86 connectors to the lower PWBA OPTFDR 2T. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT.
4) 4) 4) PWB OPTFDR 2T
3. 4.
Figure 4-153. Removing the PWBA OPTFDR 2T
403
Revision A
4.12.12 DRIVE ASSY 2ND

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Disconnect P/J82 connector on the upper PWBA OPTFDR 2T. Disconnect the harness that is connected to the DRIVE ASSY 2ND from the clamp. Remove the three screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the DRIVE ASSY 2ND to the frame, and remove the DRIVE ASSY 2ND.
J82 PWBA OPTFDR 2T
4) 3) 5)
5)
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Secure the DRIVE ASSY 2ND with the three screws (silver, 6mm). Route the harness that is connected to the DRIVE ASSY 2ND through each clamp. Connect P/J82 connector to the upper PWBA OPTFDR 2T. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT.
5)
DRIVE ASSY 2ND
Ida_2T_03_312B
Figure 4-154. Removing the DRIVE ASSY 2ND
404
Revision A
4.12.13 PICK UP ASSY 3RD

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Remove the COVER ASSY LEFT. Remove the COVER CST. Remove the upper CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. Remove the upper CHUTE UPPER. Remove the DRIVE ASSY 2ND. Remove the upper FEEDER ASSY RIGHT.
CLUTCH ASSY
SENSOR NO PAPER CLAMP P/J822 12)
P/J81
CLAMP 13) P/J825 SOLENOID FEED 14) PWBA OPTFDR 2T
10. Remove the upper FEEDER ASSY LEFT. 11. Disconnect P/J81 connector on the upper PWBA OPTFDR 2T, and remove the harness that is connected to the connector from the clamp. 12. Disconnect P/J822 connector of the SENSOR NO PAPER on the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. 13. Disconnect P/J825 connector on the harness connected to the CLUTCH ASSY on the PICK UP ASSY 3RD, and remove the harness from the clamp. 14. Disconnect P/J824 connector on the harness connected to the SOLENOID FEED on the PICK UP ASSY 3RD, and remove the harness from the clamp.
CLAMP
P/J824
Ida_2T_03_313C
Figure 4-155. Removing the PICK UP ASSY 3RD (1)
405

15. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secure the GUIDE PAPER to the PICK UP ASSY 3RD, and remove the GUIDE PAPER.
Revision A
16)-1
C A U T IO N
When removing the PICK UP ASSY 3RD in the following procedure, extra caution is required not to damage the ROLL ASSY TURN and the ROLL ASSY FEED by hitting the frame.
16. Remove the three screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the PICK UP ASSY 3RD to the frame, and draw out the PICK UP ASSY 3RD to the right.
PICK UP ASSY 3RD
15)-1 15)-1
16)-2 16)-1 16)-1
Ida_2T_03_314C
15)-2
GUIDE PAPER
Ida_2T_03_332B
406

13. Attach the COVER ASSY LEFT. 14. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT.
C A U T IO N
Revision A
REINSTALLATION When inserting the PICK UP ASSY 3RD in the following procedure, extra caution is required not to damage the ROLL ASSY TURN and the ROLL ASSY FEED by hitting the frame.
15. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT. 16. Attach the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.393)
1.
Insert the PICK UP ASSY 3RD from the right side of the frame, match the two projections with the hole of the frame, and secure them with three screws (silver, 6 mm). Support the GUIDE PAPER with your hands matching its boss to the hole of the PICK UP ASSY 3RD, and secure them with two screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm). Connect P/J824 connector on the harness that is connected to the SOLENOID FEED, and route the harness through the clamp. Connect P/J825 connector on the harness that is connected to the CLUTCH ASSY, and route the harness through the clamp. Connect P/J822 connector to the SENSOR NO PAPER.
C A U T IO N
2. 3. 4. 5.
Following step 6 is only required when the optional SENSOR OHP is installed.
6.
Connect P/J81 connector on the harness that is connected from the SENSOR LOW PAPER to the upper PWBA OPTFDR 2T, and route the harness through the clamp. Install the upper FEEDER ASSY LEFT. Install the upper FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. Install the DRIVE ASSY 2ND.
7. 8. 9.
10. Attach the upper CHUTE UPPER. (p.414) 11. Install the upper CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. 12. Attach the upper COVER CST.
407
Revision A
7. 8. 9. Install the upper FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. Install the DRIVE ASSY 2ND. Attach the upper CHUTE UPPER. (p.414)

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Remove the COVER ASSY LEFT. Remove the upper COVER CST. Remove the upper CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. Remove the upper CHUTE UPPER. Remove the DRIVE ASSY 2ND. Remove the upper FEEDER ASSY RIGHT.
10. Install the upper CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. 11. Attach the upper COVER CST. 12. Attach the COVER ASSY LEFT. 13. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. 14. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT. 15. Install the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.393)
ROLL ASSY TURN
10. Remove the upper FEEDER ASSY LEFT. 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. 12. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY. 13. Remove the E-ring that secures the BEARING EARTH to the ROLL ASSY TURN, and remove the BEARING EARTH. 14. Remove the E-ring that secures the BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC to the ROLL ASSY TURN, and remove the BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC. 15. Slide the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right, and remove it upward.
14)-2 14)-1
15)
BEARING EARTH BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC 13)-1
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Insert the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right-and-left holes of the FRAME ASSY PICKUP 3RD. Insert the BEARING SLLEVE, PLASTIC to the left side of the ROLL ASSY TURN, and attach the E-ring. Insert the BEARING EARTH into the right side of the ROLL ASSY TURN, and attach the E-ring. Attach the CLUTCH ASSY. Install the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. Install the upper FEEDER ASSY LEFT.
PICK UP ASSY 3RD
13)-2
Ida_2T_03_315A
408
Revision A
7. 8. 9. Attach the upper CHUTE UPPER. (p.414) Install the upper CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. Attach the upper COVER CST.
4.12.15 CLUTCH ASSY

C A U T IO N
10. Attach the COVER ASSY LEFT. 11. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. 12. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT. 13. Install the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.393)
FRAME ASSY PICK UP 3RD
CLUTCH ASSY 13)
10. Remove the upper FEEDER ASSY LEFT. 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. 12. Release the tab of the STOPPER CLUTCH, and remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. 13. Pull out the CLUTCH ASSY from the ROLL ASSY TURN.
ROLL ASSY TURN
[2)]
SHAFT
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Insert the CLUTCH ASSY to the ROLL ASSY TURN. Insert the STOPPER CLUTCH to the shaft of the FRAME ASSY PICK UP 3RD, and install the STOPPER CLUTCH by matching its boss with the groove of the CLUTCH ASSY. Install the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. Install the upper FEEDER ASSY LEFT. Install the upper FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. Install the DRIVE ASSY 2ND.
12) STOPPER CLUTCH

Ida_2T_03_316A
Figure 4-159. Removing the CLUTCH ASSY
3. 4. 5. 6.
409
Revision A

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove COVER ASSY RIGHT. Disconnect P/J822 connector from the SENSOR NO PAPER. Put up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER, release the three tabs on the SENSOR NO PAPER, and remove the SENSOR NO PAPER.
SENSOR NO PAPER J822 ACTUATOR NO PAPER 3)
4)-2
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Put up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER and install the SENSOR NO PAPER. Connect P/J822 connector to the SENSOR NO PAPER. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT.
4)-1
Ida_2T_03_317A
410
Revision A
11. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. 12. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT. 13. Install the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.393)

12) FRAME ASSY PICK UP 3RD
10. Remove the upper FEEDER ASSY LEFT. 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. 12. Release the three tabs on the SENSOR LOW PAPER, and remove the SENSOR LOW PAPER. 13. Disconnect P/J823 connector from the SENSOR LOW PAPER.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Connect P/J823 connector of the HARNESS ASSY LOWP2 to the SENSOR LOW PAPER. Attach the SENSOR LOW PAPER to the FRAME ASSY PICK UP 3RD. Install the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. Install the upper FEEDER ASSY LEFT. Install the upper FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. Install the DRIVE ASSY 2ND. Attach the upper CHUTE UPPER. (p.414) Install the upper CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. Attach the upper COVER CST.
HARNESS ASSY LOWP2 13) J823 SENSOR LOW PAPER

Ida_2T_03_318A
10. Attach the COVER ASSY LEFT.
411
Revision A

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Disconnect P/J824 connector on the harness that is connected to the SOLENOID FEED, and release the harness from the clamp. Remove the screw (silver, 6mm) that secures the SOLENOID FEED to the FRAME ASSY PICK UP 3RD, and remove the SOLENOID FEED.
3)-1 3)-2
J824
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Secure the SOLENOID FEED to the FRAME ASSY PICK UP 3RD with the screw (silver, 6mm). Route the harness that is connected from the SOLENOID FEED through the clamp, and connect P/J824 connector. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT.
4) FRAME ASSY PICK UP 3RD
SOLENOID FEED
Ida_2T_03_319A
412
Revision A

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the upper CHUTE UPPER. Reverse the CHUTE UPPER. Release the tab on the CHUTE UPPER that secures ACTUATOR LOW PAPER, and remove the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER by releasing one edge of the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER.
3)-1
REINSTALLATION 1. Insert one end of the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER to the hole of the CHUTE UPPER, secure the other end with a tab, and attach the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER. Attach the CHUTE UPPER.
2.
CHUTE UPPER
3)-2
ACTUATOR LOW PAPER

Ida_2T_03_027A
413
Revision A

CAUTION

C A U T IO N
Looking from the rear with the COVER CST removed, the two hooks of the CHUTE UPPER should be located on upper surface of the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. The FRAME ASSY TOP (TOP PANEL) is removed in the illustration to make it easier to understand.
HOOKs
FRAME ASSY PICK UP 3RD HOOKs HOOKs
2.
Release the two hooks that secure the CHUTE UPPER to the PICK UP ASSY 3RD, temporarily slide the CHUTE UPPER rearward to remove the four hooks, and remove the CHUTE UPPER downward.
PICK UP ASSY 3RD HOOKs
REINSTALLATION
C H E C K P O IN T
CHUTE UPPER
HOOKs
1. 2.
Hitch the four hooks on the CHUTE UPPER to the holes of the PICK UP ASSY 3RD, and install the CHUTE UPPER by locking the two hooks. Install the CASSETTE.
CHUTE UPPER
Ida_2T_03_320B
414
Revision A

REMOVAL
DITCH
1. 2. 3. Draw out the CASSETTE. Release the tab that secure the ROLL ASSY FEED to the SHAFT ASSY FEED, and pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED to remove it. Release the tab that secure the ROLL ASSY FEED to the SHAFT ASSY NUDGER, and pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED to remove it.
PIN
ROLL ASSY FEED 2)
REINSTALLATION 1. With the cross-shaped notch of the ROLL ASSY FEED matched with the pin of the SHAFT ASSY NUDGER, insert the ROLL ASSY FEED into the SHAFT ASSY NUDGER, and secure them with the tab. With the cross-shaped notch of the ROLL ASSY FEED matched with the pin of the SHAFT ASSY FEED, insert the ROLL ASSY FEED into the SHAFT ASSY FEED, and secure them with tab. Install the CASSETTE.
ROLL ASSY FEED
3)
2.
3.
SHAFT ASSY NUDGER
SHAFT ASSY FEED
Ida_2T_03_321A
415
Revision A

12)
13)
ACTUATOR NO PAPER
ACTUATOR NO PAPER
10. Remove the upper FEEDER ASSY LEFT. 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. 12. Release the tab that secures the ACTUATOR NO PAPER to the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. 13. Draw forth the ACTUATOR NO PAPER slightly, and move the thin part of the shaft from the attaching hole to the oblong square hole. 14. As moving the tab side of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER in the direction of the arrow, remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER from the oblong square hole of the PICK UP ASSY 3RD.
PICK UP ASSY 3RD 14)-2 ACTUATOR NO PAPER 14)-1

Ida_2T_03_322A
416
Revision A
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Insert the ACTUATOR NO PAPER into the oblong square hole of the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. Move the thin part of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER from the oblong square hole of the PICK UP ASSY 3RD to the attaching hole of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER in order to set up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER. Insert the boss on the ACTUATOR NO PAPER into the hole of the PICK UP ASSY 3RD, and secure them with the tab. Install the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. Install the upper FEEDER ASSY LEFT. Install the upper FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. Install the DRIVE ASSY 2ND. Attach the upper CHUTE UPPER. (p.414) Install the upper CHUTE ASSY FEEDER.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Attach the upper COVER CST. 11. Attach the COVER ASSY LEFT. 12. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. 13. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT. 14. Install the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.393)
417
Revision A
4.12.23 PICK UP ASSY 4TH

13)
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Remove the COVER ASSY LEFT. Remove the COVER CST. Remove the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. Remove the CHUTE UPPER. (p414, p427) Remove the DRIVE ASSY 2ND. Remove the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT.
J83
13) 13) 13) 13) 13) 13) FRAME ASSY TOP 13) 13)
10. Remove the FEEDER ASSY LEFT. 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. 12. Disconnect P/J83 connector from the upper PWBA OPTFDR 2T, and release the harness of the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 from the clamp. 13. Remove the nine screws (silver, 8 mm) that secure the FRAME ASSY TOP, and remove the FRAME ASSY TOP together with the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2. 14. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secure the GUIDE PAPER to the PICK UP ASSY 4TH, and remove the GUIDE PAPER.
12)-2 14)-1 14)-1

P83 12)-1
FRAME
GUIDE PAPER 14)-2

Ida_2T_03_333C
Figure 4-167. Removing the PICK UP ASSY 4TH (1)
418
Revision A
C A U T IO N
SENSOR NO PAPER P/J822 16) CLAMP CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC P/J81 15) CLAMP 17) P/J825 SOLENOID FEED CLAMP P/J824 18) PWBA OPTFDR 2T
15. Disconnect P/J81 connector on the lower PWBA OPTFDR 2T, and release the harness that is connected to the connector from the clamp. 16. Disconnect P/J822 connector of the SENSOR NO PAPER on the PICK UP ASSY 4TH. 17. Disconnect P/J825 connector on the harness connected to the ELECTRO MAGNETIC on the PICK UP ASSY 4TH, and release the harness connected to the connector from the clamp. 18. Disconnect P/J824 connector on the harness connected to the SOLENOID FEED on the PICK UP ASSY 4TH, and release the harness connected to the connector from the clamp.
Ida_2T_03_323B
19. Remove the three screws (silver, 6mm) that secure the PICK UP ASSY 4TH to the frame, and draw out the PICK UP ASSY 4TH to the right.
FRAME 19)-1 PICK UP ASSY 4TH
19)-2
19)-1
19)-1
Ida_2T_03_324B
Figure 4-168. Removing the PICK UP ASSY 4TH (2)
419

11. Install the FEEDER ASSY LEFT. 12. Install the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. 1. Insert the PICK UP ASSY 4TH from the right side of the frame, match the two projections with the holes of the frame, and secure them with three screws (silver, 6 mm). Connect P/J824 connector on the harness that is connected to the SOLENOID FEED, and route the harness through the clamp. Connect P/J825 connector on the harness that is connected to the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC, and route the harness through the clamp. Connect P/J822 connector to the SENSOR NO PAPER.
C A U T IO N
Revision A
REINSTALLATION
13. Attach the CHUTE UPPER. (p414, p427) 14. Install the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. (p.401) 15. Attach the COVER CST. 16. Attach the COVER ASSY LEFT. 17. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. 18. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT. 19. Install the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.393)
2. 3. 4.
5.
Connect P/J81 connector on the harness that is connected from the SENSOR LOW PAPER to the lower PWBA OPRFDR 2T, and route the harness through the clamp. Install the GUIDE PAPER matching its boss to the hole of the PICK UP ASSY 4TH, and secure them with two screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm).
C A U T IO N
6.
When installing the FRAME ASSY TOP (TOP PANEL), make sure not to pinch the harness of the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2.
7.
Let the harness of the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 into the hole of the frame, install the FRAME ASSY TOP with its hole matching with the boss of the frame, and secure them with nine screws (silver, 8 mm). Connect P/J83 connector on the upper PWBA OPTFDR 2T, and route the harness of the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 through the clamp. Install the PICK UP ASSY 3RD.
8. 9.
10. Install the DRIVE ASSY 2ND.
420
Revision A
6. 7. 8. 9. Install the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. Install the FEEDER ASSY LEFT. Install the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. Install the DRIVE ASSY 2ND.

10. Attach the CHUTE UPPER. (p414, p427) 11. Install the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. 12. Attach the COVER CST. 13. Attach the COVER ASSY LEFT. 14. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. 15. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT. 16. Install the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.393)
10. Remove the FEEDER ASSY LEFT. 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. 12. Remove the PICK UP ASSY 4TH. 13. Remove the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC. (p.422) 14. Remove the E-ring that secures the BEARING EARTH to the ROLL ASSY TURN, and remove the BEARING EARTH. 15. Remove the E-ring that secures the BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC to the ROLL ASSY TURN, and remove the BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC. 16. Slide the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right, and remove it upward.
ROLL ASSY TURN
15)-2 15)-1 BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC
16)
BEARING EARTH 14)-1 PICK UP ASSY 4TH 14)-2
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Insert the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right-and-left holes of the PICK UP ASSY 4TH. Insert the BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC to the left side of the ROLL ASSY TURN, and attach the E-ring. Insert the BEARING EARTH into the right side of the ROLL ASSY TURN, and attach the E-ring. Attach the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC. (p.422) Install the PICK UP ASSY 4TH.
Ida_2T_03_335A
421
Revision A
4.12.25 CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC

C H E C K P O IN T
ROLL ASSY TURN
SHAFT
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Disconnect P/J825 connector on the harness that is connected to the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC, and release the harness connected to the connector from the clamp. Release the tab of the STOPPER CLUTCH, and remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. Pull out the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC from the ROLL ASSY TURN.
5) [2)] 4) 3)-2
4. 5.
J825 3)-1 STOPPER CLUTCH
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Insert the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC to the ROLL ASSY TURN. Insert the STOPPER CLUTCH to the shaft of the FRAME ASSY 4TH, and install the STOPPER CLUTCH matching the groove of the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC with the projection on the CLUTCH STOPPER. Connect P/J825 connector on the harness that is connected to the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC, and route the harness through the clamp. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT.
Ida_2T_03_325B
3. 4. 5.
Figure 4-170. Removing the CHUTE ELECTRO NAGNETIC
422
Revision A

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Disconnect P/J822 connector from the SENSOR NO PAPER. Put up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER, release the three tabs on the SENSOR NO PAPER, and remove the SENSOR NO PAPER.
ACTUATOR NO PAPER
4)-1
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Put up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER and install the SENSOR NO PAPER. Connect P/J822 connector to the SENSOR NO PAPER. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT.
4)-2
3)
SENSOR NO PAPER
J822
Ida_2T_03_326A
423
Revision A
11. Attach the COVER ASSY LEFT. 12. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. 13. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT. 14. Install the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.393)

13) FRAME ASSY 4TH
10. Remove the FEEDER ASSY LEFT. 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. 12. Remove the PICK UP ASSY 4TH. 13. Release the three tabs on the SENSOR LOW PAPER, and remove the SENSOR LOW PAPER. 14. Disconnect P/J823 connector from the SENSOR LOW PAPER.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Connect P/J823 connector to the SENSOR LOW PAPER. Attach the SENSOR LOW PAPER to the FRAME ASSY 4TH. Install the PICK UP ASSY 4TH. Install the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. Install the FEEDER ASSY LEFT. Install the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. Install the DRIVE ASSY 2ND. Attach the CHUTE UPPER. (p414, p427) Install the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER.
Ida_2T_03_336A
HARNESS ASSY LOWP2 J823 14) SENSOR LOW PAPER
10. Attach the COVER CST.
424
Revision A

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Disconnect P/J824 connector of the harness that is connected to the SOLENOID FEED, and release the harness from the clamp. Remove the screw (silver, 6mm) that secures the SOLENOID FEED to the FRAME ASSY 4TH, and remove the SOLENOID FEED.
FRAME ASSY 4TH
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Secure the SOLENOID FEED to the FRAME ASSY 4TH with the screw (silver, 6mm). Route the harness that is connected from the SOLENOID FEED through the clamp, and connect P/J824 connector. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT.
3)-2
4)
3)-1
SOLENOID FEED J824
Ida_2T_03_327B
425
Revision A

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the lower CHUTE UPPER. (p.427) Reverse the CHUTE UPPER. Release the tab on the CHUTE UPPER that secures ACTUATOR LOW PAPER, and remove the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER by releasing one edge of the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER.
3)-1
REINSTALLATION 1. Insert one end of the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER to the hole of the CHUTE UPPER, secure the other end with a tab, and attach the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER. Attach the CHUTE UPPER. (p.427)
2.
CHUTE UPPER
3)-2
ACTUATOR LOW PAPER

Ida_2T_03_337A
426
Revision A

C A U T IO N
[CAUTION]
Looking from the rear with the COVER CST removed, the two hooks of the CHUTE UPPER should be located on upper surface of the PICK UP ASSY 4TH. The intermediate plate of the frame is removed in the illustration to make it easier to understand.
2.
Release the two hooks that secure the CHUTE UPPER to the PICK UP ASSY 4TH, temporarily slide the CHUTE UPPER rearward to remove the four hooks, and remove the CHUTE UPPER downward.
FRAME ASSY 4TH HOOKs HOOKs HOOKs 2)-1 PICK UP ASSY 4TH HOOKs 2)-1
REINSTALLATION
C H E C K P O IN T
CHUTE UPPER HOOKs
1. 2.
Hitch the four hooks on the CHUTE UPPER to the holes of the PICK UP ASSY 4TH, and install the CHUTE UPPER by locking the two hooks. Install the CASSETTE.
2)-2
CHUTE UPPER
Ida_2T_03_328B
427
Revision A

REMOVAL
DITCH
1. 2. 3. Draw out the CASSETTE. Release the tab that secure the ROLL ASSY FEED to the SHAFT ASSY FEED, and pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED to remove it. Release the tab that secure the ROLL ASSY FEED to the SHAFT ASSY NUDGER, and pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED to remove it.
PIN
ROLL ASSY FEED 2)
REINSTALLATION
3)
1. With the cross-shaped notch of the ROLL ASSY FEED matched with the pin of the SHAFT ASSY NUDGER, insert the ROLL ASSY FEED into the SHAFT ASSY NUDGER, and secure them with the tab. With the cross-shaped notch of the ROLL ASSY FEED matched with the pin of the SHAFT ASSY FEED, insert the ROLL ASSY FEED into the SHAFT ASSY FEED, and secure them with the tab. Install the CASSETTE.
ROLL ASSY FEED
2.
3.
SHAFT ASSY NUDGER
SHAFT ASSY FEED
Ida_2T_03_329B
428
Revision A

13)
14)
ACTUATOR NO PAPER
ACTUATOR NO PAPER
10. Remove the FEEDER ASSY LEFT. 11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. 12. Remove the PICK UP ASSY 4TH. 13. Release the tab that secures the ACTUATOR NO PAPER to the PICK UP ASSY 4TH. 14. Draw forth the ACTUATOR NO PAPER slightly, and move the thin part of the shaft from the attaching hole to the oblong square hole. 15. As moving the tab side of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER toward you, remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER from the oblong square hole of the PICK UP ASSY 4TH.
PICK UP ASSY 4TH 15)-2 ACTUATOR NO PAPER 15)-1

Ida_2T_03_338A
429
Revision A
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. Insert the ACTUATOR NO PAPER into the oblong square hole of the PICK UP ASSY 4TH. Move the thin part of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER from the oblong square hole of the PICK UP ASSY 4TH to the attaching hole of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER in order to set up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER. Insert the boss on the ACTUATOR NO PAPER into the hole of the PICK UP ASSY 4TH, and secure them with locks. Install the PICK UP ASSY 4TH. Install the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. Install the FEEDER ASSY LEFT. Install the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. Install the DRIVE ASSY 2ND. Attach the CHUTE UPPER. (p414, p427)
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Install the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. 11. Attach the COVER CST. 12. Attach the COVER ASSY LEFT. 13. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. 14. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT. 15. Install the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.393)
430
Revision A

REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Draw out the CASSETTE. Remove the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. Release the tab that secures the SHAFT ASSY RETARD to the HOLDER RETARD, and remove the SHAFT ASSY RETARD together with the ROLL ASSY RETARD and the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION. Pull out the ROLL ASSY RETARD and the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION from the SHAFT ASSY RETARD.
SHAFT ASSY RETARD
4.
ROLL ASSY RETARD

REINSTALLATION When installing the SHAFT ASSY RETARD, pay attention to its orientation.
C A U T IO N
3)-2
3)-1
1. 2.
Insert the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION into the SHAFT ASSY RETARD. Insert the SHAFT ASSY RETARD into the ROLL ASSY RETARD with the cross-shaped dent side of the ROLL ASSY RETARD facing the shaft, and engage the ROLL ASSY RETARD with the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION. Attach the SHAFT ASSY RETARD, on which the ROLL ASSY RETARD and the CLUTCH ASSY FRICION are attached, to the HOLDER RETARD and secure it with the tab. Attach the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. Install the CASSETTE.
3.
4. 5.
HOLDER RETARD
Ida_2T_03_339A
431
Revision A

3)-3
C H E C K P O IN T
HOLDER ASSY RETARD
3)-2
REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Draw out the CASSETTE. Press the two (right and left) tabs of the CHUTE TURN CST inward to release them, and open the CHUTE TURN CST. Release the tab that secures the HOLDER ASSY RETARD to the CASSETTE, rotate the HOLDER ASSY RETARD upward, and remove the HOLDER ASSY RETARD toward left.
CHUTE TURN CST
2)-1
3)-1
2)-2
2)-1
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Match the two holes on the HOLDER ASSY RETARD with the bosses on the CASSETTE, attach HOLDER ASSY RETARD, and secure it with the tab. Close the CHUTE TURN CST. Install the CASSETTE.
CASSETTE
Ida_2T_03_015B
Figure 4-179. Removing the HOLDER ASSY RETARD
432
Revision A

REMOVAL 1. 2. Draw out the CASSETTE. Hold down the PLATE ASSY BTM, release the hooks on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R located on right-and-left bottom of the CASSETTE, and lift the PLATE ASSY BTM. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the STOPPER BLOCK to the HOUSING CST. Release the PLATE ASSY BTM from the hook on the right side of the HOUSING CST. Raise the PLATE ASSY BTM as indicated with black arrow in Figure 4-173.
PLATE ASSY BTM 4) 2 1 5)
3. 4. 5.
HOOK PLATE ASSY BTM
PLATE ASSY BTM

Ida_2T_03_340B
433

6. 7. 8. Release the hook of the GEAR MANUAL to remove the GEAR MANUAL. Slide the KIT GUIDE SIDE L inward as far as it will go to remove upward. Slide the KIT GUIDE SIDE R inward as far as it will go to remove upward.
C A U T IO N
Revision A
KIT GUIDE SIDE R KIT GUIDE SIDE R GEAR MANUAL 6) KIT GUIDE SIDE L 8) 7) HOOK HOOK
C A U T IO N
[2)] LEVER GUIDE KIT GUIDE SIDE SIDE L
3. 4.
Attach the GEAR MANUAL. Match the SPRING N/Fs with the hooks on the backside of the PLATE ASSY BTM, and install them by securing with the hooks on the right side of the PLATE ASSY BTM. Attach the STOPPER BLOCK with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm). Lower the PLATE ASSY BTM, and secure the PLATE ASSY BTM with the hooks on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R. Install the CASSETTE to the main unit.
HOOKs
5. 6. 7.
Ida_2T_03_341A
434
Revision A
4.12.36 KIT GUIDE END

REMOVAL 1. 2. Draw out the CASSETTE from the main unit. Hold down the PLATE ASSY BTM, release the hooks on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R located on right-and-left bottom of the CASSETTE, and lift the PLATE ASSY BTM. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the STOPPER BLOCK to the HOUSING CST. Release the PLATE ASSY BTM from the hook on the right side of the HOUSING CST. Raise the PLATE ASSY BTM as indicated with black arrow in Figure 4-175.
PLATE ASSY BTM 4) 2 1 5)
3. 4. 5.
HOOK PLATE ASSY BTM
PLATE ASSY BTM

Ida_2T_03_340B
435

6. Release the notch of the ACTUATOR GUIDE END from the HOUSING CST, rotate the ACTUATOR GUIDE END 90 degrees centering around the shaft of the KIT GUIDE END, and remove the ACTUATOR GUIDE END toward you. Slide the KIT GUIDE END forward, release its hook from the HOUSING CST, and remove the KIT GUIDE END upward.
C A U T IO N
KIT GUIDE END 2
Revision A
7.
6)
When removing the KIT GUIDE END, be careful not to lose the LATCH GUIDE END and the SPRING LATCH GUIDE END as they may come off from the rear side.
REINSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Attach the KIT GUIDE END to the HOUSING CST, and slide it toward rear overleaping the hook. Insert the ACTUATOR GUIDE END to the shaft of the KIT GUIDE END, and slide it forward with its notch set in the HOUSIGN CST. Match the SPRING N/Fs with the tabs on the backside of the PLATE ASSY BTM, and install them by securing with the hooks on the right side of the PLATE ASSY BTM. Attach the STOPPER BLOCK with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm). Lower the PLATE ASSY BTM, and secure the PLATE ASSY BTM with the hooks on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R. Install the CASSETTE to the main unit.
7)
KIT GUIDE END
Ida_2T_03_342B
4. 5. 6.
HOOK
Ida_2T_03_343B
436
Revision A
4.12.37 FOOT ASSY A, FOOT ASSY B

REMOVAL As the removal procedure described below is common to both the right and left side, the procedure for the left side is omitted here.
C A U T IO N
1. 2. 3. 4.
Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the FOOT ASSY A/B to the frame. Draw out the FOOT ASSY A/B from the frame to remove it.
3)
REINSTALLATION
4)
1. 2. 3. 4. Attach the FOOT ASSY A/B to the frame by inserting the projection on the FOOT ASSY A/B to the concave portion on the bottom of the frame. Secure the FOOT ASSY A/B to the frame with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm). Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT.
FOOT ASSY B
3)
Ida_2T_03_331C
Figure 4-184. Removing the FOOT ASSY A and the FOOT ASSY B
437
CHAPTER
5
ADJUSTMENT
EPSON Aculaser C4200
Revision A
5.1 Overview
This chapter describes the adjustment/action procedures required after repairing or replacing certain parts in AcuLaser C4200.
5.1.1 Precautions
Be sure to observe the following precautions before starting adjustments/actions.
C A U T IO N
Refer to 5.1.2 Adjustment Execution Timing (p.440), always confirm the adjustment/action items and the orders for the replaced/removed parts and units in advance. Start adjustment after fully checking the Caution given in the explanation area of each adjustment item. Incorrect work may interfere with the product operations and/or functions. Refer to Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY (p.235) for the disassembly/assembly procedures required to perform the adjustment.
ADJUSTMENT
Overview
439
Revision A
5.1.2 Adjustment Execution Timing

The following table shows when the adjustment or resetting the counter is required.
Table 5-1. Adjustment Item List

Repaired Part or Situation After placing the printer after purchase After placing the printer again after transportation When misaligned color registration in the main scanning direction occurs After replacing the controller main board After renewing the controller firmware After renewing the engine controller firmware Adjustment/Action Item Adjust color registration adjustment Adjust color registration adjustment Adjust color registration adjustment Write USB ID Update the controller firmware Update the engine controller firmware (+ updating NVM) Adjustment Method and Tool Execute from the control panel Execute from the control panel Execute from the control panel PPInitSetting Firmware Update Tool Firmware Update Tool Remarks Users can perform this adjustment Users can perform this adjustment Users can perform this adjustment ------Reference See Page 441 See Page 441 See Page 441 See Page 442 See Page 445 See Page 447 and p450
ADJUSTMENT
Overview
440
Revision A
5.2 Adjustment/Action
5.2.1 Adjusting Color Registration Alignment
After placing/resetting the printer after purchase or after long-distance transport, make sure to print out a color registration sheet to see whether the color registration is properly aligned. If color registration misalignment occurs, perform the adjustment described below. Procedure 1. Turn the printer on. 2. Load a paper on the MP tray. 3. Make sure that the LCD panel displays Ready or Sleep, then press the [Enter] button twice on the control panel. 4. Select Color Regist Sheet in the Information Menu and press the [Enter] button. The printer starts to print a color registration sheet. 5. Check the alignment of the lines at the zero position for each color. If the color segment of the line is in alignment with the black segments on either side to make one straight line, no adjustment is required for that color. If the line segment are not aligned, adjust the registration as explained below. Adjustment 1. Enter Color Regist Menu. 2. Select XXXX Regist item for the color (Cyan, Magenta, or Yellow) that needs adjustment, then press the [Enter] button. 3. On the color registration sheet, find the line segments that are most closely aligned, then use the [Up] or [Down] button to display the number that corresponds to that pattern. Press the [Enter] button to complete the adjustment. 4. If necessary, print another color registration sheet for confirmation.
Figure 5-1. Color Registration Sheet
ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment/Action
441
Revision A
5.2.2 Writing USB ID

Aculaser C4200 comes with the USB interface as a standard, and the computer connected to the Aculaser C4200 via the USB interface identifies the printer by referring to the USB ID information unique to each printer. Since this USB ID information is stored on EEPROM on the MAIN Board of the printer, you have to re-define the ID information by the procedure described below when you have replaced the MAIN Board for repair.
C A U T IO N
5.2.2.1 Installing the Program and the Basic Operation

1. Copy a set of files related to PPInitSetting program into a folder.
C A U T IO N
Be sure to store the setting information file (Setting.ini) in the same drive holder where the main program file is stored.
When you repair the printer and re-define the USB ID information, you have to tell the user to uninstall the previously installed printer driver as it refers to an old USB ID information.
2. 3. 4.
Double-click the program icon [
] to start the program.
Select AL- C4200 at the [Model Selection]. Select the port used to connect the printer at the [Port Selection].
C H E C K P O IN T
The program for USB ID input and a supported operating environment is as follows; Program PPInitSetting_Ver1x E.exe Operating environment Supported OS: Port used: Windows 95/98/ME/2000/XP LPT, USB
If you select Auto, connected printers are detected and communication with the first detected one start automatically. When connecting with 2 or more printers, specify the target port to avoid unexpected connection since the auto detection varies depending on the connection state.
Figure 5-2. Basic Operation
ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment/Action
442
Revision A
5.2.2.2 Writing Method

The method of writing USB ID differs according to the condition of the main board. Referring to the following table, figure out what to do depending on the conditions. Follow the instructions shown in the program to do the writings. Table 5-2. Writing Method
Condition of Main Board Communication is impossible between PC and the Main Board Check of the previous ID The previous ID can be confirmed by a status sheet or something else that has been already printed out. There is no way to confirm the previous ID. Communication is possible between PC and the Main Board (Can retrieve the previous ID from the previous Main Board) Writing Method (Button Name) Store optional ID Store auto-generated NEW ID OLD ID Retrieval/ Restore Descriptions Enter the previous ID to write it into the new Main Board. The program automatically creates the new ID from the serial number of the printer and write it into the new Main Board. Retrieve the ID from the old board, and then enter the retrieved ID value into the new board.
Store optional ID
OLD ID Retrieval/Restore
Store auto-generated NEW ID
5.2.2.3 Confirming the Writing

When completed to write USB-ID, print a status sheet to confirm that the serial number printed on the sheet is identical to that on the label attached to the printer. (Refer to 1.20 Status Sheet (p.72))
ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment/Action
443
Revision A
5.2.3 Firmware Update

This section explains how to update the firmwares. Main Controller Firmware Engine Controller Firmware (+NVM)
OUTLINE
Operation Panel Operation Not required Required Required Not required Tool Required Required Required Required
Unit Main Controller Engine Controller NVM
Data Format RCC CRB MOT DCC
Tool Firmware update is executed by transmitting data for updating the program from the computer via USB or LPT using the exclusive software tool. Make sure to use the software tool described below. Tool Name: Firmware Update Tool
ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment/Action
444
Revision A
5.2.3.1 Main Controller Firmware Update

Procedure 1 Check the current version. Connect the printer with the computer. 2 Method 1 (RCC) Print a status sheet, and check the current firmware version. Connect the printer to the computer with a USB cable. Confirm that the Ready is displayed on the LCD. (CRB) Print a status sheet, and check the current firmware version. After turning the power off for both the printer and computer, connect them with a USB cable. Before connecting the USB cable, make sure to C A U T IO N disconnect other interface cables from the product.e. Turn the computer on and copy the program update file (the extension is CRB) onto the computer. Turn the product ON while holding down the [Color Start], [Reset], and [Down] buttons.The product will start up in Program ROM update mode. --Method 2 LCD Panel ---
---
Prepare the update data. Start up the Printer.
Turn the computer on and copy the program update file (the extension is RCC) onto the computer.
---
Program Device Version XX.XX Please Send Data
Prepare to send the data. 5 Transmit the data.
Start up the Firmware Update Tool. Specify the port and the program update file on the selection window of the tool. Click [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen.
Start up the Firmware Update Tool.Specify the port and the program update file on the selection window of the tool. Click [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen.
---
Program Device Version XX.XX OLD: XXXX NEW: XXXX
ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment/Action
445
Revision A
Procedure Execute the update.
Method 1 (RCC) Once file-receiving or rewriting operation is started on the printer side, the data LED flashes and the message ROM P Writing is displayed on the LCD panel. When the transfer is complete, completed window pops up. Click [OK]. (CRB)
Method 2 LCD Panel Confirm that both the old and new firmware versions are displayed on the LCD, and press the [Right] button on the control panel. Completion pop-up window will be displayed when the data transfer is finished. Click on the [OK].
Program Device Version XX.XX Erasing Device
Program Device Version XX.XX PRG XXXXXXXX
Confirm the checksum.
When the program update is finished, the checksum will be indicated on the LCD panel. Confirm the checksum. ---
Program Device Version XX.XX Code= XXXX, XXXX, XXXX, XXXX Total= XXXX, XXXX, XXXX, XXXX
Reboot the Printer. 9 10 11 Print the status sheet. Check the version on the status sheet.
After confirming that the data LED of the printer is turned off and the LCD panel displays Ready, turn the printer power off and turn back on again. Prints the status sheet. Confirm that the program firmware version has been updated correctly by comparing the status sheet with that printed in step 1. Refer to 1.20 Status Sheet (p.72)
Pressing the [Right] button on the control panel reboots the product. Prints the status sheet. Confirm that the program firmware version has been updated correctly by comparing the status sheet with that printed in step 1. Refer to 1.20 Status Sheet (p.72)
-------
ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment/Action
446
Revision A
5.2.3.2 Engine Controller Firmware Update

This printer requires the NVM version to be matched with the engine controller firmware version. Therefore, when updating the engine controller firmware, also update the NVM values (parameters) on the engine controller. After updating the engine controller firmware, also update the NVM.
Procedure 1 Check the current version. Connect the printer with the computer. Method Print a status sheet or engine status sheet, and check the current firmware version. After turning the power off for both the printer and computer, connect them with a parallel or USB cable. Make sure to disconnect other unnecessary interface cables from the printer in advance. C A U T IO N LCD Panel ---
---
Prepare the update data. Start up the Printer.
After turning the computer back on, copy the program data for the update (file name.MOT) to any route directory of the computer. Turn the printer on while pressing the [Up], [Down], [Job Cancel] and [Start/Stop] buttons.
---
Engine Firmware Update
EFU Ver. XXX

4
Please send EFU data
ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment/Action
447
Revision A
Procedure Prepare to send the data.
Method Run the Firmware Update Tool. Select the port and FW data file on the Firmware Update Tool screen.
LCD Panel
---
Transmit the data.
Click [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen.
send size=XXX
SENT SIZE=XXX
6
Type: XXX sum=XXX
ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment/Action
448
Revision A
Procedure Execute the update.
Method Press the [Enter] button on the control panel of the printer. A Complete pop-up window will appear when the transmission is finished. Click the [OK].
LCD Panel
Writing: Erasing
Writing: Size=XXX
Confirm the checksum.
When updating the program data is finished, the checksum will be indicated on the LCD panel. Confirm the checksum.
TYPE: XXX SUM: XXX
9 10 11
Reboot the Printer. Print the status sheet. Check the version on the status sheet.
Turn the printer off and back on. Prints the status sheet. Check the firmware version printed on the status sheet or engine status sheet and confirm that the firmware is updated.
-------
ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment/Action
449
Revision A
5.2.3.3 NVM Version Update

Procedure 1 2 3 Check the current version. Connect the printer with the computer. Prepare the update data. Start up the Printer. Connect the printer to the computer with a USB cable. Confirm that the Ready is displayed on the LCD. Turn the computer on and copy the NVM update file (the extension is DCC) onto the computer. Method Print a status sheet, and check the current NVM version. LCD Panel -------
---
Prepare to send the data. Transmit the data.
Start up the Firmware Update Tool. Specify the port and the program update file on the selection window of the tool. Click [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen.
---
Execute the update.
Once file-receiving or rewriting operation is started on the printer side and the data LED flashes. When the transfer is complete, completed window pops up. Click [OK].
Reboot the Printer. 8 9 10 Print the status sheet. Check the version on the status sheet.
After confirming that the data LED of the printer is turned off, turn the printer power off and turn back on again. Make sure to turn off the printer 10 seconds after the LED is turned off. C A U T IO N
-------
Prints the status sheet. Confirm that the NVM version has been updated correctly by comparing the status sheet with that printed in step 1. Refer to 1.20 Status Sheet (p.72)
ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment/Action
450
CHAPTER
6
MAINTENANCE
Revision A
6.1 Overview
W A R N IN G
This section gives information necessary for maintaining the printer in its optimum condition. While at maintenance work, be sure to observe the following precautions.
W A R N IN G
To prevent an electric shock, burn, injury, etc., always turn the printer off and unplug the power cord before starting maintenance work. When the power supply cable must be connected to measure voltage or for any other task, use extreme caution in working on electronic components. While the printer is operating, never touch the driving parts such as the motor, sprockets and gears. Weight: Since this printer is heavy (about 32kg, consumables and options not included), transferring must be done by two or more personnel making sure to knees down so as not to throw out your back. Safety devices: Special care must be taken to maintain safety devices such as fuse, INTERLOCK S/W, which are provided to prevent the printer from malfunction and accidents, and also carefully check the parts such as panel, covers, which are directly operated by the user. Immediately after the printer has stopped operating, do not touch the Fuser unit as it is extremely hot. Pay attention to the following when turning the printer back on after servicing. Be careful not to get your hands and clothes caught up in the rotating parts (various rollers and cooling fans) of the printer. Never touch the electrical terminals and high-voltage components. (HVPS or LVPS unit, etc.) To avoid dust explosion or ignition, never bring any consumables close to flame or throw them into fire.
Take extra care not to let the laser beam get into your eye, or it could cause loss of sight. While servicing the laser printer, never open any cover on which a Warning Label for Laser beam is attached. Use extreme caution to avoid injury of yourself and anyone around you with a clear understanding of hazardous nature of the laser beam. When you need to work on the hot part or unit (Fuser unit, for example), make sure to unplug the printer from power outlet in advance. Do not start the work until the part or unit cools down sufficiently to avoid burn injury. This printer produces a laser beam when the following conditions are all satisfied. The printer is turned on. The interlock switches are OFF. Do not use a general vacuum cleaner to clean spilt toner. To do so may cause the sucked toner particles to catch fire by sparks of the electric contacts. If the toner has spilt on the floor, etc., clean it with a broom or wipe it with a cloth moistened with neutral detergent. If it is necessary to clean a lot of spilt toner with a cleaner, use a cleaner exclusively designed for toner. Do not disassemble the components (Fuser unit, Laser scanning unit, etc.) which do not have disassembly procedures described in this manual.
MAINTENANCE
Overview
452
Revision A
C A U T IO N
Always wear gloves for disassembly and reassembly to avoid injury from sharp metal edges. Do not disassemble the consumables. Do not expose the Photoconductor unit to direct sunlight. Do not touch the onboard components with bare hands to prevent the ICs and other electrical components from being damaged by static electricity. (When necessary, wear a wrist strap.) To ensure safety and workability, use the specified tools. Do not turn the printer off until all motors stop completely. Should the printer be transported, use the special packing material, pallet, etc. Never use chemical solvents, such as thinner, benzine, or alcohol to clean the exterior or case parts of the printer. These chemicals may deform or deteriorate the components of the printer.
MAINTENANCE
Overview
453
Revision A
Cleaning the Density Sensor
W A R N IN G
6.2 Cleaning
While at maintenance work, perform the following cleaning according to the printer status.
1
Table 6-1. Cleaning

No. 1 2 3 Cleaning Point Outer case Density sensor Cleaning Requirements When the exterior is stained (dirty or dusty) When Clean Sensor is displayed on the LCD panel Reference See Page 454 See Page 454 See Page 455
Be careful not to touch the fuser, which is marked CAUTION HIGH TEMPERATURE, or the surrounding areas. If the printer has been in use, the fuser and the surrounding areas may be extremely hot.
1. 2. 3.
Turn the printer off. Press the latch on cover A and open the cover. Grasp the two orange tabs and pull the transfer unit out of the printer.
Photoconductor unit If printouts have dots at every 30 mm
Cleaning the Outer Case Turn off the printer and wipe it with a soft, clean cloth moistened with a mild detergent.
C A U T IO N
Never use alcohol or paint thinner to clean the outer case, these chemicals can damage the components and the case. Be careful not to get water onto the printer mechanism or any electrical components.
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning
454

4. Gently wipe the transparent plastic window on the density sensor with a dry soft cloth or cotton swab. Cleaning the Photoconductor Unit
W A R N IN G
Revision A
Be careful not to touch the fuser, which is marked CAUTION HIGH TEMPERATURE, or the surrounding areas. If the printer has been in use, the fuser and the surrounding areas may be extremely hot. Do not take too much time to clean the photoconductor. Exposing the photoconductor unit to too much light may damage the printer.
C A U T IO N
1. 5. 6. Hold the transfer unit by the orange tabs and lower it into the printer, making sure that it fits into the guides. Push the transfer unit in and up until it clicks into place. Pull the transfer unit toward you and the orange tabs into place. 2. 3.
Turn the printer off. Press the latch on cover A and open the cover. Raise cover D and hold the photoconductor unit by the handle, and slowly lift it straight out of the printer.
7.
Close cover A.
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning
455

4. Place the printout that has dots on it and the photoconductor unit on a flat table as shown below.
Revision A
C A U T IO N
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the drum and rollers. Also, avoid touching the drum and rollers since oil from your skin may permanently damage their surface and affect print quality. Do not expose the photoconductor unit and the developer cartridge to light any longer than necessary. Do not store the photoconductor unit in an area subject to direct sunlight.
6.
Turn the grey part of the black roller to find the spot, and wipe the spot with a dry soft cloth or cotton swab.
NOTE
1: 2:
Make sure to align the center of the printout and the center of the photoconductor unit when positioning them. Place the printout faceup so the short edge that comes out of the printer first is against the photoconductor unit as shown in the figure.
5.
Look for the roller that is the same color as the dots on the printout. Then, look for the place on the roller that is vertically in the same position as the dots on the printout.
a b c
a: Yellow b: Magenta c: Cyan d: Black
NOTE: The illustration indicates that the dots on the printout are magenta as an example.
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning
456

7. Holding the handle firmly, lower the photoconductor unit into the printer, making sure the posts on the sides of the unit slide into the slots.
Revision A
8.
Close covers D and A.
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning
457
Revision A
6.3 Maintenance Menu

[Enter (
C A U T IO N
Clear Error Log
)] SW )] SW
[Enter ( Engine Status Sheet [Down ( Print Log Report
)] SW
Print execution
This menu is provided only for a service personnel to perform maintenance and must not be disclosed to users.
Maintenance Menu [Up ( Information Menu
)] SW
Print execution
The Maintenance Menu allows service personnel to print various sheets to know the printer's status, reset the life counter when replacing the component, and so on. The printer requires a special operation at power-on in order to enter the maintenance mode to display the menu as the menu should be disclosed to users.
[Enter ( Ready
)] SW
Reset C Dev Counter Clear execution
Reset M Dev Counter
Clear execution
6.3.1 Entry into Maintenance Mode

1. While holding down the [Back ( buttons, turn the printer on. )], [Up ( )], [Down ( )] and [Enter ( )]
Reset Y Dev Counter Clear execution
When the printer is turned on, all LEDs and LCD light up and the following message is displayed. (When MAINTENANCE MODE appears, release your hand from the buttons.) ROM CHECK **MB RAM CHECK **MB 2.
Reset K Dev Counter
Clear execution
Reset Transfer Counter
Clear execution
SELF TEST
MAINTENANCE MODE
Ready
Clear Error Log Clear execution
Refer to the Maintenance Menu process flowchart in Figure 6-1, perform each function of the Maintenance Menu by operating the panel buttons.
NOTE 1: Engine-related service call errors are ignored when the Maintenance Mode starts. Before starting the printer in the Maintenance Mode and executing printing, make sure that no error has occurred in the normal operating mode. 2: To exit from the Maintenance Menu, make sure that the engine is not operating and then turn the printer off. 3: Regardless of the language setting of the printer, all the messages displayed in the Maintenance Mode will be in English.
Engine Status Sheet
Figure 6-1. Maintenance Menu Process Flowchart
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Menu
458
Revision A
6.3.2 Maintenance Menu Items

C A U T IO N
This menu is provided only for a service personnel to perform maintenance and must not be disclosed to users.
The printer goes into the maintenance mode to display the Maintenance Menu by being turned on while specified buttons are pressed down. It returns to the normal operating mode when the power is turned off and back on by normal operation. Table 6-2. Maintenance Menu Items
Item Engine Status Sheet (Refer to Figure 6-2) Explanation Before entering the maintenance mode, make sure that there is no engine-related service call error in the normal operating mode (not maintenance mode). After the printer enters into the maintenance mode, press the Enter ] button to print an engine status sheet. The sheet is printed [ according to the default settings, except RIT, toner save, and resolution settings (current settings are applied for those settings). While the printing is in progress, the LCD keeps flashing. The user default environment (settings) does not change after the printing. The contents of the engine status sheet are the counted values of each unit which makes up the printer engine. Prints a log file of printing status. Resets the development units life counter of each color and adds one to the number of replacement. The counter must be reset by a service personnel after the transfer unit is replaced with a new one (maintenance). Resets the transfer units life counter and adds one to the number of replacement. This operation is not required when replacing the transfer unit after Worn Transfer Unit or Replace Transfer Unit is occurred. Clear error log list stored for display on Engine Status Sheet.
Print Log Report (Refer to Figure 6-3) Reset C/M/Y/K Dev Counter
Reset TransferCounter
Clear Error Log
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Menu
459
Revision A
Photoconductor: Total number of pages printed with the photoconductor unit up to the present, round time, and dispense time. Increased every time new photoconductor unit is detected. Total number of pages printed with the fuser unit up to the present. Increased every time new fuser unit is detected. Total number of pages printed with the transfer unit up to the present. The value is reset by installing new transfer unit when the waste toner box is full or sends warning. Increased every time new transfer unit is detected. Round time of the development unit. Should be reset from the control panel when replacing the development unit.
6.4 Sheet for Servicing

6.4.1 Engine Status Sheet
C A U T IO N
Photoconductor Change: Fuser: Fuser Change:
The Engine Status Sheet is provided only for a service personnel to perform maintenance and must not be disclosed to users.
Engine Status Sheet Items Total Counts Total Pages: Total Planes: Color Pages: Jam Counts: Total number of pages printed up to the present. Independent of paper size. Total number of images printed up to the present. Total number of color pages printed up to the present. Independent of paper size. Number of jams.
Transfer Unit:
Transfer Unit Change: Development Unit:
Development Unit Change: Increased every time the round time is reset. Power On: Sleep: MCU Number of times power is turned on Number of times printer returns from sleep mode 10-digit number that starts with MC indicates the engine controller firmware and NVM version.
ET Cartridge (Toner Cartridge) C/M/Y/K Toner: Consumption of toner, total dots. Incremented every time the printer prints 4,096 dots.
C/M/Y/K Toner Change: Increased every time new toner cartridge is detected. C/M/Y/K Toner Used: C/M/Y/K Toner ID: Increased every time toner ID is changed. Displays 12-digits number YYMMDDLLSSSS. --- is displayed if the number cannot be obtained. YY:Year MM:Month DD:Day LL:Line number SS:Serial number
3012030100
Last five digits : NVM Version (Ver. 3.0.10.0) First five digits : MCU Version (Ver. 3.0.12.0)
MAINTENANCE
Sheet for Servicing
460

Error Log: Information that contains messages displayed on the panel and EJL status code of the error; total of printed copies, JAM code, and size and type of paper at the time of error; and date and time the error occurred. The JAM code in the Error Log indicates the location of the jam using an hexadecimal character string. Table 6-3. Jam Code
Bit 4 3 2 1 Location of Jam Duplex Jam Fuser Jam Reg Jam Feed Jam
Revision A
Jam code:
Paper Size: Paper Type: Time Occurred:
Shows English strings that is displayed on the control panel to indicate the size. Indicates the media by decimal number that is specified to the engine controller. Displays yy/mm/dd hh:mm (year/month/day hour:minute) by converting into the current local time. --/--/-- --:-- is displayed if not synchronized.
Figure 6-2. Engine Status Sheet
MAINTENANCE
Sheet for Servicing
461
Revision A
ENGINE STATUS SHEET CONTENTS SUMMARY
Information name Total Pages Total Planes Color Pages Jam Counts C Toner Dispense time Total dots Change Used ID M Toner Dispense time Total dots Change Used ID Y Toner Dispense time Total dots Change Used ID K Toner Dispense time Total dots Change Used ID
Count processing and storage location Controller Controller Controller Controller Engine Controller Controller Controller Engine
Range 0 to 99,999,999 0 to 99,999,999 0 to 99,999,999 0 to 100,000 0 to 99,999 0 to 2,147,483,647*1 0 to 255 0 to 2,147,483,647 040101000000 to 991231999999 0 to 99,999 0 to 2,147,483,647*1 0 to 255 0 to 2,147,483,647 040101000000 to 991231999999 0 to 99,999 0 to 2,147,483,647*1 0 to 255 0 to 2,147,483,647 040101000000 to 991231999999 0 to 99,999 0 to 2,147,483,647*1 0 to 255 0 to 2,147,483,647 040101000000 to 991231999999
Unit Pages Planes Pages Times
Count conditions During printing During transfering During printing When a jam occurs When supplying toner to the developer Dots with toner New C toner detected ID change
Clear conditions (EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) --(EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) ---
Times Times
Engine Controller Controller Controller Engine
Times Times
When supplying toner to the developer Dots with toner New M toner detected ID change
--(EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) ---
Times Times
When supplying toner to the developer Dots with toner New Y toner detected ID change
Times Times
When supplying toner to the developer Dots with toner New Ktoner detected ID change
MAINTENANCE
Sheet for Servicing
462
Revision A
Information name Photoconductor Sheet Round time Dispense time Photoconductor Change Fuser Fuser Change Transfer Unit Transfer Unit Change C Development Round time Change M Development Round time Change Y Development Round time Change K Development Round time Change Power On Sleep MCU Error Code 1 Error Page 1 Jam Code 1 Page Size 1 Paper Type 1
Count processing and storage location Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine Controller Engine Controller Engine Controller Engine Controller Controller Controller Engine Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller
Range
Unit
Count conditions
Clear conditions
0 to 999,999 0 to 999,999 0 to 999,999 0 to 255 0 to 999,999 0 to 255 0 to 999,999 0 to 255 0 to 16,777,215 0 to 255 0 to 16,777,215 0 to 255 0 to 16,777,215 0 to 255 0 to 16,777,215 0 to 255 0 to 99,999,999 0 to 99,999,999 -----------
Pages
Times Pages Pages
During printing During printing During printing New photoconductor detected During printing New fuser detected During printing New transfer unit detected
------------New transfer unit detected --Panel --Panel --Panel --Panel ---
msec Times msec Times msec Times msec Times Times Times ----------At power-on When returning from sleep mode --When an error occurs When an error occurs When an error occurs When an error occurs When an error occurs
(EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) --SelecType, (EEPROM initialization)
Values enclosed in parenthesis in clear conditions means they are cleared as a result. If values that are controlled by the controller side exceed the coverage, they are not guaranteed. If the number of replacement controlled by the engine side exceed the coverage, the value goes back to zero and continue the operation.
Note*1:If total dots exceed the coverage, the value goes back to zero and continue the operation
MAINTENANCE
Sheet for Servicing
463
Revision A
6.4.2 Print Log Report

Print Log Report Items S/N: Date: Main unit serial number. yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm: (year/month/day hour:minute) displayed in local time. Not displayed when out-of-synchronization.
Toner Remain C Toner: M Toner: Y Toner: K Toner: Print of papers: Total: Mono Color Simplex: Duplex: Simplex: Duplex: Dummy: Amount of remaining C Toner in %. Amount of remaining M Toner in %. Amount of remaining Y Toner in %. Amount of remaining K Toner in %. Number of pages printed per paper size. Number of pages printed. Number of printed monochrome simplex pages. Number of printed monochrome duplex pages. Number of printed color simplex pages. Number of printed color duplex pages. Number of pages added artificially for duplex printing. Paper sizes not supported for duplex printing are displayed as ---. Number of pages printed per printing mode. Average print ratio (number of printed dots per page) of each color Number of dots printed with 1% of each toner. Updated with every reduction of 1%. Number of printable pages with the remaining quantity of each toner. Estimation calculated from Coverage Duty[%] and Dots/1%[dots]. Figure 6-3. Print Log Report
Print of mode: Coverage Duty[%]: Dots/1%[dots]: Estimate [pages]:
MAINTENANCE
Sheet for Servicing
464
Revision A
PRINT LOG REPORT CONTENTS SUMMARY Table 6-4. Print Log Report Contents Summary
Information Name Serial Number Date C Toner M Toner Y Toner K Toner Print [pages] Total Mono Simplex Mono Duplex Color Simplex Color Duplex Dummy Coverage Duty[%] C, M, Y, K Dots/1%[dots] C, M, Y, K Count Processing and Storage Location Controller Controller Engine Engine Engine Engine Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Range xxxxxxxxxx 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 99,999,999 0 to 99,999,999 0 to 99,999,999 0 to 99,999,999 0 to 99,999,999 0 to 99,999,999 0.0 to 100.0 00 to 2,147,483,647 Unit % % % % pages pages pages pages pages pages % dots Count Conditions During printing During printing During printing During printing During printing During printing During printing During printing During printing During printing During printing During printing Clear Conditions None When the power is turned on New C toner detected New M toner detected New Y toner detected New K toner detected (EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization) (EEPROM initialization)
NOTE 1: Values in parentheses in the Clear conditions column are cleared as result. 2: Printers whose values (pages) exceed the above range (only for the values controlled by the controller) are not guaranteed.
MAINTENANCE
Sheet for Servicing
465
Revision A
6.5 Consumables and Components That Need Periodic Replacement

C A U T IO N
The print page-based service life values of the Consumables and Periodical Replacement Parts are guidelines. The life could become less than a half of the given numbers (printable pages) because there are many factors that decrease it; such as intermittent printing (repeating to print one or several copies for each print job), paper type (especially thick paper), paper size, paper orientation, print data (image or document), frequent power-on/off, and so on.
6.5.1 Consumables
Table 6-5. Information on Consumables
Product Name Toner Cartridge Yellow Magenta Cyan Black Photoconductor Unit Fuser Unit 3020/3021 100,000 Product Code 0242 0243 0244 0245 1109 Life (Pages) 8,000 8,000 8,000 9,000 35,000 Service Life Indication __Y_Toner Low Replace Toner __Y_ _M__Toner Low Replace Toner _M__ C___Toner Low Replace Toner C___ ___K Toner Low Replace Toner ___K Worn Photoconductor Replace Photoconductor Worn Fuser Remarks --------------------Even though the fuser unit has reached the end of life, it does not make the engine stop operating. Be sure to replace the fuser unit immediately with a new one once the warning occurs. If the transfer unit is replaced before the warning or error occurs, execute Reset TransferCounter in the Maintenance Menu to reset the life counter.
Transfer Unit 3022 35,000
Worn Transfer Unit Replace Transfer Unit
MAINTENANCE
Consumables and Components That Need Periodic Replacement
466
Revision A
Photoconductor unit
Fuser unit
Toner cartridge
Transfer uni
Ida_00_012C
Figure 6-4. Consumables
MAINTENANCE
467
Revision A
6.5.2 Regular Replacement Parts

Table 6-6. Maintenance Information on Regular Replacement Parts
Product Name ROLL ASSY RETARD 1409134 100,000 None None Part Code Life (Pages) Service Life Indication Action After Replacement Remarks This roller is installed on each paper cassette. Replace the roller if multi paper feeding happens at frequent intervals when feeding papers from paper cassettes, as the numeric value of life explained here is just for reference. If two or more developer unit assys come to the end of life at the same time, combined error code will be displayed. Refer to Troubleshooting for details.
DEVE ASSY Y 1409152 300,000 Service Req E201
Execute Reset Y Dev Counter in the Maintenance Menu to reset the life counter Execute Reset M Dev Counter in the Maintenance Menu to reset the life counter Execute Reset C Dev Counter in the Maintenance Menu to reset the life counter Execute Reset K Dev Counter in the Maintenance Menu to reset the life counter None
1409153
300,000
Service Req E202
1409154
300,000
Service Req E204
K ROLL ASSY FEED
1409155
300,000
Service Req E208
1409140 (TBD)
45,000
None
Replace the assy if paper jam happens at frequent intervals when feeding papers from the MP tray, as the numeric value of life explained here is just for reference. Replace the assy if multi paper feeding happens at frequent intervals when feeding papers from the MP tray, as the numeric value of life explained here is just for reference. Replace the assy if misalignment, skew, or registration misalignment happens as the numeric value of life explained here is just for reference. This roller is installed on each paper cassette. Replace the roller if paper jam happens at frequent intervals when feeding papers from paper cassettes, as the numeric value of life explained here is just for reference.
HOLDER ASSY RETARD 1409143 CHUTE ASSY REGI 2103365 ROLL ASSY FEED 1409148 (TBD) 300,000 None None 300,000 None None 45,000 None None
MAINTENANCE
468
Revision A
CHUTE ASSY REGI

DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K)
ROLL ASSY FEED (CST)
HOLDER ASSY RETARD (MSI)
Ida_00_015B
Ida_00_013B
ROLL ASSY FEED
ROLL ASSY FEED
Ida_00_014A
Figure 6-5. Regular Replacement Parts
MAINTENANCE
469
CHAPTER
7
APPENDIX
Revision A
Table 7-1. MAIN UNIT
P/J Coordinates F-106 E-109 D-122 E-135 E-122 H-121 H-120 F-142 I-128 I-126 I-128 I-126 I-127 I-127 I-126 I-126 G-154 E-138 G-143 F-138 F-138 D-137 E-138 C-106 B-153 F-202 G-203 Remarks Connects SENSOR FULL STACK and HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP Connects SENSOR NO PAPER and HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP Connects HOLDER ASSY CTD and HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC Connects HVPS and HARNESS ASSY HVPS Connects SENSOR TNR FULL and HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR Connects PWBA EEPROM and HARNESS ASSY EEPROM Connects ROS ASSY and HARNESS ASSY ROS Not Connects Connects LVPS and HARNESS ASSY AC INLET Connects LVPS and HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK Connects LVPS and HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC Connects LVPS and HARNESS ASSY 24V Connects LVPS and HARNESS ASSY LV RPG Connects LVPS and HARNESS ASSY LV Connects LVPS and FAN REAR Not Connects Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG and HARNESS ASSY OPFREC Connects SENSOR REGI and HARNESS ASSY REGISNS Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY EEPROM Connects CLUTCH TURN and HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH Connects CLUTCH REGI and HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH Connects HARNESS ASSY SENSOR OHP and HARNESS ASSY OHP MCU Connects SENSOR OHP and HARNESS ASSY SENSOR OHP Connects CONSOLE PANEL and HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE SE Connects SENSOR HUM and HARNESS ASSY TMP Connects WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH and DRIVE ASSY FSR Connects WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH and FRAME
7.1 Connectors
7.1.1 The List of Plugs and Jacks
MAIN UNIT Table 7-1. MAIN UNIT
P/J 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 30 31 34 36 47 48 51 52 60 61 132 133 Coordinates H-143 G-142 F-142 F-142 I-143 F-143 F-143 F-143 E-142 I-143 E-142 E-142 F-142 F-142 H-143 H-143 H-143 H-143 H-143 I-143 H-143 H-109 D-108 Remarks Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY FRONT/ DUP Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and PWB CONTROLLER (PWB ESS) Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY ROS Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY HVPS Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY REGISNS Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY OHP MCU Not Connects Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE SE Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY TMP Flash Write Test Print Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY RFID Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY FDR Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT Connects PPWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY TNR Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY 24V Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY LV Connects SOLENOID FEED MSI and HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP Connects SENSOR DUP JAM and HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP 201 220 231 234 235 171 181 191 191 192 200 134 135 136 141 142 144 151 154 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167
APPENDIX
Connectors
471

P/J 311 341 342 361 471 472 473 474 481 482 484 491 501 511 512 513 514 521 701 702 703 704 710 1321 Coordinates G-142 E-105 E-105 F-122 H-154 G-153 F-153 G-153 G-123 E-107 E-119 H-123 C-107 H-106 I-106 I-106 J-106 F-123 G-106 H-106 H-106 I-105 D-119 F-196 Remarks Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY LV RPG Connects COIL ASSY CRUM READER and HARNESS ASSY RFID2 Connects COIL ASSY CRUM READER and HARNESS ASSY TNR Connects FUSER ASSY and HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC Connects SWITCH ASSY SIZE and HARNESS ASSY FDR Connects SENSOR NO PAPER and HARNESS ASSY FDR Connects SENSOR LOW PAPER and HARNESS ASSY FDR Connects SOLENOID FEED and HARNESS ASSY FDR Connects DRIVE ASSY MAIN and HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/ MOT Connects FAN FRONT and HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT Connects HARNESS ASSY PHD2 and HARNESS ASSY FAN/ PHD/MOT Connects DRIVE ASSY DEVE and HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/ MOT Connects MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM and HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Y) and HARNESS ASSY TNR Connects DISPENSER ASSY (M) and HARNESS ASSY TNR Connects DISPENSER ASSY (C) and HARNESS ASSY TNR Connects DISPENSER ASSY (K) and HARNESS ASSY TNR Connects DRIVE ASSY FUSER and HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR Connects SENSOR NO TNR (Y) and HARNESS ASSY TNR Connects SENSOR NO TNR (M) and HARNESS ASSY TNR Connects SENSOR NO TNR (C) and HARNESS ASSY TNR Connects SENSOR NO TNR (K) and HARNESS ASSY TNR Connects CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC and HARNESS ASSY PHD2 Connects WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH and PLATE EARTH OUT3/ SOLENID FEED MSI DEVE C DEVE K DEVE K H-171 C-165 H-172 Terminal CF CF CF CF CL1 CL1 CL1 CL1 CL2 CL2 CL2 CL2 DA DA DB DB DC DC DD DD DEVE C P/J 1322 3411 Coordinates H-196 F-106
Revision A
Remarks Connects WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH and FRAME Connects HARNESS ASSY RFID2 and HARNESS ASSY RFID
Table 7-2. MAIN UNIT(High Voltage Terminals)

Coordinates C-166 B-173 H-173 D-183 D-166 B-172 H-173 D-183 E-166 B-172 G-173 D-183 B-170 D-182 B-171 D-182 B-171 D-182 B-172 D-183 C-164 Remarks Connects PHD ASSY (RTC) and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and PHD ASSY (RTC) Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects PHD ASSY (IDT1 Cleaner) and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and PHD ASSY (IDT1 Cleaner) Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects PHD ASSY (IDT2 Cleaner) and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and PHD ASSY (IDT2 Cleaner) Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects DEVE ASSY (C) (Magnet Roll (C)) and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and DEVE ASSY (C) (Magnet Roll (C)) Connects DEVE ASSY (K) (Magnet Roll (K)) and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and DEVE ASSY (K) (Magnet Roll (K))
APPENDIX
Connectors
472

Table 7-2. MAIN UNIT(High Voltage Terminals)
Terminal DEVE M DEVE M DEVE Y DEVE Y ID1 ID1 ID1 ID1 ID2 ID2 ID2 ID2 RF RF RF RF RG TR Coordinates C-164 H-171 C-163 H-170 D-166 B-173 H-173 D-184 E-164 G-172 B-173 D-184 D-166 B-173 H-173 D-183 B-181 B-181 Remarks Connects DEVE ASSY (M) (Magnet Roll (M)) and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and DEVE ASSY (M) (Magnet Roll (M)) Connects DEVE ASSY (Y) (Magnet Roll (Y)) and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and DEVE ASSY (Y) (Magnet Roll (Y)) Connects PHD ASSY (IDT1) and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and PHD ASSY (IDT1) Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects PHD ASSY . (IDT2) and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and PHD ASSY (IDT2) Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects PHD ASSY (Refresher) and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and PHD ASSY (Refresher) Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects HVPS and WIRE ASSY REGI Connects HVPS and WIRE ASSY BTR 821 822 823 824 825 H-209 G-209 F-209 H-209 G-209 171 172 G-208 G-210
Revision A
550-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT Table 7-3. 550-sheet paper cassette unit
Terminal 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 Coordinates I-205 J-204 J-205 I-205 I-205 J-204 I-205 Remarks Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY SIZE Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY LOWP Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and DRIVE ASSY Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY OPFREC Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2 Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY OPFDR Not Connects Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG and HARNESS ASSY OPFREC Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2 and HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 Connects HARNESS ASSY SIZE and SWITCH ASSY SIZE Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFDR and SENSOR NO PAPER Connects HARNESS ASSY LOWP and SENSOR LOW PAPER Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFDR and SOLENOID FEED Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFDR and CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC
APPENDIX
Connectors
473
Revision A
1100-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT Table 7-4. 1100-sheet paper cassette unit
Terminal 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 171 172 821 822 823 824 825 Coordinates I-205 J-204 J-205 I-205 I-205 J-204 I-205 G-208 G-210 H-209 G-209 F-209 H-209 G-209 Remarks
7.1.2 P/J Layout Diagram

A B C D E F G H I J K L
101
Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY SIZE Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY LOWP Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and DRIVE ASSY Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY OPFREC Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2 Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY OPFDR Not Connects Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG and HARNESS ASSY OPFREC Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2 and HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 Connects HARNESS ASSY SIZE and SWITCH ASSY SIZE Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFDR and SENSOR NO PAPER
108 105 104 103 102
3411 341 342 220
701
702
703
704
106
514
107
501
513 512 511
Connects HARNESS ASSY LOWP and SENSOR LOW PAPER Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFDR and SOLENOID FEED Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFDR and CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC
109
110
111
133
112
482 135 134
132
113
114
115
Ida_04_001A
Figure 7-1. Plug and Jack Layout for MAIN UNIT(1)
APPENDIX
Connectors
474
Revision A
116
131
117
484 710
151
132
141
118
133
119
134
120
135
121
136
144
122
137
192 191
138
491
123
124
139
125
136 142 361 521 481
140
201 200 181 34 154 16 24 30 21 31 15 311 14 61 36 51 22 17 60 47 18 19 191 13 48 52
161 166 163 167 165 164 162 160

141
126
127
142
128
143
129
144
20
130
145
Ida_04_002B
Ida_04_003B
APPENDIX
Connectors
475
Revision A
146
161
147
162
FRAME ASSY DEVE DEVE Y
148
163
DEVE M
149
164
DEVE ASSY (Y)
DEVE C DEVE K
DEVE ASSY (M) ID2 DEVE ASSY (C) CL2
473
150
472 474
165
151
166
231
152
167
DEVE ASSY (K) CF RF CL1 ID1 PHD ASSY
153
168
154
169
471
DA
155
HSG ASSY BIAS

170
DEVE Y
171
DB DC
171
DEVE M
156
DEVE C
DD CL2
157
172
ID2
DEVE K
CL1 CF
158
173
CF
RF ID1
159
174
RF CL2 ID1 CL1
ID2
160
175
Ida_Sec04_004GA
Ida_04_006B
APPENDIX
Connectors
476
Revision A
176
191 CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT 192 ELIMINATOR EXIT PLATE EARTH OUT1
177
178
193 SPRING BIAS IDT1
WIRE ASSY BTR

179
194 PLATE EARTH OUT2
SPRING BIAS IDT1
PLATE EARTH OUT4

180
195 REGISTOR GS1 SPRING EARTH OUT2
181
RG TR
196 PLATE EARTH OUT3
J1322 J1321
SOLENOID FEED MSI WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH
182
HVPS
DA DB DC BTR ASSY CL1 CF RF DD CL2 SPRING BTR L
197
183
198
184
ID1 ID2
199
185
200
CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
J234
186
201
WIRE ASSY REGI

DRIVE ASSY FUSER
187
202
188
J235
203
189
204
WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH
190
205
Ida_04_007B
Ida_04_008B
APPENDIX
Connectors
477
Revision A
201
301
202
302
81 84 83
203
303
81
204
823
304
822
80 172 86 82 85
84 83 80 822 85 171 86 82
825
205
305
206
306
207
307
821 824
208
308
209
309
821
210
824 825 823 172
310
81
311
211
84 83 823
212
312
825
80 822 85 824 821 86 82
213
313
214
314
215
315
Ida_1T_04_101A
Ida_2T_04_201C
Figure 7-8. Plug and Jack Layout for 550-FEEDER
Figure 7-9. Plug and Jack Layout for 1100-FEEDER P/J
APPENDIX
Connectors
478
Revision A
7.2 Wire Net

HARNESS ASSY TNR DISPENSER ASSY (Y)
P/J701
FAN REAR SENSOR NO TNR (Y) P161 P166 P163 LVPS P165 HARNESS ASSY LV P164 P162 P160
HARNESS ASSY RFID2
DISPENSER ASSY (M)
P/J511
P/J702 P/J512
SENSOR NO TNR (M) HARNESS ASSY LV RPG
CONSOLE PANEL
DISPENSER ASSY (C)

P/J703 P/J513
SENSOR NO TNR (C)
DISPENSER ASSY (K)
P/J704
SENSOR NO TNR (K)
PWBA ESS MAIN (PWB CONTROLLER)
P/J514 P/J342
HARNESS ASSY 24V
P/J220
HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE SE
FUSER ASSY
HARNESS ASSY RFID2

P/J341
P/J3411
HARNESS ASSY RFID

P/J34 P/J15
P/J311
P/J14
P/J22 P/J17 P/J60 P/J51
COIL ASSY CRUM READER
HARNESS ASSY ROS

P/J16 P/J151
P/J154
P/J61 P/J36 P/J191 P/J13 P/J48 P/J52 P/J142 P/J136 P/J47 P/J361
HVPS
HARNESS ASSY HVPS

P/J141
PWBA MCU IDTN

P/J19
P/J24 P/J20 P/J18
HARNESS ASSY EEPROM
ROS ASSY HARNESS ASSY SENSOR OHP

P/J200 P/J201
P/J231
SENSOR HUM HARNESS ASSY OHP MCU HARNESS ASSY REGISNS HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH SENSOR OHP
P/J181 P/J133 P/J134
HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR
HARNESS ASSY TMP
DRIVE ASSY FUSER

P/J521
HARNESS ASSY FDR
SENSOR TNR FULL
HOLDER ASSY CTD
SWITCH ASSY SIZE

P/J471
P/J144
PWBA EEPROM
P/J501 P/J132
HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP

P/J135
MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM

P/J472 P/J473 P/J474
SENSOR REGI SENSOR DUP JAM SENSOR FULL STACK SENSOR NO PAPER SOLENOID FEED MSI
DRIVE ASSY MAIN

P/J481
SENSOR NO PAPER
SENSOR LOW PAPER
SOLENOID FEED (Tray1)
P/J482
P/J710 P/J191 P/J192
HARNESS ASSY PHD2 CONN_ASSY_ CRUM_MC
P/J484
P/J491
DRIVE ASSY DEVE
FAN FRONT
CLUTCH TURN (MSI)
CLUTCH REGI
Ida_04_005D
Figure 7-10. MAIN UNIT
APPENDIX
Wire Net
479
Revision A
P/J172 HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2
SENSOR LOW PAPER P/J823
P/J17 HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG
P/J171
HARNESS ASSY OPFREC
PWBA OPTFDR 1T P81 P85 P82
HARNESS ASSY LOWP
P83 P84 P80
PWBA MCU IDTN
CLUTCH ELELCTRO MAGNETIC P/J825
SWITCH ASSY SIZE P/J821 HARNESS ASSY SIZE
HARNESS ASSY
P/J824
SOLENOID FEED
SENSOR NO PAPER DRIVE ASSY (PL11.3.15) P/J822
Ida_1T_04_005A
Figure 7-11. 550-sheet paper cassette unit MAIN UNIT
APPENDIX
Wire Net
480
Revision A
P/J823
SENSOR LOW PAPER
P17
P171 HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG
HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 J172
PWBA OPTFDR 2T
P/J83 P/J80 P/J84 P/J81 P/J85 P/J82
HARNESS ASSY LOWP2 CLUTCH ASSY P/J825 HARNESS ASSY
PWBA MCU IDTN
P/J821
HARNESS ASSY SIZE2
HARNESS ASSY OPF23
SWITCH ASSY SIZE
P/J824
SOLENOID FEED
SENSOR NO PAPER P/J822 DRIVE ASSY 2ND
P/J823 SWITCH ASSY SIZE
SENSOR LOW PAPER
P/J821 HARNESS ASSY SIZE2

P/J83 P/J80
PWBA OPTFDR 2T
P/J81 P/J85
HARNESS ASSY LOWP2 CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC P/J825
HARNESS ASSY
P/J824
SOLENOID FEED
SENSOR NO PAPER P/J822
Ida_2T_04_006B
Figure 7-12. 1100-sheet paper cassette unit
APPENDIX
Wire Net
481
Revision A
7.3 Wiring Connection Diagrams

7.3.1 Marks used in the Diagram
The table below shows how to interpret the Overall Wiring Connection Diagram given on the following pages. Table 7-5. List of the Marks
Marks Explanation Indicates a connection between parts with a harness or wire.
XX
Box without a part name in it indicates the connector (P/J). Numeric value in the box indicates the connector No. Indicates the connector (P/J) drawn separately in several places. Numeric value in the box indicates the connector No. Box with a part name in it indicates the part.
XX
PWBA MCU IDTN PL X.Y.Z Indicates a section in Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts on page XXX, and the section No.
Overall Wiring Connection Diagrams are given on the following pages. MAIN UNIT 550-sheet paper cassette unit 1100-sheet paper cassette unit
APPENDIX
Wiring Connection Diagrams
482
6
FUSER ASSY P/J162 PWBA MCU IDTN P/J361 P/J161 HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK P/J160 HARNESS ASSY AC INLET
MAIN UNIT
APPENDIX
1
P/J36 P/J166 FAN REAR SENSOR HUM J231 P/J24
2
LVPS P/J471 SWITCH ASSY SIZE
7
ROS ASSY P/J151 P/J60 P/J311 P/J61 P/J165 P/J164 P/J473 SENSOR LOW PAPER P/J163 P/J15 P/J472 SENSOR NO PAPER
CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC
P/J710
P/J484
P/J48
8
HOLDER ASSY CTD P/J136 P/J47 SENSOR TNR FULL P/J142 P/J13 PWBA EEPROM J144 P/J48 P/J191 J481 DRIVE ASSY MAIN P/J52 P/J36
P/J474
SOLENOID FEED
3
P/J501 MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM
PHD ASSY HVPS P/J141 IDT2 IDT2 CLEANER IDT1 IDT1 CLEANER BTR BTR ASSY
P/J16
P482
FAN FRONT
J491
DRIVE ASSY DEVE
P/J52
J521
DRIVE ASSY FUSER
9
RFB HTC DEVE Y DEVE M DEVE C DEVE K

10
SENSOR DUP JAM P/J133 P/J13 SENSOR FULL STACK P/J134 SENSOR NO PAPER P/J135 SOLENOID FEED MSI P/J132 SENSOR REGI P/J181 P/J18 CLUTCH TURN P/J191 CLUTCH REGI P/J192 P/J19 SENSOR OHP P/J201 P/J200 P/J20
P/J51
P/J701
SENSOR NO TNR (Y)
P/J702
SENSOR NO TNR (M)
P/J703
SENSOR NO TNR (C)
P/J704
SENSOR NO TNR (K)
P/J342
COIL ASSY CRUM READER
P/J34
P/J3411
P/J341
P/J511
DISPENSER ASSY (Y)
5 11
P/J14 PWBA ESS MAIN P/J512
DISPENSER ASSY (M)
P/J22
P/J220
CONSOLE PANEL
P/J513
DISPENSER ASSY (C)
P/J514
DISPENSER ASSY (K)
Ida_007_001D
Revision A
483
Revision A
550-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT

2
1100-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT
Ida_1T_07_101A
SENSOR LOW PAPER
2
PWBA OPTFDR 2T HARNESS ASSY SIZE2 P/J80 P/J821
SENSOR NO PAPER
SWITCH ASSY SIZE
SOLENOID FEED
1
PWBA MCU IDTN HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG HARNESS ASSY LOWP2 P/J81 P/J83 HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2 P/J85 P/J825 P/J823
SWITCH ASSY SIZE
HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2
SENSOR LOW PAPER
P/J17
P171
J172
P/J821
P/J823
P/J822
CLUTCH ASSY
HARNESS ASSY LOWP
HARNESS ASSY SIZE
P/J825
P/J824
To 2 Tray Option Feeder Unit
HARNESS ASSY OPFDR
From Single Feeder Unit
P/J172
P/J824
SOLENOID FEED
P/J172
P/J822 DRIVE ASSY 2ND P/J82 P/J84
SENSOR NO PAPER
P/J80
P/J81
P/J85
P/J84
HARNESS ASSY OPF23
PWBA OPTFDR 1T
3
PWBA OPTFDR 2T P/J83
P/J83
HARNESS ASSY OPFREC
P/J82
HARNESS ASSY SIZE2 P/J80 P/J821 SWITCH ASSY SIZE
HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG
HARNESS ASSY LOWP2 P/J81 P/J823 SENSOR LOW PAPER
P/J171
HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2 P/J85 P/J825 CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC
P/J17
P/J824
SOLENOID FEED
PWBA MCU IDTN
DRIVE ASSY
P/J822
SENSOR NO PAPER
Ida_2T_07_201A
APPENDIX
484
Revision A
4. Developer section 1 (p495) Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the COIL ASSY CRUM READER Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR NO TNR (Y)
7.4 Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts

7.4.1 Configurations
MAIN UNIT The Overall Wiring Connection Diagram is divided into 11 sections as shown below to indicate the detailed connection between parts. 1. Power section (p489) Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the LVPS Connection between the LVPS and the FAN REAR Connection between the LVPS and the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET Connection between the LVPS and the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR NO TNR (M) Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR NO TNR (C) Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR NO TNR (K)
5.
Developer section 2 (p495) Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the DISPENSER ASSY (Y) (Toner Motor: Y) Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the DISPENSER ASSY (M) (Toner Motor: M) Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the DISPENSER ASSY (C) (Toner Motor: C) Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the DISPENSER ASSY (K) (Toner Motor: K)
2.
Cassette section (p491) Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SWITCH ASSY SIZE Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR NO PAPER Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR LOW PAPER Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SOLENOID FEED (Tray 1) 6.
Fuser section (p498) Connection between the LVPS and the PWBA MCU IDTN Connection between the LVPS and the FUSER ASSY
3.
Drive section (p493) Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the DRIVE ASSY MAIN Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the DRIVE ASSY DEVE Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the DRIVE ASSY FUSER Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the FAN FRONT 7.
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the FUSER ASSY Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR HUM
ROS section (p500) Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the ROS ASSY Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC
APPENDIX
Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts
485

8. Xerographics section 1 (p502) Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR TNR FULL Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the PWBA EEPROM Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the HOLDER ASSY CTD 1. 9. Xerographic section 2 (p503) Connection among the PWBA MCU IDTN, HVPS, PHD ASSY, and BTR ASSY 2. Drive section (p508)
Revision A
550-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT The Overall Wiring Connection Diagram is divided into two sections as shown below to indicate the detailed connection between parts.
Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 1T and the PWBA MCU IDTN Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 1T and the DRIVE ASSY
10. Paper feeder section (p505) Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR DUP JAM Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR FULL STACK Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR NO PAPER Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SOLENOID FEED MSI Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR REGI Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the CLUTCH REGI Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the CLUTCH TURN (MSI) Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR OHP
Cassette section (p509) Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 1T and the SWITCH ASSY SIZE Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 1T and the SENSOR NO PAPER Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 1T and the SENSOR LOW PAPER Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 1T and the SOLENOID FEED Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 1T and the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC
1100-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT The Overall Wiring Connection Diagram is divided into three sections as shown below to indicate the detailed connection between parts.
11. Controller section (p507) Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the PWB ESS Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the CONSOLE PANEL 1. Drive section (p511) Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the PWBA MCU IDTN Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the DRIVE ASSY 2ND
APPENDIX
486

2. Cassette 2 section (p512) Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the SWITCH ASSY SIZE Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the SENSOR NO PAPER Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the SENSOR LOW PAPER Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the SOLENOID FEED Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the CLUTCH ASSY
Revision A
3.
Cassette 3 section (p514) Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the SWITCH ASSY SIZE Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the SENSOR NO PAPER Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the SENSOR LOW PAPER Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the SOLENOID FEED Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T (Tray 2) and the PWBA OPTFDR 2T (Tray 3)
APPENDIX
487
Revision A
Table 7-6. List of the Marks
Mark Explanation Indicates the function and the logical value (Low: L, High: H) of the signal when the function is detected. The voltage is the value when the signal is High. An arrow indicates the direction of the signal. Indicates cable-to-cable connection.
7.4.2 Marks used in the Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts

The table below shows how to interpret the Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts given on the following pages.Commonly used marks and symbols are omitted here. Table 7-6. List of the Marks
Mark Indicates a plug. Explanation
EXIT PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC
Indicates a jack.
I/L +24VDC +5VDC +3.3VDC SG
Indicates the DC voltage when the PWBA MCU IDTN internal interlock switch is ON. Indicates DC voltage. Indicates a Signal Ground.
P/JXX
YY
Indicates a PinYY or JackYY of the connector PXX and JXX.
PWBA MCU IDTN
Indicates a part.
Heater
Indicates a functional component in a part, and its name.
Control
Indicates control inside of PWB, and a brief outline of the control.
DEVE_A
Indicates a connection between parts with a harness or wire, and its signal name/details. An arrow indicates the direction of the signal. Indicates the function and the logical value (Low: L, High: H) of the signal for enabling the function. The voltage is the value when the signal is High. An arrow indicates the direction of the signal.
REGI CLUTCH ON(L)+24VDC
APPENDIX
488
Revision A
MAIN UNIT 1. Power section
LVPS v
PWBA MCU IDTN Interlock +24VDC
HARNESS ASSY 24V P/J163 +24V 1 2 3 4 I/L_+24VDC SG I/L_+24VDC SG P/J60 1 2 3 4
Name of Signal Line 24 OSC OFF HEAT1 xHEAT1 HEAT2 xHEAT2 HEAT EN IL OPEN SLEEP xREAR FAN STOP xREAR FAN LOW ALM FAN REAR xFRONT FAN STOP LV TYPE ALM FAN FRONT
Remarks +24 VDC output control signal (High: stops output) Main Lamp control signal in the FUSER ASSY (Lamp lights at High: HEAT1, Low: xHEAT1 )
P/J161 1 +5V
HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK +5VDC
Main Lamp control signal in the FUSER ASSY (Lamp lights at High: HEAT1, Low: xHEAT1 ) AC power control signals for both the Main and the Sub Lamp in the FUSER ASSY (High: AC power output) INTERLOCK SWITCH open/close signal (High: Switch Open) Sleep Mode control signal (stops output of High: +24 VDC, +5 VDC, and +3 VDC) FAN REAR control signal (High: Fan rotates) FAN REAR control signal (High: Fan rotates at high speed, Low: Fan rotates at low speed) FAN REAR alarm signal (High: Fan Fail)
+3.3V_M +3.3V_C FAN CONTROL
P/J161 3
I/L_+5VDC
P/J166 1 2 3 P/J164 1 2 3 4 5
24V_FAN_REAR ALM_FAN_REAR SG HARNESS ASSY LV RPG 3.3V_ESS 3.3V_ESS 5V_ESS GND_ESS GND_ESS FAN REAR +5VDC +3VDC P/J311 1 2 3 4 5 P/J61 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 +3.3VDC
FAN FRONT control signal (High: Fan rotates) LVPS identifying signal FAN REAR alarm signal (High: Fan Fail)
HARNESS ASSY LV P/J165 24V_OSC_OFF 1 5V 2 SG 3 3.3V 4 SG 5 HEAT1 6 xHEAT1 7 HEAT2 8 xHEAT2 9 HEAT_EN 10 IL_OPEN 11 SLEEP 12 xREAR_FAN_STOP 13 xREAR_FAN_LOW 14 ALM_FAN_REAR 15 xFRONT_FAN_STOP 16 LV_TYPE 17 ALM_FAN_FRONT 18
+5VDC
z Heater Control
AC SW
P/J160 1 3
P/J162
Ida_Sec007_002FB
Table 7-7. Power Section Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
489
Revision A
LVPS Overcurrent Protection 24 VDC, 5 VDC, and 3.3 VDC, which are the power voltage, stop all the outputs when short-circuiting ocurred. Each output is restored by eliminating the cause of the short-circuit, and turning the printer OFF and then back ON at specified time interval. However, 5 VDC excluding the one for the controller board and the control panel cannot be restored because of the fuse meltdown. LVPS Overvoltage Protection 24 VDC, 5 VDC, and 3.3 VDC, which are the power voltage, stop all the outputs when overvoltage ocurred. This overcurrent protection an be activated when 24 VDC, 5 VDC, and 3.3 VDC are less than 32 VDC, 7 VDC, and 4.4 VDC respectively. Each output is restored by turning the printer OFF and then back ON at specified time interval. FAN Output Circuit Output voltage of the FAN REAR ON (H) signal varies according to the conditions of the FAN LOW signal and the FAN STOP signal.
FAN LOW High
161
FAN STOP High High Low Low
FAN REAR ON(H) 24V 15V 0V 0V
Low High Low
311
61
166 163 165 164 162 60 160 Ida_07_013B
Output Outage by the I/L Switch +24 DVC output from the LVPS stops by turning off the I/L Switch that is connected to the LVPS.
APPENDIX
490

2. Cassette section
PWBA MCU IDTN
Revision A
Name of Signal Line CST1 SIZE0 SWITCH ON(L)+3.3VDC CST1 SIZE1 SWITCH ON(L)+3.3VDC CST1 SIZE2 SWITCH ON(L)+3.3VDC CST1 NO PAPER SENSED(H)+3.3VDC CST1 LOW PAPER SENSED(H)+3.3VDC CST1 FEED SOL ON(L)+24VDC CST1 TURN CL ON(L)+24VDC
Remarks
P/J47
HARNESS ASSY FDR 1 2 4 3 +3.3VDC CST1 SIZE0 SWITCH ON(L)+3.3VDC CST1 SIZE1 SWITCH ON(L)+3.3VDC CST1 SIZE2 SWITCH ON(L)+3.3VDC SG P/J471 4 3 1 2
SWITCH ASSY SIZE
ON/OFF detection signal for the upper switch on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE ON/OFF detection signal for the middle switch on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE ON/OFF detection signal for the lower switch on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE Detection signal for paper in the cassette by the SENSOR NO PAPER (High: no paper) Detection signal for the remaining amount of paper in the cassette by the SENSOR LOW PAPER (High: the remaining amount is low) Solenoid Feed ON/OFF control signal CLUTCH ASSY TURN ON/OFF control signal
+3.3VDC
P/J47 5 6 7
PULL UP +3.3VDC SG CST1 NO PAPER SENSED(H)+3.3VDC
P/J472 3 2 1 SENSOR NO PAPER
P/J47 8 9 10 Interlock +24VDC P/J47 11 12
PULL UP +3.3VDC SG CST1 LOW PAPER SENSED(H)+3.3VDC
P/J473 3 2 1 SENSOR LOW PAPER
I/L +24VDC CST1 FEED SOL ON(L)+24VDC
P474 2 1 1 2
J474
SOLENOID FEED (Tray1)
Ida_Sec007_003FB
Table 7-8. Cassette Section Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
491
Revision A
SWITCH ASSY SIZE Overview The combination of the upper, middle, and lower switch ON/OFF conditions of the SWITCH ASSY SIZE determines the paper size.
Paper Size
47
Switch Upper ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Middle ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF Lower ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF
LEGAL14"(SEF) LEGAL13"(SEF) EXECUTIVE(SEF) B5(SEF) A4(SEF) LETTER(SEF) A5 No cassette
474 471 472 473 Ida_07_014B
APPENDIX
492

3. Drive section
PWBA MCU IDTN
Revision A
Name of Signal Line xMAIN MOT START ALARM MOT MAIN CLK MAIN MOT MAIN H/L ALM FAN FRONT xDEVE MOT START ALARM MOT DEVE CLK DEVE MOT DEVE H/L xDEVE CW xFSR MOT START ALARM MOT FSR CLK FSR MOT FSR H/L
Remarks MAIN MOTOR control signal (High: MOTOR stops) MAIN MOTOR control signal (High: MOTOR error) MAIN MOTOR control signal MAIN MOTOR control signal (High: rotates at high speed, Low: rotates at low speed)
+5VDC
Interlock +24VDC
HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP P/J13 P501 I/L +24VDC 1 I/L +24VDC 2 DUP_A 3 DUP_B 4 DUP_XA 5 DUP_XB 6
MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM J501 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 M
Interlock +24VDC P/J48 A1 A2 A6 A3 A4 A5 A7 A8 A9 Interlock +24VDC A10
HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT I/L +24VDC I/L +24VDC +5VDC SG SG SG xMAIN_MOT_START ALARM_MOT_MAIN CLK_MAIN_MOT MAIN_H/L P/J481 10 9 5 8 7 6 4 3 2 1
DRIVE ASSY MAIN
FAN FRONT control signal (High: Fan Fail) DEVE MOTOR control signal (High: MOTOR stops) DEVE MOTOR control signal (High: MOTOR error) DEVE MOTOR control signal DEVE MOTOR control signal (High: rotates at high speed, Low: rotates at low speed) DEVE MOTOR control signal (High: CCW rotates) FUSER MOTOR control signal (High: MOTOR stops) FUSER MOTOR control signal (High: MOTOR error) FUSER MOTOR control signal FUSER MOTOR control signal (High: rotates at high speed, Low: rotates at low speed)
Interlock +24VDC +5VDC
P/J48 A11 A12 A13
24V_FAN_FRONT ALM_FAN_FRONT SG
P482 3 2 1 1 2 3
J482
FAN FRONT DRIVE ASSY DEVE P/J48 B34 B33 B29 B32 B31 B30 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24 Interlock +24VDC +5VDC P/J52 1 2 6 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR I/L +24VDC I/L +24VDC +5VDC SG SG SG xFSR_MOT_START ALARM_MOT_FSR CLK_FSR_MOT FSR_H/L P/J521 10 9 5 8 7 6 4 3 2 1
Ida_Sec007_004FB
I/L +24VDC I/L +24VDC +5VDC SG SG SG xDEVE_MOT_START ALARM_MOT_DEVE CLK_DEVE_MOT DEVE_H/L xDEVE_CW
P/J491 1 2 6 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 M
DRIVE ASSY FUSER
Figure 7-13. Drive Section Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
493

MOTOR ASSY DUP Overview Motor type: Hybrid stepping motor Step angle: 1.8 Coil resistance: 3.3 10%/phase (25 degree C) Excitation sequence: (*: excitation)
501
Revision A
Phase DUP_A
491
Step (2 phases) 1 2 3 * * * * * * * 4 * 5 * * 6 * 7 * 8
DUP_XA DUP_B DUP_XB
482 521 481
13
48
52
Ida_07_015B
APPENDIX
494

4. Developer section 1
PWBA MCU IDTN
Revision A
Name of Signal Line NOTNR(Y)(H)+3.3VDC NOTNR(M)(H)+3.3VDC NOTNR(C)(H)+3.3VDC NOTNR(K)(H)+3.3VDC TCRU_Y SENSED(L)+3.3VDC TCRU_M SENSED(L)+3.3VDC TCRU_C SENSED(L)+3.3VDC TCRU_K SENSED(L)+3.3VDC ANT_OUT ANT_IN
Remarks SENSOR NO TNR (Y) remaining toner detection signal (High: no toner, Low: toner present) SENSOR NO TNR (M) remaining toner detection signal (High: no toner, Low: toner present) SENSOR NO TNR (C) remaining toner detection signal (High: no toner, Low: toner present) SENSOR NO TNR (K) remaining toner detection signal (High: no toner, Low: toner present) TCRU ASSY (Y) (Toner Bottle) presence detection signal (Low: toner bottle present) TCRU ASSY (M) (Toner Bottle) presence detection signal (Low: toner bottle present) TCRU ASSY (C) (Toner Bottle) presence detection signal (Low: toner bottle present) TCRU ASSY (K) (Toner Bottle) presence detection signal (Low: toner bottle present) Communication signal between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the COIL ASSY CRUM READER (PWBA MCU IDTN output) Communication signal between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the COIL ASSY CRUM READER (COIL ASSY CRUM READER output)
P/J51 A14 A15 A16 A17 A13 P/J342 4 3 2 1 5 HARNESS ASSY RFID2 P3411 1 2 2 1 J3411 P/J341 1 2 C K M ANTENNA Y +5VDC P/J51 A12 A11 A10 +5VDC NOTNR_K(H)+3.3VDC SG P/J704 1 2 3 SENSOR NO TNR (K) +5VDC P/J51 A3 A2 A1 +5VDC NOTNR_C(H)+3.3VDC SG P/J703 1 2 3 SENSOR NO TNR (C) +5VDC P/J51 A6 A5 A4 +5VDC NOTNR_M(H)+3.3VDC SG P/J702 1 2 3 SENSOR NO TNR (M) +5VDC P/J51 A9 A8 A7 HARNESS ASSY TNR +5VDC NOTNR_Y(H)+3.3VDC SG P/J701 1 2 3 SENSOR NO TNR (Y)
COIL ASSY CRUM READER TCRU_Y (L)+3.3VDC TCRU_M(L)+3.3VDC TCRU_C(L)+3.3VDC TCRU_K(L)+3.3VDC SG
HARNESS ASSY RFID P/J34 2 1 ANT_OUT ANT_IN
Ida_07_005A
Figure 7-14. Developer Section 1 Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
495
Revision A
34 11 341 342
701
702
703
704
34 51
Ida_07_016B
APPENDIX
496

5. Developer section 2
PWBA MCU IDTN DISPENSER ASSY (Y)
Revision A
Interlock +24VDC P/J51 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25
HARNESS ASSY TNR I/L +24VDC TMOT_Y_A TMOT_Y_B TMOT_Y_XA TMOT_Y_XB P511 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 J511
Toner Motor(Y)
514
M
513 512 511
DISPENSER ASSY (M) Interlock +24VDC P/J51 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 I/L +24VDC TMOT_M_A TMOT_M_B TMOT_M_XA TMOT_M_XB P512 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 M J512
Toner Motor(M)
51
DISPENSER ASSY (C) Interlock +24VDC P/J51 B31 B32 B33 B34 B35 I/L +24VDC TMOT_C_A TMOT_C_B TMOT_C_XA TMOT_C_XB P513 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 M J513
Toner Motor(C)
Ida_07_017B
Toner Motor Overview Motor type: PM stepping motor Step angle: 7.5 0.5 Coil resistance: 80 10%/phase (20 degree C)
DISPENSER ASSY (K)
Excitation sequence: (*: excitation)

Phase Step (2 phases) 1 * * * * * * * 2 3 4 * * * * 5 * * * 6 7 8 * *
Interlock +24VDC P/J51 B36 B37 B38 B39 B40 I/L +24VDC TMOT_K_A TMOT_K_B TMOT_K_XA TMOT_K_XB P514 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 J514
Toner Motor(K)
A B
Ida_Sec007_006FB
XA XB
Figure 7-15. Developer Section 2 Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
497

6. Fuser section
PWBA MCU IDTN
Revision A
Name of Signal Line RHV TH2 EXIT PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC EEPROM DATA EEPROM CLOCK NSC VD NSC VC FUSER STS HEAT1 xHEAT1 HEAT2 xHEAT2
Remarks Humidity data inside the printer (analog value) Temperature data inside the printer (analog value) Paper detection signal by the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY(Low: paper present)
+3.3VDC +5VDC HARNESS ASSY TMP P/J24 4 3 2 1 +5VDC RHV SG TH2 J231 1 2 3 4 SENSOR HUM
EEPROM control signal EEPROM control signal Temperature data of the temperature control sensor (analog value) Temperature data of the temperature control sensor (analog value) Temperature data of the high temperature detection sensor (analog value) Control signal for the Main Lamp in the FUSER ASSY (Lamp lights at High: HEAT1, Low: xHEAT1 ) Control signal for the Sub Lamp in the FUSER ASSY (Lamp lights at High: HEAT1, Low: xHEAT1 )
+3.3VDC P/J36 6 7 8
FUSER ASSY HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC PULL UP +3.3VDC SG EXIT PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC J361 A7 A6 A5 A1 A2 A3 P361 P323 3 1 2 2 1 3 J323 P/J327 3 2 1 Exit Sensor P/J36 9 10 11 12 EEPROM DATA EEPROM CLOCK +3.3VDC SG J361 A4 A3 A2 A1 A4 A5 A6 A7 P361 P/J144 4 3 2 1 Fuser EEPROM
P/J36 15 14 13 P/J36 16 17 P/J61 12 13 10 11 HEAT2 xHEAT2 xHEAT1 HEAT1
NCS_VD NCS_VC SG
J361 B4 B5 B6 J361 B3 B2 B4 B5 B3 B2 B1
P361 P331 1 3 2 2 3 1 P361 P321 2 1 1 2
J331
Fuser NCS
FUSER_STS SG
J321 STS
HARNESS ASSY LV
HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC LVPS P/J165 9 8 7 6 2 1 AC L(230V) AC L(120V) 3 2 Heater Control P/J162 6 4 AC N SUB AC N MAIN P/J361 4 1 P3611 P3612 1 P3613 1 1
Heater
Thermostat
P/J160 1 HARNESS ASSY AC INLET
Ida_Sec007_007FB
Figure 7-16. Fuser Section Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
498

Rated voltage of the Heater Main: 550 27.5 W (120 VAC/230 VAC) Sub: 330 15.0 W (120 VAC/230 VAC)
165
Revision A
Temperature for the Thermostat to disconnect the contact point: 180 5 degree C
162 160
231
24 361 61 36
Ida_07_018B
APPENDIX
499

7. ROS section
PWBA MCU IDTN ROS ASSY QBLD PWB P/J151 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 P/J153 1 2 3 P/J152 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Revision A
Name of Signal Line XPDATA_A_Y XPDATA_B_M XPDATA_C_C XPDATA_D_K MO_A_Y MO_B_M MO_C_C MO_D_K VL1_A_Y VL1_B_M VL1_C_C VL1_D_K LD_+5VDC SOS SENSED(L) +3.3VDC SCANNER MOTOR ON(L)+5VDC CRUM DATA CRUM CLOCK
Remarks Pixel data singal to make the Quad Beam Laser Diode, which is provided for each of the four colors, in the ROS ASSY emit light
P/J15 20 19 18 17 16
HARNESS ASSY ROS XPDATA_A_Y XPDATA_B_M XPDATA_C_C XPDATA_D_K MO_A_Y MO_B_M MO_C_C MO_D_K VL1_A_Y VL1_B_M VL1_C_C VL1_D_K SG LD_+5V SCANNER MOTOR CLOCK SOS SENSED(L) +3.3VDC I/L +24VDC SG SCANNER MOTOR ON(L)+5VDC SG
Scanner Motor
LD light intensity adjutment control signal for each color
15 14 13 12 11
LD light intensity adjustment voltage for each color

Interlock +24VDC
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SOS PWB 1 2 3
The line to supply +5 VDC to the ROS ASSY from the PWBA MCU IDTN by way of the PHD ASSY Scanning start reference signal generated according to the laser beam that enters the SOS Sensor in the SOS PWB Scanner Motor ON/OFF control signal in the ROS ASSY
CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC write/read data CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC clock frequency

+3.3VDC +5VDC
P/J48 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23
LD_+5V CRUM DATA CRUM CLOCK +3.3VDC SG +5VDC
P484 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
J484
P/J710 6 5 4 3 2 1 CONN_ASSY_ CRUM_MC
HARNESS ASSY PHD2

Ida_Sec007_008FB
Figure 7-17. ROS Section Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
500
Revision A
484 151 710
15
48 Ida_07_019B
APPENDIX
501

8. Xerographic section 1
Name of Signal Line Remarks
Revision A
BTR_TONER_FULL(L)+3 Waste toner bottle full detection signal by the SENSOR TNR .3VDC FULL ADC_VOUT ADC_MON GLED CLOCK DATA Measured data by the ADC Sensor in the HOLDER ASSY CTD (analog value) Monitor output signal by the ADC Sensor in the HOLDER ASSY CTD LED control signal in the HOLDER ASSY CTD (analog value) PWBA EEPROM clock frequency PWBA EEPROM write/read data
144
PWBA MCU IDTN
+5VDC P/J36 1 2 3 4 5
HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC +5VDC ADC_VOUT GLED ADC_VMON SG P/J136 5 4 3 2 1 HOLDER ASSY CTD
136 142 36
+5VDC P/J52 13 12 11
HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR +5VDC BTR_TONER_FULL(L)+3.3VDC SG P/J142 1 2 3 SENSOR TNR FULL
191
52 Ida_07_020B
+3.3VDC P/J191 3 4 2 1
HARNESS ASSY EEPROM +3.3VDC SG CLOCK DATA P/J144 2 1 3 4 PWBA EEPROM
Ida_07_009A
Figure 7-18. Xerographic Section 1 Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
502

9. Xerographic section 2
PWBA MCU IDTN HVPS
Revision A
Name of Signal Line CLOCK DATA HV_MON_BTR_V IDT2 IDT2 CLEANER IDT1 IDT1 CLEANER RFB HTC DEVE Y DEVE M DEVE C DEVE K BTR REG ROLL
Remarks Control signal for taking in the data sent from the PWBA MCU IDTN into the HVPS Control signal for adjusting output value and output timing of the HVPS Voltage monitor signal for the BTR output (analog value) Output for second transfer from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to the IDT2 Output from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to the IDT2 Cleaner Output for primary transfer from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to the IDT1 Output from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to the IDT1 Cleaner Output from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to the Refresher Output for charging from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to the HTC Output from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to the Developer Y (Magnet Roll) Output from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to the Developer M (Magnet Roll) Output from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to the Developer C (Magnet Roll) Output from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to the Developer K (Magnet Roll) Output for third transfer from the HVPS to the BTR in the BTR ASSY Output for third transfer from the HVPS to the Regi Roll in the CHUTE ASSY REGI
PHD ASSY IDT1 IDT1 BTR ASSY Interlock +24VDC P/J16 +5VDC +3.3VDC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RG HARNESS ASSY HVPS I/L +24VDC SG +5V SG +3.3V CLOCK DATA HV_MON_BTR_V P/J141 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 TR ID2 CL2 ID1 CL1 RF CF DA DB DC DD
DEVE K DEVE C DEVE M DEVE Y HTC RFB IDT1 CLEANER IDT1 IDT2 CLEANER IDT2 BTR REG ROLL
IDT2
BTR
CHUTE ASSY REGI
Ida_07_010A
Figure 7-19. Xerographic Section 2 Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
503
Revision A
141
16
Ida_07_021B
APPENDIX
504

10. Paper Feeder Section
PWBA MCU IDTN
Revision A
Name of Signal Line DUP JAM SENSED(H)+3.3VDC FULL STACK SENSED(L)+3.3VDC MSI NO PAPER SENSED(H)+3.3VDC MSI FEED SOL ON(L)+24VDC REGI PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC REGI CLUTCH ON(L)+24VDC MSI TURN CLUTCH ON(L)+24VDC
Remarks Paper detection signal of the duplex section by the SENSOR DUP JAM (High: paper present) Full stack detection signal of the paper eject section by the SENSOR FULL STACK (Low: paper full) Detection signal for paper in the manual cassette by the SENSOR NO PAPER (High: no paper) SOLENOID FEED MSI ON/OFF control signal Paper detection signal of the registration section by the SENSOR REGI Regi Clutch ON/OFF control signal in the CHUTE REGI ASSY CLUTCH TURN (MSI) ON/OFF control signal
Interlock +24VDC P/J13 16 17 I/L +24VDC MSI FEED SOL ON(L)+24VDC P132 2 1 1 2 J132 SOLENOID FEED MSI +3.3VDC P/J13 13 14 15 P/J135 3 2 1 SENSOR NO PAPER +3.3VDC P/J13 10 11 12 P/J134 3 2 1 SENSOR FULL STACK +3.3VDC HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP P/J13 7 8 9 PULL UP +3.3VDC SG DUP JAM SENSED(H)+3.3VDC P/J133 3 2 1 SENSOR DUP JAM
PULL UP +3.3VDC SG FULL STACK SENSED(L)+3.3VDC
PULL UP +3.3VDC SG MSI NO PAPER SENSED(H)+3.3VDC
+3.3VDC HARNESS ASSY REGISNS P/J18 1 2 3 PULL UP +3.3VDC SG REGI PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC P/J181 3 2 1 SENSOR REGI
HARNESS ASSY OHP MCU P/J20 1 2 3 4 Interlock +24VDC P/J19 1 Interlock +24VDC 2 PWM SG S2 S1 P200 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 J200
HARNESS ASSY SENSOR OHP P/J201 4 3 2 1 SENSOR OHP
HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH I/L +24VDC MSI TURN CLUTCH ON(L)+24VDC P191 2 1 1 2 J191 CLUTCH TURN (MSI)
P/J19 3 4 5
I/L +24VDC REGI CLUTCH ON(L)+24VDC
P192 3 2 1 1 2 3
J192 CLUTCH REGI
NC
Ida_07_011C
Figure 7-20. Paper Feeder Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
505
Revision A
134 20
18
19 13
133 201 200 181 135 191
132 192 Ida_07_022B
APPENDIX
506

11. Controller Section
PWBA MCU IDTN PWB CONTROLLER (PWB ESS)
Revision A
P/J14 1
60
CONSOLE PANEL
P/J22 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE2
P/J220 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Ida_Sec007_012FB
Figure 7-21. Controller Section Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
507
Revision A
550-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT 1. Drive section

Name of Signal Line TXD RXD Remarks Communication signal between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the PWBA OPTFDR 1T
17
171
PWBA MCU IDTN PWBA OPTFDR 1T
Interlock +24VDC 10 9 +3.3VDC 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG P/J17 I/L+24VDC SG I/L+24VDC SG SG +3.3VDC SG TRY_SNS TXD RXD P171 1 10 2 9 3 8 4 7 5 6 6 5 7 4 8 3 9 2 10 1 J171 P/J83 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Interlock +24VDC P/J82 1 2 +3.3VDC 3 4 5 I/L +24VDC FDR_A FDR_B FDR_XA FDR_XB DRIVE ASSY
83
82 Ida_1T_07_104B
DRIVE ASSY Overview Motor type: Hybrid stepping motor

Ida_Sec007_102FB
HARNESS ASSY OPFREC
Step angle: 1.8 0.09 Coil resistance: 1.8 10%/phase (25 degree C) Excitation sequence: (*: excitation)
Phase FDR_A FDR_B FDR_XA FDR_XB Step (2 phases) 1 * * * * * * * 2 3 4 *
Figure 7-22. Drive Section Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
508

2. Cassette section
PWBA OPTFDR 1T
Revision A
Name of Signal Line OPTION TRAY2 SIZE0 ON(L)+3.3VDC OPTION TRAY2 SIZE1 ON(L)+3.3VDC OPTION TRAY2 SIZE2 ON(L)+3.3VDC OPTION TRAY2 NO PAPER ON(H)+3.3VDC OPTION TRAY2 LOW PAPER ON(H)+3.3VDC OPTION TRAY2 FEED ON(L)+24VDC OPTION TRAY2 TURN ON(L)+24VDC
Remarks
P/J80
HARNESS ASSY SIZE 1 2 4 3 5 NC OPTION TRAY2 SIZE0 ON(L) +3.3VDC OPTION TRAY2 SIZE1 ON(L) +3.3VDC OPTION TRAY2 SIZE2 ON(L) +3.3VDC SG P/J821 4 3 1 2
SWITCH ASSY SIZE
ON/OFF detection signal for the upper switch on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE ON/OFF detection signal for the middle switch on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE ON/OFF detection signal for the lower switch on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE Detection signal for the remaining amount of paper in the cassette by the SENSOR NO PAPER (High: no paper) Detection signal for the remaining amount of paper in the cassette by the SENSOR LOW PAPER (High: the remaining amount is low) Solenoid Feed ON/OFF control signal CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC ON/OFF control signal
Interlock +24VDC +3.3VDC
HARNESS ASSY LOWP P/J81 1 2 3 PULL UP +3.3VDC SG OPTION TRAY2 LOW PAPER ON(H) +3.3VDC P/J823 3 2 1 SENSOR LOW PAPER Interlock +24VDC HARNESS ASSY OPFDR P/J85 1 2 I/L +24VDC OPTION TRAY2_TURN ON(L) +24VDC P825 2 1 1 2 CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC J825
P/J85 3 4
I/L +24VDC OPTION TRAY2 FEED ON(L) +24VDC
P824 2 1 1 2
J824
SOLENOID FEED +3.3VDC P/J85 5 6 7 P/J822 3 2 1 SENSOR NO PAPER P/J172 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 To 2 Tray Option Feeder Unit
PULL UP +3.3VDC SG OPTION TRAY2 NO PAPER ON(H) +3.3VDC HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2
P/J84 1 +3.3VDC 2 3 4 5 Interlock +24VDC 6 7 8 9 10 11
RXD TXD TRY_SNS_2 SG +3.3VDC SG SG I/L +24VDC SG I/L +24VDC NC
Ida_1T_07_103B
Figure 7-23. Cassette Section Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
509
Revision A
SWITCH ASSY SIZE Overview The combination of the upper, middle , and lower switch ON/OFF conditions of the SWITCH ASSY SIZE determines the paper size.
Paper Size Switch Upper ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Middle ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF Lower ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF
81 84
80 822 85
LEGAL14"(SEF) LEGAL13"(SEF) EXECUTIVE(SEF) B5(SEF) A4(SEF) LETTER(SEF) A5 No cassette
821 824 825 823 172

Ida_1T_07_105B
APPENDIX
510
Revision A
1100-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT 1. Drive section

Name of Signal Line TXD RXD
PWBA MCU IDTN
Remarks Communication signal between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the PWBA OPTFDR 1T
PWBA OPTFDR 2T
17
171 172
Interlock +24VDC
HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG P/J17 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 I/L+24VDC SG I/L+24VDC SG SG +3.3VDC SG TRY_SNS TXD RXD P171 1 10 2 9 3 8 4 7 5 6 6 5 7 4 8 3 9 2 10 1 J172 P/J83 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Interlock +24VDC P/J82 1 2 +3.3VDC 3 4 5 I/L +24VDC FDR_A FDR_B FDR_XA FDR_XB DRIVE ASSY 2ND
172
+3.3VDC
83
82 Ida_2T_07_205B
P172 1 10 2 9 3 8 4 7 From Single Feeder Unit 5 6 6 5 7 4 8 3 9 2 10 1
J172
P/J83 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DRIVE ASSY 2ND Overview Motor type: Hybrid stepping motor Step angle: 1.8 0.09 Coil resistance: 1.8 10%phase (25 degree C)
Ida_Sec007_202FB
Excitation sequence: (*: excitation) Figure 7-24. Drive Section Connection and Wiring Diagram
Phase FDR_A FDR_B FDR_XA FDR_XB Step (2 phases) 1 * * * * * * * 2 3 4 *
APPENDIX
511

2. Cassette 2 section
PWBA OPTFDR 2T
Revision A
Remarks
P/J80
HARNESS ASSY SIZE2 1 2 4 3 5 NC OPTION TRAY2 SIZE0 ON(L) +3.3VDC OPTION TRAY2 SIZE1 ON(L) +3.3VDC OPTION TRAY2 SIZE2 ON(L) +3.3VDC SG P/J821 4 3 1 2
SWITCH ASSY SIZE
ON/OFF detection signal for the upper switch on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE ON/OFF detection signal for the middle switch on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE ON/OFF detection signal for the lower switch on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE Detection signal for the remaining amount of paper in the cassette by the SENSOR NO PAPER (High: no paper) Detection signal for the remaining amount of paper in the cassette by the SENSOR LOW PAPER (High: the remaining amount is low) Solenoid Feed ON/OFF control signal CLUTCH ASSY TURN ON/OFF control signal
Interlock +24VDC +3.3VDC
HARNESS ASSY LOWP2 P/J81 1 2 3 PULL UP +3.3VDC SG OPTION TRAY2 LOW PAPER ON(H) +3.3VDC P/J823 3 2 1 SENSOR LOW PAPER Interlock +24VDC HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2 P/J85 1 2 I/L +24VDC OPTION TRAY2_TURN ON(L) +24VDC P825 2 1 1 2 CLUTCH ASSY J825
P/J85 3 4
P824 2 1 1 2
J824
+3.3VDC P/J85 5 6 7
SOLENOID FEED
PULL UP +3.3VDC SG OPTION TRAY2 NO PAPER ON(H) +3.3VDC HARNESS ASSY OPF23
P/J822 3 2 1 SENSOR NO PAPER
P/J84 1 +3.3VDC 2 3 4 5 Interlock +24VDC 6 7 8 9 10 11
P/J83 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RXD TXD TRY_SNS_2 SG +3.3VDC SG SG I/L +24VDC SG I/L +24VDC NC
Ida_Sec007_203FB
Figure 7-25. Cassette 2 Section
APPENDIX
512
Revision A
85
81 84
822 823 825
80
Paper Size LEGAL14"(SEF) LEGAL13"(SEF) EXECUTIVE(SEF) B5(SEF) A4(SEF) LETTER(SEF) A5 No cassette
Switch Upper ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Middle ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF Lower ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF
821 824
83
Ida_2T_07_206B
APPENDIX
513

3. Cassette 3 section
PWBA OPTFDR 2T
Revision A
HARNESS ASSY OPF23 P/J84 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 NC P/J83 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PWBA OPTFDR 2T P/J80 1 2 4 3 5
Remarks ON/OFF detection signal for the upper switch on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE ON/OFF detection signal for the middle switch on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE ON/OFF detection signal for the lower switch on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE Detection signal for the remaining amount of paper in the cassette by the SENSOR NO PAPER (High: no paper) Detection signal for the remaining amount of paper in the cassette by the SENSOR LOW PAPER (High: the remaining amount is low) Solenoid Feed ON/OFF control signal CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC ON/OFF control signal
HARNESS ASSY SIZE2 OPTION TRAY3 SIZE0 ON(L) +3.3VDC OPTION TRAY3 SIZE1 ON(L) +3.3VDC OPTION TRAY3 SIZE2 ON(L) +3.3VDC SG NC P/J821 4 3 1 2
SWITCH ASSY SIZE
+3.3VDC P/J81 1 2 3 HARNESS ASSY LOWP2 PULL UP +3.3VDC SG OPTION TRAY3 LOW PAPER ON(H) +3.3VDC P/J823 3 2 1 SENSOR LOW PAPER Interlock +24VDC P/J85 1 2 Interlock +24VDC P/J85 3 4 P824 2 1 1 2 SOLENOID FEED +3.3VDC P/J85 5 6 7 P/J822 3 2 1 SENSOR NO PAPER HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2 I/L +24VDC OPTION TRAY3_TURN ON(L) +24VDC P825 2 1 1 2 CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC J825
J824
PULL UP +3.3VDC SG OPTION TRAY3 NO PAPER ON(H) +3.3VDC
Ida_2T_07_204A
Figure 7-26. Cassette 3 Section
APPENDIX
514
Revision A
Paper Size LEGAL14"(SEF) LEGAL13"(SEF) EXECUTIVE(SEF) B5(SEF) A4(SEF) LETTER(SEF) A5 No cassette Switch Upper ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Middle ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF Lower ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF
84
81 83 823 825 822 824 821
80 85 Ida_2T_07_207B
APPENDIX
515
Revision A
Table 7-9. Main Unit
Ref No. Part Name CHUTE TURN CST ROLL ASSY RETARD HOLDER RETARD SPRING RETARD SCREW M3X110 STOPPER CST FOOT SWITCH ASSY SIZE HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG CHUTE ASSY FEEDER COVER CST KIT FEEDER L KIT FEEDER R PICK UP ASSY ROLL ASSY TURN EXIT SENSOR SOLENOID FEED ACTUATOR LOW PAPER ROLL ASSY FEED ACTUATOR NO PAPER HARNESS ASSY FDR ACTUATOR REGI SENSOR UPPER PASS SENSOR OHP HOLDER ASSY RETARD CHUTE ASSY REGI IN CHUTE ASSY REGI ROLL REGI RUBBER CLUTCH REGI CLUTCH TURN 02-01-11 02-01-13 02-01-16
7.5 Service Parts List

Parts list for EPSON AcuLaser C4200 MAIN UNIT Table 7-9. Main Unit
Ref No. 01-01-01 01-01-02 01-01-03 01-01-04 01-01-05 01-01-06 01-01-08 01-01-12 01-01-14 01-01-15 01-01-18 01-01-19 01-01-20 01-01-22 01-01-23 01-01-25 01-01-26 01-01-28 01-01-30 02-01-01 02-01-04 02-01-05 02-01-07 02-01-08 02-01-10 COVER ASSY TOP COVER TOP COVER TOP STOPPER COVER TOP MAIN CONTROL PANEL COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD COVER ASSY TOP PHD LATCH TOP L LATCH TOP IR R LATCH TOP R COVER REAR FAN REAR COVER SIDE R ASSY COVER FRONT R TRAY ASSY MSI BASE COVER ASSY MSI TRAY MSI SLIDE COVER FRONT L ASSY COVER SIDE L ASSY CASSETTE ASSY 500 SPRING N/F GUIDE SIDE L GUIDE SIDE R GUIDE END ACTUATOR SIZE Part Name
02-01-17 03-01-10 03-02-03 03-02-04 03-02-05 03-02-11 03-02-12 03-02-13 03-02-80 03-02-81 03-03-01 03-03-02 03-03-07 03-03-11 03-03-14 03-03-18 03-03-20 03-03-22 04-01-01 04-01-03 04-01-08 04-01-13 04-01-20 04-02-01 04-02-04 04-02-07 04-02-09
APPENDIX
Service Parts List
516

Ref No. 04-02-10 05-01-05 05-02-01 05-02-11 05-02-19 05-02-20 05-02-25 05-02-26 05-02-27 05-02-28 05-02-30 05-02-80 05-02-81 05-03-01 05-03-09 05-03-14 05-03-15 05-03-20 05-03-27 05-03-28 05-03-29 05-03-31 05-03-38 05-04-01 05-04-02 05-04-05 05-04-13 05-04-15 05-04-16 05-04-80 ROLL TURN MSI STRAP CHUTE ASSY DUP IN LATCH L HOLDER ASSY CTD SENSOR TNR FULL DRIVE ASSY FUSER WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH LATCH R HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR KIT ROLL PINCH DUP KIT ROLL PINCH TURN CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT SOLENOID FEED MSI SENSOR UPPER PASS ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI ROLL ASSY FEED HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE SE HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH FAN FRONT PLATE EARTH OUT3 SENSOR UPPER PASS ACTUATOR FULL STACK MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM ACTUATOR DUP ROLL DUP ROLL EXIT KIT ROLL PINCH EXIT Part Name Ref No. 06-01-02 06-01-07 07-01-17 07-01-18 07-01-19 07-01-20 07-02-01 07-02-02 07-02-03 07-02-04 07-02-05 07-02-12 07-02-16 07-02-17 07-02-18 08-01-01 08-01-02 09-01-06 09-01-07 09-01-12 09-01-13 09-01-16 09-01-20 09-01-21 09-02-02 09-02-03 09-02-04 09-02-05 09-02-23 09-02-24 ROS ASSY HSG ASSY BIAS DEVE ASSY(Y) DEVE ASSY(M) DEVE ASSY(C) DEVE ASSY(K) DISPENSER ASSY(Y) DISPENSER ASSY(M) DISPENSER ASSY(C) DISPENSER ASSY(K) SENSOR NO TNR BOX ASSY CRUM READER HARNESS ASSY FDID2 HARNESS ASSY FDID HARNESS ASSY TMR DRIVE ASSY DEVE DRIVE ASSY MAIN LVPS 230V HARNESS ASSY AC INLET PWBA EEPROM CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS PWBA MCU IDTN SENSOR HUM HVPS "BOARD ASSY., MAIN" "BOARD ASSY.,MEMORY" PANEL ESS L PANEL ESS R GUIDE RAIL NETWORK BOARD
Revision A
Part Name
APPENDIX
Service Parts List
517

Table 7-10. 550-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT
Ref No. Part Name ACTUATOR SIZE CHUTE TURN CST ROLL ASSY RETARD HOLDER RETARD SPRING RETARD 01-04-10 01-04-11 01-04-13 01-04-16 01-04-17
Revision A
550-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT Table 7-10. 550-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT
Ref No. 01-01-06 01-01-10 01-01-11 01-01-15 01-01-16 01-01-17 01-01-18 01-02-01 01-02-04 01-02-05 01-02-06 01-02-08 01-03-01 01-03-02 01-03-04 01-03-07 01-03-11 01-03-15 01-03-16 01-03-20 01-03-22 01-03-24 01-03-25 01-04-01 01-04-04 01-04-05 01-04-07 01-04-08 PWBA OPTFDR 1T COVER RIGHT CHUTE ASSY FEEDER COVER LEFT COVER CST SPRING EARTH FEEDER ASSY LEFT FOOT FEEDER ASSY RIGHT SWITCH ASSY SIZE HARNESS ASSY SIZE PICK UP ASSY ROLL ASSY TURN CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC EXIT SENSOR SOLENOID FEED DRIVE ASSY ACTUATOR LOW PAPER ROLL ASSY FEED ACTUATOR NO PAPER HARNESS ASSY OPFDR HARNESS ASSY LOWP CASSETTE ASSY 500 SPRING N/F GUIDE SIDE L GUIDE SIDE R GUIDE END Part Name HARNESS ASSY OPFREC
APPENDIX
Service Parts List
518

Table 7-11. 1100-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT
Ref No. Part Name CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC EXIT SENSOR SOLENOID FEED ACTUATOR LOW PAPER ROLL ASSY FEED ACTUATOR NO PAPER KIT PICK UP ASSY 4TH CASSETTE ASSY 500 SPRING N/F GUIDE SIDE L GUIDE SIDE R GUIDE END ACTUATOR SIZE CHUTE TURN CST ROLL ASSY RETARD HOLDER RETARD SPRING RETARD 01-05-04 01-05-07 01-05-11 01-05-14 01-05-18 01-05-20 01-05-80 01-06-01 01-06-04 01-06-05 01-06-07 01-06-08 01-06-10 01-06-11 01-06-13 01-06-16 01-06-17
Revision A
1100-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT Table 7-11. 1100-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT
Ref No. 01-01-02 01-01-03 01-01-04 01-01-06 01-01-08 01-01-13 01-01-14 01-02-01 01-02-04 01-02-06 01-02-07 01-03-01 01-03-03 01-03-04 01-03-05 01-03-06 01-03-07 01-03-09 01-03-12 01-04-02 01-04-04 01-04-07 01-04-11 01-04-15 01-04-19 01-04-21 01-04-80 01-05-02 COVER ASSY LEFT COVER ASSY RIGHT CASTER ASSY-S COVER ASSY FRONT CASTER ASSY FOOT ASSY A FOOT ASSY B FEEDER ASSY LEFT FEEDER ASSY RIGHT SWITCH ASSY SIZE CHUTE ASSY FEEDER HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 PWBA OPTFDR2T HARNESS ASSY OPF23 HARNESS ASSY SIZE2 HARNESS ASSY LOWP HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2 DRIVE ASSY 2ND SPRING EARTH ROLL ASSY TURN CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC EXIT SENSOR SOLENOID FEED ACTUATOR LOW PAPER ROLL ASSY FEED ACTUATOR NO PAPER KIT PICK UP ASSY 3RD ROLL ASSY TURN Part Name
APPENDIX
Service Parts List
519
Revision A
7.6 Exploded diagram

MAIN UNIT (Total: 18 pages)
APPENDIX
Exploded diagram
520
C 600-C AS E -001
T he parts to which no reference number is as s igned will not be available as after-s ale s ervice parts .
1 (with 2, 3) 2 3
P L5.3.27
5
(P 220)
(J 220)
8 12 30 14 19 15 18
(J 166)
20 23 28 25 26 22
Ida_05_001A
F OR E P S ON AcuLas erC 4200DN(1.1)
R ev.01 C 600
C 600-E LE C -001
24
5 23 21
2 4
Ida_05_018B
R ev.01 C 600
C 600-ME C H-001
1 (including all this page)
4 5 4
10 10 10
13
11
16 17
Ida_05_002A
R ev.01 C 600
C 600-ME C H-002
10 10
10
[R ef P L3.3.1]
Ida_05_003A
R ev.01 C 600
C 600-ME C H-003
13
5 80
P L3.3.22 (J 471) (P 471)
12
(J 17)
4 81 11
(P 171)
Ida_05_004A
R ev.01 C 600
C 600-ME C H-004
1 (including all number except 22)
7 NO P AP E R
S E NS OR
(P 472)
18 20
(P 473)
18
7 LOW PAP E R
S E NS OR
11 14
(J 474)
(J 47) (J 473)
22
(J 471) (J 472) (P 474)
Ida_S ec05_005G B
R ev.01 C 600
C 600-ME C H-005
[R ef P L4.2.1]
(J 19) (P 192) (J 192)
a
(P 191)
1 20
(P 181)
(J 191)
3 S E NS OR R E G I
(J 181)
(J 18)
13
S E NS OR OHP
(P 201) (J 20)
(J 201)
Ida_05_006A
R ev.01 C 600
C 600-ME C H-006
1 (including all this page+P L4.1.a)
(J 192)
(P 192)
(P 191) P L4.1.a
10
(J 191)
Ida_05_007A
R ev.01 C 600
C 600-ME C H-007
(J 361) P L5.2.28 (P 361)
[R ef P L5.2.1]
[R ef P L5.3.1]
Ida_05_008A
R ev.01 C 600
C 600-ME C H-008 1 ( including all number except 80,81 )

(J 361)
28
(J 136)
(J 36) (J 162)
19 27 25 (with 26)
(J 234) (P 136)
80
26
11
(P 521) (J 235)
30
(J 521)
(P 142)
(J 142)
20
TONE R F ULL S E NS OR
81
(J 52)
Ida_05_009A
R ev.01 C 600
C 600-ME C H-009 1 ( including all this page, P L5.4,P L10.1.9 ) 31

(J 220) (C N2)
27
(J 134)
[R ef P L5.4]
(P 501) (J 133) (J 482) (P 482) P L10.1.9
(J 22) (C N1) (J 135)
(J 13)
28
(P 132)
38
(J 1321)
(J 1322)
(P 135)
9
(J 132)
29
15
14
MS I NO P AP E R S E NS OR
20
Ida_05_010C
R ev.01 C 600
C 600-ME C H-010
80
P L5.3.28 (P 134) (J 134) (P 501) (J 501) P L5.3.28
1 F ULL S TAC K
S E NS OR
16
15 13
(J 133) P L5.3.28 (P 133)
Ida_05_011A
1 J AM S E NS OR
R ev.01 C 600
C 600-ME C H-011
2
(J 151)
[R ef P L7.1]
(J 15)
Ida_05_012A
R ev.01 C 600
C 600-ME C H-012
P L10.1.9
(P 484) (J 484) (J 710)
17 18 19 20
Ida_05_013A
R ev.01 C 600
C 600-ME C H-013
(P 701) (P 702) (P 703) (P 704) (Y ) (M) (C ) (K )
5 NO TONE R
S E NS OR
(J 511) (Y ) (J 512) (M) (J 513) (C ) (J 514) (K )
1 (Y ) , 2 (M) , 3 (C ) , 4 (K ) 12
(P 342)
(P 341)
(J 704) (J 703) (J 702) (J 701) (J 342) (J 341) (J 3411 ) (P 3411) (P 514) (P 513) (P 512) (P 511)
16
18
17
(J 51)
(J 34)
R ev.01 C 600
Ida_05_014B
C 600-ME C H-014
(P 491)
(P 481)
(J 491) P L10.1.9 (J 481)
P L10.1.9
Ida_05_015B
R ev.01 C 600
C 600-ME C H-015
[R ef P L9.2]
23
21 6
7
(J 160)
(J 161) P L10.1.4 (P 231) (J 231)
(P 144) (J 144)
12
P L10.1.8
13 13 13
20
13 16
Ida_05_016C
R ev.01 C 600
C 600-ME C H-016
(HV P S )
[R ef P L9.1.21]
(T R )
(R G )
(P 161)
(P 141) (P WB A MC U IDT N)
(P 166) (P 163) (P 167) (P 165) (P 164) (P 162)
[R ef P L9.1.16]
(P 31) (P 34) (P 154) (P 16) (P 24) (P 30) (P 21) (P 20) (P 18) (P 17) (P 60) (P 19) (P 47) (P 13) (P 52) (P 191) (P 48) (P 311) (P 15) (P 14) (P 61) (P 51) (P 36) (P 22)
(P 160)
[R ef P L9.1.6]
(LV P S 100/120V / LV P S 230V )
(J 163)
1
(J 60)
(J 165)
2
(J 61)
(J 164)
7 3
(J 311) (J 231)
(J 1911)
8 4
(J 24) (J 191) (J 141) (J 481) (P 482) (P 484)
5
(J 48)
(J 16)
(J 491)
Ida_05_017A
R ev.01 C 600
Revision A
550-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT (Total: 4 pages)
APPENDIX
Exploded diagram
539
C 802-OP T I-138
(J 171) (J 83)
18
[R ef P L11.3.1]
10 17
[R ef P L11.2.1]
(P 84) (P 83) (P 80) (P 86) (J 80)
(P 81) (P 85) (P 82)
P L11.3.25 (J 81)
P L11.2.8
16
(J 85) P L11.3.24 (J 82) P L11.3.15
[R ef P L11.2.5]
15
11
(J 84)
(P 172)
[R ef P L11.4.1]
Ida_1T _05_101B
F OR 550-S heet P aper C as s ette Unit(1.1)
R ev.01
C 802-OP T I-139
8
(J 80)
(J 821)
6 1
(P 821)
4 4
4
Ida_S ec05_102G A
R ev.01
C 802-OP T I-140
(J 85)
1 ( including all number except 15,24,25 )

(J 822) (P 824) (P 825)
24
(J 825)
7 NO PAP E R
S E NS OR
(P 822)
20 22
(P 823)
20
7 LOW PAP E R
S E NS OR
11
(J 824)
16
(J 82)
15
(J 823)
(J 81)
25
Ida_1T _05_103A
R ev.01
C 802-OP T I-141 1 (including all this page)
4 5 4
10 10 10
13
11
16 17
Ida_1T _05_002A
R ev.01
Revision A
1100-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT (Total: 6 pages)
APPENDIX
Exploded diagram
544
C 802-OP T I-142
6 6 14 6 4 4 13 8 8 13
[R ef P L12.6.1] [R ef P L12.6.1]
14
Ida_2T _05_201D
R ev.01
C 802-OP T I-143
1 4
6
(P 821)
(J 821)
P L12.3.5
1 4
6
(P 821) (J 821)
P L12.3.5 Ida_2T _05_202A
R ev.01
C 802-OP T I-144
(P 81) (P 84) (P 83) (P 80)
(P 85) (P 82) (P 86) (J 81) (J 172)
12 1
(J 83)
(J 80)
5
(J 821)
(J 85)
(J 84)
(J 822) (P 824)
4
(J 83)
6
(J 823)
(P 825)
(J 81) (J 80)
5
(J 821)
(J 85)
(J 822) (P 824)
6
(J 823) (P 825)
(J 82)
Ida_2T _05_203A
R ev.01
4
(J 825) (P 825) P L12.3.7
NO PAP E R S E NS OR
P L12.3.7
(P 822) (J 822)
19 21
P L12.3.6
19
(P 823) (J 823)
LOW PAP E R S E NS OR
P L12.3.7
15 11
(J 824)
(P 824)
Ida_2T _05_204B
R ev.01
C 802-OP T I-146
80 (including all this page)
4 7
NO PAP E R S E NS OR
(J 825) (P 825) P L12.3.7 P L12.3.7
(P 822) (J 822)
18 20
P L12.3.6
18
LOW PAP E R S E NS OR
(P 823) (J 823)
P L12.3.7
14 11
(J 824)
(P 824)
Ida_2T _05_205C
R ev.01
4 5 4
10 10 10
13
11
16 17
Ida_2T _05_002A
R ev.01
Revision A
7.7 Circuit Diagram

C600 Main Board (Total: 6 pages)
APPENDIX
Circuit Diagram
551
GND
Note; Parts encircled in dotted lines are not installed.
Model Board Rev. Sheet
: AcuLaser C4200 : C600 Main :A : 1/6

Epson Aculaser c4200 Service Manual

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Epson Aculaser c4200 Service Manual

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SERVICE MANUAL

A4 Full Color Laser Printer

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

About This Manual

Symbols Used in this Manual

High Temperature Assembly

Caution Label for Toner Cartridges

Caution Label for High-temperature Surface

Caution Label about PHD ASSY and BTR ASSY

Caution Label about MSI and Paper Tray

Caution Label about FRAME ASSY DEVE

Caution Label about ROS ASSY

Cautions relating to Toner cleaning

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

1.1.2 Controller Features

1.1.1 Engine Features

Note : When printing on A4-sized paper

High-capacity paper supply

Paper eject capacity is 250 sheets, face-down only

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

1.1.3 Software Features

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

1.2 Basic Specifications

PRINTING SPEED MODE Table 1-1. Printing Speed Mode

1.2.2 Printer Basic Specifications

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

<Video I/F Name>

Transparency Envelope Label

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

Table 1-5. List of Continuous Printing speed (Unit: ppm)

Legal13 (GLG) Legal14 (LGL) Note *1: *2: *3:

17.6 16.8 14.7

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

8.2 8.0 8.0 7.2 7.2

17.6 16.8 14.7

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

Table 1-8. Paper Feed

Paper Type*1/Paper Size

Table 1-9. Combination with Optional Cassette

1250 sheets 1800 sheets 2350 sheets

60 to 105 g/m2 64 to 163 g/m2

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

139.70 to 355.60 (5.5" to 14") 88.90 to 220.00 (3.5" to 8.5")

Note *1: *2: *3:

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

Paper feed direction

Envelope type Note *1: *2: *3:

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

Table 1-13. Dimensions and Weights with Options Installed

Figure 1-1. Dimensions (Main Unit)

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

NOISE Main unit

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

1.3 Paper Specifications

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

1.3.3 Available Paper by Feeder

Legal13 (GLG) Legal14 (LGL) Note 1: 2: *3:

Note 1: 2: *3:

Envelope type Note 1: 2: *3:

9,000 pages1 (TBD) 8,000 pages1 (TBD)